AVP Family (AVP 1000 (1RU), AVP 2000,
AVP 3000)
Software Version 9.31.x
REFERENCE GUIDE
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preliminary Pages
ENGLISH (UK) - READ THIS FIRST!
ITALIANO - LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual. DO NOT OPERATE
THIS EQUIPMENT. Also, translation into any EC official language of this
manual can be made available, at your cost.
Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale. NON UTILIZZARE
L’APPARECCHIATURA.. È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo
manuale, ma il costo è a carico dell’utente.
SVENSKA - LÄS DETTA FÖRST!
NEDERLANDS - LEES DIT EERST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok. ARBETA DÅ INTE MED
DENNA UTRUSTNING. En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok
kan också anskaffas, på Er bekostnad.
Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt. STEL DEZE
APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING. U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten,
een vertaling van deze handleiding krijgen.
PORTUGUÊS - LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA!
SUOMI - LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual. NÃO UTILIZE O
EQUIPAMENTO. O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do
manual para o português à própria custa.
Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä. ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA. Käsikirja
voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
FRANÇAIS - AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT!
DANSK - LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel. NE
FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL. En outre, nous pouvons
vous proposer, à vos frais, une version française de ce manuel.
Udstyret må ikke betjenes. MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR
INDHOLDET AF DENNE HÅNDBOG. Vi kan også for Deres regning levere
en dansk oversættelse af denne håndbog.
DEUTSCH - LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS!
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ - ΔΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡΩΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein,
dann. BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT! Eine Übersetzung des
Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen Berechnung lieferbar.
Αν δεν καταλάβετε το περιεχόμενο αυτού του βοηθήματος/εγχειριδίου. ΜΗΝ
ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ. Επίσης, αυτό το εγχειρίδιο
είναι διαθέσιμο σε μετάφραση σε αυτή τη γλώσσα και μπορείτε να το
αγοράσετε.
ESPAÑOL - LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual. NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al (idioma)
previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar usted mismo.
Copyright
© Copyright Ericsson AB 2018. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in
any form without the written permission of the copyright owner.
Disclaimer
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of the
copyright owner.
The contents of this document are subject to revision without notice due to continued progress in
methodology, design and manufacturing. Ericsson shall have no liability for any error or damage of
any kind resulting from the use of this document.
ii
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preliminary Pages
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction
This chapter identifies the equipment versions covered by this manual, describes
the purpose of the equipment in a typical system and lists the available options.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment
This chapter provides product specific installation information including rack
mounting, ventilation and pin-out details of the external connectors.
Chapter 3: Getting Started
This chapter provides a guide to powering up the unit, setting up the IP address and
using the unit.
Chapter 4: Front Panel Control
This chapter describes the front panel display menus and options and details any
operating procedures.
Chapter 5: Web GUI Control
This chapter describes the configuration of the unit using the Web Graphical User
Interface.
Chapter 6: Advanced Video Processing & Networking
This chapter describes the principles and techniques used in the design of the
equipment to aid in understanding its operation and function.
Chapter 7: Options, Licensing and Upgrades
This chapter provides details of option cards that may be fitted to this equipment.
Chapter 8: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
This chapter details routine maintenance tasks, servicing advice and information
regarding warranty and maintenance. It also lists error and error messages that may
occur and recommends the action to be taken.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Audio Coding Standards
Annex D: Alarms List
Annex E: Logo Creator
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
iii
Preliminary Pages
Introduction
The AVP is a flexible platform consisting of a base unit or chassis into which various
option cards can be plugged. The base unit provides an Ethernet control interface,
Ethernet data interfaces, and basic transport stream processing functionality. Other
functionalities such as video encoding, audio encoding, and additional input or
output interfaces are provided by the addition of option cards.
The AVP is designed for flexibility, modularity, multi-codec capabilities, and multiple
independent outputs. Please ensure that you are familiar with the operation of the
unit by reading this guide carefully.
This Reference Guide should be kept in a safe place for reference for the life of the
equipment. It is not intended that this Reference Guide will be amended by the issue
of individual pages. Any revision will be by a complete reissue. Further copies of this
Reference Guide can be ordered from the address listed in Customer Services. If
passing the equipment to a third party, also pass the relevant documentation.
Revision History
Issues of this Reference Guide are listed below:
Issue Date
Software
Version
Comments
A
Jan 2013
9.2.x
Separate online help files combined for AVP 2000
(1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen B), AVP 3000 (1553FGC 101 1789 Uen B) and AVP 4100 (1553-FGC
101 1790 Uen B). Updated to software version 9.2.x
B
Apr 2013
9.4.x
Updated to software version 9.4.x
New supported features added
C
Jul 2013
9.5.x
Updated to software version 9.5.x
New supported features added
Included details of support for Contribution Encoder
and Voyager II
D
Nov 2013
9.6.x
Updated for software version 9.6.x
New supported features added
E
Jan 2014
9.7.x
Updated for software version 9.7.x
New supported features added
Section added to introduce Voyager GUI
F
Apr 2014
9.8.x
Updated for software version 9.8.x
AVP 4100 removed
G
Aug 2014
9.10.x
Updated for software version 9.10.x.
Roll-off factors of 5, 10 and 15 percent supported
for DVB-S2.
iv
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preliminary Pages
Issue Date
Software
Version
Comments
H
9.11.x
Updated for software version 9.11.x.
Dec 2014
Adds support for DVB RF Carrier ID Voyager
II/AVP3000.
Adds option to include EIT and TDT tables in output
streams for ETR290 Level 3 compliance.
J
May 2015
9.13.x
Updated for software version 9.12.x and 9.13.x.
Adds AVP 1000 (1RU).
Adds support for DVB-S2X for
Voyager II/AVP3000.
K
Aug 2015
9.15.x
Updated for software version 9.15.
Support for Voyager Dashboard has been
superseded by the Simplified View, which extends
supported outputs to IP and ASI and is available for
AVP 2000 as well as AVP 3000.
Note: 9.15.x is the last software release to support
the Contribution Encoder and Voyager II products.
L
Aug 2016
9.22.x
Updated for software version 9.22.
Adds information for AVP1000 product.
Adds details of H.264 fixed latency buffer mode for
CE-x option cards.
BISS encryption per component within a service.
Adds details for CE-HEVC option module,
introduced in this release.
M
Jan 2017
9.24.x
Updated for software version 9.24.
Adds supports for support for closed captions and
timecode for CE-HEVC.
Adds support for loading a stored configuration
when a change of SDI input is detected to update
video and VBI configuration.
N
Mar 2017
9.25.x
Updated for software version 9.25.
Adds support for remote logging, CE-x and
HDR/WSS signaling for CE-HEVC.
S
Apr 2017
9.26.x
Updated for software version 9.26.
Adds support for SCTE-104 to SCTE-35 message
translation on HEVC Card, In-band Control via Data
Output ports, Generic ANC and Teletext on HEVC
Card.
T
Jun 2017
9.27.x
Updated for software version 9.27.
Adds support for Super Low Delay video on CEHEVC Cards with LPCM Passthrough audio
(licensed feature) and ALC on CE-HEVC Cards
(licensed feature).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
v
Preliminary Pages
Issue Date
Software
Version
Comments
U
9.29.x
Updated for software version 9.28 and 9.29.
Sep 2017
Adds support for AVP 1000 Network Adapter,
HEVC Explicit P frame support, HEVC Card HD
multichannel (HEVC and H.264 encoding), HEVC
super low latency: Dolby E P/T and ALC
enhancements.
V
Jan 2018
9.31.x
Updated for software version 9.31.
Adds support for four-slice encoding in HEVC UHD
4K, automatic switching to CALVC (bitrates above
50 Mbps, HEVC encoding), MGP support on
systems using different subnet outputs and remux
of PCR-less components arriving over IP.
Associated Documents
The following manuals/guides are also associated with this equipment:
Ericsson Document Identity
Title
1/1553-FGB 101 752
Video Processing/Stream Processing
Products – Generic Product Information Quick Guide
174 02-FGB 101 348
Installation, Safety and Compliance
Information Generic Product Information Reference Guide
Useful Links:
Installation, Safety and Compliance Information – Generic Product Information Reference Guide can be viewed at:
http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=17402FGB101348&Lang=EN&HighestFree=Y
Product Guide downloads are available for all Product Families:
http://www.ericsson.com/ourportfolio/products/television-and-video
Trademarks
All best endeavors have been made to acknowledge registered trademarks and
trademarks used throughout this Reference Guide. Any notified omissions will be
rectified in the next issue of this Reference Guide. Some trademarks may be
registered in some jurisdictions but not in others.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and marked
with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked within the text of this
Reference Guide.
vi
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preliminary Pages
Registered Trademarks
Dolby®
Registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
GuideBuilder®
Registered trademark of Triveni Digital Inc.
Trademarks
Reflex™
Trademark of Ericsson Television.
Patents
The feature “Phase Aligned Audio” is patented Ericsson functionality.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or damage where
warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product is
operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
Warning!
Warnings give information which, if strictly observed, will prevent personal injury or
death, or damage to property or the environment. They are highlighted for
emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at
which the reader requires them.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
vii
Preliminary Pages
Caution!
Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to
equipment or other goods. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example,
and are placed immediately preceding the point at which the reader requires them.
Note:
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for
emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately after the relevant
text.
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in the Installation,
Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson Compression Products Reference
Guide supplied with your product. To maintain this certification, only use the leads
supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services.
Contact Information
Support Services
Ericsson understands that our products are “mission-critical”, providing services that
influence customer perception and impact your revenue. Our objective is to ensure
that you realize maximum utility and achieve the highest levels of availability from
our products. To realize that objective, we offer a variety of Service Level
Agreements designed to meet your business needs and budget.
Warranty
All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards
and are covered under a comprehensive 12-month warranty.
Service Level Agreements
Customers may choose one of several Support packages, either as an
enhancement during the standard 12-month warranty or as an extension after the
warranty has expired.
For standalone equipment, customers may choose either Ericsson’s Extended
Hardware Warranty or Secure Basic Support. Extended Hardware Warranty
provides hardware repair of covered equipment after the expiration of the standard
warranty. Secure Basic Support provides hardware repair, remote diagnostics and
support, and 24x7x365 remote support for emergencies.
viii
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preliminary Pages
For systems, along with Secure Basic Support, customers have the option of either
Secure Advanced Support or Secure Superior Support. These support packages
provide higher committed response and resolution times, onsite support where
necessary, service performance review and a host of other proactive services to
help you get the maximum return on your investment in Ericsson solutions. Call
Ericsson Sales for more details.
Customer Services
Europe, Middle East
and Africa
Tel:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4455
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467
Email: tvsupportemea@ericsson.com
Americas
Tel:
Tel:
Fax:
Email:
Asia
Tel:
+852 2590 3820
Fax: +852 2590 9550
Email: tvsupportapac@ericsson.com
Australia and New
Zealand
Tel:
+61 (0) 2 9111 4080
Fax: +61 (0) 2 9111 4949
Email: tvsupportanz@ericsson.com
Internet Address
www.ericsson.com
+1 888 671 1268
+1 678 812 6255
+1 678 812 6263
tvsupportamericas@ericsson.com
US and Canada
International
Hong Kong
Hong Kong
Technical Training
Ericsson provides a wide range of training courses on the operation and
maintenance of our products and on their supporting technologies. Ericsson can
provide both regularly scheduled courses and training tailored to individual needs.
Courses can be run either at your premises or at one of our dedicated training
facilities.
International
Tel:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4229
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4161
Email: tvglobaltraining@ericsson.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address
Ericsson
Unit 2
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
ix
Preliminary Pages
Return of Equipment
If you need to return equipment for repair please contact your local Ericsson
Customer Services Department.
Please refer to the Customer Services Contact Information on Page viii.
You will then be directed to return the faulty equipment to a repair centre with
the appropriate facilities for that equipment. A tracking number will be issued that
should be used if you need to enquire about the progress of the repair. The
equipment should be properly packed and the tracking number should be clearly
marked on the outside of the packaging.
Technical Publications
If you need to contact Ericsson Technical Publications regarding this publication,
e-mail: tvtechpubs@ericsson.com.
x
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1 Introduction
Chapter 1
Contents
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.4.1
1.1.4.2
1.1.4.3
1.1.4.4
1.1.4.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
1.2.6
1.2.7
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
Introduction .........................................................................................1-3
Who Should Use this Reference Guide ...............................................1-3
Software Version .................................................................................1-3
New Features in this Release ..............................................................1-3
What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide .........................1-4
Base Chassis Options .........................................................................1-4
Option Cards .......................................................................................1-5
Field Upgrade Option Cards ................................................................1-6
AVP Software Value Packs .................................................................1-6
Field Upgrade Software Value Packs ..................................................1-9
Front Panel ........................................................................................1-11
Power Switch.....................................................................................1-12
Confidence Monitor ...........................................................................1-12
Light Bar ............................................................................................1-12
USB Connector .................................................................................1-13
Rotary Knob ......................................................................................1-13
Main Display ......................................................................................1-13
Keypad ..............................................................................................1-13
Base Chassis Options .......................................................................1-13
AVP****/BAS/1AC 1U Base Chassis .................................................1-13
AVP****/BAS/2AC 1U Base Chassis .................................................1-13
AVP****/BAS/2ACFL 1U Base Chassis ............................................. 1-14
License Keys .....................................................................................1-14
List of Figures
Figure 1.1
Figure 1.2
Figure 1.3
Figure 1.4
Figure 1.5
Front Panel ........................................................................................1-12
Confidence Monitor ........................................................................... 1-12
AVP****/BAS/1AC Rear Panel with Six Option Cards Fitted .............. 1-13
AVP****/BAS/2AC Rear Panel with One CE-x Option Card Fitted ..... 1-13
AVP****/BAS/2ACFL Rear Panel with Two Option Cards Fitted ........ 1-14
List of Tables
Table 1.1 AVP 1000 (1RU) IP and ASI Support ..................................................1-4
Table 1.2 Base Chassis Options .........................................................................1-5
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1-1
Introduction
Table 1.3
Table 1.4
Table 1.5
Table 1.6
1-2
Option Cards ....................................................................................... 1-5
Field Upgrade Option Cards................................................................ 1-6
Software Value Packs Purchased with Chassis and Option Cards ...... 1-7
Value Pack Upgrade Options .............................................................. 1-9
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1
Who Should Use this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide is written for operators / users of the Advanced Video
Processor (AVP). It describes the unit’s functions and operation. The Reference
Guide is written to assist in the installation and day-to-day operation and care of the
unit. Maintenance information requiring the covers to be removed is not included.
Warning!
Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present
within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only
Ericsson television trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service
this equipment.
Caution!
Unauthorized maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the
equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
1.1.2
Software Version
This Reference Guide covers the functions of software version 9.31 and later.
To verify the installed version either:
•
Access the front panel, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.
•
Access the Web Browser screens, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
This manual continues to be relevant to subsequent build versions where the
functionality of the equipment has not changed. Where the build standard changes
the functionality, a new issue of this manual will be provided. The appropriate
number should be quoted in all correspondence with Ericsson.
1.1.3
New Features in this Release
The 9.29 release of software supports the following features:
•
Four-slice encoding in HEVC UHD 4K.
•
Automatic switching to CALVC for bitrates above 50 Mbps, for HEVC encoding.
•
MGP support on systems using different subnet outputs.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1-3
Introduction
Remux of PCR-less components arriving over IP.
•
1.1.4
What Equipment is Covered by this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide covers the following three main units and options listed in the
following tables:
AVP 1000 (1RU) Stream Processor
The AVP 1000 supports pass-thru of Transport Streams and remultiplexing of
services from any input to any output. The number of inputs and type of outputs
available depend upon the option cards fitted in the chassis.
•
Table 1.1 AVP 1000 (1RU) IP and ASI Support
Input
Functionality
Output
IP
IP
ASI
Option Card required
G.703
Option Card required
1.1.4.1
ASI
G.703
Option card
required
Option card
required
TS pass-thru
Yes
No
No
Service remux
No
No
No
TS pass-thru
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service remux
Yes
Yes
Yes
TS pass-thru
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service remux
Yes
Yes
Yes
•
AVP 2000 Contribution Encoder
The AVP 2000 Contribution Encoder supports a comprehensive range of video
processing and input/output modules, offering flexibility and allowing encoder
functionality to be upgraded incrementally and on-site.
•
AVP 3000 Voyager
The AVP 3000 Voyager provides the same encoding flexibility and performance
as the AVP 2000 with the addition of a Satellite Modulator output as standard.
Base Chassis Options
The AVP chassis consists of a base chassis, single or dual AC mains input and up
to six option cards. The base chassis is a 1RU 19 inch rack mount chassis that
contains control interfaces and two pairs of dual redundant Ethernet ports for data
output.
Additionally, the AVP 3000 includes a Satellite Modulator option card as standard.
Option cards are responsible for video, audio and data processing, and for
producing output through various interfaces. The option cards are ‘Hot Swappable’,
that is, they can be inserted or removed while the chassis is powered on, within the
limitations described in Chapter 7, Options, Licenses and Upgrades.
The base chassis options available are described in the following table.
1-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
Table 1.2
Base Chassis Options
Marketing Code
Price Object Number
Supply Object Number
Description
AVP1000/1RU/BAS/1AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/223
KDU 137 909/4
AVP 1000 (1RU) Stream Processor with
single AC input
AVP1000/1RU/BAS/2AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/224
KDU 137 909/5
AVP 1000 (1RU) Stream Processor with dual
AC input
AVP1000/1RU/BAS/2ACFL/A
FAZ 101 0196/225
KDU 137 909/6
AVP 1000 (1RU) Stream Processor with dual
AC Flying Leads
AVP2000/BAS/1AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/226
KDU 137 910/6
AVP 2000 Contribution Encoder with single
AC input
AVP2000/BAS/2AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/227
KDU 137 910/8
AVP 2000 Contribution Encoder with dual AC
input
AVP2000/BAS/2ACFL/A
FAZ 101 0196/228
KDU 137 910/3
AVP 2000 Contribution Encoder with dual AC
Flying Leads
AVP2000/BAS/1DC/A
FAZ 101 0196/229
KDU 137 910/9
AVP2000 Contribution Encoder Single DC
input
AVP2000/BAS/2DC/A
FAZ 101 0196/230
KDU 137 910/10
AVP2000 Contribution Encoder Dual DC input
AVP3000/BAS/1AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/231
KDU 137 911/4
AVP 3000 Voyager with single AC input
AVP3000/BAS/2AC/A
FAZ 101 0196/232
KDU 137 911/5
AVP 3000 Voyager with dual AC input
AVP3000/BAS/2ACFL/A
FAZ 101 0196/233
KDU 137 911/6
AVP 3000 Voyager with dual AC Flying Leads
The AVP base chassis offer the following capabilities as standard:
1.1.4.2
•
Remux
•
BISS encryption
•
PROFEC (SMPTE 2022-1) on output
•
Pass-thru of audio
Option Cards
The option cards, which are available to purchase with the base chassis are
described the following table.
Table 1.3
Option Cards
Marketing Code
Price Object Number
Supply Object Number
Description
CE/HWO/ASI/IO/A
FAZ 101 0196/234
ROA 128 6475
ASI Input/Output Card with 2x Inputs and 2x
Outputs
CE/HWO/EXTSYNC/A
FAZ 101 0196/235
ROA 128 6476
External Sync Module
CE/HWO/G703/A
FAZ 101 0196/236
ROA 128 6477
G703 Input/Output Card with 1x Inputs and 1x
Outputs
CE/HWO/CE-a/J2K/A
FAZ 101 0196/237
ROA 128 6478
JPEG-2000 SD/HD encoder card
CE/HWO/GPI/A
FAZ 101 0196/238
ROA 128 6479
General Purpose Input Card
CE/HWO/CE-a/A
FAZ 101 0196/239
ROA 128 6480
CE-a Video Compression Module
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1-5
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object Number
Supply Object Number
Description
CE/HWO/CE-x/A
FAZ 101 0196/292
ROA 128 6554
CE-x Video Compression Module
CE/HWO/CE-xA/A
FAZ 101 0196/240
ROA 128 6481
CE-xA Video Compression Module with
analogue input
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/BNC/A
HEVC Media Processing module with BNC
Inputs
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/SFP/C/A
HEVC Media Processing module with SFP
inputs - Fiber receive module
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/SFP/F/A
HEVC Media Processing module with SFP
Inputs – BNC receive module
CE/HWO/BLNK
1.1.4.3
FAZ 101 0119/3
SXA 215 2475/1
Blanking Plate
Field Upgrade Option Cards
Option cards may be added to an AVP as a field upgrade and are shown in the
following table.
Table 1.4
Field Upgrade Option Cards
Marketing Code
Price Object Number
Supply Object Number
Description
CE/UPH/ASI/IO/A
FAZ 101 0196/241
ROA 128 6482
ASI Input/Output Card with 2x Inputs and 2x
Outputs
CE/UPH/EXTSYNC/A
FAZ 101 0196/242
ROA 128 6483
External Sync Module
CE/UPH/G703/A
FAZ 101 0196/243
ROA 128 6484
G703 Input/Output Card with 1x Inputs and 1x
Outputs
CE/UPH/CE-a/J2K/A
FAZ 101 0196/244
ROA 128 6485
JPEG-2000 SD/HD encoder card
CE/UPH/GPI/A
FAZ 101 0196/245
ROA 128 6486
General Purpose Input Card
CE/UPH/CE-a/A
FAZ 101 0196/246
ROA 128 6487
CE-a Video Compression Module
CE/UPH/CE-x/A
FAZ 101 0196/293
ROA 128 6555
CE-x Video Compression Module
CE/UPH/CE-xA/A
FAZ 101 0196/247
ROA 128 6488
CE-xA Video Compression Module with
analogue input
CE/UPH/CE-HEVC/BNC/A
HEVC Media Processing module with BNC
Inputs
CE/UPH/CE-HEVC/SFP/C/A
HEVC Media Processing module with SFP
inputs - Fiber receive module
CE/UPH/CE-HEVC/SFP/F/A
HEVC Media Processing module with SFP
Inputs – BNC receive module
CE/UPG/HWO/BLNK
1.1.4.4
FAZ 101 0119/78
SXA 215 2475/2
Blanking Plate
AVP Software Value Packs
The functionality of these AVP option cards can be augmented by purchasing
software value packs, as listed in the following tables.
1-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
Table 1.5
Software Value Packs Purchased with Chassis and Option Cards
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
Applicable to
Option Card
AVP/SWO/VP/a/SD
FAZ 101 0196/252
FAT 102 3782
Standard Definition value pack offering:
CE-a
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVP/SWO/VP/a/HD
FAZ 101 0196/253
FAT 102 3783
High Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVP/SWO/VP/x/SD
FAZ 101 0196/268
FAT 102 3798
FAZ 101 0196/269
FAT 102 3799
AVP/SWO/VP/x/CONT
FAZ 101 0196/264
FAT 102 3794
SD MPEG-2 encode
SD MPEG-4 encode
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 1 channel pair of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 2 pairs)
High Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
MPEG-2 encode SD & HD
MPEG-4 encode SD & HD
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 3 channel pairs of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 4 pairs)
Contribution value pack offering:
•
CE-a
MPEG-2 encode SD & HD
MPEG-4 encode SD & HD
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 3 channel pairs of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 4 pairs)
Standard Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVP/SWO/VP/x/HD
SD MPEG-2 encode
SD MPEG-4 encode
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 1 channel pair of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 2 pairs)
4:2:2 10 bit encode
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-a
AVP/SWO/VP/x/CONT/ADV FAZ 101 0196/265
FAT 102 3795
Advanced contribution value pack offering:
•
•
•
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC
/HD
FAZ 101 0196/278
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC
/4K
FAZ 101 0196/279
FAT 102 3822
High Definition HEVC value pack offering:
•
•
FAT 102 3823
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-a
CE-HEVC
1 channel of HD HEVC
4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack
offering:
•
•
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3D synchronization to support 3D or 4K
operation
1080p encoding
Stripe Refresh low latency mode
CE-HEVC
UHD HEVC
16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
1-7
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
Applicable to
Option Card
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/MP4/
HD
FAZ 101 0196/304
FAT 102 3945
High Definition H264 value pack offering:
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/MP4/
X4
FAZ 101 0196/305
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC
/CONT
FAZ 101 0196/280
CE/SWO/VP/HEVC/HEVC
/CONT/x4
FAZ 101 0196/281
CE/SWO/VP/CONT/AUDIO
FAZ 101 0196/254
•
•
FAT 102 3946
Contribution value pack offering:
•
FAT 102 3824
•
FAZ 101 0196/255
FAT 102 3785
FAZ 101 0196/256
FAT 102 3786
CE-HEVC
4 channels of 4:2:2 encode for UHD
video
Additional 4 channels of MPEG-1
Layer II encode
Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel)
MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2
channels of audio (e.g. stereo).
AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2
channels of audio (e.g. stereo).
Note 3 packs required for surround
encoding.
CE/SWO/VP/DOLBY/AC3
FAZ 101 0196/257
FAT 102 3787
Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels
of audio (e.g. stereo).
Note 3 packs required for surround
encoding.
AVP/SWO/VP/MOD
FAZ 101 0196/248
FAT 102 3778
Basic modulation value pack offering:
•
•
•
AVP/SWO/VP/MOD/ADV
FAZ 101 0196/249
FAT 102 3779
•
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/SLD
FAZ 101 0196/295
FAT 102 3889
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
CE-HEVC
SATMOD
DVB-DSNG 8PSK & 16QAM
DVB-S2 QPSK & 8PSK
Extended symbol rate range
Advanced modulation value pack offering:
•
CE-xA
CE-a,
Audio value pack for:
•
CE-HEVC
CE-a,
Audio value pack for:
•
CE-a
CE-xA
CE-a,
Audio value pack for:
•
CE/SWO/VP/AAC
1 channel of 4:2:2 encode for HD video
Contribution audio value pack offering:
•
CE/SWO/VP/M1L2
CE-HEVC
Contribution value pack offering:
•
FAT 102 3784
CE-HEVC
4 channels of 4:2:2 encode for HD video
Contribution value pack offering:
•
FAT 102 3825
1 channel of HD H264
4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
SATMOD
DVB-S2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK &
32APSK
DVBS-2X Extensions
Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack
offering:
CE-HEVC
Enables 1 UHD HD channel for Super Low
Delay
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/SLD/
4K
FAZ 101 0196/296
FAT 102 3890
Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack
offering:
CE-HEVC
Enables 1 UHD 4k channel for Super Low
Delay
1-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
1.1.4.5
Field Upgrade Software Value Packs
Further value packs may be added to the AVP after the equipment has been
shipped via the field upgradable options as listed below.
Table 1.6
Value Pack Upgrade Options
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
Applicable to
Option Card
AVP/UPS/VP/a/SD
FAZ 101 0196/258
FAT 102 3788
Standard Definition value pack offering:
CE-a
AVP/UPS/VP/a/HD
FAZ 101 0196/259
FAT 102 3789
•
•
•
•
•
SD MPEG-2 encode
SD MPEG-4 encode
MCTF
Remux
DPI
•
Additional 1 channel pair of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 2 pairs)
High Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVP/UPS/VP/x/SD
FAZ 101 0196/270
FAT 102 3800
AVP/UPS/VP/x/HD
FAZ 101 0196/271
FAT 102 3801
FAZ 101 0196/266
FAT 102 3794
FAZ 101 0196/265
FAT 102 3795
•
•
•
FAZ 101 0196/283
FAT 102 3827
3D synchronization to support 3D or 4K
operation
1080p encoding
Stripe Refresh low Additional 4
channels of MPEG-1 Layer II encode
Phase Aligned Audio (6 channel)latency
mode
High Definition HEVC value pack offering:
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-HEVC
HD HEVC
•
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4:2:2 10 bit encode
Advanced contribution value pack offering:
•
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/
HD
MPEG-2 encode SD & HD
MPEG-4 encode SD & HD
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 3 channel pairs of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 4 pairs)
Contribution value pack offering:
•
AVP/UPS/VP/x/CONT/ADV
SD MPEG-2 encode
SD MPEG-4 encode
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 1 channel pair of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 2 pairs)
High Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVP/UPS/VP/x/CONT
MPEG-2 encode SD & HD
MPEG-4 encode SD & HD
MCTF
Remux
DPI
Additional 3 channel pairs of MPEG-1
Layer II encode (total of 4 pairs)
Standard Definition value pack offering:
•
•
•
•
•
•
CE-a
4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
1-9
Introduction
Marketing Code
Price Object
Number
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/4K FAZ 101 0196/284
Supply Object
Number
Description
Applicable to
Option Card
FAT 102 3828
Ultra High Definition HEVC value pack
offering:
CE-HEVC
•
•
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/MP4/HD
FAZ 101 0196/306
FAT 102 3947
UHD HEVC
16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
High definition MPEG-4 value pack offering:
CE-HEVC
HD MPEG-4 AVC
4 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/MP4/X3
FAZ 101 0196/308
FAT 102 3949
High Definition H264 value pack offering:
CE-HEVC
Upgrade from single H264 to 4 channels of
H264 video
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/MP4/X4
FAZ 101 0196/307
FAT 102 3948
High definition MPEG-4 value pack offering:
CE-HEVC
4 channels HD MPEG-4 AVC
16 channels of MPEG-1 Layer II audio
encode
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/
CONT
FAZ 101 0196/285
CE/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/
CONT/x4
FAZ 101 0196/286
CE/UPS/VP/CONT/AUDIO
FAZ 101 0196/260
FAT 102 3829
Contribution value pack offering:
•
FAT 102 3830
•
FAZ 101 0196/261
FAT 102 3791
CE-HEVC
4:2:2 encode for UHD video
Contribution audio value pack offering:
•
CE/UPS/VP/M1L2
4:2:2 encode for one HD video
Contribution value pack offering:
•
FAT 102 3790
CE-HEVC
Additional 2 channels of MPEG-1
Layer II encode
Phase Aligned Audio
CE-xA
CE-HEVC
CE-a
Audio value pack for:
•
CE-a
MPEG-1 Layer II encode of up to 2
channels of audio (e.g. stereo).
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-HEVC
CE/UPS/VP/AAC
FAZ 101 0196/262
FAT 102 3792
CE-a
Audio value pack for:
•
AAC-LC or HE-AAC encode of up to 2
channels of audio (e.g. stereo).
Note 3 packs required for surround
encoding.
CE/UPS/VP/DOLBY/AC3
FAZ 101 0196/263
FAT 102 3793
Dolby Digital encode of up to 2 channels
of audio (e.g. stereo).
Note 3 packs required for surround
encoding.
AVP/UPS/VP/MOD
FAZ 101 0196/250
FAT 102 3780
Basic modulation value pack offering:
•
•
•
AVP/UPS/VP/MOD/ADV
FAZ 101 0196/251
FAT 102 3781
•
1-10
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
CE-x
CE-HEVC
SATMOD
DVB-DSNG 8PSK & 16QAM
DVB-S2 QPSK & 8PSK
Extended symbol rate range
Advanced modulation value pack offering:
•
CE-x
CE-a
Audio value pack for:
•
CE-xA
SATMOD
DVB-S2 QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK &
32APSK
DVBS-2X Extensions
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
Price Object
Number
Supply Object
Number
Description
Applicable to
Option Card
AVP/UPS/VP/HEVC/HEVC/ FAZ 101 0196/301
x3
FAT 102 3895
HEVC HD to UHD upgrade value pack:
CE-HEVC
AVP/UPS/VP/HEVC/CONT/ FAZ 1010 0196/300
x3
FAT 102 3894
CE/UPS/CE-HEVC/SLD/
HDTO4K
FAT 102 3993
Marketing Code
FAZ 101 0196/299
•
to add UHD HEVC encode to existing
HD HEVC encode.
HEVC 422 upgrade value pack:
•
CE-HEVC
Upgrade from single 4:2:2 encode to
support 4:2:2 UHD encode.
Upgrade to Super Low Delay from HD to 4K
UHD encode.
CE-HEVC
Note must already have SLD license.
The AVP is a flexible platform consisting of a base unit or chassis in to which
various option cards can be plugged. The base unit provides an Ethernet control
interface for configuration, an Ethernet data interfaces for data routing between the
host and the option cards, and basic transport stream processing functionality. Other
functionalities such as video encoding, audio encoding, or other input or output
interfaces are provided by option cards through various interfaces.
The following is a summary of the features of the base chassis:
1.2
•
19 inch 1 ‘RU’ rack mount chassis.
•
Front panel main display and keypad for control and status reporting.
•
Power switch.
•
Tri-color light bar to indicate chassis health.
•
Dual redundant Ethernet control ports.
•
Dual redundant Ethernet ports for data input and output.
•
Option card slots (the number of option cards that may be fitted is different for
each base unit).
•
Option cards are ‘hot swappable’.
•
Confidence monitor for monitoring input video stream.
Front Panel
The front panel of the unit consists of a power switch, a confidence monitor, a light
bar, an USB Connector, a rotary knob, a main display and a keypad.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1-11
Introduction
Power Switch
Light Bar
Mini USB
Rotary Knob
Keypad
Confidence Monitor
Main Display
Figure 1.1 Front Panel
1.2.1
Power Switch
The mains switch is recessed to prevent accidental switch-off.
1.2.2
Confidence Monitor
The confidence monitor allows the user to monitor the selected input video signal.
Figure 1.2 Confidence Monitor
The confidence monitor is a 1.8 inch TFT LCD. The On key on the confidence
monitor turns the monitor on or off. By pressing and holding the On key, operation
related data is shown. The first line displays the total number of hours the monitor
has been operating; the second line displays the software version. The source of the
video to be displayed, the sleep timeout time and the monitor brightness can be set
up through the front panel or the web user interface. For details on how to configure
the settings for the confidence monitor see Chapter 3, Getting Started.
Note:
1.2.3
The AVP 1000 (1RU) does not have a VCM fitted so although fitted, the
Confidence Monitor is not relevant for this model unless subsequently
upgraded to AVP 2000 functionality.
Light Bar
The light bar is green when there are no active alarms or warnings and red if there is
a critical alarm. The light bar is yellow if there is an active warning, minor or major
alarm.
1-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction
1.2.4
USB Connector
The USB connector provides an interface for saving or exporting configurations to,
and loading or importing configuration from an USB stick. Moreover, by applying an
USB-Ethernet adaptor, the Ethernet port of a control computer can be connected to
the USB connector on the Front Panel of the unit.
1.2.5
Rotary Knob
The rotary knob is used for scrolling through and selecting the menu items.
1.2.6
Main Display
Control and status information is displayed on a graphic VFD display.
1.2.7
Keypad
Select and Cancel keys, as well as a numeric keypad is provided for interaction.
1.3
Base Chassis Options
1.3.1
AVP****/BAS/1AC 1U Base Chassis
This chassis option provides a single mains input and slots for up to six option
cards.
Figure 1.3 AVP****/BAS/1AC Rear Panel with Six Option Cards Fitted
1.3.2
AVP****/BAS/2AC 1U Base Chassis
This chassis option provides a dual mains input and slots for up to four option cards.
Figure 1.4 AVP****/BAS/2AC Rear Panel with One CE-x Option Card Fitted
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
1-13
Introduction
1.3.3
AVP****/BAS/2ACFL 1U Base Chassis
This chassis option provides dual mains input via flying leads and slots for up to six
option cards.
Figure 1.5 AVP****/BAS/2ACFL Rear Panel with Two Option Cards Fitted
1.4
License Keys
Licenses control the availability of some of the features accessible from the unit.
A License Key consists of a feature, and the number of instances of this feature that
are allowed within the chassis or option card.
License Keys are allocated on a ‘first configured first served’ basis. If an attempt is
made to enable a feature, but the required license key is not available then the
feature is not enabled, and a log message is generated.
1-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2 Installing the Equipment
Chapter 2
Contents
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
2.3.4.6
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
Read This First! ...................................................................................2-3
Mounting and Ventilation .....................................................................2-3
Fixing and Rack Mounting ...................................................................2-3
Ventilation ...........................................................................................2-3
Signal Connections..............................................................................2-4
Rear Panel Signal Connectors ............................................................2-4
Data Ethernet Connector .....................................................................2-5
Control Ethernet Connector .................................................................2-6
CE Option Modules .............................................................................2-7
Digital Video Input (All CE-a and CE-x Option Modules) ......................2-7
Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/BNC Option Module) ............................2-8
Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/SFP Option Module) ............................2-8
Analogue Video Input via the CVBS Interface (CE-xA) ........................2-9
Digital Audio Input Connector (All CE-a and CE-x Option Modules) .... 2-9
Analogue Audio Input via the 15-way D-type Connector (CE-xA) ...... 2-12
Satellite Modulator Option Card Connectors ...................................... 2-14
ASI I/O Option Card Connectors........................................................2-14
G.703 Transceiver Option Card Connectors ...................................... 2-15
External Sync Input Option Card Connector ...................................... 2-15
GPI Option Card Connectors .............................................................2-16
Mini USB Connector ..........................................................................2-18
List of Figures
Figure 2.1 Air-Flow through the Equipment ..........................................................2-3
Figure 2.2 Rear Panel With CE-x VCM, SatMod and ASI I/O Options Fitted ........ 2-4
Figure 2.3 Satellite Modulator Option Card Rear Panel ...................................... 2-14
Figure 2.4 ASI I/O Option Card........................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2.5 G.703 Option Card Rear Panel .......................................................... 2-15
Figure 2.6 External Sync Input Option Card ....................................................... 2-16
Figure 2.7 Mini USB Connector .......................................................................... 2-18
List of Tables
Table 2.1 Data Ethernet Connector .....................................................................2-5
Table 2.2 Link Speed: Left (Green) LED .............................................................2-5
Table 2.3 Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED..........................................................2-5
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-1
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.4
Table 2.5
Table 2.6
Table 2.7
Table 2.8
Table 2.9
Table 2.10
Table 2.11
Table 2.12
Table 2.13
Table 2.14
Table 2.15
Table 2.16
Table 2.17
Table 2.18
Table 2.19
Table 2.20
Table 2.21
Table 2.22
Table 2.23
Table 2.24
Table 2.25
Table 2.26
Table 2.27
2-2
Control Ethernet Connector................................................................. 2-6
Port Status: Left (Green) LED ............................................................. 2-6
Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED ......................................................... 2-7
Digital Video Input via the SDI/HD-SDI Interface ................................. 2-7
Lock LED State Descriptions............................................................... 2-7
Digital Video Input via the SDI Interface .............................................. 2-8
Lock LED State Descriptions............................................................... 2-8
Analogue Video Input via the CVBS Interface ..................................... 2-9
CVBS LED State Descriptions ............................................................ 2-9
Audio Breakout Cables ..................................................................... 2-10
Breakout Cable Detection Criteria ..................................................... 2-10
Digital Audio Input (Balanced) ........................................................... 2-11
Digital Audio Input (Unbalanced) ....................................................... 2-11
Audio Breakout Cables ..................................................................... 2-12
Breakout Cable Detection Criteria ..................................................... 2-12
Analogue Audio Input (Balanced) ...................................................... 2-13
Analogue Audio Input (Unbalanced).................................................. 2-13
Satellite Modulator Option Card Connectors ..................................... 2-14
ASI I/O Option Card Connectors ....................................................... 2-15
G.703 Transceiver Option Card Connectors ..................................... 2-15
External Sync Input Option Card Connector...................................... 2-16
GPI Data In Connector (Not supported in this release)...................... 2-16
GPI Alarm Contact Closure Connector .............................................. 2-16
Data Input Connector Pin-out ............................................................ 2-17
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
2.1
Read This First!
Please refer to the Installation, Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson
Compression Products Reference Guide supplied with your product for full details of
installation requirements. This guide only contains additional product specific
information where required.
2.2
Mounting and Ventilation
2.2.1
Fixing and Rack Mounting
The equipment is designed for fixed use only and has been shipped with fixing
brackets suitable for a standard 19-inch rack. When installed in a rack, it should be
secured using the fixing brackets. In addition, support shelves must be used to
reduce the weight on the brackets. Ensure it is firmly and safely located and it has
an adequate free-flow of air.
Slide the unit onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means of an
M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner.
A freestanding unit should be installed on a secure horizontal surface where it is
unlikely to be knocked or its connectors and leads disturbed.
2.2.2
Ventilation
Side openings in the unit, as well as side-mounted cooling fans, are provided for
ventilation. They ensure reliable operation of the product and protect it from
overheating. The openings of the fans must not be blocked or covered.
Air is released
through vents at
the side of the unit.
Fans are
mounted on
this side of
the unit
Figure 2.1 Air-Flow through the Equipment
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-3
Installing the Equipment
2.3
Signal Connections
2.3.1
Rear Panel Signal Connectors
Caution!
It is strongly recommended that the terminal marked at the rear panel of the
equipment is connected to a site Technical Earth before any external connections
are made and the equipment is powered. This limits the migration of stray charges.
Signal connections are made via the rear panel. The rear panels, which are
available are shown below. Full technical specifications for the connections are
given in Annex B.
Only the Data and Control Ethernet connectors and the PSU connectors are
mounted on the chassis. All other connections at the rear panel are provided with
the option modules that may be fitted. Examples are shown below.
Data Ethernet (x4)
Control Ethernet (x2)
CE-x VCM
SatMod
ASI I/O Module
Figure 2.2 Rear Panel With CE-x VCM, SatMod and ASI I/O Options Fitted
2-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
2.3.2
Data Ethernet Connector
The unit has four Ethernet ports - two for data input, and
two for data output and will respond to ARPs, pings and
other low-level Ethernet traffic. The ports are accessible
via RJ-45 connectors on the rear panel of the chassis.
These are labeled Ge 1, Ge 2, Ge 3 and Ge 4. Ge 1 and
Ge 2 are used for data input, while Ge 3 and Ge 4 are
data output.
Table 2.1 Data Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000 Base T)
Connector designation
Ge 1 (data input)
Ge 2 (data input)
Ge 3 (data output)
Ge 4 (data output)
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Tx Out (+)
(Unused pins are not connected)
Pin 2 - Tx Out (-)
Pin 3 - Rx In (+)
Pin 6 - Rx In (-)
Status and Activity Indication
Each Ethernet Data Port has a rear panel mounted status LED associated with it to
indicate link status, activity and speed as follows:
Table 2.2 Link Speed: Left (Green) LED
Link Speed
LED Status
No Link
Off
——————————————————
100 Mbps
Flash Off x 2
—☐—☐☐☐☐☐☐—☐—☐☐☐☐☐☐☐
1000 Mbps
Flash Off x 3
—☐—☐—☐☐☐☐—☐—☐—☐☐☐☐☐
The left LED flash sequence period is 1 s, with a short flash duration of 100 ms.
Table 2.3 Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED
Link Speed
LED Status
No Link
Off
——————————————————
Link
On
☐☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐
Activity
Flash
— ☐— ☐ — ☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐— ☐☐ ☐— ☐ ☐☐
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-5
Installing the Equipment
2.3.3
Control Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet control ports are used to connect the
equipment to a PC for access with a web browser. Both
connectors share the same IP address, CTL 1 is the
Primary control port, and is by default the active control
port. Control Port CTL 2 should be considered as the
secondary control network as it will not respond to the
Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed
to it either as a result of a redundancy switch, or via a
user command. The active control port switches when
CTL 1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and CTL 2 has the link.
Table 2.4 Control Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
RJ-45 (100/1000 Base T)
Connector designation
CTL 1
CTL 2
Pin outs
Pin 1 - Tx Out (+)
(Unused pins are not
connected)
Pin 2 - Tx Out (-)
Pin 3 - Rx In (+)
Pin 6 - Rx In (-)
Status and Activity Indication
Each Ethernet Control Port has rear panel mounted status LEDs to indicate link
status, activity and speed as follows:
Table 2.5 Port Status: Left (Green) LED
Port
Status
Link Speed
LED Status
Active
Port
No Link
Off
——————————————————
100 Mbps
Flash Off x 2
— ☐— ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ — ☐ — ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐
1000 Mbps
Flash Off x 3
— ☐— ☐ — ☐ ☐ ☐☐ — ☐ — ☐ — ☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐
No Link
Off
——————————————————
100 Mbps
Flash On x 2
☐— ☐— — — — — — ☐ — ☐— — — — — —
1000 Mbps
Flash On x 3
☐— ☐— ☐— — — — ☐ — ☐— ☐ — — — —
Spare
Port
The left LED flash sequence period is 1 s, with a short flash duration of 100 ms.
2-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.6 Link Activity: Right (Yellow) LED
2.3.4
Link Speed
LED Status
No Link
Off
——————————————————
Link
On
☐☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐ ☐
Activity
Flash
— ☐— ☐ — ☐ ☐ ☐☐ ☐— ☐☐ ☐— ☐ ☐☐
CE Option Modules
The following connectors are provided on the CE Video Compression Modules.
2.3.4.1
Digital Video Input (All CE-a and CE-x Option Modules)
Standard and High Definition digital video can be input via
the 75 Ω female BNC connector (labeled 3G/HD/SD-SDI)
on the rear panel. The figure shows the SDI/HD-SDI type
75 Ω female BNC video input connector located on the
rear panel of the module. The LED (labeled LOCK) next
to the connector shows the lock status of the input video
signal.
Table 2.7 Digital Video Input via the SDI/HD-SDI Interface
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
3G/HD/SD SDI IN
Pin-outs
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
Table 2.8 Lock LED State Descriptions
Item
Description
Off
The SDI/HD-SDI Input is not active.
Red
The SDI/HD-SDI Input is active, but not locked.
Green
The SDI/HD-SDI Input is active and is locked.
Alternate Red and Green
The SDI/HD-SDI Input is active, but video with the wrong line standard is being
received.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-7
Installing the Equipment
2.3.4.2
Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/BNC Option Module)
High definition digital video can be input via the four 75 Ω
female BNC connectors on the rear panel.
For a single channel of HD, the input must be fed into
connector SDI 1.
For a single channel of UHD 4K, the input is fed to all four connectors, and may be
presented to the input as either four synchronized HD quadrants, or as four
synchronized interleaved sub-pictures as per SMPTE-425-5. In all cases, the LEDs
(labeled LOCK) next to each connector will show the lock status of the input video
signal for that connector.
In encoding more than one channel of H264 or HEVC video the relevant multichannel license (x4) needs to be purchased. If only one channel is licensed, the first
connector (labeled SD 1) must be used for video input. The other connectors will not
be operational unless in UHD.
Table 2.9 Digital Video Input via the SDI Interface
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
SDI 1-4
Pin-outs
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
Table 2.10 Lock LED State Descriptions
2.3.4.3
Item
Description
Off
The SDI Input is not active.
Red
The SDI input is active, but not locked.
Green
The SDI input is active and is locked.
Alternate Red and Green
The SDI input is active, but video with the wrong line standard is being received.
Digital Video Input (CE-HEVC/SFP Option Module)
The CE-HEVC/SFP option card can be fitted with one or
two SFP+ modules. If two modules are fitted, they must
be of the same type - a mixed population is not
supported.
SFP Copper
For the card ordered as CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/C/A, two SFP+ modules are fitted
which have two miniature 75-ohm BNC connectors per module. High Definition and
Ultra High Definition 4K digital video can be input via the miniature BNC connectors.
For a single channel of HD, the input must be fed into the first connector of the first
module.
2-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
For a single channel of UHD 4K, the input is fed to all four connectors, and may be
presented to the input as either four synchronized HD quadrants, or as four
synchronized interleaved sub-pictures as per SMPTE-425-5.
SFP Fiber
For the card ordered as CE/HWO/HEVC/SFP/F/A, two SFP+ modules are fitted
which have two fiber optical inputs per module. High Definition and Ultra High
Definition 4K digital video can be input via the fiber optical inputs.
For a single channel of HD, the input must be fed into the first connector of the first
module.
For a single channel of UHD 4K, the input is fed to all four connectors, and may be
presented to the input as either four synchronized HD quadrants, or as four
synchronized interleaved sub-pictures as per SMPTE-425-5.
2.3.4.4
Analogue Video Input via the CVBS Interface (CE-xA)
Analogue composite video can be input via the 75 Ω
female BNC connector (CVBS) on the rear panel.
Table 2.11 Analogue Video Input via the CVBS Interface
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
CVBS
Pin-outs
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
Table 2.12 CVBS LED State Descriptions
2.3.4.5
Item
Description
Off
The CVBS input is not active.
Red
The CVBS input is active, but not locked.
Green
The CVBS input is active and is locked.
Alternate Red and Green
The CVBS input is active, but video with the wrong.
Digital Audio Input Connector (All CE-a and CE-x Option Modules)
Digital audio may be input via the 15-way D-type
connector labeled AUDIO/DATA. The connector supports
both balanced and unbalanced digital audio signals,
though not at the same time. The connector does not
support simultaneous analogue and digital input. The
digital audio can either be balanced (AES3) or
unbalanced (AES3-id) depending on the audio breakout
cable used.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-9
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.13 Audio Breakout Cables
Marketing Code
Part Number
Supported Audio Mode
AVP/CAB/BAL
S14936 Audio Breakout Cable
Balanced Audio: 4 XLRs in + 1 BNC for Audio
Reference Output
AVP/CAB/UNBAL
S14937 Audio Breakout Cable
Unbalanced Audio: 4 BNCs in + 1 BNC out for
Audio Reference Output
Note:
An audio breakout cable is NOT supplied as standard with the chassis, and
must be ordered separately.
The chassis detects which cable is fitted (balanced or unbalanced) and makes the
necessary selection.
Table 2.14 Breakout Cable Detection Criteria
Item
AES3
AES-3id
Interface
Balanced
Unbalanced
Connector
XLR-3
BNC
Impedance
110 Ω
75 Ω
Input Level
2-7 V peak to peak
1 V peak to peak
Max Input
7 V peak to peak
1.2 V peak to peak
Max Current
64 mA
1.6 mA
Min Input
0.2 V
0.32 V
Cable
Shielded Twisted Pair
Coax
Interface
Balanced
Unbalanced
Balanced Audio (AVP/CAB/BAL)
With this option four balanced AES3 audio channels can be connected to the
Audio/Data D-Type connector on an option card.
An XLR socket is provided for each of the four digital inputs, and a 75 Ω BNC plug
for an AES3 reference signal at 3.072 Mbps. The reference signal contains a 1 kHz
tone at -6 dBFS at a sample rate of 48 kHz.
2-10
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.15 Digital Audio Input (Balanced)
Item
Specification
Connector types
15-way D-Type
Connector designation
AUDIO/DATA
Pin Outs
Digital 1 – 1
Shell
Screen
Digital 1 – 2
1
Digital 1 Line
Digital 1 – 3
9
Digital 1 Return
Digital 2 – 1
11
Screen
Digital 2 – 2
10
Digital 2 Line
Digital 2 – 3
3
Digital 2 Return
Digital 3 – 1
Shell
Screen
Digital 3 – 2
4
Digital 3 Line
Digital 3 – 3
12
Digital 3 Return
Digital 4 – 1
Shell
Screen
Digital 4 – 2
13
Digital 4 Line
Digital 4 – 3
6
Digital 4 Return
Ref – 1
7
AES3 Reference (48 kHz)
Ref – Shell
15
Screen
Unbalanced Audio (AVP/CAB/UNBAL)
With this option four unbalanced AES-3id audio channels can be connected to the
Audio/Data D-Type connector on an option card.
A BNC plug is provided for each of the four digital inputs, and a 75 Ω BNC plug for
an AES3 reference signal at 3.072 Mbps. The reference signal contains a 1 kHz
tone at -6 dBFS at a sample rate of 48 kHz.
Table 2.16 Digital Audio Input (Unbalanced)
Item
Specification
Connector types
15-way D-Type
Connector designations
AUDIO/DATA
Pin Outs
Digital 1 – 1
1
Digital 1 Line
Digital 1 – Shell
9
Screen
Digital 2 – 1
10
Digital 2 Line
Digital 2 – Shell
3
Screen
Digital 3 – 1
4
Digital 3 Line
Digital 3 – Shell
12
Screen
Digital 4 – 1
13
Digital 4 Line
Digital 4 – Shell
6
Screen
Ref – 1
7
AES3 Reference (48 kHz)
Ref – Shell
15
Screen
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-11
Installing the Equipment
2.3.4.6
Analogue Audio Input via the 15-way D-type Connector (CE-xA)
Two stereo pairs of analogue audio may be input via the
15-way D-type connector labeled AUDIO/DATA. The
analogue audio can either be balanced or unbalanced
depending on the audio breakout cable used.
Table 2.17 Audio Breakout Cables
Marketing Code
Part Number
Supported Audio Mode
AVP/CAB/BAL
S14936 Audio Breakout
Cable
Balanced Audio: 4 XLRs in + 1 BNC for Audio
Reference Output
AVP/CAB/UNBAL
S14937 Audio Breakout
Cable
Unbalanced Audio: 4 BNCs in + 1 BNC out for
Audio Reference Output
Note:
An audio breakout cable is NOT supplied as standard with the chassis, and
must be ordered separately.
The chassis detects which cable is fitted (balanced or unbalanced) and makes the
necessary selection.
Table 2.18 Breakout Cable Detection Criteria
Item
AES3
AES-3id
Interface
Balanced
Unbalanced
Connector
XLR-3
BNC
Impedance
110 Ω
75 Ω
Input Level
2-7 V peak to peak
1 V peak to peak
Max Input
7 V peak to peak
1.2 V peak to peak
Max Current
64 mA
1.6 mA
Min Input
0.2 V
0.32 V
Cable
Shielded Twisted Pair
Coax
Balanced Audio (AVP/CAB/BAL)
With this option four balanced analogue audio channels can be connected to the
Audio/Data D-Type connector on a VCM option card.
An XLR socket is provided for each of the four analogue inputs, and a 75 Ω BNC
plug for an AES3 reference signal. The reference signal contains a 1 kHz tone at 6 dBFS at a sample rate of 48 kHz.
2-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.19 Analogue Audio Input (Balanced)
Item
Specification
Connector types
15-way D-Type
Connector designation
AUDIO/DATA
Pin Outs
Analogue 1 – 1
Shell
Screen
Analogue 1 – 2
1
Audio in 1 +
Analogue 1 – 3
9
Audio in 1 -
Analogue 2 – 1
11
Screen
Analogue 2 – 2
10
Audio in 2 +
Analogue 2 – 3
3
Audio in 2 -
Analogue 3 – 1
Shell
Screen
Analogue 3 – 2
4
Audio in 3 +
Analogue 3 – 3
12
Audio in 3 -
Analogue 4 – 1
Shell
Screen
Analogue 4 – 2
13
Audio in 4 +
Analogue 4 – 3
6
Audio in 4 -
Ref – 1
7
AES3 Reference (48 kHz)
Ref – Shell
15
Screen
Unbalanced Audio (AVP/CAB/UNBAL)
With this option four unbalanced audio channels can be connected to the
Audio/Data D-Type connector on a VCM option card. A BNC plug is provided for
each of the four analogue inputs, and a 75 Ω BNC plug for an AES3 reference
signal at 3.072 Mbps. The reference signal contains a 1 kHz tone at -6 dBFS at a
sample rate of 48 kHz.
Table 2.20 Analogue Audio Input (Unbalanced)
Item
Specification
Connector types
15-way D-Type
Connector designation
AUDIO/DATA
Pin Outs
Analogue 1 – 1
1
Audio 1 Line
Analogue 1 – Shell
9
Screen
Analogue 2 – 1
10
Audio 2 Line
Analogue 2 – Shell
3
Screen
Analogue 3 – 1
4
Audio 3 Line
Analogue 3 – Shell
12
Screen
Analogue 4 – 1
13
Audio 4 Line
Analogue 4 – Shell
6
Screen
Ref – 1
7
AES3 Reference (48 kHz)
Ref - Shell
15
Screen
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-13
Installing the Equipment
2.3.5
Satellite Modulator Option Card Connectors
The Satellite Modulator Option Card takes MPEG Transport Streams on its input
and provides a modulated output either in L-band (950 – 2150 MHz) or in IF band
(80 – 150 MHz) according to the DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X
specification.
The output signal can be fed to an up-converter for mixing the signal to the
appropriate satellite channel. The module is also capable of powering the
downstream up-converter. The module can take two input Transport Streams and
encode and modulate one of them at a time. If the Transport Stream being
modulated is lost for some reason, the module can switch automatically to the other
Transport Stream input and continue the transmission using that. The L-band input
can be used for inputting a modulated L-band signal to the module. The module
then can combine the input and its own modulated output and feed a common upconverter with the combined signal.
Figure 2.3 Satellite Modulator Option Card Rear Panel
Table 2.21 Satellite Modulator Option Card Connectors
Item
Specification
Connector types
50 Ω female SMA L-Band (L-BAND IN and L-BAND OUT MAIN)
75 Ω female SMA L-Band F-type (L-BAND OUT MON)
75 Ω female BNC (IF OUT MAIN and IF OUT MONITOR)
Connector designation
L-BAND IN
L-BAND OUT MAIN
L-BAND OUT MON
IF OUT MAIN
IF OUT MONITOR
Pin-outs
2.3.6
Centre
Input/Output/Monitor
Shield
Ground/Chassis
ASI I/O Option Card Connectors
The ASI I/O Option Card rear panel provides two ASI inputs and two ASI outputs.
Figure 2.4 ASI I/O Option Card
2-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.22 ASI I/O Option Card Connectors
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
ASI IN 1
ASI IN 2
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
Pin-outs
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
The input connectors are used for feeding the unit with external Transport Streams
for external data insertion.
The output connectors can be configured as a mirrored output pair (with the same
Transport Stream on both outputs) or two independent outputs (with different
Transport Streams on each output).
2.3.7
G.703 Transceiver Option Card Connectors
The G.703 Transceiver card provides one PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy)
input and one output interface that can be used for interfacing Transport Streams to
PDH networks. The interface is G.703 compliant, and can provide support for E
carriers, namely E31 (E3) and E32 (DS3) as specified in ITU-T Rec. G.703.
Figure 2.5 G.703 Option Card Rear Panel
Table 2.23 G.703 Transceiver Option Card Connectors
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
IN
OUT
Pin-outs
2.3.8
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
External Sync Input Option Card Connector
The External Sync Option Card rear panel connector is used for connecting a
10 MHz 1 Vpp reference signal or an analogue video signal.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
2-15
Installing the Equipment
Figure 2.6 External Sync Input Option Card
Table 2.24 External Sync Input Option Card Connector
2.3.9
Item
Specification
Connector types
75 Ω female BNC
Connector designation
SYNC IN
Pin-outs
Centre
Input
Shield
Ground/Chassis
GPI Option Card Connectors
The General Purpose Interface (GPI) Option Card provides the following interfaces.
Table 2.25 GPI Data In Connector (Not supported in this release)
Item
Specification
Connector types
9-way D-type female (not supported in
this release)
Connector designation
DATA IN
Table 2.26 GPI Alarm Contact Closure Connector
Item
Specification
Connector types
25-way D-type female
Connector designation
GPI/ALARM
Pin-outs
1
GPI Pin 1
14
2
GPI Pin 3
15
3
4
GPI Pin 6
GPI Pin 7
17
5
GPI Pin 8
GPI Pin 9
18
6
GPI Pin 10
GPI Pin 11
19
7
GPI Pin 12
GPI Pin 13
20
2-16
GPI Pin 4
GPI Pin 5
16
8
GPI Pin 2
GPI Pin 14
GPI Pin 15
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Installing the Equipment
Item
Specification
21
9
GPI Pin 16
Reset
22
Fail (NO)
23
Fail (NC)
10
Fail (COM)
11
Alarm (NO)
24
12
Alarm (NC)
25
13
Alarm (COM)
GND
Sync/10 MHz
NO, NC and COM label normally open, normally closed and common alarm or fail
relay contacts respectively.
GPI Data Input Connector (Not supported in this release)
The Data Input provides an asynchronous serial data communications interface
conforming to the IEC-232 (RS-232) standard.
The DATA IN connector is a 9-way D-type female connector on the rear panel. The
pin connections are shown in Table 2.27.
Table 2.27 Data Input Connector Pin-out
Remote (DTE) Male
Signal Name
Option Card (DTE) Female
Pin
Signal Name
1
1
Not Connected
Received Data
2
2
Received Data
Transmit Data
3
3
Transmit Data
4
4
Not Connected
5
5
Signal Ground
6
6
Not Connected
7
7
Not Connected
8
8
Not Connected
9
9
Not Connected
Signal Ground
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Pin
Signal Direction
2-17
Installing the Equipment
2.3.10
Mini USB Connector
The mini USB connector on the front panel of the AVP chassis provides an interface
for remote web access and update from a computer, and for saving or exporting
configurations to, and loading or importing configurations from a USB stick.
Figure 2.7 Mini USB Connector
For details on using the mini USB connector, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.
2-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3
Getting Started
Chapter 3
Contents
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.4.1
3.8.4.2
3.8.5
3.8.6
3.8.6.1
3.8.7
3.8.7.1
3.8.8
3.8.8.1
3.8.8.2
3.8.8.3
3.8.9
3.8.9.1
3.8.9.2
3.8.10
3.8.11
3.8.12
3.8.13
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction .........................................................................................3-5
How to Connect Up the Unit ................................................................3-5
How to Power Up the Unit ...................................................................3-6
How to Configure In-band Control .......................................................3-6
How to Configure In-band Control Using the Front Panel .................... 3-7
How to Set the Unit IP Address ...........................................................3-8
How to Configure Ethernet Control Ports .............................................3-9
How to Configure Ethernet Data Ports ............................................... 3-11
How to Configure the AVP Using the Web GUI ................................. 3-14
General AVP Configuration ............................................................... 3-14
How to Enforce HTTPS ..................................................................... 3-15
How to Configure User Authentication ............................................... 3-15
How to Configure Advanced Video Processor Settings ..................... 3-17
General Advanced Video Processor Settings .................................... 3-17
Configure Option Card Output Parameters ........................................ 3-18
How to Configure Output Transport Streams ..................................... 3-19
How to Configure the PCR ................................................................ 3-22
PCR Embedded in Audio ................................................................... 3-24
How to Set Up Pass-thru Transport Streams ..................................... 3-24
Configuration .....................................................................................3-24
How to Configure MGP ...................................................................... 3-25
Overview of MGP .............................................................................. 3-25
Configuring MGP ............................................................................... 3-26
Recommendations............................................................................. 3-27
How to Set Up Remux ....................................................................... 3-27
Configuring Service Level Remux...................................................... 3-27
Remux of Data ..................................................................................3-28
How to Configure the Front Panel Video Confidence Monitor ............ 3-29
How to Configure VLAN Tagging ....................................................... 3-29
How to Copy and Move Transport Streams and Services .................. 3-31
How to Customize the Quick Set-up Menu to Quickly Access
Required Features ............................................................................. 3-32
How to Configure Video .....................................................................3-32
How to Configure and Use Video Input Detection .............................. 3-35
How to Set Up 4K Video Encoding ....................................................3-39
How to Set up Bit Rate Tracking ........................................................3-41
How to Return to Default Settings from the GUI ................................ 3-43
3-1
Getting Started
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.17.1
3.17.2
3.17.3
3.17.4
3.17.5
3.18
3.18.1
3.18.2
3.18.3
3.19
3.19.1
3.19.2
3.20
3.20.1
3.20.1.1
3.20.1.2
3.20.1.3
3.20.1.4
3.20.1.5
3.21
3.22
3.22.1
3.22.2
3.22.3
3.23
3.24
3.24.1
3.24.2
3.25
3.25.1
3.25.2
3.25.3
3.25.4
3.25.5
How to Set Up Audio Pass-thru......................................................... 3-43
How to Set Up Phase Aligned Audio Encoding ................................. 3-44
How to Set Up Input for 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Encoding...................... 3-46
How to Set Up BISS Encryption for Services .................................... 3-47
BISS Security .................................................................................... 3-47
BISS Key Entry ................................................................................. 3-47
Setting Up BISS from the GUI ........................................................... 3-49
Setting Up BISS from the Front Panel ............................................... 3-51
BISS and Stored Configurations ....................................................... 3-52
How to Splice and Insert Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) .............. 3-53
Splice Point Operation ...................................................................... 3-53
SCTE104 Over IP ............................................................................. 3-54
How to Configure Splicing ................................................................. 3-54
How to Configure GPI Triggered Splicing .......................................... 3-55
How to Set Up a GPI Card ................................................................ 3-55
How to Set Up a VCM to Use GPI Inputs .......................................... 3-56
How to Use the Simplified View (Option) ........................................... 3-56
Using the Simplified View .................................................................. 3-56
Assumed Workflow ........................................................................... 3-57
What to Expect.................................................................................. 3-57
Multiple Outputs ................................................................................ 3-58
Simplified View Summary ................................................................. 3-60
Simplified View Limitations ................................................................ 3-65
How to Control Temperature/Fan Speed ........................................... 3-67
How to Get and Apply Additional Licenses ........................................ 3-68
Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit.............................. 3-68
Ordering Additional Licenses ............................................................ 3-69
Entering License Keys ...................................................................... 3-70
Alarm Monitoring ............................................................................... 3-71
Simple Network Management Protocol ............................................. 3-71
Supported Protocols ......................................................................... 3-72
Operation .......................................................................................... 3-72
How to Configure the AVP Using the Front Panel ............................. 3-73
How to Configure Video Parameters ................................................. 3-73
How to Configure Audio Parameters ................................................. 3-74
How to Set Up a Transport Stream ................................................... 3-74
How to Add More Transport Streams ................................................ 3-77
How to Remove a Component from a Service .................................. 3-77
List of Figures
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
Figure 3.5
Figure 3.6
Figure 3.7
Figure 3.8
Figure 3.9
Figure 3.10
Figure 3.11
3-2
AVP Connections.............................................................................. 3-5
Ethernet Control Port Numbering ...................................................... 3-9
Ethernet Data Port Numbering ........................................................ 3-11
Configuring Basic Authentication .................................................... 3-15
Configuring LDAP Authentication Test ............................................ 3-16
Configuring LDAP Authentication.................................................... 3-17
Setting the Parameters for Satellite Transmission........................... 3-19
Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Transport Stream ...... 3-20
Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Service ..................... 3-21
Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Component ............... 3-21
Video Component Output ............................................................... 3-23
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.12
Figure 3.13
Figure 3.14
Figure 3.15
Figure 3.16
Figure 3.17
Figure 3.18
Figure 3.19
Figure 3.20
Figure 3.21
Figure 3.22
Figure 3.23
Figure 3.24
Figure 3.25
Figure 3.26
Figure 3.27
Figure 3.28
Figure 3.29
Figure 3.30
Figure 3.31
Figure 3.32
Figure 3.33
Figure 3.34
Figure 3.35
Figure 3.36
Figure 3.37
Figure 3.38
Figure 3.39
Figure 3.40
Figure 3.41
Figure 3.42
Figure 3.43
Figure 3.44
Figure 3.45
Setting PCR PID Value ................................................................... 3-23
Configuring a Pass-thru Transport Stream ...................................... 3-24
Properties Panel view of Pass-thru Transport Stream ..................... 3-25
Drag and Drop Service from ASI input to Output Transport
Stream ............................................................................................3-27
Remux Configuration Wizard........................................................... 3-28
Set-up Procedure for Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config ......... 3-37
Input Detection Configuration .......................................................... 3-38
4K Video - HD Quadrants ................................................................ 3-39
4K Video - Interleaved ..................................................................... 3-40
Enabling Bit Rate Tracking Mode .................................................... 3-42
Setting Bit Rate Weighting of Component ....................................... 3-43
BISS Security Level Selection ......................................................... 3-47
BISS Key Entry ...............................................................................3-48
BISS Key Session Word.................................................................. 3-48
BISS Enabling and Key Selection ................................................... 3-49
Setting BISS Key Value................................................................... 3-50
Editing a BISS Key .......................................................................... 3-50
Selection of Components to be Scrambled Using BISS................... 3-51
Scrambling Selection of an Individual Component........................... 3-51
Simplified View - Pop-Up Display When There Is No Output
Configured ......................................................................................3-57
Simplified View Web Page – Satellite Modulator, IP and ASI
Outputs Configured (IP and ASI Mirrored) ....................................... 3-58
Simplified View - Properties Relate to Main Output ......................... 3-59
Simplified View - Immediate Action Banner, All Outputs
Configured: SatMod (Main), IP and ASI Mirrored ............................ 3-60
Simplified View - Configuration Changes Requiring Apply
Button .............................................................................................3-61
Simplified View - Modifying Component Configuration .................... 3-62
Simplified View - Configuring Carrier ID and Encryption Key ........... 3-63
Simplified View - Alarm List ............................................................. 3-63
Simplified View - Tools .................................................................... 3-64
Switching between Simplified View and Advanced Configuration
GUI .................................................................................................3-65
Fan Control .....................................................................................3-68
Downloading the License Manifest file for License Generation ........ 3-69
Finding the Host Card Chip ID and Serial Number for License
Generation ......................................................................................3-70
Finding the Option Card Chip ID for License Generation ................. 3-70
Alarm Monitoring ............................................................................. 3-71
List of Tables
Table 3.1
Table 3.2
Table 3.3
Table 3.4
Table 3.5
Table 3.6
Table 3.7
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
IP Address Restrictions .....................................................................3-8
Ethernet Control Port Parameters ................................................... 3-10
Ethernet Data Port Parameters ....................................................... 3-12
Ethernet Redundancy Modes .......................................................... 3-13
VLAN Creation Options ................................................................... 3-30
VLAN Tag Sharing Options ............................................................. 3-30
GOP Length ....................................................................................3-33
3-3
Getting Started
Table 3.8
Table 3.9
Table 3.10
Table 3.11
Table 3.12
Table 3.13
Table 3.14
Table 3.15
Table 3.16
Table 3.17
Table 3.18
Table 3.19
Table 3.20
Table 3.21
Table 3.22
Table 3.23
3-4
Input Options Parameters ............................................................... 3-35
Encode Options Parameters ........................................................... 3-36
Bit Rate Weighting Parameters ....................................................... 3-43
License Requirements for PAA Encoding ....................................... 3-44
Embedded Stereo Channel Pairs.................................................... 3-46
Example Multiple Operation SCTE104 Message Structure ............. 3-53
DPI PID Index Value ....................................................................... 3-54
Splicing Control Options ................................................................. 3-55
Simplified View Outputs .................................................................. 3-59
SNMP Interface Parameters ........................................................... 3-72
Video Parameter Settings ............................................................... 3-73
Audio Input Settings........................................................................ 3-74
Audio Encode Settings ................................................................... 3-74
Transport Stream Parameters......................................................... 3-75
IP Related Parameters.................................................................... 3-76
Component and Service Parameters .............................................. 3-76
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.1
Introduction
Due to the number of different ways the Advanced Video Processor (AVP) Series
can be used, it is impossible to give precise setting up instructions for every possible
working scenario. This chapter, therefore, gives general guidance and principles on
how to power up and set up your unit for operation and describes the more common
operations you will want to perform.
For details of all Front Panel menus and controls, see Chapter 4, Front Panel
Control. For details of all Web Graphical User Interface (GUI) menus and controls,
see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
For more information on possible networking scenarios, see Chapter 6, Advanced
Video Processing and Networking.
3.2
How to Connect Up the Unit
See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for all connector details.
Figure 3.1
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
AVP Connections
3-5
Getting Started
To connect up the unit(s):
7. Connect signal input connectors Ge 1 and Ge 2 (for your input Transport
Streams) to your local area network if IP inputs are to be used.
8. Connect signal output connectors Ge 3 and Ge 4 (for your output Transport
Streams) to your local area network if IP outputs are to be used.
9. Connect computer control connectors CTL1 and CTL2 (for Web GUI Control) to
your local area network. Both connectors share the same IP address, Ctrl1 is the
Primary control port, and is by default the active control port. Control Port Ctrl2
should be considered as the secondary control network as it will not respond to
the Control Port IP Address unless control has been passed to it either as a
result of a redundancy switch, or via a user command. The active control port
switches when Ctrl1 has no link (e.g. carrier), and Ctrl2 has the link.
10. Connect single or dual AC or DC power connectors, depending on the option
purchased, to the power supply.
11. Connect your signal cables to/from your option cards, depending on which
options are fitted to your unit, as required.
3.3
How to Power Up the Unit
To power up the unit(s):
1. With all signal and power cables connected as required, switch on unit using the
front panel switch.
2. Wait for unit initialisation to complete.
Caution!
This equipment should not be operated unless the cooling fans are working and
there is free-air flow around the unit.
3.4
How to Configure In-band Control
The In-band Control feature enables you to configure the unit using the Ethernet
Data Output ports (Ge 3 and Ge 4) for control traffic rather than the Ethernet Control
ports (CTL 1 and CTL2). This is useful where only a single network is provided for
the AVP unit.
When In-band Control is configured, this setting will remain unchanged:
3-6
•
after rebooting
•
after a system upgrade.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
•
after loading a profile (unless Support > Save Configuration > Save
configuration including control parameters and Support > Restore
Configuration including Control Parameters web GUI options are used).
Limitations
In-band Control enables you to perform most of the usual configuration, control and
monitoring functions, but has the following limitations:
3.4.1
•
The Control port is not supported when using In-band Control mode.
•
The In-band Control feature is only supported for the following network
configuration:
-
Data Output ports configured as Same-Network.
-
Data Output ports configured as Active/Active.
-
The physical IP address need not be set be set on the Data Output ports.
When In-band Control is enabled, the value configured at Device
Configuration > Advanced Setup > Network Configuration > Data
Interface Group 3-4 > IP Address shall be valid for HTTP, SNMP, NTP,
Unit Upgrade, ssh and License Key Generator.
•
If a unit upgrade fails resulting in the unit going into factory mode, all data
network access will be lost. It will therefore be necessary to retry the upgrade
using the unit’s Control port. If you have no Control port network, it will be
necessary upgrade the unit locally.
•
No reboot warning dialog appears when the In-band Control setting is changed
on the front panel. A warning dialog will be presented, however, if the setting is
updated on the web GUI.
•
The following features are not available when using In-band Control mode:
-
LDAP
-
Remote logging
-
SCTE 104 over IP
-
ESAM
-
CSM messaging for MGP
How to Configure In-band Control Using the Front Panel
Configuring In-band Control is accomplished using the front panel menus. For a full
description of these menus, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.
To configure In-band Control on the unit(s):
1. Ensure the unit is fully powered up.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-7
Getting Started
2. On the AVP front panel, using the rotary knob, scroll down to Advanced >
System > Network Configuration > Use Data Interface 3_4 for Control
(true/false).
3. Press knob to select true (In-band Control enabled) or false (In-band Control
disabled).
4. Press the Select button to save, or Cancel to discard, the changes.
Note: Changing In-band Control shall result in the unit rebooting.
When In-band Control is enabled, both the Control port and Data Output port IP
addresses are displayed on the front panel top level display, see section 4.3 Front
Panel Display.
3.5
How to Set the Unit IP Address
Setting the IP address of a unit is accomplished using the front panel menus. For a
full description of these menus, see Chapter 4, Front Panel Control.
To set the IP address of the unit(s):
1. Ensure the unit is fully powered up.
2. On the AVP front panel, using the rotary knob, scroll down to the Unit Config >
Remote Control Setup option (Unit Config > Remote Control In-band Setup
option, when In-band Control is enabled).
3. Press knob to select.
4. Using the keys on the keypad, set the IP address, subnet mask and gateway
address.
5. Press the Select button to save, or Cancel to discard, the changes.
Note:
It may be necessary to set the IP address, gateway address and Virtual IP
address to 0, and to set a subnet mask in order to allow the IP address to
be changed.
IP Addresses on the unit must adhere to RFC3330 range of restrictions as listed in
the following table of allocated IP addresses.
Table 3.1
3-8
IP Address Restrictions
Block
Present Use
Reference
0.0.0.0/8
This Network
[RFC1700, p4]
10.0.0.0/8
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
14.0.0.0/8
Public-Data Networks
[RFC1700, p181]
24.0.0.0/8
Cable Television Networks
---
39.0.0.0/8
Reserved but subject to allocation
[RFC1797]
127.0.0.0/8
Loopback
[RFC1700, p5]
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Block
Present Use
Reference
128.0.0.0/16
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
169.254.0.0/16
Link Local
---
172.16.0.0/12
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
191.255.0.0/16
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
192.0.0.0/24
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
192.0.2.0/24
Test-Net
---
192.88.99.0/24
6to4 Relay Anycast
[RFC3068]
192.168.0.0/16
Private-Use Networks
[RFC1918]
198.18.0.0/15
Network Interconnect Unit Benchmark Testing
[RFC2544]
223.255.255.0/24
Reserved but subject to allocation
---
224.0.0.0/4
Multicast
[RFC3171]
240.0.0.0/4
Reserved for Future Use
[RFC1700, p4]
Notes: The control network and data networks should not conflict.
It is suggested that the ranges for these networks are in the Private-Use
Networks as listed in the summary Table.
IP Address range 192.168.10.x (subnet 255.255.255.0) is used for internal
unit communications, so should not be used for external communications.
3.6
How to Configure Ethernet Control Ports
Overview
The Base Chassis has two Ethernet control ports that support IEEE 802.3
100BaseTX and 1000BaseT protocols. The control ports are accessible via RJ-45
connectors mounted on the rear panel of the unit.
Figure 3.2
Ethernet Control Port Numbering
The Ethernet control ports are used to connect the unit to a control computer for
control through a web browser or to a control system for control through nCompass
Control.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-9
Getting Started
Ethernet Control Port Parameters
A single IP port is defined for all Ethernet control traffic to and from the chassis. The
physical ports used for Ethernet control are by default the control Ethernet ports.
The control ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
The parameters defining the control Ethernet port are as shown in the following
table.
Table 3.2
Ethernet Control Port Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Comments
Network Mode
Same Network [default]
The interface pair is on the same
subnet.
Read only parameter
Different Network
The interface pair is on different
subnet.
Active-Active
The same traffic is present on both
interfaces all the time.
Active-Standby [default]
The secondary interface is active
only if the primary is down.
Auto-revert to Primary
[default]
Defines which of the interface group.
will be used when connection is lost
IP Redundancy Mode
Autorevert
Read only parameter.
Auto-revert to Secondary
The delay in seconds before a
redundancy switch occurs, after the
interface link is up. If this is set to 0
then switching happens immediately.
Autorevert delay
Active Interface
Primary, Secondary
The currently active interface
Line Speed
Auto [default]
The connection speed
Read only parameter
100 Mbps
1 Gbps
Duplex Mode
Auto [default]
Auto negotiate the mode
Full Duplex
Simultaneously transmit and receive
Half Duplex
Transmit and receive in a time
division manner
Default MAC Address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
The virtual MAC address of the Gex
interface.
Read only parameter
IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Virtual IP address of the control
interface group
IP address used for control and
configuration of the unit.
Should not be set to 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 [default]
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Default Gateway
IGMP mode selection
3-10
Subnet mask for the control interface
group
0.0.0.0 [default]
No defined gateway
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Gateway address for packets
outside the defined subnet
IGMP v3
Uses version 3 of the IGMP protocol
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Parameter
Values
Description
IGMP v2 [default]
Uses version 2 of the IGMP protocol
Comments
Physical Control Interface <n>
Default MAC Address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
The MAC address of the Gex
interface.
Read only parameter
Link Status
Link Up (1000)
Link is up and the link speed is 1000
Mbps.
Read only parameter
Link Up (100)
Link is up and the link speed is 100
Mbps.
Link Down
Link is down.
days : hours : mins : secs
The length of time that the link has
been up. If the link goes down this
value is reset to 0.
Read only parameter
TX Packets
Number of IP packets transmitted
Read only parameter
RX Packets
Number of IP packets received
Read only parameter
Link Up Time
IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
IP address of the physical control
interface
If set to 0.0.0.0 control interfaces will
only respond to virtual IP address
Setting the physical IP address allows
the interface to be pinged to validate
the connection. This is not intended
not be used as the IP address for
configuration and control.
Must be on the same subnet and
gateway as the virtual interface.
3.7
How to Configure Ethernet Data Ports
Overview
Four gigabit Ethernet ports are provided for data input and output.
Figure 3.3
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Ethernet Data Port Numbering
3-11
Getting Started
Ethernet Data Port Parameters
The data Ethernet ports Ge 1 and Ge 2 are bonded together, as are Ge 3 and Ge 4.
Each port of a pair transmits the same IP traffic. If the IP address, or subnet mask of
a secondary port is set to 0.0.0.0, then it will be assumed that it is operating in a
mirrored redundancy configuration with the primary port, and therefore has the same
IP address and subnet mask.
VLAN Tagging
VLAN tagging is supported on the Data Output interfaces. To configure VLAN, browse to
Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and select Vlan Group in the appropriate output
under the Vlan Tags folder. Alternatively, you can also use the front panel to set up VLANs.
The settings can be found under Advanced/System/Base Unit/Vlan Tags.
The data Ethernet ports are configured by the parameters listed in the following
table.
Table 3.3
Ethernet Data Port Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Network Mode
Same Network [default]
The interface pair is on the same
subnet.
Different Network
The interface pair is on different
subnet.
Active-Active
The same traffic is present on both
interfaces all the time.
Active-Standby
The secondary interface is active
only if the primary is down.
Active Interface
Primary, Secondary
The currently active interface
Line Speed
Auto
The connection speed
IP Redundancy Mode
Comments
If Network Mode is set to Different
Network then Active-Active is set and
becomes read only.
Read only parameter
100 Mbps
1 Gbps
Duplex Mode
Auto [default]
Auto negotiate the mode
Full Duplex
Simultaneously transmit and receive
Half Duplex
Transmit and receive in a time
division manner
Default Virtual MAC
Address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
The virtual MAC address of the Gex
interface.
Read only parameter
IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Virtaul IP address of the data
interface group
Must be unique
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
IGMP mode selection
3-12
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Subnet mask for the data interface
group
0.0.0.0 [default]
No defined gateway
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Gateway address for packets
outside the defined subnet
IGMP v3
Uses version 3 of the IGMP protocol
0.0.0.0 [default]
Will be used as source address for
multicast output.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Parameter
Values
Description
Comments
IGMP v2 [default]
Uses version 2 of the IGMP protocol
Physical Data Interface <n>
Default MAC Address
aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff
The MAC address of the Gex
interface.
Read only parameter
Link Status
Link Up (1000)
Link is up and the link speed is 1000
Mbps.
Read only parameter
Link Up (100)
Link is up and the link speed is 100
Mbps.
Link Down
Link is down.
days : hours : mins : secs
The length of time that the link has
been up. If the link goes down this
value is reset to 0.
Read only parameter
TX Packets
Number of IP packets transmitted
Read only parameter
RX Packets
Number of IP packets received
Read only parameter
Physical IP address of the data
interface
Can remain set to 0.0.0.0
Link Up Time
IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
Must be unique if set
Setting the physical IP address allows
the interface to be pinged to validate
the connection.
Must be on the same subnet and
gateway as the virtual interface.
Data Input (Ge1 and Ge2)
The unit has two Ethernet ports that can be used for data input, and responds to
ARPs and pings. Currently input data is not supported.
Data Output (Ge3 and Ge4)
The unit can generate one or more output Transport Streams from the components
produced by the option cards fitted. The IP output Transport Stream packets are
encapsulated in IP packets prior to being transmitted via the Ethernet Data ports.
The base unit does not provide any other interface through which Transport Streams
can be output.
Table 3.4
Ethernet Redundancy Modes
Redundancy Mode
Description
Type of Network
Active - Active
Both interfaces (Data 3 and Data 4)
simultaneously output the same output
TS.
Same Network
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
•
Both interfaces are configured to be on the same network.
•
They have identical IP configuration, which is set using the
Interface Group IP address (Virtual IP Address). The Physical
Interface IP address does not need to be set and can remain at
0.0.0.0.
•
The unit automatically assigns the Source Address for output TS
to be the IP address of the Interface Group.
3-13
Getting Started
Redundancy Mode
Description
Type of Network
Different Network
Active - Standby
Only the primary interface (Data 3) will
transmit the output TS.
If the primary interface goes LinkDown, the TS is sent from the
secondary interface (Data 4).
Configuration to control auto-revert is
provided).
•
Each interface has different IP configuration.
•
This is set using the Physical Interface IP settings for each
Interface.
•
The unit automatically assigns the Source Address for each
output TS to be the address configured for the Physical Interface
used for that TS.
Same Network
•
Both interfaces are configured to be on the same network.
•
They have identical IP configuration, which is set using the
Interface Group IP address (Virtual IP Address). The Physical
Interface IP address does not need to be set and can remain at
0.0.0.0.
•
The unit automatically assigns the Source Address for output TS
to be the IP address of the Interface Group.
Different Network
•
3.8
Not supported in Active – Standby mode.
How to Configure the AVP Using the Web GUI
The unit is configured using the web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI). For
details of all the GUI screens and options, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
For details of supported Web Browsers please refer to the release notes
accompanying the software release.
3.8.1
General AVP Configuration
The configuration consists of two phases. First, the general parameters of the base
unit and the option cards are configured through the Device Configuration web
page. Then, the output streams can be configured through the Service
Configuration web page.
To save any changes made, click on the Apply All button located at the right side of
the user interface below the page tabs.
Note:
To save time, save the changes only after each parameter has been
altered. When trying to leave a page without saving the changes, a dialog is
displayed which allows saving or discarding the changes or abandoning the
page.
The modified folders in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget and the
corresponding parameters in the Properties widget are highlighted in orange.
Moreover, the changes are also listed on the Changes tab of the Information
widget. To undo a change, simply click on it in the Information widget. The
appropriate item shows up in the Properties widget and its original value can be
restored manually.
3-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.8.2
How to Enforce HTTPS
The AVP control interface can be used over HTTP or HTTPS protocols. The HTTPS
protocol is always available, and uses a self-signed certificate. It is not possible to
change this certificate.
HTTP is available by default, but an administrator of the unit can turn this off.
To turn off HTTP access:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select
Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options.
2. Change the control Disable HTTP Access (HTTPS is always On) to ON in
order to disable HTTP access, thereby enforcing the use of HTTPS.
3.8.3
How to Configure User Authentication
The AVP can be configured to force a user to log into the web application. Two
authentication methods are available: Basic Authentication, and LDAP
Authentication.
Basic Authentication
Basic Authentication allows an administrator to set up a user name and password
via the web application. When applied, the browser will immediately require that the
user logs into the unit for that session.
Note:
Basic Authentication is not designed to be a strong authentication method.
Should something more robust be required, consider using LDAP
Authentication.
To set up Basic Authentication:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select
Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options.
2. Set Authentication on the Properties widget to Basic and enter a username
and password.
3. Select Apply All to enforce authentication for the current session.
Figure 3.4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Configuring Basic Authentication
3-15
Getting Started
LDAP Authentication
LDAP Authentication allows an administrator to use an external LDAP server to
perform the user authentication.
Note:
The AVP provides a test mode to check the parameters for LDAP have
been correctly entered. This test mode is necessary because if a mistake is
made on entering the data, and full live LDAP is applied, no user will be able
to authenticate and hence access to the unit will be permanently locked.
To set up LDAP authentication:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page and select
Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server options.
2. Set Authentication on the Properties widget to LDAP Test.
3. Enter the LDAP parameters as provided by the user’s IT department.
Figure 3.5
Configuring LDAP Authentication Test
4. Select Apply All. The user will be asked to enter their authentication details
(username and password). The unit will attempt to authenticate against the
server, and the result will be displayed on the same page. The unit automatically
times out after two minutes and resets the Authentication mode to Off.
5. If the LDAP settings were successful, select LDAP Authentication for the
Authentication control and select Apply All.
3-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.6
Configuring LDAP Authentication
3.8.4
How to Configure Advanced Video Processor Settings
3.8.4.1
General Advanced Video Processor Settings
To configure the General Advanced Video Processor Settings:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration page and click on the Advanced Setup
tab.
Note:
The Advanced Video Processor Settings widget displays all the unit
parameters organized into different folders in a tree view. The folders can
be expanded and collapsed by clicking on the plus or minus sign next to
them or by selecting a node, right clicking on it, then choosing Expand
Selected or Collapse Selected from the context menu.
2. General parameters such as Unit Name, UTC and SNTP Server are configured
by navigating to Encoder > Base Unit
3. Configure the IP output parameters by navigating to Encoder > Network
Configuration > Data Interface Group 3-4.
Note:
There is no actual output until a Transport Stream is created and its Status
of Service parameter is set to Online.
4. Optionally, the redundancy mode for the unit can be set up in the Encoder >
MGP Support folder
3.8.4.1.1
Set the Unit Time and Date
The UTC time and date can be set manually or the unit can obtain the current time
from a network time server using SNTPv4 (RFC 4330) and is capable of working
with Microsoft Windows Time, (SNTP as defined in RFC 1769).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-17
Getting Started
SNTP Time Server
If an SNTP Time Server is selected, and communications are established with it,
then the unit uses the time obtained to correct the system’s real time clock, and the
user cannot set the clock.
If a time server has been configured, but it fails to respond, then an ‘SNTP Server
Failed To Respond’ alarm is generated.
Note:
SNTP always uses port 123.
One set of parameters is applicable to Carrier ID present in the NIT and used in the
Satellite Modulator DVB RF Carrier ID (DVB-CID).
The properties of these fields can be entered from the Device Configuration
Advanced Setup menu or from the Voyager Dashboard. A tab will also be available
as part of the Satellite Modulator output Properties under the Service
Configuration tab.
3.8.4.2
Configure Option Card Output Parameters
Note:
An output MUST have a Transport Stream created and set to Online
before the output signal will be present.
To configure the Option Card Output Parameters:
1. Configure the parameters for satellite transmission by navigating to Encoder >
Slots > Slot n – Satellite Modulator Option Card > Satellite Modulator
Option Card. The input, modulation and output parameters can be set up by
selecting the Input Parameters, Modulation Parameters and Output Parameters
folder and entering the required information, as shown on the picture below. To
enable the output ensure that a Transport Stream has been created (this can be
an empty Transport Stream if just a signal test is required). Set the Transport
Stream status to Online. Set the Output State to either On (Reduced Power)
or On (Nominal Power), and when required set Modulation State to On.
3-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.7
Setting the Parameters for Satellite Transmission
2. The ASI outputs can be configured to be mirrored (same TS on both outputs) or
independent. There are no other configurable parameters for the ASI outputs
3. The format of the G703 Output is configured by navigating to Encoder > Slots >
Slot n – G>703 Transceiver Card > G.703 Transceiver Card > G.703 I/O Port
1.
3.8.5
How to Configure Output Transport Streams
To configure a Transport Stream for an AVP, follow the steps below. Here, the
Satellite Modulator output is taken as example. Transport Streams also can be
easily configured on other outputs using the same procedure.
Note:
The unit can be configured to simultaneously provide either the same TS
over multiple outputs (e.g. where additional output option cards are fitted) or
different TS and the various available outputs. See section 3.8.12 for
information on copying a TS.
1. Navigate to the Service Configuration web page.
2. Expand the Host Outputs node in the Outputs widget, and click on the required
output. A blue box is drawn around the selected item and the properties
associated with it are displayed in the Transport Stream accordion panel of the
Properties widget.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The Satellite Modulator Output Stream 1 and Satellite Modulator Output
Stream 2 outputs behave somewhat differently than the other outputs.
When selected, the parameters from the Device Configuration >
Advanced Video Processor Settings > Encode > Slot n – Satellite
Modulator Option Card > Satellite Modulator Option Card > Modulation
3-19
Getting Started
Parameters, Output Parameters and Input Parameters are shown to
ease access and reduce the time needed for setting up the unit. The Input
Parameters tab is shown to allow easy access to the RAS encryption
setting. All other parameters on this tab should be left at their default values.
For other outputs, an empty page is shown in the Properties widget if no
Transport Stream exists under them. Otherwise, the Transport Stream
properties are displayed.
3. Create a Transport Stream by right clicking on the required output and selecting
the Add Transport Stream command from the context menu, as shown in
Figure 3.8. The properties of the newly created Transport Stream appear in the
Properties widget.
Figure 3.8
Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Transport Stream
4. Adjust the Transport Stream properties as required.
Note:
It is good practice to configure a Transport Stream by setting the Bit rate
tracking mode to Maximize Video. In this way, any changes in the
Transport Stream bit rate will be reflected in the video component bit rates.
Moreover, on the Satellite Modulator output, the Transport Stream bit rate is
determined by the modulation parameters. Any change in the modulation
parameters will also be reflected in the bit rate of the video component.
5. To set up internally generated ATSC tables, see Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
6. To create a service in the newly created Transport Stream, make sure the
Transport Stream is selected. Right click on it and select Add Service from the
context menu, as shown in Figure 3.9. The properties of the newly created
service shall appear in the Service accordion panel of the Properties widget.
Adjust the service properties as required.
3-20
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.9
Note:
Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Service
Transport Streams and services can also be added through the Action
menu in the Outputs widget.
7. Expand the nodes in the Inputs widget and select the video stream to be
included in the Transport Stream.
8. Hold down the left mouse button and drag it over the newly created service.
Once the component is over the service, the color of the dragging box changes
to green indicating that the component is now over a valid dropping position.
Figure 3.10 Service Configuration Web Page – Adding a Component
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-21
Getting Started
9. Release the left mouse button. The component is added to the newly created
service and its parameters are shown on separate tabs in the Video
Component accordion panel of the Properties widget.
10. Adjust the video properties as required.
11. Add all the required components (audio, VBI...) from the Inputs widget to the
Transport Stream as above. Adjust the component parameters in the respective
accordion panel of the Properties widget.
Note:
To identify the source of a certain component in the Outputs widget, click
on the component. The source of the component is highlighted in grey in the
Inputs widget. You may have to scroll in the Inputs widget to actually see
the highlighted component.
12. Modifying the same parameter for different items of the same type (for instance,
the bit rate of two or more audio components) can be carried out by selecting all
the items, navigating to the property to be changed, and changing the value. If
the values for the selected items are different, then the string [Mixed] is shown
in the respective field.
13. If you want to create another service or Transport Stream, repeat the steps
above.
14. Turn the Transport Streams online by selecting the Transport Stream and
clicking on the Online button in the Properties widget.
Note:
Turning the Transport Stream online does not turn the modulator output on.
The additional steps below are needed.
15. The Satellite Modulator output and modulation parameters can be configured
from the Service Configuration>Satellite Modulator>Properties tabs. For the
output to be transmitted, in addition to the TS being set Online, the output state
must be set to ON (either reduced or nominal power) and the modulation state
must also be ON. These parameters are also available in the Device
Configuration menus.
16. The status of the modulator output is indicated by the icons in the banner at the
top of the user interface.
Note:
3.8.6
All Transport Streams can be set online in one go by selecting all of them
and clicking on the Online button.
How to Configure the PCR
By default, the unit will use a PCR embedded in the video. If a separate PCR is
required the following steps are necessary:
1. Turn off embedded PCR in the Video Component Output Properties panel.
3-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.11 Video Component Output
2. Select the Video PCR Stream from the video input list and drag and drop it into
the output service.
3. Configure the required PCR PID on this component.
4. Select Outputs >Service – n and set the PCR PID to the same value as that set
for the component.
Figure 3.12 Setting PCR PID Value
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-23
Getting Started
3.8.6.1
PCR Embedded in Audio
When configuring an audio component with embedded PCR, the PCR PID is not
automatically updated to match the audio component PID. You must configure the
PCR PID in the service properties to match the audio component PID. Failure to do
this may result in the output being non-decodable, depending upon the receiving
device.
3.8.7
How to Set Up Pass-thru Transport Streams
The AVP supports Transport Stream content Pass-thru. That means that a
Transport Stream on an ASI input interface can be passed through to the Satellite
Modulator, G.703 or IP Output interface in a content preserving mode.
3.8.7.1
Configuration
To configure a Transport Stream Pass-thru, select the ASI Transport Stream in the
Input widget on Advanced tab of the Service Configuration page, and simply
drag-and-drop to the Satellite Modulator or IP Output Stream in the Output widget.
When the cursor is above the output an information pop-up is displayed indicating
that a Pass-thru Transport Stream will be created.
Figure 3.13 Configuring a Pass-thru Transport Stream
The Properties widget shows that a Pass-thru Transport Stream has been
configured and there are no configurable parameters.
3-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.14 Properties Panel view of Pass-thru Transport Stream
3.8.7.1.1
Configuring a Pass-thru TS From the Front Panel
To configure a Transport Stream Pass-thru on the front panel, select Add Existing
Transport Stream in the menu of the appropriate output, and choose the required
incoming Transport Stream from the list.
3.8.7.1.2
TS Pass-thru Limitations
If the bit rate of an input stream is too high for the output to handle, the output is
unusable, and alarms for too high data rate or buffer overflow are issued.
3.8.8
How to Configure MGP
3.8.8.1
Overview of MGP
The Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP) is a mechanism used to control the emission of
multicasts containing media streams over IP, where multiple AVP units can emit the
same multicast onto the same network. This mechanism ensures only one AVP unit
in such a group will emit. In a system deployment, this permits controlling software
to not have to configure downstream switches to prevent duplication of the same
multicast onto the same network.
MGP is configured automatically by Ericsson control software, but can be set up via
the GUI (or the Front Panel). Please note that some of the settings mentioned here
are hidden if the unit is or has been under the control of Ericsson control software.
MGP can operate in one of two modes, or it may be turned off:
•
In Unit Level mode, it is assumed that another unit is, or may be configured
with, the same output transport streams. When a failure occurs, MGP will
coordinate a redundancy switch of all the services from one unit to the other.
•
In Media Level mode, transport streams may be grouped together into media
bundles, which may be individually switched between units.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-25
Getting Started
In addition, MGP operation is significantly affected by two other settings:
•
The Network Mode for the output Interfaces, a choice of Same Network or
Different Network, and
•
The transport stream source IP redundancy, a choice of Transparent or Nontransparent.
With a Network Mode set to Same-Network, interfaces 3 and 4 share the same IP
address and are therefore on the same network. Further options define how the
interfaces are used. But from the perspective of MGP, there is only one logical
output interface.
With a Network Mode set to Different-Network, interfaces 3 and 4 must be
connected to seemingly different networks (or sub nets) and they each get their own
distinct IP address.
When TS Source IP Redundancy is set to Transparent, media IP packets and
MGP status IP packets are virtually sourced from IP addresses which can remain
the same when a service bundle is switched from one unit to another. This setting is
incompatible with the Different-Network mode.
MGP works by emitting MGP Status Messages (MSMs) alongside the media
packets, but on a separate multicast common to a bundle, if applicable, and shared
with units likely to take over a service in case of failure or simply targeted for a nearseamless switch.
3.8.8.2
Configuring MGP
1. Set up the output interface Network mode: Device Configuration > Advanced
Setup > Device > Network Configuration > Data Interface Group 3-4 >
Network Mode.
2. Set up the Transport Stream source IP redundancy mode: Device
Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > Base Unit > TS Source IP
Redundancy.
Note:
A selection of output interface Network mode of Different Network,
together with a transport stream source IP redundancy mode of
Transparent, is not a valid combination.
3. Select the mode of operation for MGP: Device Configuration > Advanced
Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP Settings.
4. Set up the MSM multicast address:
3-26
a
In Unit Level mode, the MSM multicast address is configured at Device
Configuration > Advanced Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP
Settings.
b
In Module Level mode, there is the potential of a media bundle per
Transport Stream and the MSM multicast address is configured at Service
Configuration > Host Outputs > Transport Stream (output) > MGP
Settings. MGP protection also needs to be switched on for each
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Transport Stream (Configuration > Host Outputs > Transport Stream
(output) > MGP protection). Please note that toggling between MGP
modes will disable MGP protection for each Transport Stream.
5. Configure the MGP spares:
a
3.8.8.3
In Unit Level mode, configure the spares through Device Configuration >
Advanced Setup > Device > MGP Support > MGP Spares, entering the
IP address of each spare. Up to four spares can be configured.
Recommendations
With a Same-Network configuration, it is recommended that Transparent source IP
redundancy is used.
With a Different-Network configuration, only Non-Transparent source IP
redundancy is available. Care must be taken to set the source addresses for spare
units, providing the addresses of both output interfaces, or MGP will not work
correctly.
Note:
3.8.9
Source IP redundancy can only be set to Non-Transparent when there are
no output Transport Streams configured.
How to Set Up Remux
Services from a Transport Stream can be remuxed from an IP, ASI or G.703 input to
any output that can produce a Transport Stream.
3.8.9.1
Configuring Service Level Remux
In order to remux a service from an input to an output, first ensure there is a
Transport Stream already configured with an existing service on the output you wish
to add the remuxed service to. Once the Transport Stream has been created, drag
one or more required services from their input to the target Transport Stream.
Figure 3.15 Drag and Drop Service from ASI input to Output Transport Stream
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-27
Getting Started
Note:
The Remux Configuration wizard will start when the service has been
dropped onto the Transport Stream.
The Remux Configuration wizard will prompt you to select which components you
want to remux. By default, all components from all services dragged across will be
selected. Once you have confirmed the components you want to remux, click on
Finish.
Figure 3.16 Remux Configuration Wizard
The remuxed services will appear in the target Transport Stream, one for each
service that was dragged across. All remuxed components will have a blue R badge
to denote a remuxed component displayed in the Transport Stream tree in the
Outputs widget.
Components in the remuxed service cannot be configured, although their PID can
be altered. The resulting services can be configured as normal.
It is not possible for the device to know in advance what the bitrates of any remuxed
components are, so it is necessary to add an upper value of their combined bitrates
into the Reserved bit rate field of the Transport Stream. This bit rate will be put
aside for remuxed services and bit rate tracking will take it into account when
allocating bitrates of encoded components.
3.8.9.2
Remux of Data
A simple form of remux is also available without a license. This allows an input TS
containing data without PCR timing information (for example, SI/PSI tables) to be
remuxed into an output TS. This is referred to as ‘Non-timed data remux’. The data
will be passed through the encoder with no timing information and there will be no
alignment of the data to services from the unit.
3-28
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Configuring Non-Timed Data Remux
First click on the input that you are using, and in the Properties window, use the
Max Reserved Bandwidth field to enter the data rate of the incoming data. Next,
ensure there is a Transport Stream already configured with an existing service on
the output you wish to add the data to.
When the Transport Stream has been created, drag the input (e.g. ASI Stream 1) to
the target Transport Stream. All Transport Stream packets received on that input
port will now be included in selected Transport Stream output.
It should be noted, when this feature is used for the insertion of SI/PSI tables, it is
expected that the internal SI/PSI generation is turned off (Select the output
Transport Stream, and in the Properties window, switch off all tables).
3.8.10
How to Configure the Front Panel Video Confidence Monitor
The confidence monitor on the front panel can be configured to monitor the video
input on any VCM fitted to the chassis, from either the GUI or the front panel.
From the GUI go to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Front
Panel Parameters > Video Monitor Setup > Video Monitor Video Select. The
Properties panel will provide a drop down box listing all available sources with the
relevant slot number (in many cases this will be only a single VCM). Select the
required source.
There is a preview time for the confidence monitor that sets the time the monitor
display is active from the time the ON button is pressed. This is to help maximize the
life of the monitor. If a longer preview time is required, from the GUI go to Device
Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Front Panel Parameters and set
the Video Monitor Preview Time to the required value (in seconds).
From the front panel navigate to Unit Config > Display Setup > Video Monitor
Input and select the required source.
3.8.11
How to Configure VLAN Tagging
VLAN tagging can be used to segregate IP packets from data interfaces.
VLAN Creation
A VLAN is created by specifying the VLAN ID, IP address and the Netmask. All
Transport Streams which are tagged to this VLAN use the VLAN IP address as its
source IP address. Hence the VLAN and VLAN ID must be created before it can be
used to tag a Transport Stream.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-29
Getting Started
To create VLANs, on the Advanced Setup tab of the Device Configuration page
navigate to the Device > Vlan Tags folder, select the output you want to assign the
VLAN tag to, and click Add in the Properties pane and configure the IP settings as
required. Alternatively, on the front panel navigate to Advanced/System/Vlan Tags
and set up the VLANs as required.
Alternatively VLANs can be created via the Service Configuration page by clicking
on the Manage button next to the Vlan Tag parameter.
The available options are listed in the following table.
Table 3.5
VLAN Creation Options
Parameter
Values
Description
Vlan ID (Create)
2-4094
New VLAN ID to create.
Vlan IP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
VLAN IP Address (VLAN tagged Transport Stream will have
this as its source IP address).
Vlan Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
VLAN Netmask.
Vlan Gateway
zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz
VLAN gateway address for the current VLAN.
Note:
The VLAN Id and its IP address must be unique across all Ethernet
interfaces.
VLAN Tag Sharing
Once the VLANs are created, they can be assigned to IP Transport Streams. To do
that, navigate to Service Configuration page, and create a Transport Stream for the
appropriate IP output. Then, click on the newly created Transport Stream, and in the
Properties widget select the required VLAN tag. VLANs can also be assigned to
Transport Streams in the Outputs/IP Output <m>/Data Interface Group
<n>/Transport Stream ID: <id>/Destination List/Destination <k>/Vlan Tag front
panel menu. The following options can be set:
Table 3.6
VLAN Tag Sharing Options
Parameter
Values
Description
Vlan Tag
None, existing VLAN tag
Disables VLAN tagging or assigns the selected VLAN tag to
the current Transport Stream.
Vlan Priority
0-7
Priority that can be used to support QoS.
It is also possible to group multiple Transport Streams under the same VLAN. To do
this, assign the same VLAN tag to all of them.
Note:
3-30
On the web user interface, VLANs can be managed through the Service
Configuration page by clicking on the Manage button next to the Vlan Tag
parameter.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
VLAN Deletion
A VLAN can be removed from the Transport Stream by changing the VLAN Tag
parameter under the Transport Stream to None. If a VLAN tag used by any
Transport Stream is deleted from the VLAN Tags folder, the VLAN Tag parameter
is set to None in the respective Transport Streams.
3.8.12
How to Copy and Move Transport Streams and Services
To copy or move a previously created Transport Stream or service, or an existing
component from one output to the other, proceed as follows:
1. Select the Transport Stream, service or component.
Note:
More items can be highlighted by holding down the Ctrl or Shift key while
clicking.
2. To move the selected items, drag them over another valid dropping location and
release the mouse button. For Transport Streams, valid dropping positions are
the outputs, for services, the Transport Streams and for components, the
services.
3. To copy the item instead of moving, hold the Ctrl key while dragging. The item is
moved or copied to the specified location.
The commands in the Edit menu of the Properties widget can also be used for
copying or moving items. To use these, proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the item or items you want to copy or move, then choose Edit > Copy
or Edit > Cut.
2. Then, highlight the location where you want to paste the items. Select Paste
from the Edit menu. The items will be copied or moved to the new location.
3. There is also an option to create an identical mirror of an existing Transport
Stream such that any changes made to the original Transport Stream are
automatically applied to the mirrored Transport Stream. To create a mirrored
Transport Stream highlight the Transport Stream to be copied, chose Edit >
Copy, highlight the output where the mirrored TS is to be applied to and chose
Edit > Paste as Mirror
4. To save your changes, click the Apply All button located at the right side of the
user interface below the page tabs.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A component can be included in more than one Transport Stream as an
instance of an input component. Therefore, any change to it, be it automatic
by the bit rate tracking algorithm or manually applied by the user, is
reflected in all instances.
3-31
Getting Started
3.8.13
How to Customize the Quick Set-up Menu to Quickly Access Required
Features
The quick set-up menu provides a means for the user to customize access to
frequently used parameters:
1. Open the Customize Items dialog by selecting Actions > Customize Items.
2. In the Configuration Items widget of the Customize Items dialog, select the
Quick Setup Items node, and select Actions > Add Folder.
3. Double-click on the newly created node, and rename it to a more descriptive
name.
4. Expand the Encoder tree and scroll down to the item you want to add to your
custom list in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget.
5. By holding down the left mouse button, drag the item over the new folder in the
Configuration Items widget.
6. Add the item to the new folder by releasing the mouse button. The item cannot
be added to the Quick Setup Items node. Any valid drop position is indicated
by the dragging rectangle changing into green.
7. Repeat the process for any additional items you want to add. You can create as
many folders as you wish or you can use any previously created one. The
created folders can be reordered by the drag-and-drop technique used for
adding the item. The added items can also be relocated through drag-and-drop.
To delete a folder or an item, select it then choose Action > Remove Item.
8. When ready, click Save to save the changes. The new items are added to the
Quick Setup menu.
Notes: The list of added items can be exported by selecting Action > Export and
can be imported on another unit by Action > Import
Parameters associated with Transport Stream creation and configuration
cannot be added to the quickset-up items.
3.9
How to Configure Video
Buffer Mode
The buffer modes offered are:
3-32
•
CBR – Constant Bit Rate operation is the recommended mode of operation for
all profiles and bit rates.
•
Low Delay – removes pre-processing functions to reduce the encode delay but
at a lower quality. Bit Rate, GOP Structure and GOP length selections will affect
the delay.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
•
Mega Low Delay – removes frame sync in pre-processing to reduce encode
delay further but at reduced quality. Bit Rate, GOP Structure and GOP length
selections will affect the delay.
•
Super Low Delay (CE-HEVC Card only) – offers the lowest delay possible. Bit
rate selection may affect the delay. In this mode, the only GOP structures
possible are All P and I Frame only. Not available with H.264.
GOP Structure
For best picture quality the following GOP structures are recommended:
•
In SD and HD 1080i H.264 and HEVC operation the GOP structure should be
set to IBBBP.
•
In HD 720p H.264 and HEVC use IBBBBBBP.
To achieve low encoding delay, the Low Delay Buffer mode should be used. In this
case, the recommended GOP structure is still IBBBP. To achieve even smaller
delays, a smaller number of B pictures can be used. The IBP GOP structure is the
best compromise between latency and picture quality and the IP GOP structure
gives the lowest possible delay, but may impact on video quality.
Table 3.7
GOP Length
Video Quality
GOP Length
1080i 29.97 Hz
32
720p 59.94 Hz
60
1080i 25 Hz
24
720p 50 Hz
52
To achieve the lowest possible encoding delay Super Low Delay mode should be
used. In this mode, the GOP Structure options will change from the typical offerings
of: IBBBP etc… to: All P and I Frame only.
Profile
High@Level 4.0 is recommended for 4:2:0 mode and bit rates below 20 Mbps.
High@Level 4.1 will achieve the same performance, but allows higher bit rates up to
62.5 Mbps.
Hi422-10bit@Level 4.1 is recommended for better quality performance and allows
bit rates up to 80 Mbps.
Bit Rates
The maximum bit rate possible varies with the profile and level. However, if two or
more channels are in use, each channel is defined by the profile, or 30 Mbps,
whichever is lower.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-33
Getting Started
CE-HEVC Card Teletext / Ancillary Data Rates
For single channel usage, the maximum data rate that can be supported is 500 kbps
for the combined Teletext and ancillary data, across all channels. This can be
subdivided in any way between the channels so long as the total bit rate does not
exceed 500 kbps.
HEVC HDTV 4:2:0 Recommendation
For HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit, the typical bit rate is
around 12 Mbps.
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit is supported by professional
STBs and allows higher bit rates to be used. Typically this profile is used for bit rates
above 25 Mbps.
HEVC UHDTV 4:2:0 Recommendation
For UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit, the typical bit rate is
around 30 Mbps.
HEVC HDTV and UHDTV 4:2:2 Recommendation
On video with strong color content on 4:2:2 HEVC HDTV, the bit rate should be set
at 9 Mbps or higher for HDTV and 20 Mbps for UHDTV. At a bit rate below 9 Mbps
for HDTV and 20 Mbps for UHDTV, the video quality is likely to be better in the 4:2:0
format. Video content with less color, e.g. film material, the bit rate can also be used
at a lower bit rate in 4:2:2 format.
HEVC HDTV and UHDTV 10-bit Recommendation
The 10 bit format can be used at the same bit rate as in 8 bit even at low bit rates.
There is no cross-over in video quality between 8 bit and 10 bit. Even at low bit
rates, the 10 bit format can remove contour artifacts on flat areas or on fade
changes.
Horizontal Bandwidth
Always set to 100% for Contribution and Distribution applications
Inloop Filter
The default (recommended) setting is Normal. Setting the Inloop Filter to Low can
be used to improve sharpness (e.g., in grass in sports sequences) at the expense of
increased blocking artifacts.
Auto mode is designed to be adaptive and alter the filter strength on a per-picture
basis, and will generally lower the filter strength on sports content to improve the
sharpness in grass, albeit at the expense of increased blocking artefacts on the
crowd and players perhaps, but will revert back to normal or higher filter strength on
other content.
3-34
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.10
How to Configure and Use Video Input Detection
Overview
The CE VCM’s are capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available at
the SDI/HD-SDI input. The VCM can be set up to report whenever it detects a
format change in the input video stream, or it can even modify encoding parameters
to suit.
Note:
Changes to the source that result in a change of configuration will result in a
loss of video for a short time. This outage time varies depending on the
configuration change.
Input Detection Configuration
Once a video component has been added to an output Transport Stream on the
Service Configuration page, input detection options can be set up on the Input
and Encode tabs for the respective video in the Properties widget.
Input Options
Table 3.8
Input Options Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and
Restore Saved Config
Specifies what to do when the input video format has been
changed.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD
720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
Select Configs to be
loaded on input video
detection
No Action
Only available when Auto Detect and Restore Saved
Config is selected.
Config n
SD 567i25,
For each input format a drop down box will display all
available stored configs
SD 480i29.97,
HD 720p50,
HD 720p59.94,
HD 1080i25,
HD 1080i29.97,
3G 1080p50,
3G 1080p59.94
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-35
Getting Started
Encode Options
Table 3.9
Encode Options Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
Profile for SD
Profile Off,
Available profiles depend on card type and
licenses
The profile to set when a change to an SD format has been
detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure.
Profile for HD
Profile Off,
Available profiles depend on card type and
licenses
The profile to set when a change to an HD format has been
detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure
Profile for 3G
Profile Off
The profile to set when a change to an 3G format has been
detected. Available only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure
Available profiles depend on card type and
licenses
Input Detection is Set to Off
If Input Detection is turned off, the input video format is not monitored by the VCM.
No action is taken when there is a change in the format of the incoming native video
through the SDI/HD-SDI input, other than that specified by the output on video loss
parameter.
Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Report
If Input Detection is set to Auto Detect and Report, a video lock alarm is raised if the
video lock is lost on the SDI/HD-SDI input and the output on video loss setting will
apply.
If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is
reported as the detected video standard, otherwise the detected standard will be
displayed.
Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Configure Video Profile Only
If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is
reported as the detected video standard, a video lock alarm is raised and the output
on video loss setting will apply.
If the VCM can lock to the new input, a change in the input format the detected
standard will be displayed and a change in the Video Input Format parameter will be
triggered. Then the Video Profile will be changed as set in the Profile for {SD, HD or
3G} field if there is a change between SD, HD or 3G.
Notes: When the format changes between SD and HD the video bit rate may be
changed if the current bit rate is outside the range supported by the new
profile.
When the format changes between SD and HD any VBI or VANC
configuration will not be maintained.
3-36
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Input Detection is Set to Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config
Pre-requisites
The user must fully configure the unit as required for each expected source and
save each as a separate stored configuration on the unit.
If the user does not intend to support all of the possible source options, then an
associated configuration is not required.
The suggested operational workflow is described by the diagram below.
Identify which input formats need
operational requirements
FULLY Configure unit for required
input format operation (eg SD 25Hz)
with Auto Detect set to OFF
Repeat for all required input formats
Save as a Stored Configuration and
name appropriately.
N
Note that when no stored configs are
available no options will be presented for
selection when trying to configure “Auto
Detect and Configure – use stored config”,
so no point setting it yet!
All required
configs stored
Y
Load stored config n onto unit.
Enable “Auto Detect and Configure –
use stored configs” and select the
required config to be used sof each
required source.
Repeat for each stored config
Save the modified configuration in
the same stored config location.
N
Once all required stored configs are
available “Auto Detect and Configure –
use stored config” can be configured as
required.
It is not absolutely necessary to do this for
every configuration, but would ensure that
the unit would continue to operate in the
same way if any of the stored configs were
manually loaded onto the unit.
All required configs
modified and stored?
Y
Unit is ready to use – any of the
stored configurations can be loaded
at any time and the auto detect and
configure operation will continue to
function.
Figure 3.17 Set-up Procedure for Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-37
Getting Started
Figure 3.18 Input Detection Configuration
Operation
If no source is connected or the input source is not recognized then Not Detected is
reported as the detected video standard, a video lock alarm is raised and the output
on video loss setting will apply.
If the VCM can lock to the new input, a change in the input format the detected
standard will be displayed and the selected configuration file for the detected format
is applied.
Note:
ONLY the video, audio, VANC and VBI configuration parameters from the
stored configuration for the associated options card are applied in this case.
All other cards and base unit parameters remain unaffected.
If the video is embedded in a Transport Stream for which Bit Rate Tracking Mode is
set to Maximize Video, and the Bit Rate Weighting for the video component is set to
other than Fixed or Minimal, then the Video Bit Rate might also get updated. For
more information, see Operation and Control > Bit Rate Tracking. Some examples
are also given below:
•
3-38
Source changed from HD to SD, and Profile for SD input is set to SD MPEG-2
Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit: The new encoding profile is SD MPEG-2
Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit. The bit rate is limited to 15 Mbps (maximum
allowed by profile) if it was higher than 15 Mbps before the change. Otherwise
the bit rate is not affected.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
•
3.11
Source changed from SD to HD, and Profile for HD input is set to HD H.264
Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit: The new encoding profile is HD H.264 Main
Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit. If there is a room to increase the video bit rate to a
value higher than the maximum set for the previously used SD profile, then the
bit rate is increased.
How to Set Up 4K Video Encoding
About UHD Video
The CE-HEVC encoder is capable of encoding a 3840x2160 UHD picture as defined
in SMPTE 2036-1.
The 4K image is delivered into the encoder via either 4-off 3G BNC connectors or
4-off LC optical connectors depending on the input option ordered at the time of
manufacture.
There are 2 recognized formats of how to carry the 4K picture over the 4-off 3G
connections, quadrant or interleaved. The CE-HEVC encoder supports both input
formats.
The CE-HEVC option module supports Level A direct image mapping. Mapping an
uncompressed video image into a serial digital interface operating at a nominal rate
of 3 Gbps.
Quadrant
The 4K picture is broken into for HD quadrants and carried on 4 synchronized SDI
signals as show below.
Figure 3.19 4K Video - HD Quadrants
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-39
Getting Started
Interleaved
The 4K picture is broken up into sub pictures by dividing the original picture using
the two sample interleaved division as shown below. See SMPTE 425-3 and 425-5
for more information.
Figure 3.20 4K Video - Interleaved
Configuration
To set up 4K video encoding for a service on the Service Configuration page,
proceed as follows:
Note:
This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one
must be created before continuing. See section 3.25.3.
1. In the Inputs widget, select Video 1 Main Video Stream.
2. Drag the selected component to a service in the Outputs widget.
3. In the Outputs widget, click on the video component.
Note:
If you click on Audio Stream 1 in the Inputs widget, the corresponding
audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Outputs widget.
4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab.
5. Set the Source to SDI.
6. Set the Video Input Format to one of the following depending on the input
format described above and the video frame rate:
3-40
a
UHD 2160p50 Interleaved.
b
UHD 2160p59.94 Interleaved.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
c
UHD 2160p50 Quad.
d
UHD 2160p59.94 Quad.
Note:
It is possible to set Input Detection to Auto Detect and Configure if using
the Interleaved format.
7. Click on the Encode tab.
8. Set the Profile to UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit.
Note:
For 4:2:2 video encoding a license must be purchased and the Profile set to
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit.
9. Set the Buffer Mode to either CBR, Low Delay or Mega Low Delay depending
on the picture quality and end to end delay required. See section 3.9 for more
details.
10. Set the Video Bitrate to the required value depending on the bandwidth
available and picture quality required. See section 3.9 for more details and
recommendations.
3.12
How to Set up Bit Rate Tracking
Overview
The bit rate tracking feature ensures that the output TS rate is automatically fully
utilized. In case of a bandwidth change the tracked components change their bit rate
accordingly.
The bandwidth can be influenced typically by the bit rate of the Transport Stream but
other factors can also trigger a change.
Weighting is used to proportionally distribute the change in bandwidth among the
components in a multi program transport stream. A weight value between 2 and 20
can be assigned to a video component and so the component becomes a tracked
component whose bit rate is influenced by the Transport Stream. The bit rate of
Fixed weight components do not change and a Minimum setting will result in the
video component bit rate being configured at the lowest bit rate allowed by its video
profile.
As individual components can be included in multiple Transport Streams, a Master
TS has to be specified which will be the controlling factor that determines the bit rate
of the tracked components, which will be reflected in all Transport Streams that a
component is included in.
For example: An IP output transport stream may have significantly more bandwidth
than the Satellite Modulator output and the same TS is to be transmitted over both
interfaces. The Satellite Modulator TS is defined as the Master TS (by default) so
that it is not overrated. The common IP output components will have the same bit
rate but the IP TS will not be fully utilized.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-41
Getting Started
Notes: A Transport Stream becomes overrated when the sum of the component bit
rates exceeds the Transport Stream bit rate. This can occur when the
master Transport Stream increases the bit rate of a component that is
included in another Transport Stream and that other Transport Stream
cannot compensate the increase by the decreasing of the null packets bit
rate. As long as IP and ASI outputs are also configured with bit rate tracking
set to maximize video, they will automatically increase their bit rate in line
with the Satellite Modulator (or Master TS) output in order to avoid being
overrated.
Enabling Bit Rate Tracking
Select the Transport Stream for which bit rate tracking is required.
Notes: If the Transport Stream is not yet created, build it by following the steps in
Manual Configuration via the Web Pages or in Manual Configuration via the
Front Panel.
Bit rate tracking mode is set to Maximize video by default, but this step is
included in the process to ensure success.
In the web browser navigate to Service Configuration and click the TS in the
Outputs panel. Set the Bit rate tracking mode to Maximise video.
Figure 3.21 Enabling Bit Rate Tracking Mode
Alternatively on the front panel navigate to Bit rate Tracking and select the
Transport Stream. Set the Enable Bit rate Tracking to Maximize video.
Set Weight of Component
There is also a weighting parameter for each video component. This provides the
user with control over how the available bit rate should be shared between the video
components in a multi-program Transport Stream.
3-42
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
For example: A TS contains 2 video programs that could both have the same bit
rate, but one is premium so needs double the bit rate allocation of the second. In
this case the weighting for the premium video should be set to 20 and the second
video should be set to 10.
The weighting parameter is accessible in the video component's menu. In the web
browser click the component in the Outputs panel and select the component tab.
Figure 3.22 Setting Bit Rate Weighting of Component
On the front panel navigate to Bit rate Tracking/Components/<component>.
Table 3.10 Bit Rate Weighting Parameters
Weighting
Comment
Fixed
This will result in the user configured video bit rate to be used and the video component bit rate
will not automatically be adjusted.
Minimum
This will result in the video component bit rate being configured at the lowest bit rate allowed
by its video profile.
2 - 20
A numerical entry to determine what proportion of the available TS bit rate should be allocated
to the video component (2 being smallest, 20 being largest).
Note:
3.13
The weight of the video in the Transport Stream is set to 20 by default.
How to Return to Default Settings from the GUI
All settings are retained through a power cycle. If the unit seems to be behaving
strangely or you just want to erase all settings then the default settings can be
restored. To restore the default settings navigate to Support > General > Clear
Device Configuration and select the Reset Configuration button. The
configuration will be reset and the device will reboot.
3.14
How to Set Up Audio Pass-thru
When configuring the audio module to pass audio without encoding, it is necessary
to set the audio encode coding standard to Pass-thru before selecting the audio
input format to the pre-compressed format to be passed.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-43
Getting Started
Note:
If an attempt is made to select a pre-compressed input format while the
module is configured to encode audio, an error message referring to no
more licenses… will be displayed, and the configuration cannot be applied.
When configured for audio Pass-thru, the user is provided with the ability to select
the bit rate or bit depth of the incoming stream. This helps ensure that there is not
an excessive bit rate allocated to the audio component when bit rate tracking is
enabled. However, there is no monitoring to ensure that the input matches the
configured value and, if the configured value is set lower than the actual incoming bit
rate, the output Transport Stream can be over-rated causing problems with the
output.
Table 3.14 Audio Pass-thru Bit Rate Configuration
Audio Input
Configurable Options
LPCM Pass-thru
Bit Depth
16 bit (1960 kbps)
20 bit (2340 kbps))
24 bit (2728 kbps)
Dolby-E Pass-thru
Bit Depth
16 bit (1960 kbps)
20 bit (2340 kbps))
24 bit (2728 kbps)
Dolby Digital Pass-thru
3.15
Bit rate
Range 96 kbps to 640 kbps
How to Set Up Phase Aligned Audio Encoding
About Phase Aligned Encoding
Note:
“Phase Aligned Audio” is patented Ericsson functionality.
Phase Aligned Audio (PAA) is a proprietary feature of Ericsson Television
Contribution Encoders that uses multiple MPEG-1 Layer II encoders operating at
384 kbps to carry each channel pair in the group of phase aligned audio channels.
Phase aligned encoding is supported only if the appropriate number of
CE/SWO/PAA licenses are present (1 for single PAA, and 2 for dual PAA) combined
with additional CE/SWO/M1L2 licenses.
PAA is available on SDI inputs as long as the upstream embedder provides DIDs on
the same video line and in a fixed sequence. It is only guaranteed to be aligned if
the audio channel status blocks are aligned at the input of the encoder.
Table 3.11 License Requirements for PAA Encoding
Number of additional licenses required
3-44
6 channel
8 channel
Dual 6 channel
Dual 8 channel
CE/SWO/M1L2
1
2
4
6
CE/SWO/PAA
1
1
2
2
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
When configured in MPEG-1 Layer II 6 or 8 Channel Aligned Encoding, each pairing
is identified by the use of ISO_639_language descriptors. The languages are
encoded using two language codes per component as follows:
•
•
First instance on Audio Module 1:
-
aaa, aab for first dual mono
-
aac, aad for second dual mono
-
aae, aaf for third dual mono
-
aag, aah for fourth dual mono
Second instance on Audio Module 2:
-
bba, bbb for first dual mono
-
bbc, bbd for second dual mono
-
bbe, bbf for third dual mono
-
bbg, bbh for fourth dual mono
When adding PAA to an output Transport Stream service each audio component
that makes up the PAA must be manually added to the service before configuring
the components for PAA.
Configuration
To set up PAA or dual PAA audio streams for a service on the Service
Configuration page, proceed as follows:
Note:
This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one
must be created before continuing. See section 3.25.3.
1. In the Inputs widget, select Audio 1- Audio 3 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 1
- Audio 4 (for 8 channel aligned) by first selecting Audio 1, holding down the
Shift key, then clicking on Audio 3 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 4 (for 8
channel aligned).
2. Drag the selected components to a service in the Outputs widget.
3. If you are setting up dual PAA encoding, repeat steps 1-2 for Audio 9 - Audio
11 (for 6 channel aligned) or Audio 9 - Audio 12 (for 8 channel aligned).
4. In the Outputs widget, click on the audio component corresponding to Audio 1.
Note:
If you click on Audio Stream 1 in the Inputs widget, the corresponding
audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Outputs widget.
5. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab.
6. Set the Input Format to Uncompressed LPCM.
7. Set the Input Source to Embedded 1 (SDI 1).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-45
Getting Started
8. Click on the Encode tab.
9. Set the Coding Standard to MPEG Layer II.
10. Set the Coding Mode to either 6 Channel Aligned or 8 Channel Aligned.
The unit will automatically set the other input sources and the necessary languages
and dual phase aligned audio output can now be produced.
3.16
How to Set Up Input for 3/2L (5.1 Surround) Encoding
Overview
The unit can only de-embed stereo channel pairs (groups) from the SDI/HD-SDI
input signal. Therefore, to set up 5.1 encoding, three groups have to be deembedded from the SDI/HD-SDI input signal, and routed to the audio encoder.
The embedded groups have to be consecutive. That is, they have to carry the
different channels as detailed in Table 3.12 (SMPTE 320M).
Table 3.12
Embedded Stereo Channel Pairs
Group
Description
Embedded n
Left Front, Right Front
Embedded n+1
Center, LFE
Embedded n+2
Left Rear, Right Rear
Configuration
Note:
This procedure assumes that a service has already been created. If not, one
must be created before continuing.
1. In the Inputs widget, select Audio Stream 1.
2. Drag the selected component to a service in the Outputs widget.
3. In the Outputs widget, click on the audio component.
Note:
If you click on the Audio component in the Outputs widget, the
corresponding audio stream will be highlighted in grey in the Inputs widget.
4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab.
5. Set the Input Format to Uncompressed (LPCM)
6. Set the Input Source to Embedded n (SDI 1), the embedded stream that
contains the left front and right front channels.
7. In the Properties widget, click on the Encode tab.
8. Select the required Coding Standard.
9. Select 3/2L (5.1 Surround) for Coding Mode.
3-46
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Your 5.1 encoding is now set up.
Note:
3.17
The encoder automatically selects and routes the additional embedded
streams required to make up the 5.1 encode. The channel pairs must be
embedded as specified in Table 3.12.
How to Set Up BISS Encryption for Services
When the CE/SWO/BISS license is enabled, the encoder can use the Basic
Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) to scramble services in the outgoing
Transport Stream. Both BISS Mode-1 and BISS Mode-E are supported.
3.17.1
BISS Security
To provide the option of additional security for the BISS encrypted stream, there are
two security levels available: normal BISS encryption (the original implementation)
and Advanced BISS encryption (new, higher security). By default, the Advanced
BISS Encryption security level is enabled.
If the higher security level is required this can be configured from the GUI by
browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit.
Figure 3.23 BISS Security Level Selection
From the front panel these settings are available by navigating to Advanced >
System > Base Unit.
3.17.2
BISS Key Entry
For further security enhancement when BISS has been enabled at a service level it
is possible to individually select which components in that service are scrambled
using the key defined at the service level.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-47
Getting Started
The unit supports the use of 31 keys for BISS, which are stored in a memory table
on the unit, with the location identified as BISS Key 1 to BISS Key 31.
Each required key must be entered into the table by the user, and once entered, the
key value is not visible and there is no means of reading the value.
The key may be entered or edited via the browser when applying BISS to an output
service from the Service Configuration tab.
Figure 3.24 BISS Key Entry
Alternatively the table entries can be edited by browsing to Device Configuration >
Advanced Setup > Base Unit > BISS keys table and selecting the required key
location.
Figure 3.25 BISS Key Session Word
3-48
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
From the front panel it is necessary to enter the key value into the table location by
navigating to Advanced > System > Base Unit > BISS keys table. Use the rotary
knob to scroll to the required BISS Key (1 – 31), select and enter the required key
value.
Note:
3.17.3
This does not enable BISS.
Setting Up BISS from the GUI
To set up BISS encryption for a service from the GUI:
1. If you want to use BISS Mode-E, browse to the Device Configuration >
Advanced Setup tab, open the Encode > Base Unit node in the Advanced
Video Processor Settings widget, and add the injected ID in the BISS injected
ID (14 hexadecimal characters) field.
2. If you have not already done so, create a Transport Stream and a service as
described in Section 3.8.5.
3. Go to the Outputs widget of the Service Configuration page, and select the
service for which you want to apply BISS encryption.
4. In the properties tab select the drop down option against BISS Key, which will
show the list of 31 keys. Select the required key location.
Note:
If None is selected, BISS will not be enabled.
Figure 3.26 BISS Enabling and Key Selection
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-49
Getting Started
5. If a key is selected that has not had its key word set, a pop-up box provides the
user definable fields for this key. Select the required key type (Mode-1 or
Mode-E) and enter the New Key value (12 hexadecimal characters for Mode1 and 16 hexadecimal characters for Mode-E).
Figure 3.27 Setting BISS Key Value
If a key has already been set, an asterisk is displayed in the drop down list next
to the label. If this key is selected the pop-up box will not appear. The user can
modify the key by selecting the Edit Key box.
Figure 3.28 Editing a BISS Key
Note:
Although the BISS technical specification (Tech 3292 rev. 2.) states that
BISS Mode-E shall work with shorter BISS Mode-1 keys, this is not
supported in the unit. The Encrypted Session Word field only accepts 16digit keys.
6. When BISS has been enabled on a service a padlock will appear in the outputs
tree next to the service name and in Voyager units the Clear indicators on the
GUI banner and front panel will change to Scrambled.
7. It is possible to select which of the components of the service shall be
scrambled, when a BISS key has been selected. The choice of components can
be done at the service level or independently for each component. At the service
level, in the Service Configuration > Outputs > Service Properties widget,
open the Service > Scrambling accordion and select the components to be
scrambled.
3-50
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.29 Selection of Components to be Scrambled Using BISS
8. Selecting an individual component to be scrambled using BISS is performed on
the Component tab of the Properties of that output component.
Figure 3.30 Scrambling Selection of an Individual Component
3.17.4
Setting Up BISS from the Front Panel
To set up BISS encryption service from the front panel:
Note:
When a value needs to be changed using the front panel, the existing value
needs to be deleted using the Del key, before a new value can be entered
using the keypad.
1. If you want to use BISS Mode-E navigate to Advanced>System>Base Unit on
the front panel and set the BISS injected ID (14 hexadecimal characters)
using the keypad.
2. Navigate to the required output service (Output > Transport Stream ID >
Service List > Service n and scroll down to BISS Key. Enter the required key
location (1 to 31).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-51
Getting Started
Note:
Selecting 0 configures the key to None and BISS will not be enabled.
3. If a key is selected that has not had its key word set, a message is displayed
telling the user that a key needs to be set. In this case navigate back to
Advanced > System/Base Unit > BISS Keys Table and select the required
key. Select the required key type (Mode-1 or Mode-E) and enter the New Key
value (12 bits for Mode-1 and 16 bits for Mode-E). Go back to the Service
Menu and enable BISS by selecting the required key.
4. When BISS has been enabled on a service the Clear indicators on the GUI
banner and front panel will change to Scrambled.
Both an xml and stored configuration will contain an entry for a BISS key, if a key
had been set for the service on the unit that the configuration was saved from. To
comply with the specification that requires the value of keys that are not available on
external interfaces and cannot be retrieved, this uses the name of the table location
(BISS Key n).
3.17.5
BISS and Stored Configurations
Loading an xml or stored configuration with BISS enabled will successfully configure
the unit, resulting in a Transport Stream output and service configured, with BISS
enabled using the same BISS Key n setting as for the original configuration. The
contents of the BISS key table are NOT transferred, so unless the same key has
already been entered the key will either be not set or a previously entered different
key might be applied. To ensure the correct key is set the user can edit the key
stored in the table as described above.
Loading an xml that contains a BISS key entry onto a unit that has never had BISS
enabled will not enter any keys. ******NOTSET***** will still be displayed on the user
interface and the output WILL NOT be encrypted. A key needs to be manually
entered.
Once a BISS key has been set for a service, switching BISS off does not affect the
storage of the key. The key is maintained and used when BISS is re-enabled. If a
different key is required it needs to be manually updated, or a different key from the
table selected. The entered keys are maintained over a power cycle.
Note:
3-52
Deleting the unit configuration does not delete the contents of the BISS key
table.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.18
How to Splice and Insert Digital Programme Insertion (DPI)
Splicing is used to insert Digital Programme (DPI), e.g. advertisements, into an
MPEG-2 Transport Stream. DPI is available when the DPI license is purchased.
One licence is required for each video component.
3.18.1
Splice Point Operation
The VCM is capable of storing up to 10 splice events, which can be inserted up to
13 hours before the event is due, but no less than 4 seconds to the splice point. If
splicing is disabled all stored pending splice events will be deleted.
Splice point insertion can be controlled from SCTE104 messages, either in VANC or
from the IP input, or from GPI triggers (see Section 3.19 for GPI details)
Table 3.13
Example Multiple Operation SCTE104 Message Structure
Data
Comment
0xFF, 0xFF
reserved
0x00, 0x27
message size = 39 bytes
0x00
SCTE-104 protocol version
0xAA
AS index
0xBB
message number
0x01, 0x01
DPI PID index (slot 1, channel 1)1
0x00
SCTE-35 protocol version
0x00
timestamp type = zero (no timestamp)
0x02
number operations...(2)
0x01, 0x01
op ID = splice request data
0x00, 0x0E
data length = 14 bytes
0x01
splice insert type - splice start normal
0x12, 0x34, 0x56, 0x78
splice event ID
0x66, 0x99
unique program ID
0x0F, 0xA0
pre-roll time = 4000ms
0x00, 0x64
break duration = 10s
0x01
avail num
0x01
avails expected
0x01
auto return flag
0x01, 0x0A
op ID = insert avail descriptor request data
0x00, 0x05
data length = 5 bytes
0x01
number of avails = 1
0xA1, 0xB2, 0xC3, 0xD4
avail ID = 0xA1B2C3D4
1
The DPI_PID_index value contained within the SCTE-104 message is not a PID. It provides a way of addressing a
particular VCM within a multi-module unit to ensure that the SCTE104 messages are received by the specific
encoder. It is a 2 byte value.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-53
Getting Started
Table 3.14 DPI PID Index Value
Bit
Description
15..8
The option card slot number (1 to 6)
7..0
The encoder channel on the option card
(Note: All option cards referenced in this manual support only 1 channel of video. If
the channel is set to 0 or 1 the encoder will have splice points inserted.
If the option card slot number or the encoder channel does not exist the Video
Processor will return a splice failure message.
It is not possible to insert splice points into the video which are closer than 1 second
apart. Any messages received with a splice time within 1 second of another splice
point and with the same splice_event_id will be treated as a duplicate of the initial
splice request and deleted.
Any messages received with a splice time within 1 second of another splice point
and with a different splice_event_id will be aligned to the initial splice request. This
will result in 2 SCTE35 messages being generated containing the same PTS value
but different splice_event_ids and 1 splice point inserted into the video, unless the
auto return is set to 1 and the duration is populated, in which case the video PID will
be conditioned for two splice points.
3.18.2
SCTE104 Over IP
SCTE 104 messages can also be sent to the unit over the control port. The DPI TCP
Port on the unit is 5167 by default. This parameter can be accessed on the GUI
through Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit.
3.18.3
How to Configure Splicing
1. If you have not already done so, create a Transport Stream and a service as
described in Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
2. Go to the Inputs widget of the Service Configuration page and select the
Video SCTE 35 Stream from the VCM inputs tree and drag it into the required
output service.
3. Select the required source from the Splicing Control drop down box in the
Properties widget (see Section 3.19 for additional requirements for GPI
triggered splicing).
3-54
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Table 3.15 Splicing Control Options
Option
Description
Off
No splice operation
On VANC message only
SCTE104 messages in VANC will be passed through as SCTE35 messages
that can then be added as a component in the output transport stream.
No splice points will be inserted in the video bitstream.
3.19
On VANC
SCTE104 messages in VANC will trigger the insertion of splice points
On IP
SCTE104 messages in IP will trigger the insertion of splice points
On GPI
Splice point insertion will be triggered by GPI card inputs (see section 3.19)
How to Configure GPI Triggered Splicing
The GPI option card can be configured for triggered splicing by sending SCTE-104
messages to the encoders of the VCM cards fitted in the unit.
Note:
To enable splicing, splice point insertion license (CE/SWO/DPI) is required.
The triggers are realized by closing and opening the general purpose input pins
(GPI pins 1-16) with a common GND; for the pin connections see Chapter 2,
Installing the Equipment). The configuration process has two parts:
•
Setting up the GPI Card
•
Setting up the VCMs
The connections between the configured pins of the GPI card and the destination
encoders are represented by virtual SCTE-104 channels. Each GPI card has 16
channels, labeled from ChannelA to ChannelP.
3.19.1
How to Set Up a GPI Card
To configure General Purpose Interface (GPI) input pins for splicing, proceed as
follows.
1. Select the Advanced Setup tab on the Device Configuration page on the GUI.
2. Expand Encoder > Slots > Slot n Data & GPI Card > GPI Input Pin n Setup
folders in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget.
3. Set up the GPI input pins. For a detailed parameter list, see GPI Triggered
Splicing in Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
4. Configure splicing options by expanding the appropriate GPI Input Pin n Setup
folder and selecting Splicing Setup. For a detailed parameter list, see GPI
Triggered Splicing in Chapter 5, Web GUI Control.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A Splicing Setup folder is shown only if the GPI input pin mode has already
been set up in the respective GPI Input Pin n Setup folder.
3-55
Getting Started
3.19.2
How to Set Up a VCM to Use GPI Inputs
To set up a Video Compression Module (VCM) for using GPI inputs, proceed as
follows:
1. From the web browser navigate to Device Configuration page and select the
Advanced Setup tab.
2. Expand the Encoder > Slots folders and the folder for the slot containing the
appropriate encoder card.
3. Select Video > Video 1 > Video > Main Video > Video Encoder > Splicing.
4. Set Splicing Control to On GPI. An SCTE-104 Input folder appears in the
settings tree and provides a list displaying all usable SCTE-104 channels. A
channel is usable if there is at least one GPI pin configured on the source end of
the channel (as described above).
5. Choose an input channel for the VCM encoder core. The configuration of the
VCM is now complete and the encoder waits for SCTE-104 messages on the
selected channel.
Combinations and Limitations
With the SCTE-104 channels a many-to-many relationship can be set up between
the GPI pins and the encoder cores of VCMs, as follows.
•
More pins of the same GPI card can be configured to send messages to the
same set of encoder cores. This is achieved with selecting the same channel for
them on the GPI Input Pin Setup panel.
•
More encoder cores (of the same VCM or different VCMs) can be configured to
get messages from the same set of pins of a GPI card. This is achieved by
selecting the same channel for them on the SCTE-104 Input > Encoder folder.
•
Different GPI cards fitted in the same unit can not send messages to the same
encoder core, because one encoder core can only use one channel for
SCTE-104 input.
3.20
How to Use the Simplified View (Option)
3.20.1
Using the Simplified View
An optional ‘Simplified View’ is available for AVP 2000 and AVP 3000 units, aimed
at providing a single page, quick and easy-to-use, user interface for the day-to-day
operation of units. This extends the original simple Voyager Dashboard to include
support for ASI and IP outputs, and is not dependent on a Satellite Modulator card
being fitted.
3-56
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
It provides access to the primary settings that an operator may need access to in
order to make minor adjustments to frequently used parameters, and to easily
perform a line-up procedure ready for a broadcast. It is NOT a replacement for the
existing advanced user interface and does NOT support full configuration of the unit.
By default following an upgrade or clearing of device configuration, the Advanced
View is displayed. The user can easily switch between views, and has the facility to
select which view should be displayed by default when a browser session is opened.
This selection is maintained through a unit reboot.
3.20.1.1
Assumed Workflow
The workflow is primarily based on the use of existing configurations which are
already loaded onto the unit. These configurations are created and stored on the
unit using the advanced view. If the configurations have been created using an
earlier version of software they must be upgraded using the XML upgrade utility to
ensure compatibility with the software version in use.
3.20.1.2
What to Expect
The Simplified View requires at least one output (Satellite Modulator, IP or ASI) to
be configured with a Transport Stream containing one service, with at least a video
component, before parameters will be displayed.
Only outputs that are configured will be displayed on the Simplified View, and only
the first TS and first service with the components that have already been included
will be available. There is no way of adding new TS, services or components to the
outputs using the Simplified View.
Following a software upgrade no output is configured. In this case when opening a
browser session to the unit and selecting the link to Simplified View, a box is
displayed informing you that there is no output service configured.
This box provides a link to access and load a stored configuration (which, if created
and stored in an earlier version of software, must be converted to match the release
version before being used) or a link to go to the Advanced Configuration pages to
manually configure the output as required.
Figure 3.31 Simplified View - Pop-Up Display When There Is No Output Configured
When at least one output is configured, the Simplified View is displayed.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-57
Getting Started
Figure 3.32 Simplified View Web Page – Satellite Modulator, IP and ASI Outputs
Configured (IP and ASI Mirrored)
3.20.1.3
Multiple Outputs
Multiple outputs are supported in the Simplified view, but with some limitations.
When multiple outputs are configured (either mirrored or independent), the
Transport/Service and Properties panels are only those included in the main output,
which is defined in the following priority order:
I. SatMod (if available and configured),
II. IP (if no SatMod output and IP is configured)
III. ASI (if configured and no other output is configured).
It is not possible to select which output these panels relate to. When components
are common across the outputs changes will affect the common outputs, but this will
not necessarily be indicated on the Simplified View.
Note:
3-58
The immediate action header banner at the top of the page shows the
configured outputs in this order, so as a general rule of thumb is that the
Transport/Service and Properties panels relate to the first output in the
header banner.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Main Output is 1st in header banner
Transport Stream Properties relate to Main output
Figure 3.33 Simplified View - Properties Relate to Main Output
If mirrored outputs are required, they should be mirrored from the main output. This
gives combinations supported in the Simplified View as follows:
Table 3.16 Simplified View Outputs
SatMod Output
IP Output
ASI Output
MAIN
MAIN
Mirror of SatMod
MAIN
MAIN
Mirror of SatMod
Mirror of SatMod
Mirror of SatMod
MAIN
MAIN
Independent
MAIN
MAIN
Independent
Independent
Independent
MAIN
MAIN
Mirror of IP
MAIN
Independent
MAIN
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-59
Getting Started
When the Simplified View is to be used, outputs should either be all mirrored from
the main output, or should all be independent (but there are limitations associated
with this configuration). If other combinations are required then the advanced view
should be used.
When multiple outputs are configured as mirrored outputs, common TS parameters
that are defined by the main output are greyed out and read only for the mirrored
outputs.
3.20.1.4
Simplified View Summary
3.20.1.4.1
Immediate Action Banner - Output Configuration
The parameters, shown in the header banner, are immediately actioned on the unit,
when adjusted, without the need for an additional Apply. The parameters in this
banner are protected by the padlock to help prevent accidental changes to the
output configuration. This banner will show which outputs have been configured.
Toggle ON / OFF
Toggle between power levels
Increase / Decrease Power Enter Value or use arrows
Toggle Encryption ON / OFF
Lock / Unlock Banner
Greyed out = read only
(mirrored output)
Figure 3.34 Simplified View - Immediate Action Banner, All Outputs Configured:
SatMod (Main), IP and ASI Mirrored
Note:
3.20.1.4.2
When the outputs are mirrored, the encryption buttons for the mirrored
outputs will be greyed out and read only. Toggling the main output
encryption on/off will also apply encryption to the mirrored outputs and the
button state updates to reflect this.
Configurable Parameters Requiring Apply Button
The remaining configurable parameters available on the Simplified View operate in
the same way as for the Advanced View, in that multiple changes can be made
which are not loaded onto the unit until the Apply button is pressed.
As with the Advanced View, changes that have not been applied are highlighted,
and the Apply and Discard buttons become active.
3-60
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Changes in colour to highlight that changes have been made but not applied
Figure 3.35 Simplified View - Configuration Changes Requiring Apply Button
3.20.1.4.2.1
Output Properties Configuration
Each type of output has a different set of parameters that can be configured. When
the output is configured a new accordion panel is displayed containing these
parameters. Parameters that have dependencies are described below.
IP Output Parameters
•
Source Address - By default this does not need to be configured. The unit will
automatically determine the appropriate source address for the transport stream.
It is possible to force the source address to a user defined value only when the
unit is configured in ‘Transparent’ mode – in this case ensure that the multicast
address has been configured first.
•
Row and Column - These parameters are related to FEC on the IP output,
which needs to be licensed in order to be configured. The encapsulation mode
of the IP output needs to be set to enable FEC for these fields to become active.
The encapsulation mode must be set using the Advanced View.
•
IP TS Rate - This is the transport stream bitrate of the IP output. It does not
include overheads needed for IP encapsulation. If this field cannot be edited the
output is a mirror and the bit rate is determined by the main output.
ASI Output Parameters
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
As the only configurable parameter for an ASI output is the bit rate, this
shares the IP properties panel if both are configured.
3-61
Getting Started
•
3.20.1.4.3
ASI TS Rate - This is the transport stream bit rate for the ASI output. If this field
cannot be edited the ASI output is a mirror and the bit rate is determined by the
main output.
Service Configuration
The Simplified View provides the ability to modify the configuration of the Main
output Transport Stream. Service Information, PID values, Carrier ID information (for
Satellite Modulator Output), encryption mode and key (RAS or BISS if licensed for a
Satellite Modulator output or BISS if licensed for ASI or IP outputs) are configurable,
as well as the ability to simply add or remove available audio and ANC components
that have been included in the service when initially configured.
Note:
Only a single BISS key is supported from the Simplified View, so the same
key will be applied when BISS is enabled on multiple outputs. If different
keys are required then the Advanced View must be used.
Remove Component
Display more Video and Audio configurable properties
Add Component
Edit PID
Figure 3.36 Simplified View - Modifying Component Configuration
Note:
3-62
The number of audio components available is determined by the number of
audio components included in the service (up to a maximum of 8). If more
are required, the user should go to the advanced view and add the required
audio components.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.37 Simplified View - Configuring Carrier ID and Encryption Key
3.20.1.4.4
Alarm Status Information
The color of the alarm button indicates the highest level alarm. Selecting the button
displays a pop-up listing the current active alarms.
Figure 3.38 Simplified View - Alarm List
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-63
Getting Started
3.20.1.4.5
Additional Support Tools
The drop-down list accessed from the tools icon provides the user with access to
some additional useful information or tools. The licenses available on the unit can be
viewed, the stored configurations list (to either load or save a configuration) can be
accessed, the option to select the default view when a browser session is opened
and the ability to reset the unit are provided.
Figure 3.39 Simplified View - Tools
3.20.1.4.6
Switching Between the Simplified View and the Advanced View
Links are provided on both the Simplified View and the Advanced View to allow the
user to switch between the pages to access parameters that are not supported by
the Simplified View.
3-64
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Figure 3.40 Switching between Simplified View and Advanced Configuration GUI
3.20.1.5
Simplified View Limitations
The following is a list of limitations which should be observed when using the
Simplified View.
1. The Advanced View and Simplified View should not be open at the same time.
This can result in discrepancies in reported values. The link should be used to
switch between views when necessary.
2. At least one output MUST be configured with a Transport Stream containing a
service with video and audio components. This means that:
-
The Transport Stream must be set online.
-
Only a single service with one video and up to eight audio components and
an ANC component is supported on the Simplified View. Additional services
in the TS will not be presented on the Simplified View.
-
The first service must be configured to use the first VCM fitted in a multiple
VCM chassis.
-
All required components must be initially added to the service using the
Advanced pages.
-
Additional services and components need to be controlled using the
Advanced View.
-
Any VBI requirements must be configured using the Advanced View.
3. Only one Transport Stream (the first Transport Stream of the main output) is
supported in the Simplified View. Additional Transport Streams may be
configured, but need to be accessed using the Advanced View.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-65
Getting Started
4. Only the first service in a Transport Stream is available in the Simplified View.
Additional services may be configured, but need to be accessed using the
Advanced View.
5. The input monitor shows the status of the components in the first service of the
main output.
6. When multiple outputs are available and configured, the output for which the
Simplified View supports configuration of TS parameters is determined in the
following order:
-
Satmod – if fitted and configured.
-
IP – if fitted and configured.
-
ASI – if configured.
This cannot be modified.
7. When outputs are mirrored the common configurable parameters of the mirrored
output will be read only (so bit rate and encryption can only be set for the main
output). There is the ability to set each output ON or OFF.
8. When the outputs are independent and have been configured with different
BISS keys the Advanced View must be used to enable/disable encryption,
otherwise the key will be replaced with BISS key 1.
9. A Remux service must NOT be the first service in the output TS as:
-
The Simplified View will reject a Remux service as a non-supported
configuration. Ensure that the first service contains components encoded in
the box.
-
A Remux service can be the second service, but there is no visibility or
access to this service from the Simplified View.
10. A Pass-thru transport stream is not recognised as a supported output
configuration for the Simplified View. The advanced view needs to be used for
this configuration.
11. Current alarm status is reported on the Simplified View but alarm masking needs
to be performed using the Advanced View.
12. A browser refresh may be needed to update the display to show some changes
made using other interfaces (e.g. via front panel). This applies to both Simplified
View and the Advanced View.
13. Some unlicensed features are displayed but an attempt to configure the feature
will result in an error message pop-up stating not enough licenses and the
configuration will be rejected.
14. Limited Video Profiles. The Simplified View only supports configuring MPEG-2
Main profile (main level for SD or high level for HD) and H.264 High (level 3.1 for
SD or level 4.1 for HD) profiles. This means:
-
3-66
It is not possible to configure SD H264 Main Level 3.0, SD H264 High Level
3.0 or HD H264 Main level 4.0, which are available on the Advanced View.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.21
How to Control Temperature/Fan Speed
Temperatures are reported to the user in degrees Celsius (° C) and degrees
Fahrenheit (° F).
Host Card Monitoring
The die temperature of the main components on the Host card are monitored, and
reported to an accuracy of ±2 °C.
A host card temperature alarm threshold can be set that, if exceeded, causes a
System Over Temperature Alarm to be generated.
Note:
It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted.
Option Card Monitoring
Option cards monitor the die temperature of their main components, and report
these temperatures to an accuracy of ±2 °C. If an option card reports die
temperatures, it allows an alarm threshold to be defined for each temperature, which
if exceeded causes an alarm to be generated.
Note:
It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted.
VCMs
The controlling processor monitors the core temperatures of the main components
and passes this information back to the host card via the back plane for monitoring.
Temperature thresholds can be set to cause a warning or an alarm. The warning
level is configurable by the user, whereas the alarm level is hard coded.
Note:
It is recommended that the default threshold settings are not adjusted.
Fans
The fans fitted to the chassis are speed controllable, providing a limited range of
operating conditions.
To control temperature/fan speed:
1. Go to the Device Control > Advanced Setup > Base Unit page.
2. Using the slide bar control, set to Lowest Noise, Quiet, Cool or Best Cooling,
as required.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-67
Getting Started
Figure 3.41 Fan Control
The internal temperature of the unit will vary according to the fan speed, but the unit
will attempt to maintain the unit within safe operating limits. If it cannot do this and
the temperature increases above the set alarm thresholds, over temperature
warnings or alarms will be raised and appropriate action is needed.
3.22
How to Get and Apply Additional Licenses
The unit comes with the option cards and licenses, which were ordered, already
installed.
For AVP 2000 and AVP 3000 units, general licenses are stored on the host, while
video and audio related licenses are stored on the VCM option cards and modulator
related licenses are stored on the Satellite Modulator Card. For AVP1000 only
general licenses are stored on the host.
3.22.1
Verifying Which Licenses Are Present in the Unit
Access to the web pages is necessary to verify the licenses that are enabled on the
unit.
Navigate to Support > Licenses. This page displays a tab for each card that
contains licenses. Each tab contains the marketing code, number of each license
and a description of the feature enabled by the license.
Note:
3-68
Short term licenses are not supported.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
The number of licenses can be extended and new licenses ordered after the unit
has been shipped.
3.22.2
Ordering Additional Licenses
When ordering additional licenses for existing units the following information is
needed when contacting Customer Services:
•
A Purchase Order to cover the new licenses.
•
Details of the license types, the number of each license required and which slot
the card to be licensed is fitted in if applicable.
•
Download the manifest file from the Support > Licenses page of the GUI and
provide the downloaded file with the order.
Note:
Earlier versions of software may not support this function. In this case go on
to the next step.
Figure 3.42 Downloading the License Manifest file for License Generation
•
If the version of software running on the unit does not support this feature, then
the minimum information required is the Serial Number and ChipID of the unit.
To retrieve this information, go to Support > Versions, and in the Modules
widget of the General tab click on the Host tab.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-69
Getting Started
Figure 3.43 Finding the Host Card Chip ID and Serial Number for License
Generation
•
If the required license is for an option card the unique Chip ID of the option card
is required. To retrieve the Chip ID, go to Support > Versions, and in the
Modules widget of the General tab click on the tab for the slot the option card is
fitted in.
•
The corresponding slot number MUST also be provided.
Figure 3.44 Finding the Option Card Chip ID for License Generation
Based on the above information, a license key file will be generated and provided to
the customer.
3.22.3
Entering License Keys
The keys are saved in a License Key file ready to be entered onto the unit via the
web page.
3-70
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
1. Open Support > Licenses. Click the Browse button to locate the license key
file.
2. Click on the Upload button.
3. If licenses are required for both the base chassis and VCM option card then
multiple files will be provided (one for the base chassis and one for each slot
containing a card being licensed). All files need to be loaded onto the specific
unit.
4. Reboot the unit once all files have been loaded for the changes to take effect.
Note:
3.23
The Front Panel CANNOT be used to upload license keys.
Alarm Monitoring
Alarms are reported on the GUI and Front Panel LED indication. Alarm trap
handling is also supported through SNMP.
The severity of an alarm can be changed or the alarm can be masked if required.
This can be performed on active alarms on the GUI dashboard or on any alarms by
browsing to the Support > Device Management page.
Figure 3.45 Alarm Monitoring
3.24
Simple Network Management Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that
facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices. It is
part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite
and is defined in a set of standards (RFC 1065 - RFC 1067, RFC 1155 - RFC 1157,
RFC 1213, RFC 1441 - RFC 1452, RFC 1901 - RFC 1910, RFC 2576, RFC 3411 RFC 3418) published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-71
Getting Started
3.24.1
Supported Protocols
SNMP versions 1 and 2c are supported, primarily for alarm trap handling. The
General Ericsson Television MIB is also supported.
Note:
3.24.2
The unit does not support control via SNMP, all remote control is via HTTP.
Operation
SNMP traps are a way of reporting status information to a control system. The unit’s
SNMP functionality can be enabled or disabled, with up to five IP addresses
assigned for any SNMP Trap message to be sent. The default is 000.000.000.000,
which causes the SNMP traps to be sent to the last SNMP master. The SNMP
community name can also be set.
The user can control which SNMP traps are generated. The options are:
•
All traps – traps sent for all failure alarms, warnings and start messages.
•
Start Msgs, warning – critical – traps sent for start messages or alarms raised
of severity warning to critical.
•
Start Msgs, minor – critical – traps sent for start messages or alarms raised of
severity minor to critical.
•
Start Msgs, major – critical – traps sent for start messages or alarms raised of
severity major to critical.
•
Start Msgs, critical – traps sent for start messages or critical alarms.
•
Start Msgs only – traps sent for start messages only.
Table 3.17 SNMP Interface Parameters
3-72
Parameter
Description
SNMP Read Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default = public
SNMP Location
Textual description of the location of the unit
SNMP Contact
Name of the person responsible for this unit
SNMP Trap Community
The SNMP community name for read access. default = private
SNMP Trap Destination
The destination IP address for SNMP trap messages. Up to five destinations
can be defined, but by default none are assigned
SNMP Trap Alarm Level
Defines what events trigger the generation of an SNMP trap message. The
options are: Start Messages Only, i.e. only system start up events. Fail and
Start Messages only i.e. start-up events and critical alarms. All traps i.e.
start-up events and all alarms and warnings.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
3.25
How to Configure the AVP Using the Front Panel
The unit is fully configurable via the front panel. The most important parameters are
available under the dedicated menu items, while the full functionality of an option
card can be found under the Advanced menu. For the details of the interaction with
the front panel and the menu system, see Front Panel Control.
The configuration consists setting the general parameters of the base unit and the
option cards. Then, the output streams can be configured through the Output menu.
3.25.1
How to Configure Video Parameters
To configure the video parameters, select the AVP Encoder n menu and set the
parameters as listed in Figure 3.8.
Table 3.18 Video Parameter Settings
Parameter
Setting
Comment
Video Input Locked
True, False.
Read only parameter.
Video Bit rate
0.5 – 80 Mbps.
Range and limits depends on video profile.
Video Profile
Off
The availability of a profile depends on the option
card and the presence of a certain license.
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit.
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
HD J2K Profile Level 2 4:2:2 10 bit
HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0 8 bit
HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 8 bit
HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 10 bit
Buffer Mode
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Compatibility, Ultra
Low Delay, Stripe Refresh, Stripe Refresh (+ Audio
Encode)
Available options depend upon the option card
and licenses.
Source
Analogue, SDI, Color Bars, Black, Moving Object, Slate.
Configures the input source, which can be an
external video signal through the SDI connector or
the analogue CVBS connector on the back of the
VCM, or an internally generated test pattern.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-73
Getting Started
3.25.2
How to Configure Audio Parameters
Audio Input Parameters
To configure the audio input parameters, select the AVP Encoder /Audio
Module/Audio n /Input menu and set the parameters as listed in
Table 3.19.
Table 3.19 Audio Input Settings
Parameter
Settings
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), Dolby Digital, Dolby E,
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1-8, Input 1-4. Analogue 1-2.
Output on Audio Loss
Silence, No PID
Audio Encode Parameters
To configure the audio encode parameters, select the AVP Encoder /Audio
Module/Audio n /Encode menu and set the parameters as listed in
Table 3.20.
Table 3.20 Audio Encode Settings
Parameter
Settings
Coding Standard
MPEG Layer II, Dolby Digital, AAC, Pass-thru (Options depend on licenses)
Bitrate
Range depends upon selected coding standard
Coding Mode
Available options depend on selected coding standard.
The parameters of the encoding can be configured in a sub menu whose name
depends on the Coding Standard chosen. Set up the encoding as needed.
Note:
3.25.3
The number of audios available for configuration will depend upon the
number of licenses.
How to Set Up a Transport Stream
A Transport Stream is made up from one or more services. A service is made up
from one or more components. To build a Transport Stream to be sent to the output,
proceed as follows:
1. Select the Output menu.
2. Select the output to which the Transport Stream is to be sent.
3. Select Transport Stream ID: 1 if available, otherwise Select Add Transport
Stream.
4. Check that the parameter settings are correct.
3-74
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
Table 3.21 Transport Stream Parameters
Parameter
Description
Service List
Select to manage services in the Transport Stream. (Next step.)
Current State
Read Only – displays current output state (online, offline)
Change State
Online, Offline. Controls the actual presence of the Transport Stream in the output.
Transport Stream Bit rate
0.04 – 200 Mbps.
Reserved Bit rate
The amount of bit rate in the Transport Stream that cannot be allocated to any of the transmitted
components.
Bit rate Tracking Mode
Off, Maximize Video.
Auto Enable
false, true. Specifies whether or not to automatically re-enable the Transport Stream (set its Setmode
state to Online) when the condition set in the Auto Disable field is not met.
Auto Disable
Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Audio or Video lost, Any UPSTREAM critical alarm, Any critical alarm.
Specifies the condition on which the Transport Stream has to be disabled. Audio lost and video lost
means that the audio or video lock of any of the components in the Transport Stream is lost,
UPSTREAM critical alarm is an alarm that is triggered by any of the components that contribute to
producing the elementary streams carried by the Transport Stream.
Syntax
DVB, ATSC
Program Specific Information
Transport Stream ID
A new ID can be assigned to the Transport Stream.
PAT-PMT
On, Off
PAT-PMT Parameters
PMT Repetition Period
100 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms. Specifies how
often (in ms) the PMT shall be transmitted.
Dolby Digital Descriptor
DVB, ATSC, DVB & ATSC
CAT
On, Off
TSDT
On, Off
TDT
On, Off
EIT
On, Off
Service Information
Original Network ID
NIT
NIT Parameters
SDT
On, Off
Network Name
Set Network Name
Network ID
Set network ID.
Generate LCN
Off, IEC 62216, NorDig v1, DTG Default
Send extended NIT
(SIRG)
On, Off. If PSI/SI Level is set to On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT) make
sure the Send extended NIT (SIRG) is On so that the Carrier ID is
sent.
Insert NIT into PAT
True, False
On, Off
5. For an IP Transport Stream set up the IP related parameters as shown in
Table 3.22.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-75
Getting Started
Table 3.22 IP Related Parameters
Parameter
Description
TS Packets per IP Packet
Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate in one IP packet.
IP Encapsulation
Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP and RTP is self explanatory and
means that the Transport Stream is first encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an IP header is
added. If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns and Row is selected one (Column) or two (Column
and Row) RTP streams are output in addition to the RTP streams that carry the Transport Stream.
IP Configuration/Destination 1
Destination IP Address
The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport
Stream.
Destination UDP Port
The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport
Stream.
Source IP Address
The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport
Stream.
Source MAC Address
Read only parameter, not yet supported.
Source UDP Port
The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP packets that carry the Transport
Stream
6. Select the Service List menu in order to add one or more services to the
Transport Stream.
7. Select Add Service. A new service by the name Service Name appears in the
list.
8. Select Service Name.
9. Check that the parameter settings are correct.
Table 3.23 Component and Service Parameters
Parameter
Description
Component List
Select to manage components in the service. (Next step.)
Service ID
Set Service ID
PMT PID
A new PMT PID can be assigned to the service.
PCR PID
The PID to be used for the PCR.
NOTE: If PCR on separate PID is enabled, this value must match the PID given to the PCR
component in the output service.
SDT Parameters
Service Provider
Set service provider name.
Service Name
Set service name. After setting the service name the service will be listed
accordingly.
Service ID
A new ID can be assigned to the service.
Service Type
Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast, Off, BISS
Mode-1, BISS Mode-E.
NIT Service Parameters
LCN
0 - 1023
BISS KEY
0 – 31 Selects the location in the BISS key table to use for BISS scrambling
3-76
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Getting Started
10. Select the Component List menu in order to add one or more components to
the service.
11. Select Add Component. A new component identified by its PID appears in the
list.
12. Select the component just added (it will display none on PIDnn until a valid
component is selected.
13. Select the required Elementary Stream from the appropriate VCM and assign
an input to be handled as the component.
14. Adjust PID or Bit rate weighting if necessary.
15. Move up to the Component List menu and repeat steps 9-12 to add more
components to the service.
16. Move up to the Service List menu and repeat steps 5-13 to add more services
to the Transport Stream.
17. After the Transport Stream has been created, move up to the Transport Stream
ID: 1 menu. Select the Change State option and set it to Online.
Note:
3.25.4
As the output has not been enabled in the Line-up menu, at this point the
unit will not produce an output through the RF connectors.
How to Add More Transport Streams
To add more Transport Streams to other outputs, follow the procedure detailed in
Section 3.25.3. by first selecting the Outputs menu, then repeating the Transport
Stream creation process. Alternatively, an existing Transport Stream can be copied
to another (or in case of IP output to the same) output by proceeding as follows:
1. Select Outputs.
2. Navigate to the output to which a Transport Stream is to be added.
3. Select Add Existing Transport Stream.
4. Select the Transport Stream you want to copy.
5. The selected Transport Stream will be copied to the output.
6. Select the newly copied Transport Stream.
7. Select Change State and set it to Online.
3.25.5
How to Remove a Component from a Service
To remove Components from a Service, proceed as follows:
1. Select the Output menu.
2. Select the Output containing the Transport Stream.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
3-77
Getting Started
3. Select the Transport Stream.
4. Select Service List.
a
Select the required Service (not Add Service).
5. Select Component List.
b
Scroll to the Component to be removed.
c
Press the DEL button on the keypad and confirm by pressing select (as
instructed on the display).
Note:
3-78
Adding or removing services or components from a TS will result in a short
interruption to the output while the SI tables are updated to reflect the
change.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4
Front Panel Control
Chapter 4
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.2
4.2.3.3
4.2.3.4
4.2.3.5
4.2.3.6
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.3
4.3.1
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.4.1.3
4.4.1.4
4.4.1.5
4.4.1.6
4.4.1.7
4.4.1.8
4.4.1.9
4.4.2
4.4.2.1
4.4.2.2
4.4.2.3
4.4.2.4
4.4.2.5
4.4.2.6
4.4.2.7
4.4.2.8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction .........................................................................................4-3
Using the Front Panel Controls ............................................................4-3
Light Bar ..............................................................................................4-3
Power Switch.......................................................................................4-3
Mini USB .............................................................................................4-3
Web Access and Update from Computer through the Mini USB .......... 4-4
Configuration Handling through USB ...................................................4-4
Loading a Configuration from USB ......................................................4-5
Saving a Configuration to USB ............................................................4-5
Importing Configurations from USB .....................................................4-5
Exporting Configurations to USB .........................................................4-5
Rotary Knob ........................................................................................4-5
Keypad ................................................................................................4-6
Confidence Monitor On Key.................................................................4-6
Keyboard Lock ....................................................................................4-6
Front Panel Display .............................................................................4-7
Appearance and General Features......................................................4-7
Front Panel Menus ..............................................................................4-9
Main Menu ..........................................................................................4-9
Manage Configuration Menu .............................................................4-11
Line Up Menu ....................................................................................4-12
Modulation Parameters Menu ............................................................4-12
Bit Rate Tracking Menu ..................................................................... 4-13
A/V Encoder Menu ............................................................................4-14
Output Menu......................................................................................4-14
Alarms Menu .....................................................................................4-21
Shortcuts Menu .................................................................................4-21
Unit Config Menu ...............................................................................4-21
Advanced Menu ................................................................................4-22
CE-a, CE-x, CE-xA Pre-Processor Advanced Menu .......................... 4-30
CE-x, CE-xA Encoder Advanced Menu ............................................. 4-44
CE-a J2K Advanced Menu ................................................................4-44
CE-HEVC Encoder Advanced Menu .................................................4-47
Satellite Modulator Option Card Advanced Menu (AVP 3000) ........... 4-50
ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu ................................................ 4-53
G.703 Transceiver Card Advanced Menu .......................................... 4-55
GPI Card Advanced Menu .................................................................4-57
4-1
Front Panel Control
List of Figures
Figure 4.1
Figure 4.2
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.4
Figure 4.5
Figure 4.6
Advanced Video Processor Front Panel .............................................. 4-3
Front Panel Mini USB.......................................................................... 4-4
Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up (In-band Control Disabled) .... 4-7
Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up (In-band Control Enabled)..... 4-7
Audio Input Monitor Screen ................................................................. 4-9
Main Menu Navigational Overview .................................................... 4-10
List of Tables
Table 4.1
Table 4.2
Table 4.3
Table 4.4
Table 4.5
Table 4.6
Table 4.7
Table 4.8
Table 4.9
Table 4.10
Table 4.11
Table 4.12
Table 4.13
Table 4.14
Table 4.15
Table 4.16
Table 4.17
Table 4.18
Table 4.19
Table 4.20
4-2
Ethernet Interface Settings .................................................................. 4-4
Keypad Description ............................................................................. 4-6
Main Screen Icons .............................................................................. 4-8
Main Menu Options ........................................................................... 4-10
Manage Configuration Menu ............................................................. 4-11
Line Up Menu ................................................................................... 4-12
Modulation Parameters Menu ........................................................... 4-12
Bit Rate Tracking Menu..................................................................... 4-13
A/V Encoder Menu ............................................................................ 4-14
Output Menu ..................................................................................... 4-14
Unit Config Menu .............................................................................. 4-21
Advanced Menu ................................................................................ 4-22
CE-a, CE-x, CE-xA Pre-Processor Advanced Menu ......................... 4-30
CE-x, CE-xA Encoder Advanced Menu ............................................. 4-44
CE-a J2K Advanced Menu ................................................................ 4-44
CE-HEVC Encoder Advanced Menu ................................................. 4-47
Satellite Modulator Option Card Advanced Menu (AVP 3000)........... 4-50
ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu ................................................ 4-53
G.703 Transceiver Card Advanced Menu ......................................... 4-55
GPI Card Advanced Menu ................................................................ 4-57
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
4.1
Introduction
This chapter describes the features and options provided by the Front Panel menus
for controlling the Advance Video Processor Series.
Note:
4.2
After powering up (see Chapter 3, Getting Started), wait for initialization to
complete (approximately 1.5 to 3 minutes, depending on the number of
options fitted in the chassis) before attempting to use the front panel menus
and controls.
Using the Front Panel Controls
The user interface for the Front Panel consists of an ON/OFF power switch, light
bar, mini USB, rotary knob alphanumeric keypad, pushbuttons, main display and
confidence monitor that are used to set-up, control and monitor the unit.
The unit can be controlled through the front panel by the rotary knob and the
keypad. In a given state only the illuminated keys are functional.
Power Switch
Light Bar
Mini USB
Rotary Knob
Keypad
Confidence Monitor
Main Display
Figure 4.1 Advanced Video Processor Front Panel
4.2.1
Light Bar
The light bar indicates the alarm state of the unit.
4.2.2
Power Switch
The power switch is used for turning the unit On or Off. The switch is recessed to
prevent the unit from being accidentally switched off.
4.2.3
Mini USB
The mini USB connector provides an interface for remote web access and update
from a computer, and for saving or exporting configurations to, and loading or
importing configurations from a USB stick.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-3
Front Panel Control
Figure 4.2 Front Panel Mini USB
4.2.3.1
Web Access and Update from Computer through the Mini USB
The Mini USB port on the front panel of the unit can be used as a virtual IP
connector through an USB-to-Ethernet adaptor. A computer connected through an
USB-to-Ethernet adaptor to the front panel USB connector can provide the same
functions as a computer connected to the control Ethernet interface of the unit. In
this way the USB port can be used for unit upgrade and control. To access the unit
from a computer through the USB connector, proceed as follows:
1. Connect an USB-to-Ethernet adaptor to the front panel USB connector with a
USB cable.
2. Connect one of the Ethernet ports of the control computer to the Ethernet port
on the USB-to-Ethernet adaptor through an UTP cable.
3. Set up the Ethernet interface of the control computer connected to the USB-toEthernet adaptor as detailed in Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
Parameter
Setting
IP Address
192.168.20.[2-255]
Gateway Address
192.168.20.1
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0
Note:
4.2.3.2
Ethernet Interface Settings
The USB interface uses the IP address 192.168.20.20, so this address
cannot be assigned to the control computer.
Configuration Handling through USB
Configurations can be loaded or imported from, and saved or exported to a USB
stick connected to the front panel USB connector.
Notes: Only configurations saved from, or converted to, the same software version
as that running on the unit should be loaded or imported onto the unit.
If a configuration file is loaded onto a unit that has a different hardware
configuration to that of the original unit, not all parameters will be configured
and operation of the unit cannot be guaranteed.
The USB stick must be pre-formatted to FAT32 file system prior to use. The
Unit Config/USB Control/Format USB Stick command on the front panel
4-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
does not format the attached USB stick; it only clears its content and
recreates the directory structure required by the unit, 64 empty “slots” ready
to take configurations. This means that any data already on the USB stick
will be lost.
4.2.3.3
Loading a Configuration from USB
To load a configuration from the connected USB stick, select Manage
Configuration/Load Configuration from USB.
Note:
4.2.3.4
The selected configuration is applied but not stored on the unit.
Saving a Configuration to USB
To save the current configuration of the unit to the connected USB stick, select
Manage Configuration/Save Configuration to USB.
Note:
4.2.3.5
Entries already containing a stored configuration cannot be overwritten.
Choose an entry with <empty slot> label to save the configuration.
Importing Configurations from USB
To import all the configurations stored on the USB stick, select Manage
Configuration/Import Configuration/Import All Configurations.
To choose some configurations on the USB stick to import, select Manage
Configuration/Import Configuration/Select Configuration to Import. The
selected items are marked with '>', and can be imported by selecting the Import
Selected Configurations command.
Configurations can also be imported one by one by selecting Manage
Configuration/Import Configuration/USB Config <n>.
4.2.3.6
Exporting Configurations to USB
To export all of the configurations stored on the unit, select Manage
Configuration/Export Configuration/Export All Configurations.
To choose some configurations on the unit to export, select Manage
Configuration/Export Configuration/Select Configuration to Export.
The selected items are marked with '>', and can be imported by selecting Export
Selected Configurations.
Configurations can also be imported one by one by selecting Manage
Configuration/Export Configuration/Device Config <n>.
4.2.4
Rotary Knob
The rotary knob is used for scrolling in the menu system, moving the cursor or
stepping attribute values. The knob also serves as a push button and performs the
same function as the Select key.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-5
Front Panel Control
The current position on the menu is indicated by a diamond next to the text. The
diamond is solid if the parameter is configurable or outline if the text is for
information (read only).
The menu option is selected by either pressing the rotary knob or pressing the
select key.
Selecting an item will either take you to the next level in the menu tree or will provide
you with the configurable options. These are either a pre-defined list that can be
scrolled through and selected, or user entry from the alphanumeric keypad. When
changes are made, pressing the knob or the Select key will activate and save the
change. If you do not want to apply or save the change then press the Cancel key
4.2.5
Keypad
The main keys provided on the keypad are detailed in Table 4.2
Table 4.2
4.2.6
Keypad Description
Key
Description
Select
Used for selecting a menu item or accepting attribute value input.
Cancel
Used for exiting a menu or cancelling attribute value input.
Ins
Used for creating a link in a menu or inserting a character during text input.
Del
Used for deleting an item in a list or deleting a character during parameter input.
Alphanumeric Keys
Used for entering numerical or textual values. Different characters are invoked
by multiple presses within a short interval.
Confidence Monitor On Key
The On key on the confidence monitor turns the monitor on or off. By pressing and
holding the On key operation related data is shown. The first line displays the total
number of hours the monitor has operated, the second line displays the software
version.
For details on how to configure the settings for the confidence monitor, see Chapter
3 Getting Started.
4.2.7
Keyboard Lock
The controls are locked after a time of inactivity. In order to set the key lock time,
navigate to Unit Config/Display Setup/Menu Display And Keypad. The keys can
be unlocked by pressing the Ins, then the Select keys in this sequence as instructed
on the front panel.
4-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
It is possible to configure the time before the keyboard becomes locked. This is
available in the Unit Config / Display Setup / Menu Display and Keypad menu of
the front panel or, from the GUI, go to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup >
Base Unit > Front Panel Parameters and set the Key Lock Time in the
Properties panel.
4.3
Front Panel Display
The parameters of the main display can be configured through the
Unit Config/Display Setup menu of the front panel.
4.3.1
Appearance and General Features
The parameters of the main displays for all models of the AVP are similar in content
and can be configured through the Unit Config/Display Setup menu of the front
panel.
When the power-up sequence is complete, if In-band Control is disabled, a main
screen is displayed showing the following features, see Figure 4.3.
Figure 4.3 Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up (In-band Control Disabled)
When the power-up sequence is complete, if In-band Control is enabled, a main
screen is displayed showing the following features, see Figure 4.4.
Figure 4.4 Typical Screen Displayed on Power-Up (In-band Control Enabled)
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-7
Front Panel Control
4.3.1.1.1
Title Bar
Alternately displays the current location within the menu tree and the recently loaded
configuration. If the loaded configuration was changed in any way, the '(changed)'
string is appended to the name.
4.3.1.1.2
Icons
The icons allow the user to determine the current state of the AVP 3000 at a glance.
The icons available on the main screen are shown in Table 4.3.
Table 4.3 Main Screen Icons
Icon
Description
Modulation State
Output State
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Off
Moderate
Off
On
High
Off
On
Moderate
On
On
High
On
On
Off Air
Either of Output State or Modulation State is Off or the Current State of the
satellite modulator Transport Stream is not Online.
On Air
Both Output State and Modulation State are On and the Current State of the
satellite modulator Transport Stream is Online.
CLEAR
No service in an enabled Modulator Transport Stream output is BISS or RAS
encrypted
SCRAMBLED
4.3.1.1.3
Output Power
At least one service in an enabled Modulator Transport Stream output is BISS or
RAS encrypted
Active Area
The active area is used for:
4.3.1.1.4
•
Displaying the IP address and status information about the active streams
•
Displaying the Satellite Modulator parameters (AVP 3000 only)
•
Displaying the menu system
•
Displaying parameter setting
Audio Monitor
A selected audio input can be monitored. To select an audio input for constant
monitoring, navigate to Unit Config/Display Setup/Audio Monitor Input and set
the slot and channel parameters.
4-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
4.3.1.1.5
Audio Input Monitor
On the Audio Input Monitor Screen, see Figure 4.4, all the encoded channels from
an option card can be displayed.
Figure 4.5 Audio Input Monitor Screen
The entire audio input range for an encoder card can be monitored by selecting the
AV Encoder/Audio Monitor menu. The rotary knob can be used to switch between
Channels 1-8 and Channels 9-16 on each card.
4.4
Front Panel Menus
4.4.1
Main Menu
Shortly after power-up the title bar of this screen displays the current location within
the menu tree and the recently loaded configuration. The main area of the screen
may also display either the current IP Address or Service Name, if one has been
set.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-9
Front Panel Control
Figure 4.6 Main Menu Navigational Overview
The front panel provides a menu structure which is extended by the installed option
cards. Menu navigation is achieved by the front panel controls. The menu is
organized in such a way that frequently used items are easily accessible, while all
the functionality is still made available through the front panel. The menu items are
described in Table 4.4.
Table 4.4
Main Menu Options
Menu Item
Description
AVP 2000
AVP 3000
Manage Configuration
Saving, loading, exporting, importing configurations


Line Up
Carrier signal power and frequency settings


Modulation Parameters
Carrier signal modulation settings


Bit Rate Tracking
Transport Stream Bit Rate settings


A/V Encoder
Audio/Video encoding settings, VCM specific


Output
Building a Transport Stream on a specific output


Alarms
Viewing alarms and setting alarm masks


Shortcuts
User-defined links to menu items


Unit Config
Device settings


Advanced (AVP2000/3000)
Access to full functionality of the AVP and the installed option
cards


Sub Menus are listed in the following tables.
4-10
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
4.4.1.1
Manage Configuration Menu
The Manage Configuration Menu is used for saving, loading, exporting and
importing configurations. The menu structure is shown in Table 4.5.
Table 4.5
Manage Configuration Menu
Manage Configuration
Load Configuration
Delete All Configurations
from device
Deletes all the configurations previously saved on the unit.
Config <n>: <config name>
Selects the configuration to load from the configurations saved on the unit.
Save Configuration
Config <n>: <name>
Saves the current configuration to the unit. Only slots labeled <empty slot> can be selected. Other
slots are read only.
Note: If an individual stored configuration needs to be deleted, Select the required memory slot and
press the Del key.
Load Configuration from USB1
Delete All Configurations
from USB
Deletes all the configurations stored on the USB stick.
Config <n>: <name>
Lists the configurations stored on the USB stick connected to the front panel. The selected
configuration is loaded and becomes the current configuration, but is not stored in any of the slots
in the unit.
Save Configuration to USB1
Config <n>: <name>
The list of configurations stored on the unit. The selected configuration is saved to the USB stick
connected to the front panel.
Import Configuration1
Import All Configurations
Imports all the configurations stored on the USB stick and saves them on the unit. None of the
configurations becomes active.
Select Configurations to
Import
Import Selected
Configurations
Imports the selected configurations and stores them on the unit. None of the configurations
becomes active, they are only stored on the unit.
USB config <n>: <name>
The list of configurations stored on the USB stick. The configurations to be imported can be
selected by pressing the Select button on the keypad.
USB Config <n>: <name>
Imports one particular configuration from a USB stick. The imported configuration does not become
active.
Export Configuration1
Export All Configurations
Exports all the configurations stored on the unit to a USB stick.
Select Configurations to
Export
Export Selected
Configurations
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Exports the selected configurations and stores them on the USB stick attached to the front panel.
4-11
Front Panel Control
Device Config <n>:
<name>
The list of configurations stored on the USB stick. The configurations to be exported can be
selected by pressing the Select button on the keypad.
Device Config <n>: <name>
1
4.4.1.2
Exports one particular configuration to USB stick.
Visible only when a USB drive is detected.
Line Up Menu
The Line Up Menu displays the Satellite modulator line up settings. The menu
options are shown in Table 4.6.
Table 4.6
Line Up Menu
Line Up
Output State
On (Nominal Power), On (Reduced Power), Off. Turns off or turns on the carrier signal with the selected
power as set by the relevant parameter.
Nominal L-Band Power1
-40 – 5 dBm
Reduced L-Band Power1
Nominal IF Power2
-30 – 5 dBm
Reduced IF Power2
Modulation State
On, Off
L-Band Frequency1,3
950 – 2150 MHz. The center frequency of the signal output through the L-Band output.
IF Frequency2,3
50 – 180 MHz. The center frequency of the signal output through the IF output.
Uplink Frequency4
The frequency the signal is converted to by the up-converter fed from the Voyager II. Its valid range
changes depending upon other parameters.
1 Applies to L-Band output only.
2 Applies to IF output only.
3 Accessible if Frequency Input Mode is set to other than Uplink Frequency in the Modulation Parameters menu.
4 Accessible if Uplink Frequency is set for Frequency Input Mode in the Modulation Parameters menu.
4.4.1.3
Modulation Parameters Menu
The Modulation Parameters Menu displays the Satellite Modulation settings. The
menu options are shown in Table 4.7.
Table 4.7 Modulation Parameters Menu
Modulation Parameters
Modulation State
On, Off. The values are read only here and can only be changed in the Line Up or in the Advanced/Satellite
Modulator Option Card/Output Parameters menu. The state is also reflected by icons, see Front Panel Screens.
Modulation
Standard
DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X. The used modulation standards are defined by ETSI EN 300 421, ETSI
301 210 or ETSI EN 302 307, respectively.
Modulation
QPSK, 8PSK, 8PSK-L 16QAM, 16APSK, 16APSK-L, 32APSK, 32APSK-L, 64APSK and 64APSK-L. The availability
of the constellations used for modulating the carrier is subject to the availability of licenses and the value set for the
Modulation Standard parameter.
4-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
RF Carrier ID
State
On, Off, Last State. The Carrier State set what/when?
FEC Rate
1/4, 1/3, 2/5, 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 7/8, 8/9, 9/10, 13/45, 9/20, 8/15, 11/20, 5/9, 26/45, 28/45, 23/36, 25/36,
32/45, 13/18, 11/15, 7/9, 77/90. Indicates the ratio of the useful information to the useful information plus the
redundant information used for error correction. The availability of the options is subject to the value set for the
Modulation Standard parameter.
Symbol Rate
1.0 – 45 MSym/s (or 0.132 - 66 MSym/s if the VOY/SWO/HSYM license is available - extended range)
Maximum Input
Data Rate
The maximum data rate of the transport stream the modulator can accept for the given modulation settings. Readonly parameter.
Output Select
L-Band, IF. The RF output used for sending the signal from the Voyager to the Up-converter. Depending on the
choice made here the availability of related menu items changes.
Frequency Input
Mode
L-Band Frequency1, IF Frequency 2, Uplink Frequency. The mode the frequency is treated. For L-Band Frequency1
or IF Frequency 2 the RF center frequency of the respective output is directly entered. For Uplink Frequency, the RF
center frequency is calculated from the Uplink Frequency and the Up-converter Frequency.
L-Band
Frequency1,3
950 – 2150 MHz. The center frequency of the signal output through the L-Band output.
IF Frequency2,3
50 – 180 MHz. The center frequency of the signal output through the IF output.
Uplink
Frequency4
The frequency the signal is converted to by the up-converter fed from the Voyager II.
Output state
On, Off. Read only parameter that reflects the output state set in the Line-up or in the Advanced/Satellite Modulator
Option Card/Output Parameters menu. The state is also reflected by icons, see Front Panel Screens.
Reduced L-Band
Line-up Power1
-40 – 5 dBm. The L-Band output power set when the satellite modulator Output State is changed to On during bootup or when rebooted with the Output State allowed to stay on after reboot.
Reduced IF
Line-up Power2
-30 – 5 dBm. The IF output power set when the satellite modulator Output State is changed to On during boot-up or
when rebooted with the Output State allowed to stay on after reboot.
Up-converter
Power1
Off, 15V, 24V. Turns on or off a DC voltage to supply the up-converter fed by the Voyager II. The presence of DC
power is also confirmed by an LED on the modulator card.
Output Powerup State
On, Off, Last State. The Output State set after the unit is booted. By Last State the unit keeps the Output State set
before reboot.
Clock Reference
Mode
Internal, [External]. External mode is not supported by the current hardware configuration.
1 Applies to L-Band output only.
2 Applies to IF output only.
3 Accessible if Frequency Input Mode is set to other than Uplink Frequency.
4 Accessible if Uplink Frequency is set for Frequency Input Mode.
4.4.1.4
Bit Rate Tracking Menu
The Bit Rate Tracking Menu displays the Transport Stream Bit Rate settings. The
menu options are shown in Table 4.8.
Table 4.8
Bit Rate Tracking Menu
Bit Rate Tracking
Select TS
Selects the Transport Stream the modifications in this menu apply to.
Enable Bit Rate
Tracking
Off, Maximize video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the selected Transport Stream.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-13
Front Panel Control
TS Bit Rate
Sets the Bit Rate of the selected Transport Stream.
Components
Selects the component within the Transport Stream selected.
Component <n>
The components within the selected Transport Stream.
Bit Rate
The Bit Rate of the component with Fixed weighting. For components with weighting other than Fixed, the
parameter is read only.
Bit Rate
weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2-20. Applies only for video components contained within a Transport Stream with Enable
Bit Rate Tracking set to Maximise video. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to changes in
the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate
defined for the video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much a component is changed
when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other
than Minimum.
Master TS
The Transport Stream whose Bit Rate directly controls the Bit Rate of the component if it has a weighting
other than Fixed.
4.4.1.5
A/V Encoder Menu
The A/V Encoder Menu displays the VCM specific audio/video encoder settings. The
menu options are shown in Table 4.9.
Table 4.9
A/V Encoder Menu
A/V Encoder
Video Input Locked
Yes, No. Read only parameter. Indicates whether a video lock is achieved for the SDI streams. For internal
streams, its value is always Yes.
Video Bit Rate
Bit Rate of the video component encoded by the encoder card.
Video Profile
The video profile and level to use for encoding the source.
Buffer Mode
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay.
Source
SDI, Bars, Black, Moving Object, Slate. External SDI source or internal source to be encoded.
Audio Monitor
Displays the levels for the channels associated with audio modules on the VCM card. To select between the
audio modules, turn the rotary knob.
Audio Module <n>
For a full list of the menu items in the Audio Module <n> menu.
4.4.1.6
Output Menu
The Output Menu is used for building a Transport Stream on a specific output. The
menu options are shown in Table 4.10.
Table 4.10 Output Menu
Output
IP Output <n>
Data Interface Group <m>
Network Mode
4-14
The IP output is either a physical interface or a bond of physical
interfaces.
Selects interface group <m> to modify its parameters.
Same-Network, Different-Network. If set to Different-Network, the
two ports in the group can belong to different subnets. In DifferentNetwork mode only the Active-Active Redundancy mode is
supported.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
IP Redundancy Mode
Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes the behavior of the spare
interfaces.
Active Interface
Read only parameter. In Active - Active redundancy mode both
interfaces are active.
Line Speed
Auto, 100 Mpbs, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link.
Duplex Mode
Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data are to be
transmitted and received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or
transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the
same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration.
Default Virtual MAC Address
Virtual MAC address assigned to the Data Interface Group.
IP Address
The IP address associated with the interface group.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the interface group.
Gateway Address
The gateway address associated with the interface group.
IGMP mode Selection
IGMP v2, IGMP v3
Physical Data Interface <k>
The physical data interface labeled as Ge <k> of the current data
interface group.
Default MAC Address
The hardware address of the Ge <k> interface.
Link Status
Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data
interface.
Link Up Time
The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is
established. Read only parameter.
TX Packets
Packets transmitted since the link is up.
RX Packets
Packets received since the link is up.
IP Address
The IP address of the physical data interface.
Add New Transport Stream
Creates a new Transport Stream for the current output.
Add Existing Transport Stream
Creates a copy of an existing Transport Stream for the current
output.
Transport Stream <l>
Transport Stream ID <id>
Service List
The list of the Transport Streams to copy to the current output.
Selects the Transport Stream with ID <id> to modify its parameters.
The list of services in the current Transport Stream.
Add Service
Adds a new service to the current Transport Stream.
Service <name>
Selects the service with <name> already added to the current
Transport Stream.
Component List
List of components in the current service.
Add Component
Adds a new component to the current service.
<Component name> on <pid>
Selects the component with <component name> and <pid> already
added to the current service.
Elementary Stream
The elementary stream associated with the component produced by
one of the CE VCM modules in the unit.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-15
Front Panel Control
PID
The Packet Identifier that identifies the TS packets carrying the
current component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2-20. The weighting associated to the current
component. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to
changes in the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a
component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate defined for the
video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much
a component is changed when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is
changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other
than Minimum.
Master TS
Information only – master TS for Bitrate tracking
Service ID
The unique identifier of the current service within the current
Transport Stream.
PMT PID
PID assigned to the PMT that describes the current service.
PCR PID
The PID of the TS packets that carry the clock reference for the
current service. If the service has a component with the Embedded
PCR parameter set to On, this field contains the PID of that
particular video stream and it is read only.
SDT Parameters
Service Provider
The name of the service provider as appears in the NIT.
Service Name
The name of the service as appears in the NIT.
Service Type
Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast.
NIT Service Parameters
LCN
BISS Key
0 - 1023
Off, 1 – 32 Enables BISS using key stored in selected location
.
4-16
BISS SW
The 12 hexadecimal digit clear session word used for scrambling
the current service. Visible only if BISS-1 is selected for Scrambling.
BISS ESW
The 16 hexadecimal digit encrypted session word used for
scrambling the current service. Visible only if BISS-E is selected for
Scrambling. The key entered here is encrypted by the BISS Injected
ID found under Advanced/System/Base Unit.
Current State
The Setmode state of the Transport Stream. Read only parameter.
Change State
Sets the Setmode state of the Transport Stream. The options
available depends on the value set for MGP Mode under
Advanced/System/MGP Support.
Transport Stream Bit Rate
The Bit Rate of the Transport Stream.
Bit Rate Tracking Mode
Off, Maximise video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the
current Transport Stream.
Auto Enable
If set to true, it automatically re-enables the Transport Streams
when all the specified error conditions are cleared.
Auto Disable
Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm, Any
CRITICAL alarm. Disables the output when the set condition is met.
The Transport Stream can be set to be re-enabled at the Auto
Enable option.
Syntax
DVB, ATSC
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Program Specific Information
Transport Stream ID
A new ID can be assigned to the Transport Stream.
PAT-PMT
On, Off
PAT-PMT Parameters
PMT Repetition Period
100 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms. Specifies how often (in ms) the PMT shall
be transmitted.
Dolby Digital Descriptor
DVB, ATSC, DVB & ATSC
CAT
On, Off
TSTD
On, Off
Service Information
Original Network ID
NIT
On, Off
NIT Parameters
Network Name
Set Network Name
Network ID
Set network ID.
Generate LCN
Off, IEC 62216, NorDig v1, DTG Default
Send Extended NIT - SIRG
On, Off. If PSI/SI Level is set to On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT) make
sure the Send extended NIT (SIRG) is On so that the Carrier ID is
sent.
Insert NIT into PAT
True, False
SDT
On, Off
IP Bit Rate
Specifies the Bit Rate of the IP output and includes the overhead
added by IP encapsulation. Read only parameter.
TS Packets per IP Packet
1 - 7. Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate
in one IP packet.
IP Encapsulation
UDP, RTP, RTP FEC Column, RTP FEC Column and Row.
Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP and
RTP is self explanatory and means that the Transport Stream is first
encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an IP header is added.
If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns and Row is selected one
(Column) or two (Column and Row) RTP streams are output in
addition to the RTP streams that carry the Transport Stream.
FEC Rows
The number of rows used in FEC encoding.
FEC Columns
The number of columns used in FEC encoding..
FEC Alignment
Block Aligned, Non Block Aligned. The aligned method used for Pro
MPEG FEC..
IP Output Configuration
Destination 1
Destination IP Address
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Selects Destination 1.
The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
4-17
Front Panel Control
Destination UDP Port
The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
Source IP Address
The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
Source UDP Port
The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
Vlan ID Tag
Time To Live
TTL value for inclusion in the IP header
Type Of Service
ToS value for inclusion in the IP header
Selects ASI Output <n> on the ASI option card in slot <m>. If the
ASI output is mirrored, then there is only 1 output per card.
ASI Output <n> (Slot <m>)
Add New Transport Stream
Adds a new Transport Stream to the output. Displayed only if no
Transport Stream is defined for the ASI output.
Add Existing Transport Stream
Creates a copy of an existing Transport Stream at the current
output. Displayed only if no Transport Stream is defined for the ASI
output.
Transport Stream ID: <id>
Selects the Transport Stream with id <id> to modify its parameters.
Service List
The list of services in the current Transport Stream.
Add Service
Adds a service to the current Transport Stream.
Service <name>
Selects the service with <name> already added to the current
Transport Stream.
Component List
4-18
Lists the components in the current service.
Add Component
Adds a new component to the current service.
<Component name> on pid <pid>
Selects the component with <component name> and <pid> already
added to the current service.
Elementary Stream
The elementary stream associated with the component produced by
one of the VCM modules in the unit.
PID
The Packet Identifier that identifies the TS packets carrying the
current component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2-20. The weighting associated to the current
component. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to
changes in the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a
component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate defined for the
video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much
a component is changed when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is
changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other
than Minimum.
Service Provider
The name of the service provider as appears in the NIT.
Service Name
The name of the service as appears in the NIT.
Service ID
The unique identifier of the current service within the current
Transport Stream.
Service Type
Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
PMT Pid
PID assigned to the PMT that describes the current service.
Logical Channel
Appears in the NIT and provides a default channel number label for
the current service.
PCR PID
PID of the TS packets that carry the clock reference for the current
service. If the service has a component with the Embedded PCR
parameter set to On, this field contains the PID of that particular
video stream and it is read only.
Scrambling
Off, BISS-1, BISS-E. Disables or enables the scrambling of the
current service by the Basic Interoperable Scrambling System with
or without encrypted keys.
BISS SW
The 12 hexadecimal digit clear session word used for scrambling
the current service. Visible only if BISS-1 is selected for Scrambling.
BISS ESW
The 16 hexadecimal digit encrypted session word used for
scrambling the current service. Visible only if BISS-E is selected for
Scrambling. The key entered here is encrypted by the BISS Injected
ID found under Advanced/System/Base Unit.
Current State
The Setmode state of the Transport Stream. Read only parameter.
Change State
Sets the Setmode state of the Transport Stream. The options
available depends on the value set for MGP Mode under
Advanced/System/MGP Support.
Transport Stream ID
The label to identify the current Transport Stream from any other
multiplex within a network.
Network Name
The network name as used in the NIT.
Network ID
The network ID as used in the NIT.
Mode
CBR, VBR.
PSI-SI Level
Off, On (PAT, PMT only), On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT). Sets which
tables are inserted into the Transport Stream.
Send Extended NIT (SIRG)
On, Off. Determines whether Carrier ID is to be inserted in the NIT.
Available only when the PSI-SI Level is set so that NIT is generated.
PMT Repetition Period
The repetition interval of the PMT table expressed in ms.
Transport Stream Bit Rate
The Bit Rate of the Transport Stream.
Bit Rate Tracking Mode
Off, Maximise video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the
current Transport Stream.
Auto Enable
If set to true, it automatically re-enables the Transport Streams
when all the specified error conditions are cleared.
Auto Disable
Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm, Any
CRITICAL alarm. Disables the output when the set condition is met.
The Transport Stream can be set to be re-enabled at the Auto
Enable option.
G.703 Transceiver (Slot <m>)
Selects the G.703 Transceiver card.
Add New Transport Stream
Adds a new Transport Stream to the output. Displayed only if no
Transport Stream is defined for the ASI output.
Add Existing Transport Stream
Creates a copy of an existing Transport Stream at the current
output. Displayed only if no Transport Stream is defined for the ASI
output.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-19
Front Panel Control
Transport Stream ID <id>
Service List
4-20
Selects the Transport Stream with ID <id> to modify its parameters.
The list of services in the current Transport Stream.
Add Service
Adds a new service to the current Transport Stream.
Service <name>
Selects the service with <name> already added to the current
Transport Stream.
Component List
List of components in the current service.
y
Add Component
Adds a new component to the current service.
<Component name> on <pid>
Selects the component with <component name> and <pid> already
added to the current service.
Elementary Stream
The elementary stream associated with the component produced by
one of the VCM modules in the unit.
PID
The Packet Identifier that identifies the TS packets carrying the
current component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2-20. The weighting associated to the current
component. A component with Fixed weighting does not respond to
changes in the Transport Stream Bit Rate. If Minimum is set for a
component, it will always use the minimum Bit Rate defined for the
video profile it is encoded with. A value 2-20 determines how much
a component is changed when the Transport Stream Bit Rate is
changed relative to other components with Bit Rate weighting other
than Minimum.
Service Provider
The name of the service provider as appears in the NIT.
Service Name
The name of the service as appears in the NIT.
Service ID
The unique identifier of the current service within the current
Transport Stream.
Service Type
Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic, Data Broadcast.
PMT Pid
PID assigned to the PMT that describes the current service.
Logical Channel
Appears in the NIT and provides a default channel number label for
the current service.
PCR PID
The PID of the TS packets that carry the clock reference for the
current service. If the service has a component with the Embedded
PCR parameter set to On, this field contains the PID of that
particular video stream and it is read only.
Scrambling
Off, BISS-1, BISS-E. Disables or enables the scrambling of the
current service by the Basic Interoperable Scrambling System with
or without encrypted keys.
BISS SW
The 12 hexadecimal digit clear session word used for scrambling
the current service. Visible only if BISS-1 is selected for Scrambling.
BISS ESW
The 16 hexadecimal digit encrypted session word used for
scrambling the current service. Visible only if BISS-E is selected for
Scrambling. The key entered here is encrypted by the BISS Injected
ID found under Advanced/System/Base Unit.
Current State
The Setmode state of the Transport Stream. Read only parameter.
Change State
Sets the Setmode state of the Transport Stream. The options
available depends on the value set for MGP Mode under
Advanced/System/MGP Support
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Transport Stream ID
The label to identify the current Transport Stream from any other
multiplex within a network.
Network Name
The network name as used in the NIT.
Network ID
The network ID as used in the NIT.
Mode
CBR, VBR.
PSI-SI Level
Off, On (PAT, PMT only), On (PAT/PMT/SDT/CAT/NIT). Sets which
tables are inserted into the Transport Stream.
Send Extended NIT (SIRG)
On, Off. Determines whether Carrier ID is to be inserted in the NIT.
Available only when the PSI-SI Level is set so that NIT is generated.
PMT Repetition Period
The repetition interval of the PMT table expressed in ms.
Transport Stream Bit Rate
The Bit Rate of the Transport Stream.
Bit Rate Tracking Mode
Off, Maximise video. Enables or disables Bit Rate tracking for the
current Transport Stream.
Auto Enable
If set to true, it automatically re-enables the Transport Streams
when all the specified error conditions are cleared.
Auto Disable
Never, Audio Lost, Video Lost, Any Upstream CRITICAL Alarm, Any
CRITICAL alarm. Disables the output when the set condition is met.
The Transport Stream can be set to be re-enabled at the Auto
Enable option.
4.4.1.7
Alarms Menu
The Alarms Menu displays the alarm settings available on the unit.
4.4.1.8
Shortcuts Menu
The Shortcuts menu displays the shortcuts available on the unit.
4.4.1.9
Unit Config Menu
The Unit Config Menu displays the device settings. The menu options are shown in
Table 4.11.
Table 4.11 Unit Config Menu
Unit Config
Remote Control Setup
IP Address
The IP address of the unit for upgrade or web control.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated to the IP address set.
Gateway Address
The gateway through which the unit can be accessed.
Display Setup
Video Monitor Input
Provides list of available sources
Video Monitor Parameters
Video Monitor Brightness
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
0 – 8 Adjusts the brightness of the monitor
4-21
Front Panel Control
Video Monitor Usage TIme
Information Only
Video Monitor Preview Time
Duration that the monitor will be active from the time the “on” button is pressed
Audio Monitor Input
Audio Slot Select
Selects the slot from which to monitor a channel on the front panel.
Audio Channel Select
Selects the channel from the slot selected in Audio Slot Select and the module set in Audio
Module Select for displaying on the front panel.
Audio Module Select
Selects the module from the slot selected in Audio Slot Select.
Menu Display and Keypad
Keypad Lock Time
The timeout time in seconds after which the keyboard gets locked.
Keypad LED Brightness
The brightness of the keys in the keypad.
Display Test
Starts a test sequence on the display to verify correct operation.
USB Control1
Recreates the default directory structure on the USB stick connected to the front panel. Any
existing data on the USB stick will be lost.
Format USB Stick
1
4.4.2
Visible only when a USB drive is detected.
Advanced Menu
The Advanced menu allows access to all of the Advanced menus for the installed
option cards. Selecting the option card (the parameters of which you wish to edit)
from the Slot <n> option will give access to the required menu.
Note:
The availability of some options depends upon the hardware fitted or
licenses available.
If no option card is selected, the System menu is displayed as shown below.
Table 4.12 Advanced Menu
Advanced
Slot <n>
See the menu of the installed card:
CE-a, CE-x, CE-xA Pre-Processor Advanced Menu
CE-x, CE-xA Encoder Advanced Menu
CE-a J2K Advanced Menu
CE-HEVC Encoder Advanced Menu
Satellite Modulator Option Card Advanced Menu (AVP 3000)
ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu
G.703 Transceiver Card Advanced Menu
GPI Option Card Advanced Menu
System
Network Configuration
Check Duplicate IP Address
4-22
Enable, Disable. If enabled, the unit checks whether there is another
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
unit with the same IP address within the network by sending out ARP
messages.
Control Interface Group
Network Mode
Same-Network, Different-Network. Read only parameter for the
control interface, and is set to Same-Network.
IP Redundancy Mode
Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes how the spare interfaces will
behave. For the control port, it is set to Active-Standby and is read
only.
Index
Identifier of the interface group. Read only parameter.
Autorevert
Auto-revert to Primary, Auto-revert to Secondary. Shown only if the IP
Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Determines what to do
when connection is lost.
Autorevert Delay
The delay in seconds before automatic redundancy switching takes
place. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to ActiveStandby.
Active Interface
Read only parameter. Displays which interface is active. In Active Active redundancy mode both interfaces are active.
Line Speed
Auto, 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link.
Duplex Mode
Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data should be
transmitted and received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or
transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the
same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration.
Default MAC Address
Virtual MAC address assigned to the Control Interface Group.
IP Address
The IP address associated with the interface group.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the interface group.
Gateway Address
The gateway address associated with the interface group.
Physical Control Interface <n>
The physical data interface labelled as Ge <n> of the current control
interface group.
Port Type
Ethernet. Read only parameter.
Direction
Output. Read only parameter.
Index
Identifier of the physical data interface. Read only parameter.
Default MAC Address
The hardware address of the Ge <n> interface.
Link Status
Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data interface.
Link Up Time
The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is established.
Read only parameter.
TX Packets
The packets transmitted since the link is up.
RX Packets
The packets received since the link is up.
IP Address
The IP address of the physical data interface.
Data Interface Group <n>
Network Mode
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Same-Network, Different-Network. If set to Different-Network, the two
ports in the group can belong to different subnets. In Different-Network
mode only the Active-Active Redundancy mode is supported.
4-23
Front Panel Control
IP Redundancy Mode
Active-Active, Active-Standby. Describes how the spare interfaces will
behave. For the Input data interface group only Active-Active is
supported and is a read only parameter. For the Output data
interface group both options are available.
Index
Identifier of the interface group. Read only parameter.
Autorevert
Auto-revert to Primary, Auto-revert to Secondary. Shown only if the IP
Redundancy mode is set to Active-Standby. Determines what to do
when connection is lost.
Autorevert Delay
The delay in seconds before automatic redundancy switching takes
place. Shown only if the IP Redundancy mode is set to ActiveStandby.
Active Interface
Read only parameter. Displays which interface is active. In Active Active redundancy mode both interfaces are active.
Line Speed
Auto, 100 Mpbs, 1 Gbps. The transmission speed of the link.
Duplex Mode
Auto, Full Duplex, Half Duplex. Determines whether data should be
transmitted and received in a time divided manner (Half Duplex) or
transmission and reception can happen at the same time over the
same link (Full Duplex). Auto is for automatic configuration.
Default Virtual MAC Address
Virtual MAC address assigned to the current Data Interface Group.
IP Address
The IP address associated with the interface group.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask associated with the interface group.
Gateway Address
The gateway address associated with the interface group.
Physical Data Interface <m>
The physical data interface labelled as Ge <m> of the current data
interface group.
Port Type
Ethernet. Read only parameter.
Direction
Output. Read only parameter.
Index
Identifier of the physical data interface. Read only parameter.
Default MAC Address
The hardware address of the Ge <n> interface.
Link Status
Link Down, Link Up. The status of the current physical data interface.
Read only parameter.
Link Up Time
The time in days, hours, minutes and seconds the link is established.
Read only parameter.
TX Packets
Packets transmitted since the link is up. Read only parameter.
RX Packets
Packets received since the link is up. Read only parameter.
IP Address
The IP address of the physical data interface.
Use Data Interface Group 3_4
If true data Ethernet ports Ge 3 and Ge 4 are used for control network
access to the unit.
If false the Ethernet control ports are used for control network access
to the unit.
Note: Changing this value will automatically reboot the unit.
Model
Unit Name
4-24
The name of the current unit for displaying on the web user interface.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Build Version
Assembly Date
The time and date when the current unit was assembled. Read only
parameter.
Software Version
The version of the software currently installed on the unit. Read only
parameter.
Serial Number
The serial number of the unit. Read only parameter.
Chassis Type
The type of the chassis. Read only parameter.
PSU A Option
The voltage level provided by PSU A. Read only parameter.
PSU B Option
The voltage level provided by PSU B. Read only parameter.
Inlet A
AC, DC, none. The type of the power through inlet A of the current
unit. Read only parameter.
Inlet B
AC, DC, none. The type of the power supply through inlet B of the
current unit. Read only parameter.
Inlet Mode
Supply mode of the inlets. Read only parameter.
Number of Usable Slots
The number of slots in the current unit. Single PSU units have 6 slots,
dual PSU units have 4 or 6 slots. Read only parameter.
Base Unit
Build Version
Host Controller Id
The Card Id of the host controller card. Read only parameter.
Software Date
The date the host software was compiled. Read only parameter.
Software Version
The version of the software running on the host controller card. Read
only parameter.
Hardware Version
The hardware version of the host controller card. Read only
parameter.
S Number
The BOM assembly number of the host card. The S number specifies
the available software and firmware features of the card. Read only
parameter.
Serial Number
The serial number of the host card. Read only parameter.
Software/Firmware
BSP Software Version
The software version of the board support package. Read only
parameter.
Application Software Version
The version of the application that runs on the host controller card.
Read only parameter.
Boot FPGA Firmware Version
The firmware version of the boot FPGA. Read only parameter.
Main FPGA Firmware Version
The firmware version of the main FPGA. Read only parameter.
Clocks FPGA Firmware
Version
The firmware version of the clocks FPGA. Read only parameter.
Advanced
Chip Id
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The unique identifier of the host controller card. Read only parameter.
4-25
Front Panel Control
FPGA Temperature
FPGA Warning Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA at which the
unit issues a warning.
FPGA Over Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA at which the
unit issues a critical alarm.
FPGA Temperature
The current temperature in degrees centigrade of the host FPGA.
PHY0 Temperature
PHY0 Warning Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY0 at which
the unit issues a warning.
PHY0 Over Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY0 at which
the unit issues a critical alarm.
PHY0 Temperature
The current temperature in degrees centigrade of Ethernet PHY0.
PHY1 Temperature
4-26
PHY1 Warning Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1 at which
the unit issues a warning.
PHY1 Over Temperature
The temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1 at which
the unit issues a critical alarm.
PHY1 Temperature
The current temperature in degrees centigrade of the Ethernet PHY1.
Mux SCR Source
Internal, Video. The source of the system clock reference used for
timing.
Status of Service
The Setmode state of the unit.
Change State
Changes the Setmode state of the unit. The available options depend
on the settings in Advanced/System/Base Unit/MGP Support/MGP
Mode.
IP Input system Compensation
0 – 5000 ms
What to Do on Reboot
Restore, Offline. Determines whether the streams remain offline after
reboot or their Setmode state is to be restored.
TS Source IP Redundancy
Non-Transparent, Transparent
BISS Mode
BISS Security option (Normal or Advanced)
BISS Injected ID (14 hex digits)
BISS injected ID used for transmitting the Encrypted Session Word
used for BISS-E encoding.
BISS Keys table
Table locations for BISS key storage and selection
UTC Time
The UTC time set on the unit.
UTC Date
The UTC date set on the unit.
SNTP Server
The IP address of a time server in the network.
Reflex Version1
Selects the Reflex version to use for statistical multiplexing. Not
supported in the current release.
DPI TCP Port
The port for the SCTE104 Slice messages to be transmitted.
Alarm Status
The overall alarm status of the unit. The same as indicated by the light
pipe on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
User Authentication
Enable
On, Off. Determines whether authentication is required for controlling
the unit.
User Name
The user name used for authentication if user authentication is
enabled.
Password
The password used for authentication if user authentication is
enabled.
Fan Speed
Information Only
Fans Speed Control
Lowest Noise, Quiet, Cool or Best Cooling. Sets the fan speed to
achieve the required operation whilst maintaining a safe operating
temperature within the unit.
Fans Speed Status
Lists the speed of the respective fans in rpm.
Fan 1
Fan 2
Fan 3
Fan 4
Fan 5
Voltage Rails Status
Lists the actual voltage or current levels of the respective nominal
outputs.
0.9V A
0.9V B
1.0V
1.0V GTP
1.2V GTP
1.2V
1.5V
1.8V
2.5V
2.5V Vcc Aux
3.0V
3.3V
3.6V
Front Panel Parameters
LED Brightness Control
0-7. The brightness of the keys and the rotary knob.
Video Monitor Preview Time
The time in seconds after which the TND is to be turned off
automatically. If 0 is given as value, the TND does not turn out
automatically.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-27
Front Panel Control
Video Monitor Usage Time
The cumulative time the TND was switched on.
Video Monitor Brightness
0-7. Sets the brightness of the TND (CMU) display.
Key Lock Time
The time in seconds after which the keyboard gets locked to prevent
accidental key presses.
Default Screen on Key Lock
When set to on the menu will return to default screen. Set to off to
remain on current screen after timeout lock.
Default Screen Type
Classic – enables the scrolling status information
Alternative disables the scrolling status
Carrier ID Setup
Carrier ID information for use in NIT and RF outputs.
Operator
Phone Number
Longitude
Latitude
User Information
NIT Descriptor Tag
TSTD Setup
Usual Station Code
SNG HQ
SNG Provider
Remote Server Logging
Remote Server IP Address
The IP address to which system messages selected for remote
logging are sent. A value of 0.0.0.0 disables all remote logging.
Alarm Logging
Off, On. When set to On, all alarm log messages are copied to the
remote server.
ESAM Logging
Off, On. When set to On, all ESAM log messages are copied to the
remote server.
SCTE-35 Logging
Off, On. When set to On, all SCTE-35 log messages are copied to the
remote server.
User Configuration Logging
Off, On. When set to On, all user configuration changes are sent to
the remove server.
Reflex Parameters
4-28
PCR Port
The UDP port on the current unit to which PCR Exchange Messages
are sent.
Command port
The UDP port on the current unit to which Set Rate Messages are
sent.
Status Port
The UDP port on the multiplexer to which Status Messages are sent
from the current unit.
PCR Exchange Timeout Port
The maximum time between PCR Exchange Messages. If exceeded,
PCR Exchange Timeout Alarm is triggered.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Reflex TTL
The time to live value to be applied to all Reflex v5 messages
transmitted from the current unit.
Set Rate Timeout Period
The maximum number of video frames between set rate messages. If
exceeded, Set Rate Message Timeout Alarm is triggered.
Output Stream List
Lists the output reflex streams. Empty in this release as Reflex is not
supported.
MGP Support
Supported MGP Version
The MGP version supported by the unit. Read only parameter.
MGP Mode
Off, Module Level, Unit Level. Determines if MGP is enabled or not, or
if it is enabled, then the unit is controlled as a whole or on a module
level basis.
Transmission Interval
Period for steady-state transmission of MSM packets in units of ms.
R0 Playout Period
Duration of the MSM burst emitted on entering MGP state R0 in units
of ms.
S1 Playout Period
Duration of the MSM burst emitted on entering MGP state S1 in units
of ms.
Control Contact Timeout
Period of time in ms the system waits before assuming loss of contact
with the control system after the control link goes down.
MSM Destination Port
UDP port for sending MGP packets.
MGP Settings1
1
Only available when MGP is enabled
MSM Multicast Address
The destination IP Address of the MSM packets.
MGP State
The current state of the MGP implementation.
MGP Spares2
2
Only available when MGP is enabled.
Spare Device Configuration
Spare IP Address
Selects a spare device to set up its parameters.
The IP address of another unit that is acting as a spare for this
unit/service.
Vlan Tags
Output <n>: Data Port <m> - Data Port <k>
Selects output <n> for adjusting its VLAN settings.
Add Vlan tag
Adds a new VLAN tag to the current output.
Vlan ID: <id>
The ID associated with the VLAN tag. Allows the user to change the
ID.
Vlan ID (Create)
Modifies the VLAN ID for the current tag.
Vlan IP
Assigns an IP address to the VLAN.
Vlan Netmask
Specifies the network mask for the current VLAN.
Vlan Gateway
Specifies the gateway address for the current VLAN.
SNMP
System Contact
Contact to the team providing support for this unit.
System Name
The name to identify the current unit.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-29
Front Panel Control
System Location
The location where the current unit is installed.
Will This Unit Be SNMP Polled
True, False. Determines whether the unit is polled for SNMP
information or not.
Time Elapsed Before Control Assumed Lost
The amount of time between sysUpTime requests before the
connection with the control system is assumed to be down.
Currently in Contact with Control System
Determines if a connection has been established with the trap server.
SNMP Trap Server
Configures the Trap Server destinations.
Community
The community name for all trap messages.
SNMP Version
The version of SNMP used for the trap messages.
Trap Sequence Index
The reference number of the last alarm trap sent.
Config Trap Wait
The minimum time in seconds between each configuration change
message sent.
Config Event Index
The reference number of the last configuration change trap sent.
Trap Level
Start Msgs, warning-critical; Start Msgs, minor-critical; Start Msgs,
major-critical; Start Msgs, critical; Start Msgs only. Configures the
levels of the alarm and the start traps sent from the current unit.
Accept Configuration
4.4.2.1
Accepts the changes in hardware configuration if there are any.
CE-a, CE-x, CE-xA Pre-Processor Advanced Menu
Note:
The availability of some options depends upon the hardware fitted or
licenses available.
Table 4.13 CE-a, CE-x, CE-xA Pre-Processor Advanced Menu
Build
Card Id
Name
Software Version
Hardware Version
CPLD Version
Hardware S Number
S Number
Advanced
Chip Id
Requested Air Flow
PCR Interval
FrontEnd FPGA Temperature
Temperature
4-30
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
BackEnd FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
VideoGroup
Video 1
Input
Video Input Lock
Source
Input Detection
Detected Video Standard
Video Input Format
Pedestal
Output on Video Loss
Ident Text
MCTF
Adaptive Pre-processing
Bandwidth
Half Line Removal
logo
Upload New Logo File
Logo file
Logo insertion
A fixed logo position?
The X position of the logo
The Y position of the logo
HD to SD Video Down-conversion
Default Aspect Ratio Conversion
Use Input AFD
Action on AFD lost
Action on AFD code 0000
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-31
Front Panel Control
VBI Extraction
Descriptor Control
VBI Descriptor Mode
VBI Data Descriptor Insertion
VBI Teletext Descriptor Insertion
Teletext Descriptor Insertion
Proprietary Descriptor Insertion
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signalling
Video Index
Video Index Field 1
Video Index Field 2
Video Index Field 1
Video Index Field 2
SMPTE 2016
AFD Sustain
AFD Sustain Timeout
AFD Action on Reserved Codes
Closed Captions
Closed Captions Source
Timecode
TC Mode
TC External Source
TC Dropframes
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Insertion Timeout
Broadcaster ID Mode
Default Servicename
Broadcaster ID Source
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC Extraction
Max ANC Bit Rate
4-32
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Teletext
Teletext Source
Teletext Packetisation
SMPTE2031 Max. No. Teletext Lines
SMPTE2031 Teletext Present
Min # Teletext Packets
PTS on Teletext
Teletext Descriptor Page List
Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page Language
Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page Language
Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page Language
Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page Language
VBI Line Control
Field 1
VBI Line 9
VBI Line 10
VBI Line 11
VBI Line 12
VBI Line 13
VBI Line 14
VBI Line 15
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-33
Front Panel Control
VBI Line 16
VBI Line 17
VBI Line 18
VBI Line 19
VBI Line 20
VBI Line 21
VBI Line 22
Field 2
VBI Line 272
VBI Line 273
VBI Line 274
VBI Line 275
VBI Line 276
VBI Line 277
VBI Line 278
VBI Line 279
VBI Line 280
VBI Line 281
VBI Line 282
VBI Line 283
VBI Line 284
VBI Line 285
Field 1
VBI Line 6
VBI Line 7
VBI Line 8
VBI Line 9
VBI Line 10
VBI Line 11
VBI Line 12
VBI Line 13
VBI Line 14
VBI Line 15
4-34
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
VBI Line 16
VBI Line 17
VBI Line 18
VBI Line 19
VBI Line 20
VBI Line 21
VBI Line 22
VBI Line 23
Field 2
VBI Line 319
VBI Line 320
VBI Line 321
VBI Line 322
VBI Line 323
VBI Line 324
VBI Line 325
VBI Line 326
VBI Line 327
VBI Line 328
VBI Line 329
VBI Line 330
VBI Line 331
VBI Line 332
VBI Line 333
VBI Line 334
VBI Line 335
VBI Line 336
VBI in Picture
VBI in Picture
Video
Main Video
Video Encoder
Profile
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-35
Front Panel Control
Profile for SD input
Profile for HD input
Resolution
Video Bit Rate
Buffer Mode
Aspect Ratio
GOP Length
GOP Structure
Closed GOPs
Scene Cut Detection
Delay
Stills Detection
Film Mode
Inloop Filter
Max CABAC Bit Rate
SEI Encapsulation Mode
Frame Sync. Delay in SEI (3D Mode)
Splicing
Splicing Control
Splice Null Insertion
Audio Splicing
AS Index Control
DPI PID Index Control
AS Index 1
AS Index 2
DPI PID Index 1
DPI PID Index 2
Splice Status
Scte104 Messages In
Scte104 Message Error
Scte35 Messages Out
Pending Splices.
Splice Event Info
4-36
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Splice <n>
Splice Type
Out of Network
Unique Program ID
Event ID
Time to splice (H)
Time to splice (M)
Time to splice (S)
Time to splice (F)
Stream Output
Embedded PCR
Copyright
Original
PES Packet Per
AU Information Ctrl
Elementary Stream Stuffing
AR Signalling Output Control
AR Signalling Location
TC Output Location
Reflex
Reflex Configuration
Enable Reflex
Media SetMode
Source IP Addr
Mux Multicast Addr
Spare Mux Source IP Addr
Enc Multicast Addr
Tracking Encoder Source IP Addr
Tracking Encoder Control IP Addr
Tracking Encoder Module ID
Video PID
PCR PID
Reflex Transport Stream ID
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-37
Front Panel Control
TS Source IP Address
Reflex Status
Received Reflex Msg
Device Rx Counter
Device Tx Counter
Socket Rx Counter
Socket Tx Counter
PCR Excg Rx Counter
PCR Excg Tx Counter
Set Rate Src IP Addr
PCR Exchange Src IP Addr
SCR diff to be applied to ClocksFPGA
Audio Module
Advanced
AC-3 PMT / Descriptor Syntax
Audio <n>
Input
Input Format
Input Source
Output On Audio Loss
Source Switchout
PCM Bypass
Dolby E Program
Operation Mode
Downmix Parameters
Downmix Type
Downmix metadata override
Downmix metadata reversion mode
Center mix level
Surround mix level
Audio Status
Compressed Audio Locked
Downmix Active
4-38
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Level (L)
Level (R)
PCM Bypass Active
Switchout Active
Input Buffer Level
Input Bit Rate
Input Coding Mode
Dolby E
Dolby E Program Config
Dolby E Frame Rate
Dolby E Bit Depth
Resync Count
Dropped Frames
Repeated Frames
Bad RC Packets
Delay
Audio Loudness Status
Integrated Loudness
Short Term Loudness
Current Adjustment
Encode
Coding Standard
Bit Rate
Coding Mode
Metadata Controls Coding Mode
Metadata source type
Metadata override type
Metadata reversion mode type
Metadata preset type
Embedded PCR
AU Information Ctrl
Pass-thru
Channel Mode
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-39
Front Panel Control
Bit Depth
Channel Identification
Encapsulation
TNS (Temporal Noise Shaping)
PNS (Perceptual Noise Substitution)
SBR Signalling
Automatic Loudness Control
Operating Mode
Target Level
Time Period
Peak Limit
Maximum Boost
Maximum Attenuation
Preset
Reset Statistics
Advanced
Lip Sync Offset
Analogue audio reference level
Gain
Language
Language (Left)
Language (Right)
User Defined Language 1
User Defined Language 2
MPEG Version
Copyright
Original
De-emphasis
Audio description
Action on control track Loss
Action when silence detected
Silence Threshold
Silence Period
4-40
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Dolby Metadata Presets
Dolby Metadata Preset <n>
Preset name
Dialogue normalization level
Bitstream mode
Line mode compression profile
RF mode compression profile
RF overmodulation protection
Center mix level
Surround mix level
Dolby Surround mode
Audio production information exists
Mixing level
Room type
Copyright flag
Original bitstream flag
Enable extended bitstream information
Preferred downmix mode
Lt/Rt center mix level
Lt/Rt surround mix level
Lo/Ro center mix level
Lo/Ro surround mix level
Dolby Surround EX mode
A/D converter type
Digital de-emphasis
DC high pass filter enable
Bandwidth low-pass filter enable
Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable
Surround attenuation enable
Surround phase shift enable
Metadata Status
Audio Node
Input Metadata Status
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-41
Front Panel Control
Dialogue normalization level
Coding mode
LFE channel enable
Bitstream mode
Line mode compression profile
RF mode compression profile
RF overmodulation protection
Center mix level
Surround mix level
Dolby Surround mode
Audio production information exists
Mixing level
Room type
Copyright flag
Original bitstream flag
Preferred downmix mode
Lt/Rt center mix level
Lt/Rt surround mix level
Lo/Ro center mix level
Lo/Ro surround mix level
Dolby Surround EX mode
A/D converter type
DC high pass filter enable
Bandwidth low-pass filter enable
Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable
Surround attenuation enable
Surround phase shift enable
Output Metadata Status
Dialogue normalization level
Coding mode
LFE channel enable
Bitstream mode
Line mode compression profile
4-42
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
RF mode compression profile
RF overmodulation protection
Center mix level
Surround mix level
Dolby Surround mode
Audio production information exists
Mixing level
Room type
Copyright flag
Original bitstream flag
Preferred downmix mode
Lt/Rt center mix level
Lt/Rt surround mix level
Lo/Ro center mix level
Lo/Ro surround mix level
Dolby Surround EX mode
A/D converter type
DC high pass filter enable
Bandwidth low-pass filter enable
Low-frequency effects low pass filter enable
Surround attenuation enable
Surround phase shift enable
Video Input Port
ioPortType
ioDirection
ioPortIndex
Audio Input Port 1
ioPortType
ioDirection
ioPortIndex
Audio Input Port 2
ioPortType
ioDirection
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-43
Front Panel Control
ioPortIndex
4.4.2.2
CE-x, CE-xA Encoder Advanced Menu
Table 4.14 CE-x, CE-xA Encoder Advanced Menu
Build
Card Id
Name
Software Version
Hardware Version
S Number
Serial Number
Versions
Advanced
Chip Id
Requested Air Flow
Motion FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Coding FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Backend FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
4.4.2.3
CE-a J2K Advanced Menu
Table 4.15 CE-a J2K Advanced Menu
Build
Card Id
Name
Software Version
4-44
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Hardware Version
CPLD Version
Hardware S Number
S Number
Serial Number
Advanced
Chip Id
Requested Air Flow
PCR Interval
FrontEnd FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
BackEnd FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Video
Video 1
Input
Video Input Lock
Source
Input Detection
Detected Video Standard
Video Input Format
Output on Video Loss
VBI Extraction
Generic ANC
Generic ANC Extraction
Max ANC Bit Rate
VBI in Picture
Enable VBI in Picture
Video
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-45
Front Panel Control
Main Video
Video Encoder
Profile
Profile for SD input
Profile for HD input
Resolution
Video Bit Rate
Buffer Mode
Delay
Stream Output
Embedded PCR
Copyright
Original
Reflex
Audio Module
Audio <n>
Input
Input Format // LPCM, Dolby E
Input Source
Output On Audio Loss
Audio Status
Input Bit Rate
Delay
Encode
Coding Standard
Bit Rate
Coding Mode
Embedded PCR
Passthru
Channel Mode
Bit Depth
Channel Identification
Advanced
4-46
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Lip Sync Offset
Language
Language (Left)
Language (Right)
User Language 1
User Language 2
Video Input Port
ioPortType
ioDirection
ioPortIndex
Audio Input Port 1
ioPortType
ioDirection
ioPortIndex
Audio Input Port 2
ioPortType
ioDirection
ioPortIndex
4.4.2.4
CE-HEVC Encoder Advanced Menu
This section provides the advanced menu options for the CE-HEVC card.
Table 4.16 CE-HEVC Encoder Advanced Menu
Build
Card Id
Name
Software Version
Hardware Version
CPLD Version
Hardware S Number
S Number
Advanced
Chip Id
PCR Interval
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-47
Front Panel Control
BackEnd FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Encoder Sensor Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Audio DSP Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Video Group
Input
Video Input Lock
Source
Input Detection
Video Input Format
UHD Pixel Format
Output on Video Loss
Indent Text
Logo
Video Format Conversion
VBI Extraction
Video
Main Video
Encode
Profile
Signalling Options
Resolution
Buffer Mode
Video Bitrate
Aspect Ratio
4-48
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
GOP Length
GOP Structure
Closed GOPs
Delay
Splicing
Splicing Control
Splicing Null Insertion
Audio Splicing
Splice Status
Scte104 Messages In
Scte104 Message Error
Scte35 Messages Out
Pending Splices.
Splice Event Info
Splice <n>
Splice Type
Out of Network
Unique Program ID
Event ID
Time to splice (H)
Time to splice (M)
Time to splice (S)
Time to splice (F)
Stream Output
Embedded PCR
Copyrights
Original
AR Signalling Output Control
TC Output Location
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-49
Front Panel Control
4.4.2.5
Satellite Modulator Option Card Advanced Menu (AVP 3000)
This section provides the advanced menu options for the Satellite Modulator card.
Table 4.17 Satellite Modulator Option Card Advanced Menu (AVP 3000)
Build
Satellite Modulator Card ID
Name
Software Version
Hardware Version
S Number
Advanced
FPGA Temperature
Backend FPGA Warning Temperature Threshold
FPGA Over Temperature Threshold
FPGA Temperature
Card Id
Input Parameters
Primary Input Source
Secondary Input Source
Input Select
Input Mode
Input Format
Rate Adaptation
Input Buffer Size
Clock Reference Mode
RAS Scrambling
RAS Key
RAS Scrambling for TS2 (Only available when DVB-S2 Mode is set to VCM.)
RAS Key for TS2 (Only available when DVB-S2 Mode is set to VCM.)
RAS Version
Modulation Parameters
Modulation Standard
Modulation State
DVB-S2 Mode
4-50
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Stream Synchronization Mode
Null Packet Deletion
FEC Rate
Frame Size
Modulation
Pilots
Stream Synchronization Mode or TS2
Null Packet Deletion for TS2
FEC Rate for TS2
Frame Size for TS2
Modulation for TS2
Pilots for TS2
NCR Stamping PID
Symbol Mapping Mode
PL Scrambling Sequence Number
Symbol Rate
Roll-off Factor
Bandwidth
Output Parameters
RF Carrier ID State
Output Select
Output State
Output Power-up State
IF Output
Frequency Input Mode
IF Frequency
Uplink Frequency
Reduced IF Line-up Power
Nominal IF Power
IF Spectrum Sense
Spectrum Sense
IF Tilt
IF Up-converter Frequency
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-51
Front Panel Control
L-Band Output
Frequency Input Mode
L-Band Frequency
Uplink Frequency
Reduced L-Band Line-up Power
Nominal L-Band Power
L-Band Spectrum Sense
L-Band Tilt
L-Band Up-converter Frequency
Up-converter Power
Up-converter Reference
Status Parameter
Primary Stream Bit Rate
Secondary Stream Bit Rate
Input Stream Buffer Level
TS2 Buffer Level
Maximum Input Data Rate
Up-converter Voltage
Up-converter Current
Beacon Receiver Voltage
PL Efficiency
Symbol Rate Offset
MODCOD Statistics Table
Reset MODCOD Statistics
0 Dummy PL Frame
1 QPSK 1/4
2 QPSK 1/3
3 QPSK 2/5
4 QPSK 1/2
5 QPSK 3/5
6 QPSK 2/3
7 QPSK 3/4
8 QPSK 4/5
4-52
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
9 QPSK 5/6
10 QPSK 8/9
11 QPSK 9/10
12 8PSK 3/5
13 8PSK 2/3
14 8PSK 3/4
15 8PSK 5/6
16 8PSK 8/9
17 8PSK 9/10
18 16APSK 2/3
19 16APSK 3/4
20 16APSK 4/5
21 16APSK 5/6
22 16APSK 8/9
23 16APSK 9/10
24 32APSK 3/4
25 32APSK 4/5
26 32APSK 5/6
27 32APSK 8/9
28 32APSK 9/10
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
4.4.2.6
ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu
The front panel provides full access to the ASI option card's capabilities. The
advanced menu is listed in the table below.
Table 4.18 ASI I/O Option Card Advanced Menu
Build
ASI IO Option Card Id
Name
Build Date
Software Version
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-53
Front Panel Control
Hardware Version
S Number
Advanced
Requested Air Flow
FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Card Id
ASI Output Streams
ASI Output <n>
Output Enabled
Time Stamp Filter Enabled
Advanced
Byte Mode Output
Good Average
Average Interpacket time
Good Values
Force Dump
Output Mode
port
Port Type
Direction
Index
port
Port Type
Direction
Index
ASI Input Port 1
Port Type
Direction
Index
ASI Input Port 2
4-54
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
Port Type
Direction
Index
4.4.2.7
G.703 Transceiver Card Advanced Menu
The front panel provides full access to the G.703 transceiver card capabilities. The
advanced menu is listed in the table below.
Table 4.19 G.703 Transceiver Card Advanced Menu
Build
Common Processor Option Card Id
Name
Software Version
Hardware Version
Hardware S Number
S Number
Advanced
Backend FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
G.703 I/O Ports
G.703 I/O Port 1
PDH Carrier
Framing
Receiver
Status
Packet Size
Randomization
FEAC
Stuff Packet Ratio
TS Bitrate
ATM Configuration
ATM Mode
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-55
Front Panel Control
Alpha
Delta
VPI
Cell Header Correction
Cell Header Error Ignore
DVB Configuration
Destuffing
Derandomization
RS Decoding
Deinterleaving
Advanced
Packet Size
#Sync Bytes To Lock
Sync Miss Sample Size
Sync Miss Limit
Transmitter
Status
Null Packet Ratio
Stuff Packet Ratio
TS Bit Rate
ATM Configuration
ATM Mode
VPI
DVB Configuration
G703 Stuffing
Randomization
RS Encoding
Interleaving
4-56
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
4.4.2.8
GPI Card Advanced Menu
The front panel provides full access to the capabilities of the GPI card. The
advanced menu is listed in the table below.
Table 4.20 GPI Card Advanced Menu
Build
Data & GPI Card Id
Name
Build Date
Software Version
Hardware Version
S Number
Advanced
Requested Air Flow
Backend FPGA Temperature
Temperature
Temperature Alarm Threshold
Over Temperature Threshold
Card ID
GPI Input Status
GPI Streams
GPI Data Stream
Source Unique ID
Stream Type
Stream Subtype
Stream Port
Stream Device
Stream Destination List
Output Stream
Source Unique ID
Stream Type
Stream Subtype
Stream Port
Stream Device
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-57
Front Panel Control
Stream Destination List
Last GPI Input
Last Input Time
External Reset Input
RS232 Input
PES Streams
RS232 Data Stream
Source Unique ID
Stream Type
Stream Subtype
Stream Port
Embedded PCR
Bit Rate
DVB Mode
ATSC Mode
Descriptor Group
Stream Device
Stream Destination List
Input Data Rate
Output Data Rate
Enabled
Encoding
Baud rate
Buffer Mode
Component Tag
GPI Splicing
SCTE104 Streams
SCTE-104 ChannelX
Source Unique ID
Stream Type
Stream Subtype
Stream Port
Stream Destination List
4-58
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Front Panel Control
GPI Pin Settings
GPI Input Pin n Setup
GPI Input Pin Mode
Splicing Setup
SCTE-104 Channel
GPI Pin Trigger Polarity
Out Pre-roll
Return Pre-roll
Return to Network
Splice Duration
Fixed Delay
Splice ID Increment Mode
Avail Descriptor
Provider Avail Id
GPI Input Pin State
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
4-59
Front Panel Control
BLANK
4-60
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5 Web GUI Control
Chapter 5
Contents
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.1.1
5.1.1.2
5.1.1.3
5.1.1.4
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3
5.2.1.4
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
5.2.2.3
5.2.2.4
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.3
5.3.2.4
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.1.1
5.4.1.2
5.4.1.3
5.4.2
5.4.2.1
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Using the Web Graphical User Interface..............................................5-7
Appearance and General Features......................................................5-7
Header ................................................................................................5-7
Navigation Area ...................................................................................5-8
Widgets ...............................................................................................5-8
Footer ..................................................................................................5-9
Supported Actions and Features .........................................................5-9
Pages ................................................................................................5-10
Dashboard Page ...............................................................................5-10
Dashboard Page Widgets ..................................................................5-11
Outputs Widget..................................................................................5-11
Bit Rate Utilization widget .................................................................. 5-11
Device Information Widget................................................................. 5-12
Alarm Monitor Widget ........................................................................ 5-13
Using the Dashboard Page................................................................5-13
Accessing the Properties of Transport Streams, Services or
Components Associated with an Output ............................................ 5-13
Checking the Bit Rates of the Different Components in a
Transport Stream .............................................................................. 5-14
Setting Alarm Severity ....................................................................... 5-15
Accepting Hardware Configuration Changes ..................................... 5-15
Stored Configurations Page...............................................................5-15
Stored Configuration Page Widgets................................................... 5-16
Stored Configurations Widget ............................................................ 5-16
Configuration Workbench Widget ...................................................... 5-16
Using the Stored Configuration Page ................................................ 5-17
Storing the Current Configuration ...................................................... 5-17
Restoring a Configuration .................................................................. 5-18
Exporting a Configuration .................................................................. 5-18
Importing a Configuration .................................................................. 5-18
Device Configuration Page ................................................................5-19
Quick Setup Tab................................................................................5-19
Configurations Items Widget .............................................................. 5-20
Properties Widget ..............................................................................5-20
Information Widget ............................................................................ 5-20
Advanced Setup Tab .........................................................................5-21
Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget ...................................... 5-21
5-1
Web GUI Control
5.4.2.2
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.4
5.4.4.1
5.4.4.2
5.4.4.3
5.4.4.4
5.4.4.5
5.4.4.6
5.4.4.7
5.4.5
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.1.1
5.5.1.2
5.5.1.3
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.3
5.5.2.4
5.5.2.5
5.5.2.6
5.5.2.7
5.5.2.8
5.5.2.9
5.5.2.10
5.5.2.11
5.5.2.12
5.5.2.13
5.5.3
5.5.3.1
5.5.3.2
5.5.3.3
5.5.3.4
5.5.3.5
5.5.4
5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
5.5.4.3
5.5.4.4
5.5.4.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.1.1
5.6.1.2
5.6.2
5.6.3
5-2
Properties Widget ............................................................................. 5-22
Using the Device Configuration Page................................................ 5-23
Customizing the Quick Setup Menu .................................................. 5-23
Configuring Option Cards Using the Device Configuration Page ....... 5-24
CE VCM Option Cards ...................................................................... 5-24
ASI Option Card ................................................................................ 5-24
G.703 Transceiver Card .................................................................... 5-24
GPI Option Card ............................................................................... 5-26
External Sync Input Option Card ....................................................... 5-33
Satellite Modulator Option Card (AVP 3000 Voyager Only) ............... 5-33
DVB RF Carrier ID ............................................................................ 5-33
Configuring Base Unit LDAP User Authentication ............................. 5-38
Service Configuration Page............................................................... 5-40
Widgets ............................................................................................. 5-40
Inputs Widget .................................................................................... 5-40
Outputs Widget ................................................................................. 5-41
Properties Widget ............................................................................. 5-42
Using the Service Configuration Page............................................... 5-43
Adding a Transport Stream to an Output ........................................... 5-43
Adding a Service to a Transport Stream............................................ 5-43
Adding a Component to a Transport Stream ..................................... 5-44
Deleting Transport Streams, Services or Components ...................... 5-44
Manually Changing the Setmode State of a Transport Stream .......... 5-45
Copying Transport Streams, Services or Components ...................... 5-45
Moving Transport Streams, Services or Components ....................... 5-46
Cloning Transport Streams ............................................................... 5-47
Disabling a Transport Stream if Audio or Video Lock is Lost ............. 5-47
Disabling a Transport Stream if a Critical Alarm or an Upstream
Critical Alarm is Raised ..................................................................... 5-48
Restoring a Transport Stream if the Auto Disable Condition is not
Met.................................................................................................... 5-48
Reserving Bandwidth for Transport Streams ..................................... 5-48
Providing More Space for Configuration Items in the Properties
Widget .............................................................................................. 5-48
Configuring Option Cards Using the Service Configuration Page ...... 5-49
CE-a VCM (Video Compression Module) .......................................... 5-49
CE-a J2K VCM.................................................................................. 5-71
CE-x VCM ......................................................................................... 5-77
CE-x Analogue VCM ......................................................................... 5-97
CE-HEVC VCM ............................................................................... 5-116
Configuring Transport Streams ....................................................... 5-134
Transport Stream Configuration ...................................................... 5-134
Internal PSIP Data Insertion ............................................................ 5-138
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) .............................. 5-140
ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE 2012-1, 2) ................................................ 5-140
VLAN Tagging................................................................................. 5-143
Support Page .................................................................................. 5-144
General Tab .................................................................................... 5-145
Import and Export Widget ............................................................... 5-145
Log Files Widget ............................................................................. 5-145
Version Tab .................................................................................... 5-145
Licenses Tab .................................................................................. 5-146
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.6.4
Device Management Tab................................................................. 5-147
List of Figures
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Figure 5.4
Figure 5.5
Figure 5.6
Figure 5.7
Figure 5.8
Figure 5.9
Figure 5.10
Figure 5.11
Figure 5.12
Figure 5.13
Figure 5.14
Figure 5.15
Figure 5.16
Figure 5.17
Figure 5.18
Figure 5.19
Figure 5.20
Figure 5.21
Figure 5.22
Figure 5.23
Figure 5.24
Figure 5.25
Figure 5.26
Figure 5.27
Figure 5.28
Figure 5.29
Figure 5.30
Figure 5.31
Figure 5.32
Figure 5.33
Figure 5.34
Figure 5.35
Figure 5.36
Figure 5.37
Figure 5.38
Figure 5.39
Figure 5.40
Figure 5.41
Figure 5.42
Figure 5.43
Figure 5.44
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Main Components of the GUI (Advanced View) ................................ 5-7
Header ..............................................................................................5-7
Navigation Area.................................................................................5-8
Example of a Widget .........................................................................5-8
Example of an Accordion Panel ........................................................5-9
Footer ...............................................................................................5-9
Dashboard Page .............................................................................5-10
Outputs Widget ...............................................................................5-11
Bit Rate Utilization Widget ............................................................... 5-12
Device Information Widget .............................................................. 5-13
Alarm Monitor Widget ...................................................................... 5-13
Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream Accordion Panel ......... 5-14
Stored Configurations Page ............................................................ 5-15
Stored Configuration Widget ........................................................... 5-16
Configuration Workbench Widget .................................................... 5-16
Quick Setup Tab .............................................................................5-19
Configuration Items Widget ............................................................. 5-20
Properties Widget............................................................................ 5-20
Information Widget .......................................................................... 5-21
Advanced Setup Tab ....................................................................... 5-21
Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget ................................... 5-22
Properties Widget............................................................................ 5-22
GPI Pin Setting via GUI ................................................................... 5-26
Load Stored Configurations ............................................................. 5-27
GPI Input Pin Splicing Setup ........................................................... 5-28
VCM Splicing Control ...................................................................... 5-30
VCM SCTE 104 Input Selection ...................................................... 5-30
Alarm Severity Configuration ........................................................... 5-31
Data Input Configuration ................................................................. 5-32
DVB RF Carrier ID .......................................................................... 5-33
DVB RF Carrier ID Tab ................................................................... 5-34
Remote Authentication and HTTP Server Option Properties ........... 5-38
Service Configuration Video Page ................................................... 5-40
Inputs Widget ..................................................................................5-41
Outputs Widget ...............................................................................5-42
Properties Widget............................................................................ 5-42
Add Service Menu ........................................................................... 5-44
Deleting a Service ........................................................................... 5-45
Dragging a Transport Stream or Service ......................................... 5-46
Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI ............................ 5-139
Support Page > General Tab ........................................................ 5-145
Support Page > Versions Tab ....................................................... 5-146
Support Page > Licenses Tab ....................................................... 5-146
Support Page > Device Management Tab..................................... 5-147
5-3
Web GUI Control
List of Tables
Table 5.1
Table 5.2
Table 5.3
Table 5.4
Table 5.5
Table 5.6
Table 5.7
Table 5.8
Table 5.9
Table 5.10
Table 5.11
Table 5.12
Table 5.13
Table 5.14
Table 5.15
Table 5.16
Table 5.17
Table 5.18
Table 5.19
Table 5.20
Table 5.21
Table 5.22
Table 5.23
Table 5.24
Table 5.25
Table 5.26
Table 5.27
Table 5.28
Table 5.29
Table 5.30
Table 5.31
Table 5.32
Table 5.33
Table 5.34
Table 5.35
Table 5.36
Table 5.37
Table 5.38
Table 5.39
Table 5.40
Table 5.41
Table 5.42
Table 5.43
Table 5.44
Table 5.45
Table 5.46
Table 5.47
5-4
Setmode State Color Codes ........................................................... 5-14
Stored Configuration Parameters.................................................... 5-17
ASI Output Configuration Parameters ............................................. 5-24
Transmitter Configuration Parameters ............................................ 5-24
GPI Input Pin Configuration ............................................................ 5-26
Splicing Set Up Options .................................................................. 5-29
Data Input Configuration Options .................................................... 5-32
Satellite Modulator Input Configuration Parameters ........................ 5-34
Satellite Modulator Modulation Configuration Parameters............... 5-35
Satellite Modulator Output Configuration Parameters ..................... 5-36
LDAP Authentication Configuration Parameters ............................. 5-38
Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters .................................. 5-49
Video Encoding Parameters ........................................................... 5-51
Video Output Parameters ............................................................... 5-52
Video Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-53
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters .................... 5-53
Audio Input Parameters .................................................................. 5-56
Audio Encoding Standards ............................................................. 5-57
MPEG Layer 2 Parameters ............................................................. 5-57
Dolby Digital Parameters ................................................................ 5-58
AAC-LC Parameters ....................................................................... 5-59
HE-AAC Parameters....................................................................... 5-60
LPCM Pass-thru Parameters .......................................................... 5-60
Dolby-E Pass-thru Parameters ....................................................... 5-61
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus Pass-thru Parameters............. 5-61
Audio Description Service Parameters............................................ 5-62
Automatic Loudness Control Parameters ........................................ 5-62
Audio Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-64
Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters ................................................ 5-64
Splicing Parameters........................................................................ 5-66
Slicing Component Parameters ...................................................... 5-67
Teletext Parameters ....................................................................... 5-67
Teletext Component Parameters .................................................... 5-68
VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters ................................................. 5-68
ANC Component Parameters ......................................................... 5-71
PCR Stream Configuration Parameters .......................................... 5-71
Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters .................................. 5-71
Video Encoding Parameters ........................................................... 5-72
Video Output Parameters ............................................................... 5-73
Video Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-74
VBI Stream and ANC/DVB Subtitle Stream Parameters ................. 5-74
Audio Input Parameters .................................................................. 5-74
Audio Encoding Standards ............................................................. 5-75
Pass-thru Parameters ..................................................................... 5-75
Audio Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-76
VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters ................................................. 5-76
ANC Component Parameters ......................................................... 5-76
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.48
Table 5.49
Table 5.50
Table 5.51
Table 5.52
Table 5.53
Table 5.54
Table 5.55
Table 5.56
Table 5.57
Table 5.58
Table 5.59
Table 5.60
Table 5.61
Table 5.62
Table 5.63
Table 5.64
Table 5.65
Table 5.66
Table 5.67
Table 5.68
Table 5.69
Table 5.70
Table 5.71
Table 5.72
Table 5.73
Table 5.74
Table 5.75
Table 5.76
Table 5.77
Table 5.78
Table 5.79
Table 5.80
Table 5.81
Table 5.82
Table 5.83
Table 5.84
Table 5.85
Table 5.86
Table 5.87
Table 5.88
Table 5.89
Table 5.90
Table 5.91
Table 5.92
Table 5.93
Table 5.94
Table 5.95
Table 5.96
Table 5.97
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
PCR Stream Configuration Parameters ........................................... 5-77
Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters................................... 5-77
Video Encoding Parameters ............................................................ 5-79
Video Output Parameters ................................................................ 5-81
Video Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-82
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters ..................... 5-83
Audio Input Parameters................................................................... 5-85
Audio Encoding Standards .............................................................. 5-85
MPEG Layer 2 Parameters ............................................................. 5-86
Dolby Digital Parameters................................................................. 5-86
AAC-LC Parameters........................................................................ 5-87
HE-AAC Parameters ....................................................................... 5-88
Pass-thru Parameters ..................................................................... 5-88
Audio Description Service Parameters ............................................ 5-89
Audio Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-89
Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters................................................. 5-90
Splicing Parameters ........................................................................ 5-91
Slicing Component Parameters ....................................................... 5-92
Teletext Parameters ........................................................................ 5-93
Teletext Component Parameters ..................................................... 5-93
VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters ................................................. 5-94
ANC component Parameters........................................................... 5-96
PCR Stream Configuration Parameters ........................................... 5-96
Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters................................... 5-97
Video Encoding Parameters ............................................................ 5-99
Video Output Parameters .............................................................. 5-101
Video Component Parameters ...................................................... 5-101
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters ................... 5-102
Audio Input Parameters................................................................. 5-104
Audio Encoding Standards ............................................................ 5-105
MPEG Layer 2 Parameters ........................................................... 5-105
Dolby Digital Parameters............................................................... 5-106
AAC-LC Parameters...................................................................... 5-106
HE-AAC Parameters ..................................................................... 5-107
Pass-thru Parameters ................................................................... 5-108
Audio Description Service Parameters .......................................... 5-108
Audio Component Parameters ...................................................... 5-109
Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters............................................... 5-109
Splicing Parameters ...................................................................... 5-111
Slicing Component Parameters ..................................................... 5-111
Teletext Parameters ...................................................................... 5-112
Teletext Component Parameters ................................................... 5-113
VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters ............................................... 5-113
ANC Component Parameters ........................................................ 5-115
PCR Stream Configuration Parameters ......................................... 5-116
Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters................................. 5-116
Video Encoding Parameters .......................................................... 5-118
Output Entropy Encoding .............................................................. 5-120
Video Output Parameters .............................................................. 5-120
Video Component Parameters ...................................................... 5-121
5-5
Web GUI Control
Table 5.98
Table 5.99
Table 5.100
Table 5.101
Table 5.102
Table 5.103
Table 5.104
Table 5.105
Table 5.106
Table 5.107
Table 5.108
Table 5.109
Table 5.110
Table 5.111
Table 5.112
Table 5.113
Table 5.114
Table 5.115
Table 5.116
Table 5.117
Table 5.118
Table 5.119
Table 5.120
Table 5.121
Table 5.122
Table 5.123
Table 5.124
Table 5.125
5-6
Available Multichannel Encoding Profiles/Levels .......................... 5-122
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters .................. 5-123
ARC Parameters........................................................................... 5-123
Audio Input Parameters ................................................................ 5-124
Audio Encoding Standards ........................................................... 5-124
MPEG Layer 2 Parameters ........................................................... 5-125
Dolby Digital Parameters .............................................................. 5-125
AAC-LC Parameters ..................................................................... 5-126
HE-AAC Parameters..................................................................... 5-127
Pass-thru Parameters ................................................................... 5-127
Audio Description Service Parameters.......................................... 5-128
Audio Component Parameters ...................................................... 5-128
Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters .............................................. 5-129
Splicing Parameters...................................................................... 5-130
Slicing Component Parameters .................................................... 5-131
Teletext Parameters ..................................................................... 5-131
Teletext Component Parameters .................................................. 5-132
Ancillary Data Parameters ............................................................ 5-132
ANC Component Parameters ....................................................... 5-133
PCR Stream Configuration Parameters ........................................ 5-134
General Transport Stream Settings............................................... 5-134
Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams ..................... 5-136
Service Settings ............................................................................ 5-137
FEC Parameters ........................................................................... 5-140
Column FEC ................................................................................. 5-142
Column and Row FEC .................................................................. 5-142
VLAN Creation Options................................................................. 5-143
VLAN Tag Sharing Options ........................................................... 5-144
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.1
Using the Web Graphical User Interface
The Advanced Video Processor (AVP) is designed to be configured and controlled
by its own web graphical user interface (GUI).
The Graphical User Interface uses widget based architecture. This section describes
the functions and elements of the GUI, referenced as the Advanced View.
5.1.1
Appearance and General Features
The appearance and the main components of the Advanced View are shown in
Figure 5.1.
Pages Tabs
Alarm Status Bar
Widgets
Figure 5.1 Main Components of the GUI (Advanced View)
5.1.1.1
Header
The header contains the Company Logo, the Model Name and the Unit Name, the
Alarm Status Bar, the Output Status Indicators, and the name of the recently
loaded configuration, if any.
Figure 5.2 Header
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-7
Web GUI Control
The unit can be easily identified by the Unit Name when browsing remotely. The
name can be changed by double clicking on it.
The color of the Alarm Status Bar indicates the highest actual alarm severity. The
bar is red in case of an alarm with critical severity, orange if an alarm or warning
with any severity other than critical and no alarm with critical severity is issued, and
green otherwise.
5.1.1.2
Navigation Area
The unit is controlled through five different web pages, each of them responsible for
a well-defined control task. The pages can be accessed through the top menu in the
Navigation area. Where appropriate, control tasks are further broken down into
smaller subtasks. Each subtask has its own tab.
Figure 5.3 Navigation Area
The area below the tabs serves as a taskbar with two buttons on it. The Apply All
button allows the user to commit the changes made to any of the parameters on the
displayed page or tab. With the Discard All button the changes can be revoked and
the state prior to the modifications can be recalled. Modified parameters are
highlighted in orange. If the user first modifies some parameters and then tries to
navigate away from the page or tab, a warning dialog is displayed. The buttons do
not appear on every page.
The information next to the buttons displays the number of running tasks and the
processing status of them.
5.1.1.3
Widgets
Widgets are containers that allow the user to perform specific actions or display
relevant information. Widget can be resized by dragging the splitters between them.
By double clicking on the splitters the widgets can be collapsed to provide more
room for neighboring widgets. Double clicking on a splitter again redisplays the
previously hidden element.
Figure 5.4 Example of a Widget
5-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Where relevant, objects can be manipulated by drag and drop within or between the
widgets.
Note:
5.1.1.3.1
Avoid sudden moves with the mouse while dragging and dropping.
Accordion Panels
Accordion panels are separate areas within widgets which can be collapsed and
expanded by clicking on the small arrow on the top left hand of the panel.
Figure 5.5 Example of an Accordion Panel
5.1.1.4
Footer
The footer on the page displays copyright information and contains a link through
which Ericsson can be contacted. Moreover, the color of the footer indicates the
status of the link to the unit being controlled through the web user interface. Orange
color indicates that the link to the unit is down; navy blue indicates that the link is up.
Figure 5.6 Footer
5.1.2
Supported Actions and Features
•
Drag and Drop – The web GUI supports drag and drop, for example in the
Configuration > Services page, to enables you to quickly copy services and
profiles. Additionally, when selecting services and profiles, the web GUI
supports Shift-Click operation to enables you to select multiple adjacent items,
and Ctrl-Click operation when selecting multiple non-adjacent items.
•
Drop-Down Menus – Some web GUI pages provide drop-down menus to
enables you to select from the available options.
•
Right-Click/Context Menus – Some web GUI pages provide right-click menus
for speedier configuration.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-9
Web GUI Control
5.1.3
•
Parameter Highlighting – When you modify service and profile properties, any
changes you make will be highlighted as orange text. These changes will not
be carried out until they are confirmed, by clicking the Apply All green button.
•
Web Page Resizing and Collapsing – To enable you to view just the
information that you need, the panes displayed on some web pages may be
resized by dragging the pane boundary, or collapsed by clicking on the 
symbol in the pane boundary. If your monitor screen width is less than 1300
pixels, panes may be collapsed automatically.
Pages
The control options of the unit are grouped into five categories. Each of the
categories is represented by a page. They are as follows:
•
Dashboard
•
Stored Configurations
•
Device Configuration
•
Service Configuration
•
Support
Each page is described in the following sections and the descriptions are followed
by tasks that can be performed on these pages.
5.2
Dashboard Page
The Dashboard page provides detailed information about the device and the
Transport Streams.
Figure 5.7 Dashboard Page
5-10
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.2.1
Dashboard Page Widgets
5.2.1.1
Outputs Widget
The Outputs widget lists the items within the Transport Streams set up for the
different outputs. If you want to quickly edit the properties of an item (other than the
output itself), select it by clicking on its name with the left mouse button, then either
select the Edit Properties option from the Actions menu, or right click on the item
and select the same option from the context menu. You will be directed to the
Service Configuration page with the respective item selected in the Outputs
widget there.
Figure 5.8 Outputs Widget
5.2.1.2
Bit Rate Utilization widget
The Bit Rate Utilization widget provides status information about the different
Transport Streams by color coding them according to the legend shown at the
bottom of the Transport Stream Rates accordion panel. (For the meaning of the
respective states and colors refer to Bit Rate Tracking.) Moreover, the useful and
total bit rates of each Transport Stream are also shown. Click on a Transport Stream
here and a pie chart will be displayed in the Component Bit Rates per Transport
Stream accordion panel with the bit rates of the individual services and
components.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-11
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.9 Bit Rate Utilization Widget
5.2.1.3
Device Information Widget
The Device Information widget provides information on the unit, the option cards
and the network configuration. If there is a configuration mismatch in one of the
slots, an alarm is raised and displayed in the Alarm Monitor widget. In this case,
the Accept Hardware Configuration button is shown below the slot information. By
clicking on the button, the current configuration can be accepted. After accepting the
hardware configuration, the alarm is ceased.
5-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.10 Device Information Widget
5.2.1.4
Alarm Monitor Widget
The Alarm Monitor widget displays the current alarms and an alarm history sorted
by severity. The alarms can be expanded or collapsed by clicking on the arrow next
to their name.
Figure 5.11 Alarm Monitor Widget
5.2.2
Using the Dashboard Page
This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Dashboard page.
5.2.2.1
Accessing the Properties of Transport Streams, Services or Components
Associated with an Output
To directly access the properties of a Transport Stream, service or component from
the Dashboard, do the following:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-13
Web GUI Control
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component
whose parameters you want to access.
2. Right click on the selected item, and choose Edit Properties from the context
menu.
3. The view will change to the Service Configuration page with the item selected
in the Outputs widget.
The Setmode state is reflected how the Transport Streams are color coded in the
Transport Stream Rates accordion panel of the Bit Rate Utilization widget. The
color codes are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
5.2.2.2
Setmode State Color Codes
State
Color
Online
green
Offline
grey
Preview
light green
Retire
orange
Checking the Bit Rates of the Different Components in a Transport Stream
To check the bit rates of services and components in a Transport Stream, do the
following:
1. In the Transport Stream Rates accordion panel of the Bit Rate Utilization
widget, click on the Transport Stream whose components you want to check.
2. The bit rates are shown in a table in the Component Bit Rates per Transport
Stream accordion panel. The bit rates of the components are also shown if the
mouse is hovered over a component in the pie chart.
Figure 5.12 Component Bit Rates per Transport Stream Accordion Panel
5-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.2.2.3
Setting Alarm Severity
To set the severity of any of the current alarms or any alarms raised since power up,
do the following:
1. On the Current or History tab in the Alarm Monitor widget, click on the arrow
next to the alarm whose severity you want to modify.
2. In the Severity drop down list, set the required severity level.
5.2.2.4
Accepting Hardware Configuration Changes
When the persistent store is cleared, the hardware configuration settings are also
deleted. After the unit is rebooted an alarm will be raised to signify that the hardware
configuration has been changed. This is normal and does not indicate any
malfunction. To clear the alarm, do the following:
1. In the Option Slot Summary accordion of the Device Configuration widget,
click on the Accept Hardware Configuration.
2. The respective alarms are cleared.
5.3
Stored Configurations Page
The Stored Configuration page allows saving the current configuration to or
restoring a stored configuration from the unit. To load or save a configuration
through the front panel, select Manage Configuration.
Figure 5.13 Stored Configurations Page
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-15
Web GUI Control
5.3.1
Stored Configuration Page Widgets
This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Stored Configurations
page.
5.3.1.1
Stored Configurations Widget
The Stored Configurations widget lists 64 slots to which configurations can be
saved or from which configurations can be restored. If you click on an entry, the
corresponding information is shown in the Configuration Workbench widget.
Figure 5.14 Stored Configuration Widget
5.3.1.2
Configuration Workbench Widget
The Configuration Workbench widget displays the information about the slot
selected in the Stored Configurations widget. Moreover, it lets the user overwrite,
restore, delete or export the configuration in the selected slot.
Figure 5.15 Configuration Workbench Widget
Note:
5-16
The format of the files exported through the Stored Configurations page is
not compatible with the format of the configurations saved on the Support
page.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.3.2
Using the Stored Configuration Page
This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Stored Configuration
Page.
5.3.2.1
Storing the Current Configuration
The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. On
delivery, all store locations are empty. When the user has configured the unit with a
complete set of parameters the configuration can be saved to a store location.
Configurations can be saved at any time. To save the current configuration, do the
following:
1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the slot you want to use for storing
the configuration. If the slot is not empty, it will be overwritten.
2. In the Name field in the Configuration Workbench widget, enter a name for the
configuration.
3. You can also add a description in the Description field if you wish. The
description can help identifying the configuration in the future.
4. Click on the Save Config button within the Configuration Workbench widget.
5. A confirmation dialog will appear. Choose Yes to save the configuration in the
selected slot.
Once stored the configuration is available to be recalled and used at any time. The
table below describes each main action associated with the stored configurations.
Table 5.2
Stored Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Description
Restore
Restores the configuration from the selected stored onto the unit. Select required stored number and press
Restore
Save Config
Saves the current unit configuration into the selected store location. Select required store number, enter Name
and Description and press Save Config
Edit
Allows Store Name and Description to be changed. Select required store, modify the Name and/or Description as
required and press Edit to save the modified text only. The stored configuration data will not be affected
Delete
Delete contents, name and description of selected store. Select required store number and press Delete
Import
Imports a configuration from file to selected store location. Browse to required file and select Import. This does
not affect unit configuration.
The file being imported must be in the same format (ie exported from the stored configurations function rather
than the save-load XML
Export
To export the selected configuration to a file, move the mouse pointer over the link, right click and select Save
target as... or Save link as..., dependent on the browser you are using. You will then be prompted for a filename
and a place to store the file. Give the file a .xml extension.
Update Properties
Refreshes the contents of the list and the workbench from the unit.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-17
Web GUI Control
5.3.2.2
Restoring a Configuration
The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations.
Configurations can be restored at any time. To restore a previously stored
configuration, do the following:
1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to
restore.
2. The Configuration Workbench widget will display the properties of the selected
stored configuration.
3. To restore the configuration, click the Restore button in the Configuration
Workbench widget.
5.3.2.3
Exporting a Configuration
The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. The
content of any of the slots can be exported. Exported configurations from a previous
version of the unit can be fed to the Configuration Converter Tool and converted
to the current version. To export a previously stored configuration, do the following:
1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to
restore.
2. The Configuration Workbench widget will display the properties of the selected
stored configuration.
3. To export the configuration, click the Export button in the Configuration
Workbench widget.
4. In the popup window, select the Save file option.
5. By default, the file will be saved in the Downloads folder on your computer.
Note:
5.3.2.4
The format of files exported from a Stored Configurations page is not
compatible with the files saved on the General tab of the Support page.
Similarly files saved on the Support page cannot be imported into stored
configurations.
Importing a Configuration
The unit provides 64 configuration slots for storing different configurations. The
content of any of the slots can be exported. Exported configurations from a previous
version of the unit can be fed to the Configuration Converter Tool and converted
to the current version. To import a converted configuration, do the following:
1. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the slot you want to use to store
the imported configuration.
2. Click on the Browse button within the Configuration Workbench widget.
3. In the popup window, browse to the file you want to import, and click Open.
4. The file name will be populated into the text box next to the Browse button.
5-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5. Click on the Import button.
6. Answer Yes to the confirmation message.
Note:
5.4
The format of files exported from the Stored Configurations page is not
compatible with the files saved on the General tab of the Support page.
Similarly files saved on the Support page cannot be imported into stored
configurations.
Device Configuration Page
The Device Configuration page provides setup options for the device and provides
access to the following tabs:
5.4.1
•
Quick Setup Tab
•
Advanced Setup Tab
Quick Setup Tab
The Quick Setup tab provides access to the most commonly used parameters. The
list of parameters displayed here can be customized and even exported. The tab
contains the Configuration Items, the Properties, the Help, and the Information
widgets.
Figure 5.16 Quick Setup Tab
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-19
Web GUI Control
5.4.1.1
Configurations Items Widget
The Configuration Items widget displays the Quick Setup menu as a tree. The
tree contains the most commonly used parameters. These include default
parameters as well as the parameters added by the user.
Figure 5.17 Configuration Items Widget
For information on how to add your own parameters to the tree, go to 5.4.3.1:
5.4.1.2
Properties Widget
The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected in the
Configuration Items widget. When a value of a property is changed its label is
highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change is committed or
abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on the taskbar,
respectively.
Figure 5.18 Properties Widget
5.4.1.3
Information Widget
The Information widget contains the Changes, Warnings and Errors tab pages for
displaying changes, warnings and errors. By clicking on a change the corresponding
item is displayed in the Properties widget and the change can be revoked by
manually resetting the parameter to its original value.
5-20
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.19 Information Widget
Note:
5.4.2
The original value is shown in a tooltip by hovering the mouse pointer over
the item in the Changes tab.
Advanced Setup Tab
The Advanced Setup tab provides access to all configuration options of the unit.
Figure 5.20 Advanced Setup Tab
5.4.2.1
Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget
The Advanced Video Processor Settings widget displays a tree view of all
configuration items available on the unit organized into different folders for easier
navigation. The properties of the selected node (if any) are displayed in the
Properties widget.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-21
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.21 Advanced Video Processor Settings Widget
5.4.2.2
Properties Widget
The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected in the
Advanced Video Processor Settings widget. When a value of a property is
changed, its label is highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change
is committed or abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on
the taskbar, respectively. Fan speed may be controlled by adjusting the slider to the
appropriate setting.
Figure 5.22 Properties Widget
5-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.4.3
Using the Device Configuration Page
This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Device Configuration
page.
5.4.3.1
Customizing the Quick Setup Menu
The Configuration Items widget displays the Quick Setup menu as a tree. The
tree contains the most commonly used parameters. These include default
parameters as well as the parameters added by the user. To add your own
parameters to the tree, do the following:
1. Open the Customize Items dialog by selecting Actions > Customize Items.
2. In the Configuration Items widget of the Customize Items dialog, select the
Quick Setup Items node, and select Actions > Add Folder.
3. Double click on the newly created node, and rename it to a more descriptive
name.
4. Scroll down to the item you want to add to your custom list in the Advanced
Video Processor Settings widget.
5. By holding down the left mouse button, drag the item over the new folder in the
Configuration Items widget.
6. Add the item to the new folder by releasing the mouse button. The item cannot
be added to the Quick Setup Items node. Any valid drop position is indicated
by the dragging rectangle changing into green.
7. Repeat the process for any additional items you want to add. You can create as
many folders as you wish or you can use any previously created one. The
created folders can be reordered by the drag and drop technique used for
adding the item. The added items can also be relocated through drag and drop.
To delete a folder or an item, select it then choose Action > Remove Item.
8. When ready, click Save to save the changes. The new items are added to the
Quick Setup menu.
Note:
The list of added items can be exported by selecting Action > Export and
can be imported on another unit by Action > Import.
The Settings widget of the Customize Items dialog displays all the options
available to be set regardless of the visibility of the individual items.
(Normally, some items might be hidden depending on the settings selected
for other parameters.) When such an item is added to the Configuration
Items list and the list is saved, the item will only show up on the Quick
Setup list if the other parameters controlling its visibility are changed to the
correct value.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-23
Web GUI Control
5.4.4
Configuring Option Cards Using the Device Configuration Page
This section gives the tables of parameters available for configuring the option cards
using the Device Configuration web page.
5.4.4.1
CE VCM Option Cards
It is recommended that the configuration of the CE VCM option cards is done
through the Service Configuration web page.
5.4.4.2
ASI Option Card
The ASI Option module provides ASI outputs for the transmission of MPEG-2
Transport Streams. When an ASI option module is fitted in a base chassis the host
detects its presence and adds the option to configure a Transport Stream to be
output over ASI.
5.4.4.2.1
ASI Output Configuration
The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - ASI IO Option Card > ASI IO
Option Card > ASI Output Streams. The same parameters can be accessed
through the Advanced/ASI/ASI Output Streams menu on the front panel.
Table 5.3
ASI Output Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Output Mode
Mirrored, Independent
Specifies whether the two outputs output the same
Transport Stream or they operate independently. If set to
Mirrored, only one output will be accessible.
5.4.4.3
G.703 Transceiver Card
The section describes the options available to set up the G.703 input and output
through the web user interface or the front panel. When a G.703 Transceiver Card is
fitted in a base chassis, the host detects its presence and adds the option to
configure a Transport Stream to be output over it.
5.4.4.3.1
Transceiver Configuration
The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - G.703 Transceiver Card >
G.703 Transceiver Card > G.703 I/O Ports > G.703 I/O Port 1. The same
parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/ G.703 Transceiver
Card/G.703 I/O Ports/G.703 I/O Port 1 menu on the front panel.
Table 5.4
Transmitter Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PDH Carrier
E3, DS3
Specifies which E carrier to use. E3 is equivalent to E31 (which supports an output bit
rate of 34368 kbps), DS3 is equivalent to E32 (which supports an output bit rate of 44736
kbps) as defined by ITU-T Rec. G.703.
Framing
None, M13, C-bit
Specifies the framing used in DS3 operation.
5-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Receiver/ATM Configuration
ATM Mode
Off, On
ATM encapsulated transmission as per ETSI ETS 300 813. Available only if Framing is
set to C-bit.
Alpha
2 – 255
Number of consecutive incorrect HEC to lose ATM synchronization (ITU-T I.432.1).
Delta
2 – 255
Number of consecutive correct HEC to achieve ATM synchronization (ITU-T I.432.1).
VPI
1 – 255
ATM Virtual Path Identifier. This value should not normally be changed.
Cell Header
Correction
Off, On
Do not correct any ATM cell header error, but report error even for single bit error.
Cell Header Error
Ignore
Off, On
Never report ATM cell header error; treat headers even with multibit errors as good.
Receiver/DVB Configuration
Destuffing
Off, On
Proprietary stuff packet removal. Should not normally be turned off.
Derandomization
Auto, Off
Inversion of spectral shaping data randomization as per ETSI/EN 300 429. "Auto"
enables decision based on bit stream analysis.
RS Decoding
Auto, Off
Reed-Solomon bit error correction processing as per ETSI/EN 300 429. "Auto" enables
decision based on bit stream analysis.
Deinterleaving
Auto, Off
Block error correction interleaving removal as per ETSI/EN 300 429. "Auto" enables
decision based on bit stream analysis.
Auto, 188 bytes,
204 bytes
Number of bytes in a TS packet. The 204-byte format is used with Forward Error
Correction (FEC) scheme laid down in ETSI/EN 300 429.
Receiver/Advanced
Packet Size
"Auto" enables packet size detection.
#Sync Bytes To Lock
2 – 255
Number of consecutive TS sync characters to achieve TS synchronization. Possible
values are between 2 and 255 (default is 5).
Sync Miss Sample
Size
2 – 255
Number of consecutive TS packets to look for missing sync characters in synchronized
state. Possible valuesare between 2 and 255 (default is 30).
Sync Miss Limit
2 – 255
Number of missing sync characters to lose TS synchronization. Possible values are
between 2 and 255 (default is 2).
Transmitter/ATM Configuration
ATM Mode
Off, On
Enables or disables ATM encapsulated transmission as per ETSI ETS 300 813.
Available only if Framing is set to C-bit.
VPI
1 – 255
Virtual Path Identifier. Should not normally be changed.
Transmitter/DVB Configuration
G.703 Stuffing
Off, On
Controls whether only G.703 packets are inserted into the output transport stream.
On [default] = G.703 packets only included in the output transport stream. The output
bitrate can be manually configured as required.
Off = nulls will be inserted as well as G.703 packets and the output bitrate is determined
by the G.703 configuration.
Randomization
Off, On
Enables spectral shaping by data randomization as per ETSI EN 300 429.
RS Encoding
Off, On
Enables or disables Reed-Solomon forward error correction as per ETSI EN 300 429.
Interleaving
Auto, Off
Enables interleaving as per ETSI EN 300 429. If set to Auto, interleaving will be enabled
if RS Encoding is applied.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-25
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.4
GPI Option Card
This section describes the options available to set up the GPI option card through
the web user interface or the front panel.
5.4.4.4.1
GPI Input Configuration
To configure GPI input pins for splicing, select the Advanced Setup tab on the
Device Configuration page on the GUI. Expand Encoder > Slots > Slot n Data &
GPI Card > GPI Input Pin n Setup folders in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings widget.
Figure 5.23 GPI Pin Setting via GUI
The parameters for each input pin are listed below.
Table 5.5
GPI Input Pin Configuration
Parameter
Values
GPI Input Pin Mode
Off (Default)
5-26
Description
Load Stored Configuration
Only available for pins 1 to 10.
Splice Out of Network
When selected and the GPI pin changes state, an Out of
network splice point is signaled to be inserted into the
Transport Stream. Further setting determines how and when
the splice point is inserted.
Splice Return to Network
When selected and the GPI pin changes state, a Return to
network splice point is signaled to be inserted into the
Transport Stream. Further setting determines how and when
the splice point is inserted.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
5.4.4.4.2
Values
Description
Splice Latched
When selected and the GPI pin changes state, an Out of
network splice point is signaled to be inserted into the
Transport Stream. A return to network splice point is signalled
when either the GPI pin polarity changes state again or when
the splice duration is reached. Further setting determines how
and when the splice point is inserted.
Load Stored Configurations (Not Supported in this Release)
It is possible to use the GPI input pins to trigger the loading of any of the 64 stored
configurations on the unit. The selection of the stored configuration is made by
configuring 6 of the GPI input pins as a binary representation of the store number
while a 7th pin provides the toggle to action the loading of the configuration.
When a GPI Input Pin Mode is set to Load Stored Config the next 6 pins are
automatically configured to the same setting. The lowest pin number (originally
selected) is the LSB of the store number. The highest pin number is the GPI trigger
to load the selected configuration.
Figure 5.24 Load Stored Configurations
For example: If 'GPI Input Pin 3' is set to ‘Load Stored Config’ and the following pins
are set as follows
•
GPI Input Pin 3
0
•
GPI Input Pin 4
0
•
GPI Input Pin 6
1
•
GPI Input Pin 7
0
•
GPI Input Pin 8
1
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
LSB
MSB
5-27
Web GUI Control
When GPI Input Pin 9 is toggled the configuration in store 40 is loaded.
When a GPI input pin mode is selected, the splicing setup options become available
by expanding the appropriate GPI Input Pin n Setup folder. The parameters are
listed below.
5.4.4.4.3
Splicing Configuration
The card can be configured to send SCTE 104 messages to encoders of VCMs
fitted in the unit.
The closure (or opening) of the general purpose input pins (GPI Pin 1 – 16) with the
common GND can trigger these SCTE 104 messages. The configuration can be
divided into two parts:
5.4.4.4.4
•
Setting up the GPI card (pins and messages)
•
Setting up the VCMs
GPI Card Splicing Configuration
When any of the Splice options are selected a further set of configurable options
are displayed if the GPI Input Pin n Setup is expanded to show Splicing Setup
Figure 5.25 GPI Input Pin Splicing Setup
5-28
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.6
Splicing Set Up Options
Parameter
Values
Description
SCTE 104 Channel
None, ChannelA to ChannelP
Virtual SCTE 104 channel used to route messages to
encoders. Different pins can share same channel. Different
encoders can share same channel.
GPI Pin Triggered
Polarity
Open, Closed (Default)
When the parameter is set to Open a message is sent when
the pin goes from Closed state to open state. When the
parameter is set to closed a message is sent when the pin
goes from open state to closed state. Splice latched mode
defines the trigger for the Out of network message.
Out Pre-roll
0, 4 to 100(s)
0 (default value) indicates immediate and a value less than 4
will be treated as immediate. A splice point is inserted at the
earliest possible opportunity. If a value is set for the pre-roll, a
splice point shall be inserted that many seconds after the GPI
pin contact change has been signalled.
Return Pre-roll
0, 4 to 100(s)
0 (default value) indicates immediate and a value less than 4
will be treated as immediate.
Return to Network
Automatic
If set to Automatic a Return to network splice shall
automatically be inserted after the time set for the Splice
Duration has elapsed from when the Out of Network splice
was signalled.
External Control
Splice Duration
1 to 10000 (s)
Fixed Delay
0 to +1000 (ms)
Splice ID Increment
Mode
For each Avail, For each Msg
Avail_Descriptor
Off (Default), Present
If set to Present, the value in the Provider Avail Id is inserted
into the output SCTE 35 message
Provider Avail Id
0 to 424967295
Used as a reference to identify a specific Transport Stream
that the splice point is to be associated with.
GPI Input Pin State
5.4.4.4.5
Added to both Out and Return pre-roll.
Read only.
Setting Up the VCM to Use GPI Inputs
Note:
It is not possible to define the EventID , so all SCTE-35 messages will
contain the same EventID.
The example given here shows setting up a CE-x in slot 3.
To set Up the VCM to use GPI inputs, select the Advanced Setup tab on the
Device Configuration page on the GUI. Expand Encoder > Slots > Slot 3 > CE-x
> Video > Video 1 > Video > Main Video > Video Encoder > Splicing folders in
the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-29
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.26 VCM Splicing Control
When Splicing Control is set to On GPI the SCTE 104 Input node appears in the
settings tree. This provides a list displaying all usable SCTE 104 channels. A
channel is usable if there is at least one GPI pin configured on the source end of the
channel. After choosing an input channel for the VCM encoder core, the
configuration of the VCM is complete, it now waits for messages on selected
channel for SCTE 104 messages.
Figure 5.27 VCM SCTE 104 Input Selection
5-30
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Combinations and Limitations
With the SCTE 104 Channels a many-to-many relation can be set up between the
GPI pins and the encoder cores of VCMs. This means:
•
More pins of the same GPI card can be configured to send messages to the
same set of encoder cores. This is achieved with selecting the same channel for
them on the GPI Input Pin Setup panel.
•
More encoder cores (of the same VCM or different VCMs) can be configured to
get messages from the same set of pins of a GPI card. This is achieved with
selecting the same channel for them on the SCTE 104 Input / Encoder panel.
Different GPI cards fitted in the same unit can not send messages to the same
encoder core. This is because channels belong to GPI cards and one encoder core
can use only one channel for SCTE 104 input.
5.4.4.4.6
Alarm Relay
The alarm relay function is initiated by an alarm relay and a fail relay. The alarm
relay is energized when there is no active alarm condition and de-energized when
an alarm with the severity Major is raised or cleared by the unit. The fail relay is
energized when there is no active fail condition and de-energized when an alarm
with the severity Critical is raised by the unit. A loss of power is signaled as both an
alarm and a fail condition.
The alarm relay function is not configurable. At the same time, it is possible to
configure the severities of the unit alarms. To do so, browse to the Dashboard page
and select the All tab in the Alarm Monitor widget. An expandable box is displayed
for the host, and one for each card inserted in the chassis. By expanding a box, the
individual alarms can be selected and the appropriate severity level can be set.
Figure 5.28 Alarm Severity Configuration
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-31
Web GUI Control
5.4.4.4.7
Data Input Configuration (Not Supported in this Release)
To configure the Data Input Pins using the GUI, select the Advanced Setup tab on
the Device Configuration page on the GUI. Expand Encoder > Slots > Slot n
Data & GPI Card > RS232 Input options in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings widget.
Figure 5.29 Data Input Configuration
Table 5.7
Data Input Configuration Options
Parameter
Options
Description
Enabled
True
Data Channel enable/disable
False
Encoding
Wenger
Identified in the PMT as a component of type 0xC1 with no descriptors.
Wegener ASYNC data are transmitted as private stream 2 type data. This stream conforms
to ISO13818. The adaptation field is used to add stuffing bytes if needed to complete a TS
packet. Stuffing bytes are set to a value of 0xFF. Payload data bytes follow the packet
length field and do not include a CRC field.
Motorola
Identified in the PMT as a component of type 0xC0 with no descriptors.
The IEC-232 data are encapsulated directly into the full 184 payload bytes of the transport
packets (i.e. no PES layer).
The IEC-232 data-stream is expected to contain complete DCIIText packets. These packets
must be preceded by the sequence (0x7F, 0xFE, 0x7F, 0xFE) followed by 2 bytes which
contain the length of the DCIIText packet. If this sequence is not detected, the card shall
raise an alarm to indicate that it is not locked to the data stream.
Baud Rate
DVB
Format as specified by DVB
Ericsson
Ericsson proprietary format
1200
Sets the baud rate of the IEC-232
2400
asynchronous data channel (Baud/s)
4800
9600 (Default)
19200
38400
Buffer Mode
5-32
Send Immediately
Only available in Ericsson encoding mode. If selected, whenever data is available at the
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Options
Description
Data Input port it is sent in the output Transport Stream. This can result in wasted
bandwidth due to low packet occupancy. It also results in a higher packet rate, which may
cause some receivers to overflow
Component Tag
5.4.4.5
Wait 1s
Data is buffered until enough have arrived to fill a transport packet or 1 second elapses,
whichever occurs first
0 to 16383
Defines the optional component tag to be assigned to the data stream
External Sync Input Option Card
The External Sync Input Option Card has no configurable parameters. To configure
the external sync input to be used as the clock source, from the web interface,
browse to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and under Base Unit set the
MUX SCR Source to External. Alternatively, on the front panel use the External
option under Advanced/System/Base Unit/MUX SCR Source.
5.4.4.6
Satellite Modulator Option Card (AVP 3000 Voyager Only)
The section describes the operation and control of the Satellite Modulator.
5.4.4.7
DVB RF Carrier ID
To comply with ETSI 103129, the Carrier ID information entered by the operator can
now be included in the Satellite Modulator Output. The Carrier ID configuration field
provides a single point of entry for the required parameters that are used in both the
NIT and the RF output.
By default, the RF Carrier ID State control is set to On for the Satellite Modulator
Output, thus including Carrier ID in the RF output.
Figure 5.30 DVB RF Carrier ID
5.4.4.7.1
Configuring Carrier ID Parameters
The user-defined fields for Carrier ID information can be accessed through a
number of routes, all of which will configure the same parameters.
•
Front Panel.
•
Simplified View - The Carrier ID button in the left panel provides a pop-up box
for data entry.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-33
Web GUI Control
•
Advanced View - There is a Carrier ID tab on the Satellite Modulator properties
panel when using the Service configuration tab.
Figure 5.31 DVB RF Carrier ID Tab
The data can also be entered by browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced
Setup > Base Unit > Carrier ID Setup.
5.4.4.7.2
Satellite Modulator Input Configuration
The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - Satellite Modulator Option
Card > Satellite Modulator > Input Parameters. The same parameters can be
accessed through the Advanced/Satellite Modulator/Input Parameters menu on the
front panel.
Table 5.8
Satellite Modulator Input Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Primary Input Source
Stream 1, Stream 2, Null Packets, PRBS
The source of the primary input of the Satellite Modulator card.
Secondary Input
Source
Stream 1, Stream 2, Null Packets, PRBS
The source of the secondary input of the Satellite Modulator
card.
Input Select
Primary, Secondary
Specifies the Transport Stream on which input to feed to the
satellite modulator.
Input Mode
Manual, Semi-automatic, Fully Automatic
Specifies how to switch over to the other input in case the
current input fails. In Manual mode no automatic switch over is
done. In Semi-automatic mode the switch-over to the other
input is automatic, if the a Transport Stream on current input is
not detected, but there is no automatic switch back to the
original input if the Transport Stream is restored. In fully
automatic mode the even switch back to the original input is
automatic once the Transport Stream on that input is restored.
Input Format
MPEG TS, BB Frames
The format of the input data stream. BB Frames are currently
not supported.
Rate Adaptation
Off, On
Allows the modulator to be used at a fixed symbol rate,
asynchronously with its transport stream input data rate.
The recommended setting is for Rate Adaptation to be ON,
allowing the modulator to either insert or drop null packets in
the input stream to match that expected by the modulator
according to the selected modulation, FEC rate and other
relevant parameters. In this mode the modulator card’s
symbol rate is held constant at a value nominally equal to the
5-34
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
user-defined symbol rate setting.
When rate adaptation is disabled, the modulator card tries to
lock its symbol rate to the input data rate, but it can only do so
if the configured input data rate is within the tracking range of
the input rate control PLL (approximately ±122 ppm). If this
does not match, errors will be seen at the output.
Input Buffer Size
512 bytes to 4096 bytes
The size of the input buffer.
Clock Reference
Mode
Internal, External
The source of the 10 MHz reference clock used by the satellite
modulator. External mode is not supported by the current
hardware configuration.
RAS Scrambling
Off, On
Specifies whether to use RAS scrambling.
RAS Key
The 7-byte key used for RAS scrambling.
RAS version
The version of the RAS implemented on the satellite
modulator.
5.4.4.7.3
Satellite Modulator Modulation Configuration
The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - Satellite Modulator Option
Card > Satellite Modulator > Modulation Parameters or on the Modulation
Parameters tab in the Properties widget of the Service Configuration page if one
of the Satellite Modulator Output Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/Satellite
Modulator/Modulation Parameters menu on the front panel.
Table 5.9
Satellite Modulator Modulation Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Modulation Standard
DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X
Specifies the modulation standard to use for satellite
transmission.
Modulation State
Off, On
Turns on or off the modulation of the carrier. If the output is
enabled and modulation is turned off, an unmodulated
carrier is output.
Stream
Synchronization
Mode1
Disabled, Short, Normal
Specifies whether to transmit ISSY and if so, whether to use
a two or three-byte ISSY field in the BB header.
Stream
Synchronization
Mode1 for TS2
Disabled, Short, Normal
Same as above for the 2nd Transport Stream in VCM mode.
Null Packet Deletion1
Off, On
If set to On, null packets will be deleted from the incoming
Transport Stream.
FEC Rate
1/41,4, 1/31,4, 2/51,4, 1/2, 3/51,4, 2/3, 3/4, 4/51,4,
5/6, 7/82,3, 8/91,4, 9/101,4, 13/45,4 , 9/20,4,
8/15,4, 11/20,4, 5/9,4, 26/45,4, 28/45,4, 23/36,4,
25/36,4, 32/45,4, 13/18,4, 11/15,4, 7/9,4, 77/90,4
The code rate of the Reed-Solomon encoder (DVB-S and
DVB-DSNG mode) or the BCH – LDPC encoder (DVB-S2
and DVB-S2X mode)
FEC Rate for TS2
1/41, 1/31, 2/51, 1/2, 3/51, 2/3, 3/4, 4/51, 5/6,
7/82,3, 8/91,2, 9/101
Same as above for the 2nd Transport Stream in VCM mode.
Frame Size1,4
Normal, Short
The size of the BB frames in DVB-S2 mode.
Normal, Short
Same as above for the 2nd Transport Stream in VCM mode.
1
Frame Size for TS2
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-35
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
1,2,3,4
Description
1,2,4
4
2
Modulation
QPSK
, 8PSK
, 8PSK-L ,16QAM ,
16APSK1,4, 16APSK-L4, 32APSK1,4,,32APSKL4, 64APSK4 and 64APSK-L4
The modulation mode and order used for the transmission.
Modulation for TS2
QPSK, 8PSK1,2, 16QAM2, 16APSK1, 32APSK1
Same as above for the 2nd Transport Stream in VCM mode.
Off, On
Toggles the insertion of pilot symbols into the transmitted
signal on and off.
Pilots1 for TS2
Off, On
Same as above for the 2nd Transport Stream in VCM mode.
NCR Stamping PID
0 - 8191
The PID used for packets transmitting Network Clock
Reference.
Symbol Mapping
Mode
Peak Power, Mean Power
Specifies what to use for power normalization.
PL Scrambling
Sequence Number1,4
0 to 26141
The sequence number used for physical layer scrambling.
Symbol Rate
1.000000 Msymbol/s to 45.000000 Msymbol/s
(standard)
The symbol rate used for modulation.
Pilots
1,4
0.132000 Msymbol/s to 66.000000 Msymbol/s
(with VOY/SWO/HSYM license - extended
range)
Roll-off Factor
5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 35 %
The roll-off factor of the filter used for pulse shaping
1 Applies to DVB-S2
2 Applies to DVB-DSNG
3 Applies to DVB-S
4 Applies to DVB-S2X
5.4.4.7.4
Satellite Modulator Output Configuration
The following parameters are available through the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page under Slots > Slot <n> - Satellite Modulator Option
Card > Satellite Modulator > Output Parameters or on the Output Parameters
tab in the Properties widget of the Service Configuration page if one of the
Satellite Modulator Output Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The same
parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/Satellite Modulator/Output
Parameters menu on the front panel.
Table 5.10 Satellite Modulator Output Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
RF Carrier ID State
On, Off
Enables DVB-CID on the modulator output.
Output Select
L-band, IF
Specifies which output to use.
Output State
On (Reduced Power), On (Nominal Power),
Off
Turns the output of the Satellite Modulator on at the specified
power level or off. Note that to enable the output, the Transport
Stream through the satellite modulator output has to be set to
Online Setmode state.
L-Band Frequency, Uplink Frequency
The mode how the frequency is treated. For L-Band
Frequency the RF center frequency of the respective output is
directly entered. For Uplink Frequency, the RF center
frequency is calculated from the Uplink Frequency and the Upconverter Frequency.
L-Band Output
Frequency Input Mode
5-36
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
L-Band Frequency
950.000 MHz to 2150.000 MHz
The center frequency of the signal output through the L-Band
output.
The frequency the signal is converted to by the up-converter
fed from the AVP 3000 Voyager through the L-Band output.
Uplink Frequency
Uplink Frequency = Up-converter Frequency ± IF Frequency.
± depends on the Spectrum Sense.
Nominal L-Band
Power
-40.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm
The Nominal signal power output through the L-Band output
applied when the output is set to On (Nominal Power)
Reduced L-Band
Power
-40.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm
The Reduced signal output power applied when the output is set
to On (Reduced Power) when the output frequency is changed
or after a reboot if the Output State is allowed to stay on.
L-Band Spectrum
Sense
Normal, Inverted
Specifies whether the spectrum is inverted or not inverted. It
has an effect on the Up-converter Frequency calculation.
L-Band Tilt
-0.040 dB/MHz to 0.040 dB/MHz
The tilt applied in the L-band.
L-Band Up-converter
Frequency
2500.000 MHz - 100000.000 MHz
The oscillator frequency of the up-converter fed by the AVP
3000 Voyager through the L-Band output.
Up-converter Power
Off, 15V, 24V
The voltage level to feed a downstream up-converter device.
Up-converter
Reference
Off, On
Specifies whether to produce a 10-MHz reference for the
downstream up-converter device.
Frequency Input Mode
IF Frequency, Uplink Frequency
The mode how the frequency is treated. For IF Frequency the
RF center frequency of the respective output is directly
entered. For Uplink Frequency, the RF center frequency is
calculated from the Uplink Frequency and the Up-converter
Frequency.
IF Frequency
50.000 MHz to 180.000 MHz
The center frequency of the signal output through the IF
output.
IF Output
The frequency the signal is converted to by the up-converter
fed from the AVP 3000 Voyager through the IF output.
Uplink Frequency
Uplink Frequency = Up-converter Frequency ± IF Frequency.
± depends on the Spectrum Sense.
Nominal IF Power
-30.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm
The Nominal signal power output through the IF output applied
when the output is set to On (Nominal Power).
Reduced IF Line-up
Power
-30.0 dBm to 5.0 dBm
The Reduced IF output power level applied when the output is
set to On (Reduced Power), when the output frequency is
changed or after a reboot if the Output State is allowed to stay
on.
IF Spectrum Sense
Normal, Inverted
Specifies whether the spectrum is inverted or not inverted. It
has an effect on the Up-converter Frequency calculation.
IF Tilt
-0.040 dB/MHz to 0.040 dB/MHz
The tilt applied to the IF output signal.
IF Up-converter
Frequency
500.000 MHz to 100000.000 MHz
The oscillator frequency of the up-converter fed by the AVP
3000 Voyager through the IF output.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-37
Web GUI Control
5.4.5
Configuring Base Unit LDAP User Authentication
This section describes the options for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
that can be used to authenticate a user before full access is granted to the AVP via
the Web GUI through the parameters available via the page Device Configuration
> Advanced Setup > Base Unit > Remote Authentication and HTTP server
options.
Figure 5.32 Remote Authentication and HTTP Server Option Properties
When authenticated, the user retains access to the AVP for that browser session. If
the session is closed, the user must re-authenticate. The AVP does not offer
different levels of access: once a user is authenticated, all functionality is available
to that user.
Table 5.11 LDAP Authentication Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Authentication
Off, Basic, LDAP Test, LDAP Authentication
Off: No user authentication is performed
Basic: the username and password presented on this page are
used to access the AVP web UI
LDAP Test: a short-term configuration of LDAP used to check
the settings. The settings will be applied for 2 minutes. The
user will be asked for username and password and the AVP
will attempt to authenticate these details against the LDAP
server. The results are printed on this page. After the test, this
setting will be turned to Off.
LDAP Authentication: user access to the web UI is controlled
through user authentication against the configured LDAP
server.
Disable HTTP Access
(HTTPS is always On)
Off, On
Off: Both HTTP and HTTPS access to the web UI is available
on the control interface.
On: Only HTTPS access is available on the control interface.
HTTPS uses a self-signed certificate and this cannot be
changed.
5-38
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
LDAP Host IP Address
The LDAP server’s IP address. The AVP does not support
DNS.
LDAP Bind Dn
The BIND distinguished name. This information must be
obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server.
LDAP Bind Password
The password for binding to the LDAP server. This information
must be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server.
LDAP Base Dn
The root distinguished name used to query the LDAP server.
This information must be obtained from the administrator of the
LDAP server.
LDAP Entry Filter
Filter detail for the LDAP sever. This information must be
obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server.
Start TLS
Off, On
Enables TLS (transport layer security).
Off: Communication between the AVP and the LDAP server
will be in clear text.
On: Communication between the AVP and the LDAP server
will be encrypted. This may result in a slower response from
the AVP.
Default LDAP
Authentication
Behaviour
Positive Authentication, Negative
Authentication
If the LDAP server is out of contact for any reason, the
behavior of user authentication can be selected to either reject
the user (Negative Authentication), or accept the user and
permit the user to operate the web UI (Positive Authentication).
All activity is logged.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
When LDAP Authentication is active, there is no special administrator
access. If Negative Authentication is selected, and the LDAP server is
unavailable, or mistakes have been made on entering the parameters for
the LDAP server, the AVP WILL BE LOCKED FOR ALL USERS. Ericsson
Customer Services must be contacted to assist on regaining access. It is
strongly recommended to use the LDAP Test Authentication setting to
check parameter entry and LDAP server access, before committing to the
LDAP Authentication setting. See Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to
Configure User Authentication.
5-39
Web GUI Control
5.5
Service Configuration Page
The Service Configuration page provides setup options for the outputs of the
device.
Figure 5.33 Service Configuration Video Page
5.5.1
Widgets
5.5.1.1
Inputs Widget
The Inputs widget shows the available components sorted by input. Any component
on this list can be added to the outputs provided that there is a valid license to do so
or the number of times a component can be reused has not been exceeded.
5-40
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.34 Inputs Widget
5.5.1.2
Outputs Widget
The Outputs widget lists the inputs and outputs of the device, respectively. The Edit
menu of the Outputs widget provides Copy, Cut and Paste commands to copy or
move Transport Streams, services, and components. Components can be dragged
and dropped from the Inputs widget to the services listed in the Outputs widget,
and can also be dragged and dropped within the Outputs widget. Drag and drop
moves the item, Ctrl + drag and drop copies the item. Items cannot be dropped
arbitrarily: components can only be dropped on services, services on Transport
Streams, and Transport Streams on outputs. A valid drop location is indicated by a
green rectangle.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-41
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.35 Outputs Widget
5.5.1.3
Properties Widget
The Properties widget displays the properties of the items selected either in the
Inputs or in the Outputs widget. When a value of a property is changed, its label is
highlighted in orange and remains highlighted until the change is committed or
abandoned by clicking on the Apply All or Discard All buttons on the taskbar,
respectively. Depending on which item is selected in the Inputs and Outputs
widget, the properties are displayed in different accordion panels in the Properties
widget.
Figure 5.36 Properties Widget
Note:
5-42
If a component is selected in the Outputs widget, its source is also
highlighted in the Inputs widget and the other way around. This makes it
easy to identify corresponding components.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.2
Using the Service Configuration Page
This section describes the tasks that can be completed on the Service Configuration
page.
5.5.2.1
Adding a Transport Stream to an Output
To add a Transport Stream to an output, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to.
2. Right click on the selected output.
3. Select Add Transport Stream from the context menu.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to.
2. Click Action > Add Transport Stream.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the output you want to add a Transport Stream to.
2. Right click on the selected output and choose Add Transport Stream from the
context menu.
Note:
5.5.2.2
Outputs other than the IP outputs cannot have more Transport Streams
associated to them.
Adding a Service to a Transport Stream
To add a service to a Transport Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to.
2. Right click on the selected Transport Stream.
3. Select Add Service from the context menu.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to.
2. Click Action > Add Service.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add a service to.
2. Right click on the selected Transport Stream, and choose Add Service from the
context menu.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-43
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.37 Add Service Menu
5.5.2.3
Adding a Component to a Transport Stream
To add a component to a service, do the following:
1. In the Inputs widget select the component you want to add to a service in the
Outputs widget.
2. Drag the component over the desired service in the Outputs widget.
Note:
5.5.2.4
To select more components to add, press and hold the< Ctrl key then click
on the appropriate components in the Inputs widget. To select consecutive
items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last
item.
Deleting Transport Streams, Services or Components
To delete a Transport Stream, service or component, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want to delete.
2. Press the Del key.
3. Answer Yes to the confirmation message.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want to delete.
2. Click Action > Delete Selected.
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want to delete.
5-44
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
2. Right click on the selected item, and choose Delete Selected from the context
menu.
Figure 5.38 Deleting a Service
Note:
5.5.2.5
Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive items,
select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last item.
Manually Changing the Setmode State of a Transport Stream
To change the Setmode state of a Transport Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream for which you want to
change the Setmode state.
2. In the Properties widget, click on the Online or Offline button.
5.5.2.6
Copying Transport Streams, Services or Components
To copy a Transport Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want copy.
2. Drag the selected Transport Stream, service or component over another output
(when copying a Transport Stream), another Transport Stream (when copying a
service) or another service (when copying a component).
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want copy.
2. Select Edit > Copy from the widget menu bar.
3. Select the output (when copying a Transport Stream), the Transport Stream
(when copying a service) or the service (when copying a component) you want
to copy the selected item to.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-45
Web GUI Control
4. Select Edit > Paste from the widget menu bar.
Note:
5.5.2.7
To select more Transport Streams, services or components, press and hold
the Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive
items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last
item.
Moving Transport Streams, Services or Components
To move a Transport Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want move.
2. While holding down the Ctrl key, drag the selected Transport Stream, service or
component over another output (when moving a Transport Stream), another
Transport Stream (when moving a service) or another service (when moving a
component).
Figure 5.39 Dragging a Transport Stream or Service
OR
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream, service or component you
want to move.
2. Select Edit > Cut from the widget menu bar.
3. Select the output (when moving a Transport Stream), the Transport Stream
(when moving a service) or the service (when moving a component) you want to
move the selected item to.
4. Select Edit > Paste from the widget menu bar.
Note:
5-46
To select more Transport Streams, services or components, press and hold
the Ctrl key then click on the appropriate items. To select consecutive
items, select the first item, press and hold the Shift key, then select the last
item.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.2.8
Cloning Transport Streams
Transport Stream cloning allows the user to create a mirror of an existing Transport
Stream. Mirrored Transport Streams are only references to the original one. Thus,
any change in the original Transport Stream will be automatically applied in the
mirrored Transport Stream.
Note:
No external Transport Streams, services, or components will show up under
a mirrored Transport Stream in the Outputs widget of the Service
Configuration page. Furthermore, when a mirrored Transport Stream is
selected, the Properties widget will display a link to the original one, and
will not display any parameters.
Although the content of the mirrored and the original Transport Stream is
the same, the physical output streams will not be identical bit-by-bit. This is
due to the mechanism the Transport Streams are played out through the
different outputs.
To create a clone of an existing Transport Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to clone.
2. Select Copy from the Edit menu on the menu bar of the Outputs widget.
3. Select the output you want to insert the clone to.
4. Choose Edit > Paste as Mirror. The Transport Stream will be pasted as a
mirror at the selected Transport Stream.
5.5.2.9
Disabling a Transport Stream if Audio or Video Lock is Lost
To disable the output when the input lock is lost for a component in a Transport
Stream, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to disable when
the lock of any of its components is lost.
2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Disable to Audio Lost, Video Lost, or
Audio or Video Lost depending on what shall trigger turning the output off.
3. In the Outputs widget, select the video component whose lock state shall
influence the Transport Stream output.
4. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab, and set the Output On Video
Loss to No PID.
5. In the Outputs widget, select the audio component whose lock state shall
influence the Transport Stream output.
6. In the Properties widget, click on the Input tab, and set the Output On Audio
Loss to No PID.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-47
Web GUI Control
5.5.2.10
Disabling a Transport Stream if a Critical Alarm or an Upstream Critical Alarm
is Raised
An upstream CRITICAL alarm is an alarm raised by a module that has direct
influence on the Transport Stream.
To disable the output when a critical alarm or an upstream CRITICAL alarm is
raised, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to disable when a
CRITICAL alarm or an upstream CRITICAL alarm is raised.
2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Disable to Any Critical Alarm or Any
Upstream CRITICAL Alarm.
When a transport stream has been auto-disabled due to an ongoing alarm condition,
any attempt to manually put the transport stream online will be rejected and an error
message will be displayed.
5.5.2.11
Restoring a Transport Stream if the Auto Disable Condition is not Met
To restore the output when the Auto Disable condition is cleared, do the following:
1. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream whose Online state you
want to restore.
2. In the Properties widget, set the Auto Enable to true.
5.5.2.12
Reserving Bandwidth for Transport Streams
Bandwidth reservation allows the user to reserve a configurable amount of
bandwidth in the output Transport Streams. The reserved amount will always be
preserved even if bit rate tracking is enabled. To specify the amount of bandwidth to
reserve, do the following:
1. Select a Transport Stream in the Outputs widget.
2. In the Properties widget, set the Reserved Bit Rate to the required value.
5.5.2.13
Providing More Space for Configuration Items in the Properties Widget
When a service has many components of different types, the Properties widget
might get crowded with accordion panels that belong to the different components.
To preserve space, some of the components (based on their types) can be hidden.
To show or hide a component type, do the following:
1. Select a Transport Stream in the Outputs widget.
2. In the Properties widget, choose View > Visibility Control > Show x or View >
Visibility Control > Hide y, where x and y is the type you want to show or hide.
5-48
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.3
Configuring Option Cards Using the Service Configuration Page
This section gives the tables of parameters available for configuring the option cards
using the Service Configuration Web Page.
5.5.3.1
CE-a VCM (Video Compression Module)
5.5.3.1.1
Video and VBI Stream Configuration
Video Input and Pre-Processing
The parameters listed below are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.12 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Lock
Yes, No
Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified
through the parameters below. Read only parameter.
Source
SDI
The video will be sourced from the SDI/HD-SDI input on
the rear panel.
Bars
An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used
as the video source.
Black
An internally generated black test pattern will be used as
the video source.
Moving Object
An internally generated moving object test pattern will be
used as the video source.
Slate
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and
Restore Saved Config
Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be
automatically detected or what actions to take if a change
is detected in the Input Video Format.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD
720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
Video Input Format
SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD
720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97
Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the
video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change
in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the
Video Profile used for encoding. As from the current
release down-conversion is supported, SD profiles can be
selected for HD input formats.
Output On Video Loss
Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay
Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input.
Black, Black with text overlay
Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input.
Color Bars, Bars with text overlay
Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input.
No PID
The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not
updated.
Slate, Slate with text overlay
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-49
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Overlay text to display on top of images when with text
option is selected in Output on Video Loss.
Ident Text
MCTF
Off, Default, Strong, Stronger
The amount of Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering
done to improve image quality.
Adaptive
Preprocessing
Off, On
Increases the video quality by performing preprocessing
operations. Available only if Video Input Format is set to
SD 480i29.97 or SD 576i25.
Bandwidth
30 to 100 %
Sets the video horizontal bandwidth filter.
Half Line Removal
Off, On
Enables or disables the removal of black half lines at the
top of the picture by substituting video data from adjacent
lines. The option is available when Video Input Format is
set to SD 576i25.
Off, On
Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can
be selected under Logo file.
Logo
Logo insertion
The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be
uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Not supported in
this release.
Logo file
A fixed logo position?
On, Off
Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying
the logo on the video. If On, the position of the logo is fixed
according to the position held within the logo file. If O ff,
the position of the logo is determined by the coordinates
entered in the X and Y position boxes.
The X position of the
logo
The position relative to left of the screen 0 (number of
pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position
is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated.
Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not
supported in this release.
The Y position of the
logo
The position relative to top of screen 0 (number of video
lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a
logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A
fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this
release.
HD to SD Video Down-conversion
Default Aspect Ratio
Conversion
Anamorphic, Center Cut, Letterbox
The down-conversion to apply when AFD is lost or AFD
code 000 is received.
Use Input AFD
true, false
Specifies whether to attempt to use AFD code at input for
format conversion (when true) or always apply the default
(when false).
Action on AFD lost
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD is lost.
Action on AFD code
0000
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD code 0000 is received.
Video Encoding
The parameters listed below are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video
1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel.
5-50
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.13 Video Encoding Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Profile
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the
allowed bit rate range.
Profile for SD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
The profile to set when an SD input is detected on the SDI
input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile
cannot be set manually.
Profile for HD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
The profile to set when an HD input is detected on the HDSDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video
Profile cannot be set manually.
Resolution
352 x 576, 480 x 576, 528 x 576, 544 x 576, 640
x 576, 704 x 576, 720 x 576, 352 x 480, 480 x
480, 528 x 480, 544 x 480, 640 x 480, 704 x
480, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, 1920
x 1080
Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the
encoded video. The available options depend on the
values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile.
Video Bit Rate
The valid bit rate range depends on the selected
video profile.
Defines the Transport Stream bit rate to be used by the
compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode
is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that
contains the video component and the Bit Rate Weighting
of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this
field is read only.
CBR
Constant Bit Rate operation.
Low Delay
Reduced encode delay (typically 350ms) achieved by
removing pre-processing functions. Bit Rate, GOP
structure and GOP length impact the delay. The IP GOP
structure will give lowest delay, but with reduced quality.
Aspect Ratio
16:9, 4:3
Does not affect the video encoding but rather indicates
what the desired aspect ratio for the decoded picture (not
the pixel). If no other mechanism such as WSS in the VBI
is used, the video output image will use this aspect ratio.
GOP Length
4 to 250
Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames
between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream.
GOP Structure
IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP
Sets the number of B frames between reference frames.
IBBBBBBBP can only be used for 720p video format
encoded with a H.264 video profile.
Closed GOPs
Off, On
Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in
which the predicted frames can have their reference from
outside the group.
Buffer Mode
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-51
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Scene Cut Detection
On, Off
When enabled, minimizes the negative effect the scene
changes have on the bit rate by inserting an I-Frame when
a change is detected. It also affects the GOP length.
Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only
parameter.
Delay
Stills Detection
Off, Intelligent, Clamp
Detects if the video is a still picture, and adjusts the
encoded video bit rate accordingly when operating in VBR
mode.
Film Mode
Off, On
Sets encoding parameters that give better image quality
for film like sources.
Inloop Filter
High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto
Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback
loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can
increase picture sharpness.
Max CABAC Bit Rate
Depends on the Video Profile set.
Controls the bit rate at which the encoder switches from
CABAC to CAVLC entropy coding.
SEI Encapsulation
Mode
Combined, Mediaroom
Defines how the SEi messages are formatted in the picture
header for H264. For combined, all the different types of
messages (for example AFD) are bundles into one NAL
packet. For Mediaroom each type of message is put into
its own NAL packet. This was done for STB compatibility
issues
Video Output
The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output menu on the
front panel.
Table 5.14 Video Output Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
Off, On, On (Picture Header)
Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video or is on a
separate PID. When set to Off, there must be a separate
PCR component in the service which can have a user
defined PID. When set to On, the PCR PID will be the
same as the associated component. A PCR will be
included for every I picture. The On (Picture Header)
option is provided in MPEG-2 encoding only as an option
to support some legacy equipment that required a PCR on
every picture. This should only be used when absolutely
necessary.
Copyright
Off, On
Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header.
Original
Off, On
Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header.
PES Packet Per
GOP, Picture
Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The
Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is
used.
AU Information Ctrl
RAI, RAI and AU Info, RAI, AU Info and TC
Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation
Field for video Access Units (AU) with the following values:
Random Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI 101 154 (AU info),
and Time Code (TC).
5-52
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
AR Signalling Output
Control
Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data
Controls which source is used for embedding aspect ratio
signaling into user data. If set to Off, no aspect ratio data
will be resent in the output. AFD sources are: SMPTE
2016, Video Index, WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect
Ratio. Bar Data is only SMPTE 2016.
TC Output Location
Off, SEI Message
Defines how timecode is put into the output video stream.
Video Component
The parameters listed in are available on the Component tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output
name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot
<x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.15 Video Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
Master TS
Off, On
Sets the master Transport Stream for the component.
Source PID Monitoring
Off, On
Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID from an IP input
can be enabled, and can be set to caused a redundancy
switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by
Ericsson control software. Not supported in this release.
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the VBI tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video
1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.16 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Enable VBI Pass-thru
Mode
Off, On
Enable Pass-thru of VBI, ANC and Teletext data from
specified PIDs, instead of extracting them from SDI. Read
only parameter. Not supported in this release.
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
VBI Teletext
Descriptor Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT.
Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Description Control
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-53
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set
to User.
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index
(11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after
Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero
means drop to default immediately on loss.
AFD Action on
Reserved Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved
AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
Code as 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Closed Captions
Source
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel
on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI
VITC
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Timecode
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input
(RP207).
Insertion Timeout
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
5-54
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Default Servicename
Description
The default service name to be used.
Broadcaster ID Source
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the
output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC
Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line
22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line
23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line)
input streams.
VBI Line 272 - VBI
Line 285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI
Line 336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signalling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 1
Field 2
Input Detection
The CE-a VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3, Getting
Started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection.
5.5.3.1.2
Audio Stream Configuration
Audio Input
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Input tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEa/Audio Module/Audio <n>/Input menu on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-55
Web GUI Control
Table 5.17 Audio Input Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), Dolby Digital, Dolby E
Sets the input format used by the audio encoder.
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed
to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming
audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 kHz
test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI
embedded audio stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital
inputs.
Output On Audio Loss
No PID, Silence
Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is
for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for
encode silence.
When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID is not
removed from the Program Map Table, so a Transport
Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the output
Transport Stream.
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Specifies which input to output to the reference output on
the 15-way D-type audio connector.
Downmix Type
Lo/Ro downmix, Lt/Rt downmix
Specifies the downmix type.
Downmix metadata
override
Off, on.
Specifies the downmix override.
Downmix metadata
reversion mode
If available, maintain last received metatdata
values, otherwise use fixed settings; Use fixed
settings.
Specifies the downmix metadata reversion mode.
Center mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB).
Specifies the center mix level.
Surround mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB).
Specifies the surround mix level.
Use preferred stereo
downmix if available.
Off, on
Enables the preferred stereo downmix, if available.
Audio Locked
No, Yes
Specifies audio signal is locked.
Downmix active
No, Yes
Specifies the downmix is active.
Downmix active
Lo/Ro downmix, Lt/Rt downmix
Specifies the downmix type.
Level (L)
0
Specifies the left channel level.
Level (R)
0
Specifies the right channel level.
PCM Bypass Active
No, Yes
Specifies if PCM Bypass is active. Only valid for Dolby E.
Switchout Active
No, Yes
Specifies if switchout is active. Only valid for Dolby E.
Input Buffer Level
0
Specifies input buffer level.
Input Bit Rate
0
Specifies input bit rate (in kbps).
Dolby Digital Sample
Rate
0
Specifies Dolby Digital sample rate in (Hz). Only valid for
Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus decoding.
Source Switchout
Downmix Parameters
Audio Status
Read-only. Specifies the input coding mode as determined
by a Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital plus decode.
Input Coding Mode
Resync Count
0
Specifies the resync count.
Bad RC Packets
0
Specifies the number of bad timing packets received by
5-56
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
the audio processor.
Delay
1000
Specifies the delay (in ms).
Audio Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a/Audio Module/Audio <n>/Encode menu on the front panel.
Table 5.18 Audio Encoding Standards
Parameter
Options
Description
Coding Standard
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 Encode(More than two channel pairs
require the /SWO/M1L2 license)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital encode, requires CE/SWO/DOLBYAC3
license..
AAC-LC
AAC-LC encoding, requires CE/SWO/AAC license.
HE-AAC
HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2 encoding, requires CE/SWO/AAC
license.
Pass-thru
Pass-thru of the input
Audio Description Service
MPEG-1 Layer II Encode of a mono audio track that
describes action in the video plus a control track.
Table 5.19 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384
Bit rate of the audio stream
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase
Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio
(8 Cannels)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding..
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6 dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Left)
The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-57
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
The language of the right channel when in dual mono
(1+1) mode.
Language (Right)
Audio Stream Type
Description
Main Audio
Clean Effects
Hearing Impaired
Visual Impaired
The audio stream type descriptor for the stream when not
in dual mono (1+1) mode.
Main Audio (00)
Clean Effects (01)
Hearing Impaired (02)
Visual Impaired (03)
Audio Stream Type
(Left)
Main Audio
Clean Effects
Hearing Impaired
Visual Impaired
The audio stream type descriptor for the left channel when
in dual mono (1+1) mode.
Main Audio (00)
Clean Effects (01)
Hearing Impaired (02)
Visual Impaired (03)
Audio Stream Type
(Right)
Main Audio
Clean Effects
Hearing Impaired
Visual Impaired
The audio stream type descriptor for the right channel
when in dual mono (1+1) mode.
Main Audio (00)
Clean Effects (01)
Hearing Impaired (02)
Visual Impaired (03)
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 1 is set in any of the language fields.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 2 is set in any of the language fields.
MPEG Version
MPEG1, MPEG2
Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be signaled.
Copyright
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected.
Original
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
De-emphasis
Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17
To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm
specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis
applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis
applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to
encoding.
Table 5.20 Dolby Digital Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input), 1/0 (Right – input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Metadata Controls
Coding Mode
Off, On
Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated
in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if
present).
Metadata source type
Embedded/Decoded Auto
Selects where live metadata comes from.
Metadata override
type
None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue
Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm
Defines which metadata parameters to override.
5-58
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Metadata Reversion
Mode
Last Used, Preset
Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live
metadata.
Metadata preset type
1 to 8
Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected
for Metadata Reversion Mode.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.21 AAC-LC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384, 448, 512
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
Audio Stream Type
The language of the stream.
Main Audio
The audio stream type descriptor for the stream.
Clean Effects
Main Audio (00)
Hearing Impaired
Clean Effects (01)
Visual Impaired
Hearing Impaired (02)
Visual Impaired (03)
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-59
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.22 HE-AAC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
16, 24, 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
SBR Signaling
Explicit, Implicit
Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
Audio Stream Type
The language of the stream.
Main Audio
The audio stream type descriptor for the stream.
Clean Effects
Main Audio (00)
Hearing Impaired
Clean Effects (01)
Visual Impaired
Hearing Impaired (02)
Visual Impaired (03)
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Defined 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.23 LPCM Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio PES.
Au Information Ctrl
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Channel Mode
2 channel (stereo / dual mono)
LPCM pass-thru will always pass thru both channels
present in the incoming AES3 stream.
5-60
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Depth
16-bit, 20-bit, 24-bit
Select the expected bit depth of the audio words. This will
affect the outgoing elementary stream bit rate.
Channel Identification
0 - 255
User defined channel identification number of the first
audio channel in the outgoing SMPTE 302M
stream’sAES3 data header.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Language
A selection of languages from across the world.
The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors.
Audio Stream Type
Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired;
Visual Impaired
Intended use of the audio.
Advanced
Table 5.24 Dolby-E Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Ctrl
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Bit Depth
16-bit, 20-bit, 24-bit
Select the expected bit depth of the audio words. This will
affect the outgoing elementary stream bit rate.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Language
A selection of languages from across the world.
The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors.
Audio Stream Type
Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired;
Visual Impaired
Intended use of the audio.
Advanced
Table 5.25 Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Bit rate
16 to 640 kbps in discrete steps as defined by
Dolby
Bit rate of the incoming audio. The outgoing audio shall
retain the same bit rate.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Ctrl
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Language
A selection of languages from across the world.
The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors.
Audio Stream Type
Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired;
Visual Impaired
Intended use of the audio.
Advanced
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-61
Web GUI Control
Table 5.26 Audio Description Service Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
64
Bit Rate of the audio stream.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Language
A selection of languages from across the world.
The language of the stream to be signaled in descriptors.
Audio Stream Type
Main Audio; Clean Effects; Hearing Impaired;
Visual Impaired
Intended use of the audio.
MPEG Version
MPEG-1; MPEG-2
Standard to be used for the output compressed audio.
Copyright
Off; On
Set the copyright bits in the MPEG headers.
Original
Off; On
Set the original bits in the MPEG headers.
De-emphasis
Off; 50/15us; CCITT J.17
Set de-emphasis as applied to the audio, in the MPEG
headers. Does not apply the appropriate pre-emphasis.
Action on control track
loss
No action; Bit rate saving
If Bit rate Saving is selected, there shall be no emitted
elementary stream for Audio Description if the control track
is not received.
Action when silence is
detected
No action; Bit rate saving
If Bit rate Saving is selected, there shall be no emitted
elementary stream for Audio Description if silence is
detected on the incoming audio track.
Silence Threshold
Decibels, -90 to -1, dBFS
Threshold of incoming audio track, which, if below the
threshold will be determined to be silence.
Silence Period
Time, seconds, 0-300
Duration of silence as determined by the threshold,
needed before Action when Silence is Detected will take
place.
Advanced
Table 5.27 Automatic Loudness Control Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Operating Mode
Off
ALC is not in use.
Measure
Long and short measurements are taken and displayed in
the status but no audio adjustments are made.
Measure + ALC
Measurements are taken and corrections are made for
short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above
the Target level.
5-62
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Measure + ALC + LTLC
Measurements are taken and corrections are made for
short term peak in audio that are measured 1 LU above
the Target level. Corrections are also made over the
longer term to adjust the channel loudness level to that of
the Target Level.
In this mode manual gain adjustment from the codec page
is disabled.
Target Level
-40 to 0 (LKFS (LU)
The desired Loudness level for the channel
Time Period
5 to 120 minutes
This controls the responsiveness of the long term audio
loudness level correction.
A smaller number will result in the audio being adjusted
more dynamically. A larger value will give a slower less
noticeable adjustment.
Peak Limit
-20 to 0 dBFS
This controls a hard clipping limiter for the audio level. This
adjustment is based on the absolute peak level measured
in dBFS.
The peak limiter only operates in ‘Measure + ALC’ and
‘Measure + ALC + LTLC’ modes.
If this value is set to 0 no limiting is performed
Maximum Boost
0 to 10 dB
This control determines the maximum amount of gain that
the LTLC algorithm can apply. This is to prevent over
adjustment which can lead to unwanted audio artifacts.
This only applies when the operating mode is “Measure +
ALC + LTLC”
Maximum Attenuation
0 to 10 dB
This control determines the maximum amount of
attenuation that the ALC and the LTLC algorithm can
apply. This is to prevent over adjustment which can lead to
unwanted audio artifacts
Preset
Subtle, Standard, Strong
The available options are Subtle, Standard and Strong.
This setting controls the aggressiveness of the corrections
performed by the Short Term ALC algorithm. It controls
how quickly the correction takes place and the strength of
the correction
Reset Statistics
True, false
This can be used to reset the statistics that have been
collected in the Audio Algorithm. Due to the slower update
nature of the web interface the apparent change would be
to the measurement of the Integrated Loudness only
The reference target
level
Line out mode; RF mode; Portable mode -14dB;
Portable mode -1dB; Portable mode -8dB
Sets the reference target level for downstream decoders.
Override dialnorm
metadata
Off, on
For Dolby encoding, the dialnorm parameter can be
overridden with the Target Level. This is recommended
practice.
Audio Component
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Component tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-63
Web GUI Control
Table 5.28 Audio Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
Exclude from PMT
False
If set to True, this component will not be referenced in the
PMT, and its bit rate is excluded from bit rate calculations.
Source PID Monitoring
None; Monitor; Monitor & Redundancy
Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID from an IP input
can be enabled, and can be set to cause a redundancy
switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by
Ericsson control software. Not supported in this release.
Dolby Metadata Presets
Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - CE-a >CE-a > Audio Module > Dolby
Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify. Alternatively, the settings can
be reached through the front panel under Advanced/CE-a/Audio Module/Dolby Metadata
Presets. Any of these presets can then be applied to any audio channel encoding audio in
the Dolby Digital format. The table below lists the parameters for each preset.
Table 5.29 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters
Parameter
Values
Preset name
Description
Name of the preset (for user information)
Dialogue
normalization level
-31 to -1 dB
Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment
required to achieve this set level.
Bitstream mode
Main audio service: complete main, music and
effects, Associated service: visually impaired,
Associated service: hearing impaired,
Associated service: dialogue, Associated
service: commentary, Associated service:
emergency, Associated service: visually
impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover
Flags the type of service in the bitstream.
Line mode
compression profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
Alters the dynamic range for line output.
RF mode compression
profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall
level is raised by 11 dB.
Center mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB)
Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre
speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only.
Surround mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Surround downmix level for the front left and right
channels when consumer has no surround speakers.
Dolby Surround mode
Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded
Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains
information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt)
Audio production
information exists
Off, On
This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type
parameters exist within the bit-stream.
Mixing level
80 to 111 dB
Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue
level during the final audio mixing session.
5-64
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Room type
Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor,
Small room flat monitor
Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final
audio mixing session.
Copyright flag
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected
Original bitstream flag
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
Enable extended
bitstream information
Off, On
Flags if additional information is available for downmixing.
Preferred downmix
mode
Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro
downmmix preferred
Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro
downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder.
Lt/Rt center mix level
1.414 (+3.0 dB), 1.189 (+1.5 dB), 1.000 (0 dB),
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix.
Similar to 'Center mix level'.
Lt/Rt surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the surround
channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to
Surround mix level'.
Lo/Ro center mix level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix.
When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center
mix level'
Lo/Ro surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this
replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'.
Dolby Surround EX
mode
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Flags if the stream has been encoded in 'Surround Ex'.
Only used if surround channels are present.
A/D converter type
Standard, HDCD
Indicates type of A/D conversion used.
Digital de-emphasis
Off, Auto, On
To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification
the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input
signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis
filter must be applied prior to encoding.
DC high pass filter
enable
Off, On
Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient
encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach
100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore
must be clipped.
Bandwidth low-pass
filter enable
Off, On
Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter
removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded.
Low-frequency effects
low pass filter enable
Off, On
Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should
only be switched off if it is known that there are no
frequencies above 120 Hz.
Surround attenuation
enable
Off, On
Attenuate surround channels by 3 dB before encoding.
Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels
for the surround channels, and this can be used to
compensate.
Surround phase shift
enable
Off, On
Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround
channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing
a 'Lt/Rt' downmix.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-65
Web GUI Control
5.5.3.1.3
Splicing Stream Configuration
Splicing
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Splicing tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.30 Splicing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Splicing Control
Off, On VANC Message Only, On VANC, On IP
On VANC or On IP Enables splice points to be set in the
video stream upon reception of a SCTE104 message and
determines the insertion point.
On VANC Message Only does not insert splice point, but
converts the SCTE 104 message to SCTE 35 message in
the output.
To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license
(CE/SWO/DPI) is needed.
Splice Null Insertion
Off, On
Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35
messages into the output stream if no messages have
been sent for 500ms.
Audio Splicing
Off, On
Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that
the video splice occurs.
AS Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Only available when Splicing Control is set to On VANC
Message Only.
If set to Don’t Care the AVP will create SCTE 35 output
regardless of the source Automation System.
If set to Use 1 the AVP will create SCTE 35 output only for
incoming SCTE 104 whose AS Index matches the setting
in AS Index 1.
If set to Use 1 + 2 the AVP will create SCTE 35 output only
for incoming SCTE 104 messages whose AS Index
matches either the setting in AS Index 1 or the setting in
AS Index 2.
DPI PID Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Determines how many values of DPI PID Index are
compared against the incoming SCTE 104message.
Available only when Splicing Control is set to On VANC
Message Only.
AS Index 1
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 or
Use 1 + 2.
AS Index 2
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 1
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 or Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 2
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 + 2.
None
Only available if triggering splicing based on contact
closure through a GPI card.
SCTE 104 Encode
Input Stream Channel
5-66
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Splicing Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.31 Slicing Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.1.4
Teletext Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext.
Teletext
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is transmitted.
The parameters listed are available on the Teletext tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEa/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction/Teletext menu on the front panel.
Table 5.32 Teletext Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Source
Off, OP-47 (Max 300kb/s), VANC Teletext
Controls the source from where Teletext is extracted,
including encapsulation method where appropriate.
Teletext Packetisation
Normal (ETS 300-472) - Data on Teletext
Component, Legacy (ETS 301-775) - Data on
VBI Component
Controls how the Teletext data is packetized in to a
component data stream.
SMPTE2031 Max. No.
Teletext
3, 7, 11, 15, 36
Defines the maximum number of Teletext lines inserted.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source.
SMPTE2031 Teletext
Present
Yes, No
Displays whether Teletext is found in the SDI stream.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source. Read only parameter.
Min # Teletext Packets
0 to 3
Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets
generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data.
PTS On Teletext
Off, On
Controls whether a PTS value is included in the output
Teletext packets.
Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional
Information Page, Programme Schedule Page,
Heading Impaired Subtitle Page
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The page type of the Teletext descriptor.
5-67
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page
Language
Description
The page number for the page to be set.
List of languages
The language set for the Teletext descriptor.
Teletext Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
Teletext data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.33 Teletext Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.1.5
VBI and ANC Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters available for setting up VBI and ANC
streams.
VBI and Ancillary Data
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is
extracted and how the data is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEa/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.34 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
VBI Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Description Control
5-68
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT.
Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set
to User.
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signalling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index
(11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after
Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero
means drop to default immediately on loss.
AFD Action on Reserved
Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved
AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
Code as 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE 334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External,
Freewheel on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Closed Captions Source
Timecode
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input
(RP207).
5-69
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Insertion Timeout
Description
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Default Servicename
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
The default service name to be used.
Broadcaster ID Source
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the
output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line 22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line 23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System
B, Monochrome samples
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line)
input streams.
VBI Line 272 - VBI Line
285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI Line
336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext
System B, Monochrome samples
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signalling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 1
Field 2
ANC Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
ancillary data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
5-70
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.35 ANC Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.1.6
PCR Stream Configuration
The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream
contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams
included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a
timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the
service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream.
The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/Transport
Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot <m> Video 1
PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.36 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
PID
16 - 8190
The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the
program clock reference values.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only
parameter.
5.5.3.2
CE-a J2K VCM
5.5.3.2.1
Video and VBI Stream Configuration
Video Input and Pre-Processing
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a J2K/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.37 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Lock
Yes, No
Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified
through the parameters below. Read only parameter.
Source
SDI
The video will be sourced from the SDI/HD-SDI input on
the rear panel.
Bars
An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used
as the video source.
Black
An internally generated black test pattern will be used as
the video source.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-71
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Moving Object
An internally generated moving object test pattern will be
used as the video source.
Slate
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and
Restore Saved Config
Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be
automatically detected or what actions to take if a change
is detected in the Input Video Format.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD
720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
Video Input Format
SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD
720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97
Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the
video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change
in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the
Video Profile used for encoding. As from the current
release down-conversion is supported, SD profiles can be
selected for HD input formats.
Output On Video Loss
Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay
Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input.
Black, Black with text overlay
Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input.
Color Bars, Bars with text overlay
Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input.
No PID
The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not
updated.
Video Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a J2K/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on
the front panel.
Table 5.38 Video Encoding Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Profile
Profile Off,
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD J2K Profile Level 2 4:2:2 10 bit
Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the
allowed Bit Rate range.
Profile for SD input
Profile Off,
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD J2K Profile Level 2 4:2:2 10 bit
The profile to set when an SD input is detected on the SDI
input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile
cannot be set manually.
Profile for HD input
Profile Off,
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD J2K Profile Level 2 4:2:2 10 bit
The profile to set when an HD input is detected on the HDSDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video
Profile cannot be set manually.
Resolution
720 x 576, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1920 x 1080
Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the
encoded video. The available options depend on the
values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile.
5-72
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Bit Rate
The valid bit rate range depends on the selected
video profile.
Defines the Transport Stream bit rate to be used by the
compressed video component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode
is set to Maximize Video for the Transport Stream that
contains the video component and the Bit Rate Weighting
of the component is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this
field is read only.
Compatibility
Compatibility with the JPEG 2000 standard, usually means
a delay no more than 160 ms.
Ultra low delay
Very low delay brought by the JPEG 2000 encoding.
Buffer Mode
Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only
parameter.
Delay
Video Output
The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output menu on the
front panel.
Table 5.39 Video Output Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
Off, On, On (Picture Header)
Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video. If it is set to
other than Off, the PCR PID field of a service will become
read only and will contain the PID of the current component.
Copyright
Off, On
Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header.
Original
Off, On
Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header.
PES Packet Per
GOP, Picture
Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The
Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is used.
AU Information Ctrl
RAI, RAI and AU Info, RAI, AU Info and TC
Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation
Field for video Access Units (AU) with the following values:
Random Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI 101 154 (AU info),
and Time Code (TC).
AR Signaling Output
Control
Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data
Controls what Aspect Ratio signaling will get embedded in
the video as user data. AFD sources are: SMPTE 2016,
Video Index, WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect Ratio. Bar
Data is only SMPTE 2016.
TC Output Location
Off, SEIMsg
Defines how timecode is put into the output video stream.
Video Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front
panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-73
Web GUI Control
Table 5.40 Video Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
Master TS
Off, On
Sets the master Transport Stream for the component.
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Configuration
VBI Stream and ANC/DVB Subtitle Stream
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEx/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.41 VBI Stream and ANC/DVB Subtitle Stream Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Generic ANC
Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
Generic ANC
VBI in Picture
Enable VBI in picture
Off, Closed Caption
Input Detection
The CE-a J2K VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3,
Getting Started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection.
5.5.3.2.2
Audio Stream Configuration
Audio Input
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-a J2K/Audio
Module/Audio <n>/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.42 Audio Input Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), Dolby E
Sets the input format used by the audio encoder.
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed
to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming
audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes a 1 kHz
test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI
embedded audio stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital
inputs.
5-74
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Output On Audio Loss
No PID, Silence
Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is
for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for
encode silence.
When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID is not
removed from the Program Map Table, so a Transport
Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the output
Transport Stream.
Audio Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-a J2K/Audio Module/Audio <n>/Encode menu on the front panel.
Table 5.43 Audio Encoding Standards
Parameter
Options
Description
Coding Standard
Pass-thru
Pass-thru of the input
Table 5.44 Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Audio Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-75
Web GUI Control
Table 5.45 Audio Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.2.3
VBI and ANC Stream Configuration
VBI and Ancillary Data
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-a
J2K/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.46 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Generic ANC Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Generic ANC Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Generic ANC
VBI in Picture
Enable VBI in picture
Off, Closed Caption
ANC Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.47 ANC Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.2.4
PCR Stream Configuration
The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream
contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams
included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a
timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the
service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream.
5-76
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/Transport
Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot <m> Video 1
PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.48 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
16 - 8190
The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the
program clock reference values.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only
parameter.
5.5.3.3
CE-x VCM
5.5.3.3.1
Video and VBI Stream Configuration
Video Input and Pre-Processing
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-x/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.49 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Lock
Yes, No
Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified
through the parameters below. Read only parameter.
Source
SDI
The video will be sourced from the SDI/HD-SDI input on
the rear panel.
Bars
An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used
as the video source.
Black
An internally generated black test pattern will be used as
the video source.
Moving Object
An internally generated moving object test pattern will be
used as the video source.
Slate
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and
Restore Saved Config
Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be
automatically detected or what actions to take if a change
is detected in the Input Video Format.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD
720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
Video Input Format
SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD
720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97
Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the
video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change
in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the
Video Profile used for encoding. As from the current
release down-conversion is supported, SD profiles can be
selected for HD input formats.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-77
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Output On Video Loss
Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay
Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
Black, Black with text overlay
Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input. Text
overlay is not supported in this release.
Color Bars, Bars with text overlay
Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
No PID
The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not
updated.
Slate, Slate with text overlay
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Ident Text
Overlay text to display on top of images.
MCTF
Off, Default, Strong, Stronger
The amount of Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering
done to improve image quality.
Adaptive
Preprocessing
Off, On
Adaptive PreProcessing analyses the incoming video to
tries and identify areas of noise contained within the
picture. A filter is then applied to those areas of the picture
to remove the noise. Applying the filter may remove detail
from the picture and may make edges of objects appear
soft or slightly blurred.For normal operation with high
quality input video feeds it is recommended that this option
is set to OFF.
Bandwidth
30 to 100 %
Sets the video horizontal bandwidth filter.
Half Line Removal
Off, On
Enables or disables the removal of black half lines at the
top of the picture by substituting video data from adjacent
lines. The option is available when Video Input Format is
set to SD 576i25.
Off, On
Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can
be selected under Logo file.
Logo
Logo insertion
The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be
uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Not supported in
this release.
Logo file
A fixed logo position?
On, Off
Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying
the logo on the video. Not supported in this release.
The X position of the
logo
The position relative to left of the screen 0 (number of
pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position
is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated.
Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not
supported in this release.
The Y position of the
logo
The position relative to top of screen 0 (number of video
lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a
logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A
fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this
release.
HD to SD Video Down-conversion
Default Aspect Ratio
Conversion
Anamorphic, Center Cut, Letterbox
The down-conversion to apply when AFD is lost or AFD
code 000 is received.
Use Input AFD
true, false
Specifies whether to attempt to use AFD code at input for
format conversion or always apply the default.
5-78
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Action on AFD lost
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD is lost.
Action on AFD code
0000
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD code 0000 is received.
Video Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x/Video/Video
1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel.
Table 5.50 Video Encoding Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Profile
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the
allowed bit rate range.
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0
8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
10 bit
Profile for SD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The profile to set when an SD input is detected on the SDI
input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile
cannot be set manually.
5-79
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Profile for HD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
The profile to set when an HD input is detected on the HDSDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video
Profile cannot be set manually.
Resolution
352 x 576, 480 x 576, 528 x 576, 544 x 576, 640
x 576, 704 x 576, 720 x 576, 352 x 480, 480 x
480, 528 x 480, 544 x 480, 640 x 480, 704 x
480, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, 1920
x 1080
Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the
encoded video. The available options depend on the
values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile.
Video Bit Rate
The valid bit rate range depends on the selected
video profile.
Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video
component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize
Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video
component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component
is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only.
Buffer Mode
CBR
Constant Bit Rate operation.
Low Delay
Reduced encode delay (typically 350ms) achieved by
removing pre-processing functions. Bit Rate, GOP
structure and GOP length impact the delay. The IP GOP
structure will give lowest delay, but with reduced quality.
Mega Low Delay
Encode delay reduced further by removing frame-sync in
pre-processing. Bit Rate, GOP structure and GOP length
impact the delay. The IP GOP structure will give lowest
delay, but with reduced quality.
Stripe Refresh
Available if the AVP/SWO/CE-x/Stripe license is enabled.
Provides sub 100ms end to end latency for H.264
operation when combined with the appropriate Ericsson
RX8200.
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode)
Available if the AVP/SWO/CE-x/Stripe license is enabled.
Allows MPEG-1 LayerII audio encode in Stripe Refresh
This increases the latency by 1 frame compared to Stripe
Refresh.
Fixed Latency
Provides a fixed latency (~650ms) across the full bit rate
range of the selected H.264 video profile.
Aspect Ratio
16:9, 4:3
Does not affect the video encoding but rather indicates
what the desired aspect ratio for the decoded picture (not
the pixel). If no other mechanism such as WSS in the VBI
is used, the video output image will use this aspect ratio.
GOP Length
4 to 250
Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames
between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream.
GOP Structure
IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP
Sets the number of B frames between reference frames.
IBBBBBBBP can only be used for 720p video format
encoded with a H.264 video profile.
5-80
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Closed GOPs
Off, On
Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in
which the predicted frames can have their reference from
outside the group.
Scene Cut Detection
On, Off
When enabled, minimizes the negative effect the scene
changes have on the bit rate by inserting an I-Frame when
a change is detected. It also affects the GOP length.
Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only
parameter.
Delay
Stills Detection
Off, Intelligent, Clamp
Detects if the video is a still picture, and adjusts the
encoded video bit rate accordingly when operating in VBR
mode.
Film Mode
Off, On
Sets encoding parameters that give better image quality
for film like sources. Available only for frame rates of 29.97
or 59.94 Hz when the resolution is set to other than SIF.
Inloop Filter
High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto
Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback
loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can
increase picture sharpness.
Max CABAC Bit Rate
Depends on the Video Profile set.
Controls the bit rate at which the encoder switches from
CABAC to CAVLC entropy coding.
SEI Encapsulation
Mode
Combined, Mediaroom
Defines how the SEi messages are formatted in the picture
header for H264. For combined, all the different types of
messages (for example AFD) are bundles into one NAL
packet. For Mediaroom each type of message is put into
its own NAL packet. This was done for STB compatibility
issues
3D Mode
Off, Side by Side Frame Packing, Top and
Bottom Frame Packing; Frame Sync Delay in
SEI
Configures output to include 3D related information in the
SEI messages. The frame sync delay in SEI message is
only available for CE-x with CE/SWO/CE-x/H264,
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and CE/SWO/CE-x/3D licenses.
Video Output
The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/Video/Video 1/Video/Main
Video/Stream Output menu on the front panel.
Table 5.51 Video Output Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
Off, On, On (Picture Header)
Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video or is on a
separate PID.
When set to Off, there must be a separate PCR
component in the service which can have a user defined
PID.
When set to On, the PCR PID will be the same as the
associated component. A PCR will be included for every I
picture.
The On (Picture Header) option is provided in MPEG-2
encoding only as an option to support some legacy
equipment that required a PCR on every picture. This
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Copyright
Off, On
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header.
5-81
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Original
Off, On
Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header.
PES Packet Per
GOP, Picture
Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The
Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is
used.
AU Information Ctrl
Off, RAI, RAI and AU Info
Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation
Field for video Access Units (AU). This can be: Random
Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI 101 154 (AU info), Time
Code (TC) and Additional Info (Encoding info and
BroadcasterID).
Elementary Stream
Stuffing
Off, On
Control for the Elementary stream level to maintain the
configured bit rate.
AR Signaling Output
Control
Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data
Controls what Aspect Ratio signaling will be put into video
user_data. AFD sources are: SMPTE 2016, Video Index,
WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect Ratio. Bar Data is only
SMPTE 2016.
AR Signalling Location
Sequence Hdr, Picture Hdr, Seq And Pic Hdrs
Specifies which header shall contain the aspect ratio
signaling information.
TC Output Location
SeqHdr, SeqAndPicHdr, Off, SEIMsg
Determines the locations used to transmit Time code
information in the stream. Time code can be carried by the
sequence header, the sequence and picture headers for
MPEG-2 or a SEI message for H.264.
Video Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.52 Video Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
Master TS
Off, On
Sets the master Transport Stream for the component..
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEx/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
5-82
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.53 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Enable VBI Pass-thru
Mode
Off, On
Enable Pass-thru of VBI, ANC and Teletext data from
specified PIDs, instead of extracting them from SDI. Read
only parameter. Not supported in this release.
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
VBI Teletext
Descriptor Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT.
Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set
to User.
Description Control
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index
(11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after
Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero
means drop to default immediately on loss.
AFD Action on
Reserved Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved
AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
Code as 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Closed Captions
Source
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
5-83
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel
on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI
VITC
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Timecode
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input
(RP207).
Insertion Timeout
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Default Servicename
Broadcaster ID Source
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
The default service name to be used.
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the
output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC
Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line
22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line
23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line)
input streams.
VBI Line 272 - VBI
Line 285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI
Line 336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 1
Field 2
5-84
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Input Detection
The CE-x VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3, Getting
started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection.
5.5.3.3.2
Audio Stream Configuration
Audio Input
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-x/Audio Module/Audio <n>/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.54 Audio Input Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby
Digital, Dolby E, AAC
Sets the input format used by the audio encoder.
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed
to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming
audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 kHz
test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI
embedded audio stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital
inputs.
Output On Audio Loss
No PID, Silence
Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is
for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for
encode silence.
NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID
is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a
Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the
output Transport Stream.
Source Switchout
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Specifies which input to output to the reference output on
the 15-way D-type audio connector.
Audio Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x/Audio Module/Audio
<n>/Encode menu on the front panel.
Table 5.55 Audio Encoding Standards
Parameter
Options
Description
Coding Standard
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 Encode(More than two channel pairs
require the /SWO/M1L2 license)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital encode, requires CE/SWO/DOLBYAC3
license.
AAC-LC
AAC-LC encoding, requires CE/SWO/AAC license.
HE-AAC
HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2encoding, requires CE/SWO/AAC
license.
Pass-thru
Pass-thru of the input
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-85
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Options
Description
Audio Description Service
MPEG-1 Layer II encode of a mono audio track that
describes action in the video plus a control track.
Table 5.56 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384
Bit Rate of the audio stream
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase
Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio
(8 Cannels)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding..
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Left)
The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Right)
The language of the right channel when in dual mono
(1+1) mode.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in any of the language fields.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in any of the language fields.
MPEG Version
MPEG1, MPEG2
Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be ignaled.
Copyright
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected.
Original
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
De-emphasis
Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17
To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm
specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis
applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis
applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to
encoding.
Table 5.57 Dolby Digital Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input), 1/0 (Right – input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
5-86
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Metadata Controls
Coding Mode
Off, On
Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated
in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if
present).
Metadata source type
Embedded/Decoded Auto, Serial Port (Program
1 to 8)
Selects where live metadata comes from.
Metadata override
type
None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue
Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm
Defines which metadata parameters to override.
Metadata Reversion
Mode
Last Used, Preset
Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live
metadata.
Metadata preset type
1 to 8
Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected
for Metadata Reversion Mode.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.58 AAC-LC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384, 448, 512
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-87
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.59 HE-AAC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
16, 24, 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
SBR Signalling
Explicit, Implicit
Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.60 Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
5-88
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.61 Audio Description Service Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
64
Bit Rate of the audio stream.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Audio Component
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Component tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.62 Audio Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-89
Web GUI Control
Dolby Metadata Presets
Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - CE-x >CE-x > Audio Module > Dolby
Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify. Alternatively, the settings can
be reached through the front panel under Advanced/CE-x/Audio Module/Dolby Metadata
Presets. Any of these presets can then be applied to any audio channel encoding audio in
the Dolby Digital format. The table lists the parameters for each preset.
Table 5.63 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters
Parameter
Values
Preset name
Description
Name of the preset (for user information)
Dialogue
normalization level
-31 to -1 dB
Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment
required to achieve the set level.
Bitstream mode
Main audio service: complete main, music and
effects, Associated service: visually impaired,
Associated service: hearing impaired,
Associated service: dialogue, Associated
service: commentary, Associated service:
emergency, Associated service: visually
impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover
Flags the type of service in the bitstream.
Line mode
compression profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
Alters the dynamic range for line output.
RF mode compression
profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall
level is raised by 11dB.
Center mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB)
Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre
speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only.
Surround mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Surround downmix level for the front left and right
channels when consumer has no surround speakers.
Dolby Surround mode
Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded
Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains
information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt)
Audio production
information exists
Off, On
This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type
parameters exist within the bit-stream.
Mixing level
80 to 111 dB
Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue
level during the final audio mixing session.
Room type
Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor,
Small room flat monitor
Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final
audio mixing session.
Copyright flag
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected
Original bitstream flag
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
Enable extended
bitstream information
Off, On
Flags if additional information is available for downmixing.
Preferred downmix
mode
Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro
downmmix preferred
Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro
downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder.
Lt/Rt center mix level
1.414 (+3.0 dB), 1.189 (+1.5 dB), 1.000 (0 dB),
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix.
Similar to 'Center mix level'.
Lt/Rt surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the surround
channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to
Surround mix level'.
5-90
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Lo/Ro center mix level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix.
When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center
mix level'
Lo/Ro surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this
replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'.
Dolby Surround EX
mode
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Flags if the stream has been encoded in Surround Ex.
Only used if surround channels are present.
A/D converter type
Standard, HDCD
Indicates type of A/D conversion used.
Digital de-emphasis
Off, Auto, On
To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification
the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input
signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis
filter must be applied prior to encoding.
DC high pass filter
enable
Off, On
Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient
encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach
100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore
must be clipped.
Bandwidth low-pass
filter enable
Off, On
Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter
removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded.
Low-frequency effects
low pass filter enable
Off, On
Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should
only be switched off if it is known that there are no
frequencies above 120 Hz.
Surround attenuation
enable
Off, On
Attenuate surround channels by 3 dB before encoding.
Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels
for the surround channels, and this can be used to
compensate.
Surround phase shift
enable
Off, On
Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround
channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing
a 'Lt/Rt' downmix.
5.5.3.3.3
Splicing Stream Configuration
Splicing
The following parameters are available on the Splicing tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x/Video/Video
1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front panel.
Table 5.64 Splicing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Splicing Control
Off, On VANC Message Only, On VANC, On IP
Enables splice points to be set in the video stream upon
reception of a SCTE 104 message and determines the
insertion point.
To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license
(CE/SWO/DPI) is needed.
Splice Null Insertion
Off, On
Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35
messages into the output stream if no messages have
been sent for 500ms.
Audio Splicing
Off, On
Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that
the video splice occurs.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-91
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
AS Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Only available when Splicing Control is set to On VANC
Message Only.
If set to Don’t Care the AVP will create SCTE 35 output
regardless of the source Automation System.
If set to Use 1 the AVP will create SCTE 35 output only for
incoming SCTE 104 whose AS Index matches the setting
in AS Index 1.
If set to Use 1 + 2 the AVP will create SCTE 35 output only
for incoming SCTE 104 messages whose AS Index
matches either the setting in AS Index 1 or the setting in
AS Index 2.
DPI PID Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Determines how many values of DPI PID Index are
compared against the incoming SCTE 104 message.
Available only when Splicing Control is set to On VANC
Message Only.
AS Index 1
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 or
Use 1 + 2.
AS Index 2
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 1
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 or Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 2
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 + 2.
Splicing Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.65 Slicing Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.3.4
Teletext Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext.
Teletext
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the Teletext tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI
Extraction/Teletext menu on the front panel.
5-92
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.66 Teletext Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Source
Off, OP-47 (Max 300 kb/s), VANC Teletext
Controls whether Teletext is extracted from VANC or not
and if it extracted, which encapsulation method (OP-47 or
SMPTE 2031) to use.
Teletext Packetisation
Normal (ETS 300-472) - Data on Teletext
Component, Legacy (ETS 301-775) - Data on
VBI Component
Controls how the Teletext data is packetized in to a
component data stream.
SMPTE2031 Max. No.
Teletext
3, 7, 11, 15, 36
Defines the maximum number of Teletext lines inserted.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source.
SMPTE2031 Teletext
Present
Yes, No
Displays whether Teletext is found in the SDI stream.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source. Read only parameter.
Min # Teletext Packets
0 to 3
Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets
generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data.
PTS On Teletext
Off, On
Controls whether a PTS value is included in the output
Teletext packets.
Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page
Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional
Information Page, Programme Schedule Page,
Heading Impaired Subtitle Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page
Language
The page type of the Teletext descriptor.
The page number for the page to be set.
List of languages
The language set for the Teletext descriptor.
Teletext Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
Teletext data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.67 Teletext Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.3.5
VBI and ANC Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters available for setting up VBI and ANC
streams.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-93
Web GUI Control
VBI and Ancillary Data
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is
extracted and how the data is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI
Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.68 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Enable VBI Pass-thru
Mode
Off, On
Enable Pass-thru of VBI, ANC and Teletext data from
specified PIDs, instead of extracting them from SDI.
Read only parameter. Not supported in this release.
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame
Rate is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to
User.
VBI Teletext
Descriptor Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into
the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to
User.
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to
User.
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is
set to User.
Description Control
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signalling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video
Index (11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at
input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received
AFD code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then
drop to default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then
switch AFD off.
5-94
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained.
Zero means drop to default immediately on loss.
AFD Action on
Reserved Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when
reserved AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
s 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Closed Captions
Source
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel on
Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
Timecode
TC Mode
TC External Source
TC Dropframes
NC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI VITC
Off, On, Auto
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will
select the first source present in order of the drop down
list.
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to
external source, or to ON for internal source.
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from
input (RP207).
Insertion Timeout
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Default Servicename
Broadcaster ID Source
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
The default service name to be used.
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into
the output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC
Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the
SDI stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data
output.
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line
22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to
Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption
information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line
23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to
Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signalling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625line) input streams.
Field 1
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-95
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
VBI Line 272 - VBI
Line 285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to
Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption
information. Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI
Line 336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to
Off if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 2
ANC Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
ancillary data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.69 ANC component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.3.6
PCR Stream Configuration
The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream
contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams
included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a
timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the
service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream.
The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/Transport
Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot <m> Video 1
PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.70 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
PID
16 - 8190
The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the
program clock reference values.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only
parameter.
5-96
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.3.4
CE-x Analogue VCM
5.5.3.4.1
Video and VBI Stream Configuration
Video Input and Pre-Processing
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x
Analogue/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.71 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Lock
Yes, No
Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified
through the parameters below. Read only parameter.
Source
SDI
The video will be sourced from the SDI/HD-SDI input on
the rear panel.
Analogue
The video will be sources from the CVBS input on the rear
panel.
Bars
An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used
as the video source.
Black
An internally generated black test pattern will be used as
the video source.
Moving Object
An internally generated moving object test pattern will be
used as the video source.
Slate
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure Video Profile Only, Auto Detect and
Restore Saved Config
Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be
automatically detected or what actions to take if a change
is detected in the Input Video Format.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD
720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
Video Input Format
SD 567i25, SD 480i29.97, HD 720p50, HD
720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD 1080i29.97
Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the
video format used for encoding the test patterns. A change
in the Video Input Format might result in a change in the
Video Profile used for encoding. As from the current
release down-conversion is supported, SD profiles can be
selected for HD input formats.
Output On Video Loss
Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay
Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
Black, Black with text overlay
Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input. Text
overlay is not supported in this release.
Color Bars, Bars with text overlay
Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
No PID
The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not
updated.
Slate, Slate with text overlay
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Ident Text
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Overlay text to display on top of images.
5-97
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
MCTF
Off, Default, Strong, Stronger
The amount of Motion Compensated Temporal Filtering
done to improve image quality.
Adaptive
Preprocessing
Off, On
Adaptive Preprocessing analyses the incoming video to
tries and identify areas of noise contained within the
picture. A filter is then applied to those areas of the picture
to remove the noise. Note applying the filter may remove
detail from the picture and may make edges of objects
appear soft or slightly blurred.
For normal operation with high quality input video feeds it
is recommended that this option is set to OFF.
Bandwidth
30 to 100 %
Sets the video horizontal bandwidth filter.
Half Line Removal
Off, On
Enables or disables the removal of black half lines at the
top of the picture by substituting video data from adjacent
lines. The option is available when Video Input Format is
set to SD 576i25.
Off, On
Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can
be selected under Logo file.
Logo
Logo insertion
The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be
uploaded by selecting the Upload option. Not supported in
this release.
Logo file
A fixed logo position?
On, Off
Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying
the logo on the video. Not supported in this release.
The X position of the
logo
The position relative to left of the screen 0 .. (number of
pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position
is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated.
Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not
supported in this release.
The Y position of the
logo
The position relative to top of screen 0 .. (number of video
lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a
logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A
fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this
release.
HD to SD Video Down-conversion
Default Aspect Ratio
Conversion
Anamorphic, Center Cut, Letterbox
The down-conversion to apply when AFD is lost or AFD
code 000 is received.
Use Input AFD
true, false
Specifies whether to attempt to use AFD code at input for
format conversion or always apply the default.
Action on AFD lost
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD is lost.
Action on AFD code
0000
Convert as anamorphic and put AFD code 1000
out, Convert as specified in Default and put AFD
code out
Specifies what to do if AFD code 0000 is received.
5-98
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Video Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder
menu on the front panel.
Table 5.72 Video Encoding Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Profile
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
Sets the encoder profile. The profile will also affect the
allowed bit rate range.
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0
8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
10 bit
Profile for SD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
The profile to set when an SD input is detected on the SDI
input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video Profile
cannot be set manually.
Profile for HD input
Profile Off,
SD MPEG2 Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD MPEG2 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD MPEG2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD MPEG2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
The profile to set when an HD input is detected on the HDSDI input. Visible only if Input Detection is set to Auto
Detect and Configure. If this option is visible, the Video
Profile cannot be set manually.
Resolution
352 x 576, 480 x 576, 528 x 576, 544 x 576, 640
x 576, 704 x 576, 720 x 576, 352 x 480, 480 x
480, 528 x 480, 544 x 480, 640 x 480, 704 x
480, 720 x 480, 1280 x 720, 1440 x 1080, 1920
x 1080
Defines the horizontal and vertical resolution of the
encoded video. The available options depend on the
values set for Video Input Format and Video Profile.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-99
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Bit Rate
The valid bit rate range depends on the selected
video profile.
Defines the bit rate to be used by the compressed video
component. If Bit Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize
Video for the Transport Stream that contains the video
component, and the Bit Rate Weighting of the component
is set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this field is read only.
Buffer Mode
CBR
Constant Bit Rate operation.
Low Delay
Reduced encode delay (typically 350ms) achieved by
removing pre-processing functions. Bit Rate, GOP
structure and GOP length impact the delay. The IP GOP
structure will give lowest delay, but with reduced quality.
Mega Low Delay
Encode delay reduced further by removing frame-sync in
pre-processing. Bit Rate, GOP structure and GOP length
impact the delay. The IP GOP structure will give lowest
delay, but with reduced quality.
Aspect Ratio
16:9, 4:3
Does not affect the video encoding but rather indicates
what the desired aspect ratio for the decoded picture (not
the pixel). If no other mechanism such as WSS in the VBI
is used, the video output image will use this aspect ratio.
GOP Length
4 to 250
Defines the nominal distance in steps of video frames
between two consecutive I frames in the encoded bitstream.
GOP Structure
IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP
Sets the number of B frames between reference frames.
IBBBBBBBP can only be used for 720p video format
encoded with a H.264 video profile.
Closed GOPs
Off, On
Enables or disables the usage of Group of Pictures in
which the predicted frames can have their reference from
outside the group.
Scene Cut Detection
On, Off
When enabled, minimizes the negative effect the scene
changes have on the bit rate by inserting an I-Frame when
a change is detected. It also affects the GOP length.
Displays the actual video encoding delay. Read only
parameter.
Delay
Stills Detection
Off, Intelligent, Clamp
Detects if the video is a still picture, and adjusts the
encoded video bit rate accordingly when operating in VBR
mode.
Film Mode
Off, On
Sets encoding parameters that give better image quality
for film like sources. Available only for frame rates of 29.97
or 59.94 Hz when the resolution is set to other than SIF.
Inloop Filter
High, Normal, Low, Very Low, Auto
Sets the characteristics of the filter placed in the feedback
loop of the encoder. Applying the filter to the picture can
increase picture sharpness.
Max CABAC Bit Rate
Depends on the Video Profile set.
Controls the bit rate at which the encoder switches from
CABAC to CAVLC entropy coding.
SEI Encapsulation
Mode
Combined, Mediaroom
Defines how the SEi messages are formatted in the picture
header for H264. For combined, all the different types of
messages (for example AFD) are bundles into one NAL
packet. For Mediaroom each type of message is put into
its own NAL packet. This was done for STB compatibility
issues
3D Mode
Off, Side by Side Frame Packing, Top and
Bottom Frame Packing
Configures output to include information in the SEI
message depending on the 3D mode. Frame Sync Delay
in SEI is only available for CE-x with CE/SWO/CE-x/H264,
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and CE/SWO/CE-x/3D licenses.
5-100
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Video Output
The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Stream Output
menu on the front panel.
Table 5.73 Video Output Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
Off, On, On (Picture Header)
Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video or is on a
separate PID.
When set to Off, there must be a separate PCR
component in the service which can have a user defined
PID.
When set to On, the PCR PID will be the same as the
associated component. A PCR will be included for every I
picture.
The On (Picture Header) option is provided in MPEG-2
encoding only as an option to support some legacy
equipment that required a PCR on every picture. This
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Copyright
Off, On
Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header.
Original
Off, On
Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header.
PES Packet Per
GOP, Picture
Determines how PES packets shall be generated. The
Picture option is only available if MPEG 2 encoding is
used.
AU Information Ctrl
RAI, RAI and AU Info, RAI, AU Info and TC
Controls insertion of Private Data in the TS Adaptation
Field for video Access Units (AU) with the following values:
Random Access Indicator (RAI), ETSI 101 154 (AU info),
and Time Code (TC).
AR Signalling Output
Control
Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data
Controls what Aspect Ratio signalling will get embedded in
the video as user data. AFD sources are: SMPTE 2016,
Video Index, WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect Ratio. Bar
Data is only SMPTE 2016.
TC Output Location
Off, SEIMsg
Defines how timecode is put into the output video stream.
Video Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.74 Video Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-101
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Master TS
Off, On
Sets the master Transport Stream for the component..
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Video/Video
1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.75 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Enable VBI Pass-thru
Mode
Off, On
Enable Pass-thru of VBI, ANC and Teletext data from
specified PIDs, instead of extracting them from SDI. Read
only parameter. Not supported in this release.
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
VBI Teletext
Descriptor Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT.
Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set
to User.
Description Control
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index
(11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after
Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
AFD Sustain Timeout
5-102
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero
means drop to default immediately on loss.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
AFD Action on
Reserved Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved
AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
Code as 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Closed Captions
Source
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External, Freewheel
on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Timecode
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input
(RP207).
Insertion Timeout
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Default Servicename
Broadcaster ID Source
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
The default service name to be used.
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the
output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC
Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line
22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line
23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line)
input streams.
Field 1
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-103
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
VBI Line 272 - VBI
Line 285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI
Line 336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 2
Input Detection
The CE-x Analogue VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3,
Getting Started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection.
Note:
5.5.3.4.2
Input detection does not work for the analogue input.
Audio Stream Configuration
Audio Input
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Audio
Module/Audio <n>/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.76 Audio Input Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby
Digital, Dolby E, AAC
Sets the input format used by the audio encoder.
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Input 1-4, Analogue 1-2,
Embedded 1 to 8
Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed
to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming
audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 kHz
test tone. Embedded 1 to 8 are for digital input embedded
in the SDI/HD-SDI stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital
input and Analogue 1-2 are for analogue input. Analogue
and digital inputs cannot be used at the same time.
Output On Audio Loss
No PID, Silence
Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is
for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for
encode silence.
NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID
is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a
Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the
output Transport Stream.
Source Switchout
5-104
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Specifies which input to output to the reference output on
the 15-way D-type audio connector.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Audio Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Audio
Module/Audio <n>/Encode menu on the front panel.
Table 5.77 Audio Encoding Standards
Parameter
Options
Description
Coding Standard
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 Encode(More than two channel pairs
require the /SWO/M1L2 license)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital encode, requires CE/SWO/DOLBYAC3
license.
AAC-LC
AAC-LC encoding, requires CE/SWO/AAC license.
HE-AAC
HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2encoding requires CE/SWO/AAC
license.
Pass-thru
Pass-thru of the input
Audio Description Service
MPEG-1 Layer II encode of a mono audio track that
describes action in the video plus a control track.
Table 5.78 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384
Bit Rate of the audio stream
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase
Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio
(8 Cannels)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding..
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Left)
The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Right)
The language of the right channel when in dual mono
(1+1) mode.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in any of the language fields.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in any of the language fields.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-105
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
MPEG Version
MPEG1, MPEG2
Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be signaled.
Copyright
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected.
Original
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
De-emphasis
Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17
To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm
specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis
applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis
applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to
encoding.
Table 5.79 Dolby Digital Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input), 1/0 (Right – input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Metadata Controls
Coding Mode
Off, On
Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated
in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if
present).
Metadata source type
Embedded/Decoded Auto, Serial Port (Program
1 to 8)
Selects where live metadata comes from.
Metadata override
type
None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue
Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm
Defines which metadata parameters to override.
Metadata Reversion
Mode
Last Used, Preset
Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live
metadata.
Metadata preset type
1 to 8
Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected
for Metadata Reversion Mode.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.80 AAC-LC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384, 448, 512
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
5-106
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.81 HE-AAC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
16, 24, 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
SBR Signalling
Explicit, Implicit
Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The language of the stream.
5-107
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.82 Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.83 Audio Description Service Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
64
Bit Rate of the audio stream.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
5-108
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Audio Component
The parameters listed in Table 5.84 are available on the Component tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.84 Audio Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
Dolby Metadata Presets
Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - CE-x Analogue >CE-x Analogue >
Audio Module > Dolby Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify.
Alternatively, the settings can be reached through the front panel under Advanced/CE-x
Analogue/Audio Module/Dolby Metadata Presets. Any of these presets can then be
applied to any audio channel encoding audio in the Dolby Digital format. The table lists the
parameters for each preset.
Table 5.85 Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters
Parameter
Values
Preset name
Description
Name of the preset (for user information)
Dialogue
normalization level
-31 to -1 dB
Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment
required to achieve the set level.
Bitstream mode
Main audio service: complete main, music and
effects, Associated service: visually impaired,
Associated service: hearing impaired,
Associated service: dialogue, Associated
service: commentary, Associated service:
emergency, Associated service: visually
impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover
Flags the type of service in the bitstream.
Line mode
compression profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
Alters the dynamic range for line output.
RF mode compression
profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall
level is raised by 11dB.
Center mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB)
Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre
speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only.
Surround mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Surround downmix level for the front left and right
channels when consumer has no surround speakers.
Dolby Surround mode
Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded
Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains
information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt)
Audio production
information exists
Off, On
This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type
parameters exist within the bit-stream.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-109
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Mixing level
80 to 111 dB
Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue
level during the final audio mixing session.
Room type
Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor,
Small room flat monitor
Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final
audio mixing session.
Copyright flag
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected
Original bitstream flag
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
Enable extended
bitstream information
Off, On
Flags if additional information is available for downmixing.
Preferred downmix
mode
Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro
downmmix preferred
Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro
downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder.
Lt/Rt center mix level
1.414 (+3.0 dB), 1.189 (+1.5 dB), 1.000 (0 dB),
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix.
Similar to 'Center mix level'.
Lt/Rt surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the surround
channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to
Surround mix level'.
Lo/Ro center mix level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix.
When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center
mix level'
Lo/Ro surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this
replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'.
Dolby Surround EX
mode
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Flags if the stream has been encoded in 'Surround Ex'.
Only used if surround channels are present.
A/D converter type
Standard, HDCD
Indicates type of A/D conversion used.
Digital de-emphasis
Off, Auto, On
To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification
the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input
signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis
filter must be applied prior to encoding.
DC high pass filter
enable
Off, On
Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient
encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach
100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore
must be clipped.
Bandwidth low-pass
filter enable
Off, On
Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter
removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded.
Low-frequency effects
low pass filter enable
Off, On
Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should
only be switched off if it is known that there are no
frequencies above 120 Hz.
Surround attenuation
enable
Off, On
Attenuate surround channels by 3 dB before encoding.
Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels
for the surround channels, and this can be used to
compensate.
Surround phase shift
enable
Off, On
Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround
channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing
a 'Lt/Rt' downmix.
5-110
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.3.4.3
Splicing Stream Configuration
Splicing
The following parameters are available on the Splicing tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x
Analogue/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front panel.
Table 5.86 Splicing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Splicing Control
Off, On VANC Message Only, On VANC, On IP
Enables splice points to be set in the video stream upon
reception of a SCTE 104 message and determines the
insertion point.
To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license
(CE/SWO/DPI) is needed.
Splice Null Insertion
Off, On
Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35
messages into the output stream if no messages have
been sent for 500ms.
Audio Splicing
Off, On
Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that
the video splice occurs.
AS Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Determines how many values of AS Index are compared
against the incoming SCTE 104message. Available only
when Splicing Control is set to On VANC Message Only.
DPI PID Index Control
Don't Care, Use 1, Use 1 + 2
Determines how many values of DPI PID Index are
compared against the incoming SCTE 104message.
Available only when Splicing Control is set to On VANC
Message Only.
AS Index 1
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 or
Use 1 + 2.
AS Index 2
0 to 255
The AS index used if AS Index Control is set to Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 1
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 or Use 1 + 2.
DPI PID Index 2
0 to 255
The DPI PID index used if DPI PID Index Control is set to
Use 1 + 2.
Splicing Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.87 Slicing Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-111
Web GUI Control
5.5.3.4.4
Teletext Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext.
Teletext
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the Splicing tab of the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on
the front panel.
Table 5.88 Teletext Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Source
Off, OP-47 (Max 300kb/s), VANC Teletext
Controls whether Teletext is extracted from VANC or not
and if it extracted, which encapsulation method (OP-47 or
SMPTE 2031) to use.
Teletext Packetisation
Normal (ETS 300-472) - Data on Teletext
Component, Legacy (ETS 301-775) - Data on
VBI Component
Controls how the Teletext data is packetized in to a
component data stream.
SMPTE2031 Max. No.
Teletext
3, 7, 11, 15, 36
Defines the maximum number of Teletext lines inserted.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source.
SMPTE2031 Teletext
Present
Yes, No
Displays whether Teletext is found in the SDI stream.
Available only if VANC Teletext is selected for Teletext
Source. Read only parameter.
Min # Teletext Packets
0 to 3
Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets
generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data.
PTS On Teletext
Off, On
Controls whether a PTS value is included in the output
Teletext packets.
Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page
Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional
Information Page, Programme Schedule Page,
Heading Impaired Subtitle Page
Teletext Page Type
Teletext Page Number
Teletext Page
Language
The page type of the Teletext descriptor.
The page number for the page to be set.
List of languages
The language set for the Teletext descriptor.
Teletext Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
Teletext data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
5-112
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.89 Teletext Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.4.5
VBI and ANC Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters available for setting up VBI and ANC
streams.
VBI and Ancillary Data
This section gives the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is
extracted and how the data is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-x Analogue/Video/Video
1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.90 VBI and Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Enable VBI Pass-thru
Mode
Off, On
Enable Pass-thru of VBI, ANC and Teletext data from
specified PIDs, instead of extracting them from SDI. Read
only parameter. Not supported in this release.
VBI Descriptor Mode
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
VBI Data Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Data Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
VBI Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the VBI Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the
PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Teletext Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Teletext Descriptor is inserted into the PMT.
Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set to User.
Proprietary Descriptor
Insertion
Off, On
Controls if the Legacy Proprietary Descriptor is inserted
into the PMT. Available only if VBI Descriptor Mode is set
to User.
Description Control
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling
Video Index
Off, On (Default), On (User)
Controls the extraction of Video Index (and thus whether
Video Index can be used as source of AR info).
Default: The default lines will be set to decode Video Index
(11/324 in 25Hz, 14/277 in 29.97 Hz)
User: The User defines the lines used to decode Video
Index.
Video Index Field 1
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 1.
Video Index Field 2
10 to 22
Specifies which line contains the video index in field 2.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-113
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
SMPTE 2016
Off, On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Indefinitely, Default after Timeout, Off after
Timeout
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Control how long previous AFD code is maintained. Zero
means drop to default immediately on loss.
AFD Action on Reserved
Codes
Pass Through, Code as 0000
Specify what code is passed to the output when reserved
AFD codes are received at the input.
Pass Through: Passes code through unchanged.
Code as 0000: Changes code to 0000.
Closed Captions
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External,
Freewheel on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC, VBI
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Closed Captions Source
Timecode
Broadcaster ID
Reception Timeout
Timeout in seconds for reception of Source ID from input
(RP207).
Insertion Timeout
Timeout in seconds for insertion of default source ID.
Broadcaster ID Mode
Off, Auto, Default Only, Source Only
Default Servicename
Broadcaster ID Source
Gives what to insert as a broadcaster ID.
The default service name to be used.
No, Input, Default
Indicates if the Broadcaster ID is derived from the input,
the default or is invalid.
The Broadcaster ID that is currently being inserted into the
output stream.
Broadcaster ID
Generic ANC
Generic ANC Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
5-114
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
VBI Line 9 - VBI Line 22
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 6 - VBI Line 23
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System
B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signaling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext. Visible for 576i (625-line)
input streams.
VBI Line 272 - VBI Line
285
Off, Closed Caption
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, Closed Caption for closed caption information.
Visible for 480i (525-line) input streams.
VBI Line 319 - VBI Line
336
Off, VITC, WSS, WSS-AFD, Teletext System
B
Specifies the content in the respective VBI lines. Set to Off
if the line in the incoming video does not carry any
information, VITC for Time Code, WSS for Wide Screen
Signalling, WSS-AFD for Active Format Detection and
Teletext System B for Teletext.
Field 1
Field 2
ANC Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
ancillary data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.91 ANC Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.4.6
PCR Stream Configuration
The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream
contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams
included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a
timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the
service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-115
Web GUI Control
The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/Transport
Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot <m> Video 1
PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.92 PCR Stream Configuration Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
PID
16 - 8190
The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the
program clock reference values.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only
parameter.
5.5.3.5
CE-HEVC VCM
5.5.3.5.1
Video and VBI Stream Configuration
Video Input and Pre-Processing
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video1/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.93 Video Input and Pre-Processing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Lock
Yes, No
Shows whether there is a video lock to the format specified
through the parameters below. Read only parameter.
Source
SDI
The video will be sourced from the HD-SDI input on the
rear panel.
Color Bars
An internally generated color bars test pattern will be used
as the video source.
Black
An internally generated black test pattern will be used as
the video source.
Moving Object
An internally generated moving object test pattern will be
used as the video source.
Slate
A slate file uploaded by the user will be used as the video
source.
Color Bars with text overlay
The Color Bars source overlaid with the Ident Text.
Input Detection
Off, Auto Detect and Report, Auto Detect and
Configure
Controls whether the format of the SDI input shall be
automatically detected or what actions to take if a change
is detected in the Input Video Format.
Detected Video
Standard
Not Detected, HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD
1080i25, HD 1080i29.97, HD 1080p50, HD
1080p59.94, HD 2160p50, HD 2160p59.94,
The detected video standard if Input Detection is set to
other than Off. If the format is not detected or Input
Detection is set to Off, it is set to Not Detected. Read only
parameter.
5-116
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Input Format
HD 720p50, HD 720p59.94, HD 1080i25, HD
1080i29.97, HD 1080p50, HD 1080p59.94, HD
2160p50 Interleaved, HD 2160p59.94
Interleaved, HD 2160p50 Quad, HD 2160p59.94
Quad
Defines the expected video format on the SDI input or the
video format used for encoding. A change in the Video
Input Format might result in a change in the Video Profile
used for encoding.
Output On Video Loss
Freeze Frame, Freeze with text overlay
Repeats the last good video frame on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
Black, Black with text overlay
Switches to a black test pattern on loss of video input. Text
overlay is not supported in this release.
Slate with text overlay
Switches to pre-configured text overlay on loss of video.
Color Bars, Bars with text overlay
Switches to a color bars test pattern on loss of video input.
Text overlay is not supported in this release.
No PID
The video PID shall no longer be transmitted. The SI is not
updated.
Ident Text
Overlay text to display on top of images.
Upload New Logo File
Browse, Upload
Browse to and upload the file to be used for the logo.
Logo insertion
Off, On
Controls if logos are displayed or not. The file to use can
be selected under Logo file.
The file to use as a logo. The selected file can be
uploaded by selecting the Upload option.
Logo file
A fixed logo position?
On, Off
Controls whether to use the default position for overlaying
the logo on the video. Not supported in this release.
The X position of the
logo
The position relative to left of the screen 0 .. (number of
pixels per video line - logo width - 1). If an invalid position
is specified, a logo display alarm will be generated.
Displayed only if A fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not
supported in this release.
The Y position of the
logo
The position relative to top of screen 0 .. (number of video
lines - logo height - 1). If an invalid position is specified, a
logo display alarm will be generated. Displayed only if A
fixed logo position? is set to Off. Not supported in this
release.
Upload New Slate File
Browse, Upload
Browse to and upload the file to be used for the slate
Video Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video
1/Video/Main Video/Video Encoder menu on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-117
Web GUI Control
Table 5.94 Video Encoding Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Video Profile
Profile Off,
Sets the encoder profile. The profile will
also affect the allowed bit rate range.
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit,
HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit,
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
Profile for HD input
Profile Off,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
The profile to set when an SD input is
detected on the SDI input. Visible only if
Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible,
the Video Profile cannot be set
manually.
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
Profile for 3G input
Profile Off,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
Profile for UHD input
Profile Off,
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
5-118
The profile to set when a 3G input is
detected on the SDI input. Visible only if
Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible,
the Video Profile cannot be set
manually.
The profile to set when an UHD input is
detected on the SDI inputs. Visible only
if Input Detection is set to Auto Detect
and Configure. If this option is visible,
the Video Profile cannot be set
manually.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Resolution
1280 x 720, 1920 x 1080, 3840 x 2160
Defines the horizontal and vertical
resolution of the encoded video. The
available options depend on the values
set for Video Input Format and Video
Profile.
Signalling Options
SDR (BT.709), UHD SDR (BT.2020), HDR HLG10 (HDR in VUI),
HDR HLG10 (SDR in VUI), HDR PQ10
The HDR signalling option to be used.
Video Bit Rate
The valid bit rate range depends on the selected video profile.
Defines the bit rate to be used by the
compressed video component. If Bit
Rate Tracking Mode is set to Maximize
Video for the Transport Stream that
contains the video component, and the
Bit Rate Weighting of the component is
set to other than Fixed or Minimal, this
field is read only.
Buffer Mode
CBR
Constant Bit Rate operation.
Low Delay
Reduced encode delay achieved by
removing pre-processing functions. Bit
Rate, GOP structure and GOP length
impact the delay. The IP GOP structure
will give low delay, but with reduced
quality.
Mega Low Delay
Encode delay reduced further by
removing frame-sync in pre-processing.
Bit Rate, GOP structure and GOP length
impact the delay. The IP GOP structure
will provide lower latency than Low
Delay.
Super Low Delay
Only available for HEVC and a single
channel:
The lowest delay is achieved by
removing GOP structure concepts and
concentrating on striping of P Frames or
complete I Frames. This selection will
provide the best latency delay
performance. No ANC stream
processing is available in this mode.
Aspect Ratio
16:9, 4:3
Does not affect the video encoding but
rather indicates what the desired aspect
ratio for the decoded picture (not the
pixel). If no other mechanism such as
WSS in the VBI is used, the video output
image will use this aspect ratio.
GOP Length
4 to 250
Defines the nominal distance in steps of
video frames between two consecutive I
frames in the encoded bit-stream. This
setting is not available when Buffer
Mode is set to Super Low Delay.
GOP Structure
IP, IBP, IBBP, IBBBP, IBBBBBBBP
Sets the number of B frames between
reference frames. IBBBBBBBP can only
be used for 720p video format encoded
with a H.264 video profile. When Buffer
Mode is set to Super Low Delay, GOP
Structure is limited to All P or I Frame
only.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-119
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Closed GOPs
Off, On
Enables or disables the usage of Group
of Pictures in which the predicted frames
can have their reference from outside
the group. This setting has no effect
when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is
selected.
Displays the actual video encoding
delay. Read only parameter.
Delay
Output Entropy Encoding is automatically used, depending on what coding standard
and bit rate is selected.
Table 5.95
Output Entropy Encoding
Coding Standard
Bit Rate
Entropy Encoding
HEVC single channel
Any bit rate
CABAC
HEVC multichannel
Any bit rate
CABAC
H264 single channel
Less than 50 Mbps
CABAC
HEVC single channel
More than 50 Mbps
CAVLC
H264 multichannel
Any bit rate
CAVLC
Video Output
The following parameters are available on the Output tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/Video/Video 1/Video/Main
Video/Stream Output menu on the front panel.
Table 5.96 Video Output Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
Off, On
Sets if the PCR is embedded within the video. If it is set to
other than Off, the PCR PID field of a service will become
read only and will contain the PID of the current
component.
Copyright
Off, On
Sets the copyright flag in the elementary stream header.
Original
Off, On
Sets the original flag in the elementary stream header.
AR Signalling Output
Control
Off, AFD Only, AFD and Bar Data
Controls which source is used for embedding aspect ratio
signalling into user data. If set to Off, no aspect ratio data
will be resent in the output. AFD sources are: SMPTE
2016, Video Index, WSS-AFD/WSS, user set Aspect
Ratio. Bar Data is only SMPTE 2016. This setting is not
available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer Mode
is selected.
TC Output Location
Off, SEI Message
Defines how timecode is put into the output video stream.
This setting is not available (not visible) when Super Low
Delay Buffer Mode is selected.
Closed Captions
Off, ATSC (default)
Controls if Closed Captions are included in the output
stream. This setting is not available (not visible) when
Super Low Delay Buffer Mode is selected.
5-120
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Video Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a video component is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/Slot <x> Video Stream on PID <y> menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.97 Video Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
16 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed, Minimum, 2 to 20
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
Master TS
Off, On
Sets the master Transport Stream for the component.
Source PID Monitoring
None, Monitor, Monitor & Redundancy
Priority 1 ETR290 monitoring on this PID from an IP input
can be enabled, and can be set to cause a redundancy
switch to a spare device if in a system controlled by
Ericsson control software. Not supported in this release.
Multichannel Restrictions
The first channel must always be set to encode. If this is set to OFF, then it will not
be possible to encode any video stream. If there are to be mixed frame rates, the
highest frame rate of all channels must be present on channel 1.
•
It is not possible to mix 25 Hz and 29.97 Hz on the same card.
•
It is not possible to mix 50 Hz and 59.94 Hz on the same card.
GOP Structure
•
There is no restriction across the channels. Each channel may have a different
GOP structure.
Bit Rate
•
There is no restriction across the channels. Each channel may have a different
bit rate. If two or more channels are in use the bit rate for each channel may not
exceed 30 Mbps.
Number of Channels Per Card:
•
It is only possible to encode one UHD stream.
•
It is only possible to encode three 1080p streams.
•
It is possible to encode up to four 720p/1080i streams.
•
In Super Low Delay mode, it is only possible to encode one channel of HEVC
video (any resolution).
•
In Super Low Delay mode, it is not possible to encode H.264 video.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-121
Web GUI Control
Notes: First Release (release 9.29):
The same video format must be present across all channels in this first
release.
In subsequent releases (release TBD):
If the first channel is configured to 720p or 1080p, channels 2-3 may be
configured to be either 720p or 1080i.
If the first channel is configured to 1080i, channels 2-3 may only be
configured to be 1080i.
Available Encoding Profiles/Levels When Using Multiple Channels
When using multiple channels, the available encoding profiles/levels are dictated by
the profile/level selected on channel 1. The profiles/levels for channels 2 to 4 must
come from the same group, as shown in the table below.
Table 5.98 Available Multichannel Encoding Profiles/Levels
Ch 1 Profile/Level
Available Profile/Level for Ch 2-4
H.264 HD
Off
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 8 bit
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit,
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.0 4:2:2 10 bit.
H.264 3G
Off
HDp50/59.94 H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 H.264 HIgh Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.2 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit.
HEVC HD
Off
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit.
HEVC 3G
Off
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit,
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit.
Note:
5-122
If channel 1 is set to Off, then no channels will be able to encode.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a video stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEHEVC/Video/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Note:
These setting are not available (not visible) when Super Low Delay Buffer
Mode is selected.
Table 5.99 Vertical Blanking Interval / Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Off, SMPTE334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
TC Mode
Off; External, Zero on Loss; External, Freewheel
on Loss; Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only displayed when 29.97 Hz family is selected on Input
tab. Auto configures to external source, or to ON for
internal source.
Closed Captions
Closed Captions
Source
Timecode
Table 5.100
Parameter
ARC Parameters
Values
Description
Aspect Ratio (AR) Signaling
SMPTE2016
Off (Default), On
Controls whether SMPTE 2016 data can be used as a
source for AR info.
AFD Sustain
Maintain previously received AFD code
indefinitely
Control what AFD code goes out when AFD is lost at input.
Maintain previously received AFD code for
period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000
Maintain previously received AFD code for
period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch
AFD off
AFD Sustain Timeout
0 to 5,10, 20, 50, 100, 120
Indefinitely: Maintains previously received AFD code
indefinitely.
Default after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD
code for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then drop to
default, i.e. code 1000.
Off after Timeout: Maintains previously received AFD code
for period specified in Sustain Timeout, then switch AFD
off.
Control how long in frames previous AFD code is
maintained. Zero means drop to default immediately on
loss.
Input Detection
The CE-HEVC VCM supports video input detection as described in Chapter 3,
Getting Started: How to Configure and Use Input Detection, with the exception of
"Auto Detect and Restore Saved Config".
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-123
Web GUI Control
5.5.3.5.2
Audio Stream Configuration
Audio Input
The following parameters are available on the Input tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-HEVC/Audio Module/Audio <n>/Input menu on the front panel.
Table 5.101 Audio Input Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Input Format
Uncompressed (LPCM), MPEG Layer II, Dolby
Digital, Dolby E, AAC
Sets the input format used by the audio encoder.
Input Source
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Sets the source used by the audio encoder. No input is fed
to the encoder if Off is selected. Mute mutes the incoming
audio and encodes silence. Test Tone encodes an 1 kHz
test tone, Embedded 1 to 8 sets the source to an SDI
embedded audio stream. Input 1-4 are for the digital
inputs.
Output On Audio Loss
No PID, Silence
Specifies the action to take when input is Lost. No PID is
for dropping the audio PID from the stream, Silence is for
encode silence.
NOTE: When No PID is selected, the reference to the PID
is not removed from the Program Map Table, so a
Transport Stream analyzer will indicate a ghost PID in the
output Transport Stream.
Source Switchout
Off, Mute, Test Tone, Embedded 1 to 8, Input 1 4
Specifies which input to output to the reference output on
the 15-way D-type audio connector.
Audio Encoding
The following parameters are available on the Encode tab of the Properties widget on the
Service Configuration page when an audio component is selected in the Outputs widget.
The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CE-HEVC/Audio
Module/Audio <n>/Encode menu on the front panel.
Note:
When Super Low Delay is selected, LPCM Pass-thru or Dolby E Passthru is available.
Table 5.102 Audio Encoding Standards
Parameter
Options
Description
Coding Standard
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 Encode(More than two channel pairs
require the CE/SWO/VP/M1L2 license)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital encode, requires CE/SWO/VP/DOLBYAC3
license.
AAC-LC
AAC-LC encoding, requires CE/SWO/VP/AAC license.
HE-AAC
HE-AAC or HE-AAC v2 encoding, requires
CE/SWO/VP/AAC license.
Pass-thru
Pass-thru of the input
Audio Description Service
MPEG-1 Layer II encode of a mono audio track that
describes action in the video plus a control track.
5-124
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Table 5.103 MPEG Layer 2 Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384
Bit Rate of the audio stream
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left - input), 1/0 (Right - input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
1+1 (L/Ch1, R/Ch2), 2/0, 2/0 (Joint), Phase
Aligned Audio (6 Cannels), Phase Aligned Audio
(8 Cannels)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream when not in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Left)
The language of the left channel when in dual mono (1+1)
mode.
Language (Right)
The language of the right channel when in dual mono
(1+1) mode.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in any of the language fields.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in any of the language fields.
MPEG Version
MPEG1, MPEG2
Configures if MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 to be ignaled.
Copyright
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected.
Original
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
De-emphasis
Off, 50/15us, CCITT J.17
To meet the MPEG-1 Layer 2 encoding algorithm
specification the audio must not have pre-emphasis
applied. If the input signal does have pre-emphasis
applied, a de-emphasis filter must be applied prior to
encoding.
Table 5.104 Dolby Digital Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256,
320, 384, 448, 512, 576, 640
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input), 1/0 (Right – input), 1/0 (L+R)/2,
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Metadata Controls
Coding Mode
Off, On
Override default coding mode with coding mode indicated
in decoder program configuration or live metadata (if
present).
Metadata source type
Embedded/Decoded Auto, Serial Port (Program
1 to 8)
Selects where live metadata comes from.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-125
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Metadata override
type
None, All, Compression Profile, Dialogue
Normalization, Comp Profile and Dial Norm
Defines which metadata parameters to override.
Metadata Reversion
Mode
Last Used, Preset
Determines which metadata is used upon loss of live
metadata.
Metadata preset type
1 to 8
Defines which metadata preset to use if Preset is selected
for Metadata Reversion Mode.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.105 AAC-LC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320, 384, 448, 512
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
5-126
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
Table 5.106 HE-AAC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
16, 24, 32, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,
192, 224, 256
Bit Rate of the audio stream. The available options depend
on the selected coding mode.
Coding Mode
2/0, 3/2L (5.1 Surround)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Encapsulation
MPEG2 ADTS, MPEG4 LATM/LOAS
Specifies the encapsulation used for transmitting AAC
content. It can be either MPEG-2 Audio Data Transport
Stream or MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Stream based on
MPEG-4 Low Overhead Audio Transport Multiplex.
TNS (Temporal Noise
Shaping)
Off, On
Turns noise shaping on or off.
SBR Signalling
Explicit, Implicit
Specifies how Spectral Band Replication is signaled.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Table 5.107 Pass-thru Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio.
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set the Language field.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-127
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
Table 5.108 Audio Description Service Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Bit Rate
64
Bit Rate of the audio stream.
Coding Mode
1/0 (Left – input)
Specifies what channel configuration to use for encoding.
Embedded PCR
On, Off
Controls whether PCR is to be embedded in the audio
PES.
Au Information Cont
Off, AU Info
Controls the insertion of private data in the adaptation unit
of the audio access units (AU). AU Info is defined in ETSI
TR 101 154. Only AU_PTS is present for audio
Lip Sync Offset
-500 to 500 ms
Configures a delay to the audio to improve A/V
synchronization.
Gain
-6 to 6dB
Sets the gain in dB for the audio stream.
Advanced
Language
The language of the stream.
User Language 1
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 1 is set in the Language field.
User Language 2
A custom three-character language code when User
Language 2 is set in the Language field.
Audio Component
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Component tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an audio component is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.109 Audio Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5-128
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Dolby Metadata Presets
Four custom Dolby Metadata Presets can be configured in the Advanced Setup tab of the
Device Configuration page. To set the preset options, in the Advanced Video Processor
Settings drill down to Encoder > Slots > Slot <n> - CE-HEVC >CE-HEVC > Audio Module
> Dolby Metadata Presets, and select the preset you want to modify. Alternatively, the
settings can be reached through the front panel under Advanced/CE-x/Audio
Module/Dolby Metadata Presets. Any of these presets can then be applied to any audio
channel encoding audio in the Dolby Digital format. The table lists the parameters for each
preset.
Table 5.110Dolby Metadata Preset Parameters
Parameter
Values
Preset name
Description
Name of the preset (for user information)
Dialogue
normalization level
-31 to -1 dB
Used by a decoder to determine the level of adjustment
required to achieve the set level.
Bitstream mode
Main audio service: complete main, music and
effects, Associated service: visually impaired,
Associated service: hearing impaired,
Associated service: dialogue, Associated
service: commentary, Associated service:
emergency, Associated service: visually
impaired, Associated service: karaoke/voiceover
Flags the type of service in the bitstream.
Line mode
compression profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
Alters the dynamic range for line output.
RF mode compression
profile
None, Film Standard, Film Light, Music
Standard, Music Light, Speech
This alters the dynamic range for RF output. The overall
level is raised by 11dB.
Center mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB)
Indicates the downmix level when there is no centre
speaker. This is applied to left and right channels only.
Surround mix level
0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Surround downmix level for the front left and right
channels when consumer has no surround speakers.
Dolby Surround mode
Not Indicated, Not Encoded, Encoded
Flags if a two channel encoded stream contains
information for a Dolby Pro-logic decode (Lt/Rt)
Audio production
information exists
Off, On
This indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type
parameters exist within the bit-stream.
Mixing level
80 to 111 dB
Indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue
level during the final audio mixing session.
Room type
Not indicated, Large room X curve monitor,
Small room flat monitor
Type and calibration of the mixing room used for the final
audio mixing session.
Copyright flag
Off, On
Indicates if the material is copyright protected
Original bitstream flag
Off, On
Indicates if source is the original or a copy
Enable extended
bitstream information
Off, On
Flags if additional information is available for downmixing.
Preferred downmix
mode
Not indicated, Lt/Rt downmix preferred, Lo/Ro
downmmix preferred
Indicates if the producer would prefer a Lt/Rt or a Lo/Ro
downmix. Can be over-ridden by the decoder.
Lt/Rt center mix level
1.414 (+3.0 dB), 1.189 (+1.5 dB), 1.000 (0 dB),
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lt/Rt downmix.
Similar to 'Center mix level'.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-129
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Lt/Rt surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the surround
channels when mixed for a Lt/Rt downmix. Similar to
Surround mix level'.
Lo/Ro center mix level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed with the L& R channels for a Lo/Ro downmix.
When present this replaces the value set for the 'Center
mix level'
Lo/Ro surround mix
level
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Indicates the required level reduction of the center channel
when mixed for Lo/Ro downmix. When present this
replaces the value set for the 'Surround mix level'.
Dolby Surround EX
mode
0.841 (-1.5 dB), 0.707 (-3.0 dB), 0.595 (-4.5 dB),
0.500 (-6.0 dB), 0 (-inf dB)
Flags if the stream has been encoded in Surround Ex.
Only used if surround channels are present.
A/D converter type
Standard, HDCD
Indicates type of A/D conversion used.
Digital de-emphasis
Off, Auto, On
To meet the Dolby Digital encoding algorithm specification
the audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input
signal does have pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis
filter must be applied prior to encoding.
DC high pass filter
enable
Off, On
Removing the DC component can lead to more efficient
encoding, but there is a risk that signals that do not reach
100% PCM may exceed this after filtering and therefore
must be clipped.
Bandwidth low-pass
filter enable
Off, On
Remove high frequency signals before encoding. The filter
removes frequencies that would not normally be encoded.
Low-frequency effects
low pass filter enable
Off, On
Apply a 120 Hz low pass filter prior to an encode. Should
only be switched off if it is known that there are no
frequencies above 120 Hz.
Surround attenuation
enable
Off, On
Attenuate surround channels by 3 dB before encoding.
Theatrical and consumer mixing rooms use different levels
for the surround channels, and this can be used to
compensate.
Surround phase shift
enable
Off, On
Apply a phase shift of 90 degrees to the surround
channels. This simplifies the decode process for producing
a 'Lt/Rt' downmix.
5.5.3.5.3
Splicing Stream Configuration
Splicing
The parameters listed in the table below are available on the Splicing tab of the
Properties widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is
selected in the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Advanced/CE-HEVC/Video/Video 1/Video/Main Video/Splicing menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.111 Splicing Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Splicing Control
Off, On VANC Message Only
On VANC Message only does not insert splice point, but
converts the SCTE 104 message to SCTE 35 message in
the output.
To enable splicing, a splice point insertion license
(CE/SWO/DPI) is needed.
5-130
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Splice Null Insertion
Off, On
Used to determine the insertion of NULL SCTE 35
messages into the output stream if no messages have
been sent for 500ms.
Audio Splicing
Off, On
Used to determine if audio is manipulated at the point that
the video splice occurs.
Splicing Component
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an SCTE 35 stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.112Slicing Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
32 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For splicing stream, this is
Fixed and read only.
5.5.3.5.4
Teletext Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters for setting up Teletext.
Teletext
This section describes the parameters that have an effect on how Teletext is
transmitted.
The parameters listed are available on the Teletext tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEHEVC/videoGroup/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction/Teletext menu on the front
panel.
Table 5.113Teletext Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Source
Off, OP-47 (Max 300kbps), VANC Teletext
Controls the source from where Teletext is extracted,
including encapsulation method where appropriate.
Min # Teletext Packets
0 to 3
Defines the minimum number of Teletext packets
generated per field, even if there is no Teletext data.
Teletext Descriptor Page List / Teletext Descriptor Page
Teletext Page Type
Off, Initial Page, Subtitle Page, Additional
Information Page, Programme Schedule Page,
Heading Impaired Subtitle Page.
Teletext Page Number
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The page type of the Teletext descriptor.
The page number for the page to be set.
5-131
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Teletext Page
Language
List of languages
The language set for the Teletext descriptor.
Teletext Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
Teletext data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when a Teletext stream is selected in
the Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.114Teletext Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
16 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm.
5.5.3.5.5
ANC Stream Configuration
This section describes the parameters available for setting up ANC streams.
Note:
No ANC stream processing is available if the video buffer mode “Super Low
Delay” is selected
Ancillary Data
This section describes the parameters that have an effect on what ancillary data is
extracted and how the data is transmitted.
The following parameters are available on the VBI tab of the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the Advanced/CEHEVC/videoGroup/Video 1/Input/VBI Extraction menu on the front panel.
Table 5.115Ancillary Data Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
Standard, Legacy, Philips, User
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream (only applicable when Video Frame Rate
is 29.97 Hz)
Off, VBI lines, SMPTE 334
The source for Closed Captions data encoded as part of
the Video Stream. Only applicable when frame rate is
29.97 Hz.
Description Control
VBI Descriptor Mode
Closed Captions
Closed Captions Source
5-132
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
TC Mode
Off, External, Zero on Loss, External,
Freewheel on Loss, Internal
Controls what mode the Time code (TC) is working in,
either Off, external source or internally generated. Also
sets what happens on loss of external source (zero or
freewheel).
TC External Source
Auto, ANC VITC1, ANC VITC2, ANC LTC
Controls the external source of Time Code. Auto will select
the first source present in order of the drop down list.
TC Dropframes
Off, On, Auto
Only in 525 line operation controls if Time Code takes
account of drop frames or not. Auto configures to external
source, or to ON for internal source.
Generic ANC Extraction
Off, On
Controls whether Generic ANC is extracted from the SDI
stream or not as per SMPTE 2038-2008.
Max ANC Bit Rate
100 to 2000 kbps
The maximum data rate of the Generic ANC data output.
Timecode
Generic ANC
ANC Component
This section describes the parameters associated with the component carrying
ancillary data.
The following parameters are available on the Component tab of the Properties
widget on the Service Configuration page when an ANC stream is selected in the
Outputs widget. The same parameters can be accessed through the
Output/<output name>/Transport Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service
name>/Component List/<component name> menu on the front panel.
Table 5.116ANC Component Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
PID
16 to 8190
Sets the packet identifier associated with the component.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Specifies the weight associated to the component in the
Bit Rate Tracking algorithm. For audio stream, this is Fixed
and read only.
5.5.3.5.6
PCR Stream Configuration
The video encoding module can generate a separate PCR stream. The PCR stream
contains timing reference that can be used for decoding the elementary streams
included in the same service as the PCR stream itself. To use the PCR stream as a
timing reference for decoding, set the PCR PID parameter associated with the
service to the PID assigned to the PCR stream.
The following parameters are available in Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page when a PCR Stream is selected in the Outputs widget. The
same parameters can be accessed through the Output/<output name>/Transport
Stream ID: <n>/Service List/<service name>/Component List/Slot <m> Video 1
PCR stream on PID <n> menu on the front panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-133
Web GUI Control
Table 5.117PCR Stream Configuration Parameters
Parameters
Values
Description
PID
16 - 8190
The packet identifier assigned to packets carrying the
program clock reference values.
Bit Rate Weighting
Fixed
Not relevant for the PCR component. Read only
parameter.
5.5.4
Configuring Transport Streams
The section describes the parameters available for Transport Stream configuration.
5.5.4.1
Transport Stream Configuration
The Transport Streams generated by the unit are fully compliant with the MPEG-2
Transport Stream specification (ISO/IEC 13818-1), and consists of services that
carry one or more components.
The unit can form up to 18 output Transport Streams and output them through the
Transport Stream output interfaces.
A total of 256 services can be allocated between the output Transport Streams.
Each service can contain a maximum of 24 elementary streams. The elementary
streams that make up a service can be selected from the elementary streams
available from the option cards. The only restriction is that the elementary streams in
a service must all reference the same 27 MHz clock.
An elementary stream can be included in up to four services. Only one video
elementary stream can be assigned to a service, and the audio delay of audio
services should be matched to that video. Only one PCR can be associated with a
service.
Settings for IP and non-IP output Transport Streams differ slightly. The following
three sections define the general Transport Stream settings, the settings that are
related to the IP output, and the settings for the various services within the IP or
non-IP output Transport Streams.
5.5.4.1.1
General Transport Stream Settings
The general Transport Stream parameters are available in the Properties widget on
the Service Configuration page if a Transport Stream is selected in the Outputs
widget. The same settings are also available through the front panel under
Output/<interface name>/<Transport Stream name>.
Table 5.118General Transport Stream Settings
Parameter
Values
Description
Status of Service
Online, Offline, Preview, Retire
Determines the output (Setmode) state of the Transport
Stream.
Bit rate
0.01 to 216 Mbps
Bit rate of the emission transport stream.
5-134
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Reserved Bit rate
-216 to +216 Mbps
Reserve bit rate in the transport stream that will not be
consumed by services or components.
Auto Enable
True; False
Automatically resume emission of the TS if the event causing
automatic disable has cleared.
Auto Disable
Never; Audio Lost; Video Lost; Audio or
Video Lost; Any CRITICAL alarm
Automatically stop emission of the TS in the event of the
selected event.
Syntax
ATSC; DVB
Which syntax to be used in the TS, descriptors and tables.
External Generation
Off
External generation of PSI tables, ATSC only.
Program Specific Information
Transport Stream ID
1 to 65535
ID of the transport stream as it appears in the NIT.
PAT/PMT
On; Off
Generate PAT and PMT if selected.
CAT
Off; On
Conditional Access Table generation.
TSTD
Off; On
Generation of the TSTD table. Selection only available for
DVB syntax.
PMT Repetition Period
100; 400; 500 milliseconds
How often to transmit the PMT.
Dolby Digital
Descriptor
DVB; ATSC; DVB & ATSC
Format of the Dolby Digital Descriptor in the PMT, if present.
Selection only available for DVB syntax.
Original Network ID
1 to 65535
ID of the originating network. Selection only available for DVB
syntax.
NIT
Off; On
Network Identification Table. Selection only available for DVB
syntax.
TDT
Off; On
Time and Date Table. Selection only available for DVB syntax.
EIT
Off; On
Event Information Table generation. Selection only available
for DVB syntax.
SDT
Off; On
Service Description Table.
Network Name
string
Free field string for the Network name to be sent in the NIT.
Network ID
1 to 65535
Identity of the network.
LCN
Off; IEC 62216; NorDig v1; DTG default
Logical Channel Number.
Send extended NIT
(SIRG)
Off; On
Insert NIT into PAT
Yes; No
PAT/PMT Parameters
Service Information
NIT Parameters
PSIP Information
ATSC Syntax Only.
MGT
Off; On
Master Guide Table generation.
STT
Off; On
System Time Table generation.
(T/C)VCT
Terrestrial / Cable Virtual Channel Table generation.
EIT
Event Information Table generation.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-135
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
GPS UTC Offset
0-255 seconds
Time in seconds.
Daylight Saving
Off; On
Daylight Savings Time to be considered.
Delivery
Terrestrial; Cable
Delivery mode
Modulation Mode
8 VSB; 16 VSB
Modulation mode of transmission.
Carrier Frequency
0 – 999 999 999 Hz
Carrier frequency of transmission.
EIT Base PID
16 to 8190
PID of the first EIT.
Number of EITs
0 to 4
Number of tables in the SI.
STT Parameters
(T/C) VCT Parameters
EIT Parameters
5.5.4.1.2
Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams
The IP related Transport Stream parameters are available in the Properties widget
on the Service Configuration page if an IP output Transport Stream is selected in
the Outputs widget.
Table 5.119Additional Settings for IP Output Transport Streams
Parameter
Values
Description
Specifies the bit rate of the IP output and includes the
overhead added by IP encapsulation. Read only parameter.
IP Bit Rate
TS Packets per IP
Packet
1 to 7
Specifies how many Transport Stream packets to encapsulate
in one IP packet.
IP Encapsulation
UDP, RTP, RTP FEC Column, RTP FEC
Column and Row
Specifies what higher layer to encapsulate in IP packets. UDP
and RTP is self explanatory and means that the Transport
Stream is first encapsulated in UDP or RTP packets, then an
IP header is added. If RTP FEC column or RTP FEC Columns
and Row is selected one (Column) or two (Column and Row)
RTP streams are output in addition to the RTP streams that
carry the Transport Stream.
Number of Rows
The number of rows used in FEC encoding.
Number of Columns
The number of columns used in FEC encoding.
Alignment
MGP Settings1
Block Aligned, Non Block Aligned
The aligned method used for ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE
2022-1, 2)
1
Only available in MGP Module Level mode and if the unit is not controlled by Ericsson control software
MSM Multicast
Address
IP v4 multicast address
Destination for MGP Status Messages. Transport streams
sharing this value belong to the same media bundle and are
switched on or off together.
MGP State
R0 Not In Service, S0 Not in Service, S1
Activated Spare, R1 On air
State of the bundle the transport stream belongs to. Read only.
IP Configuration/Destination 1
Destination IP
Address
5-136
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
The destination IP address to use in the IP packet header of
the IP packets that carry the Transport Stream
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Destination UDP Port
0 to 65535
The destination UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the
IP packets that carry the Transport Stream
Source IP Address
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
The source IP address to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
Source MAC Address
Read only parameter, not yet supported.
Source UDP Port
0 to 65535
Vlan Header
Disabled, Enabled.
The source UDP port to use in the IP packet header of the IP
packets that carry the Transport Stream
Vlan ID Tag
Vlan Tag
The VLAN tag to use for the current IP stream.
Vlan Priority
0 to 7
The priority to be used by the switches to prioritize different
services.
Time To Live
0 to 240
TTL value for inclusion in the IP header
Type Of Service
0 to 255
ToS value for inclusion in the IP header
Actual source IP
address, calculated by
a rule
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
The source IP address. Read only parameter
Actual source MAC
address, calculated by
a rule
The source MAC address. Read only parameter.
MGP Settings1
Spare IP Address
IP v4 address
Address used as source for MGP Status Message IP packets,
generally the IP address assigned to an output interface of a
peer (backup) unit.
Service Settings
The service parameters are available in the Properties widget on the Service
Configuration page if a service is selected in the Outputs widget. The same
settings are also available through the front panel under Output/<IP interface
name>/<Transport Stream name>/Service List/<service name>.
Table 5.120 Service Settings
Parameter
Values
Description
Service ID
1 - 65535
PMT PID
16 to 8190
The PID assigned to the Program Map Table for the service.
PCR PID
16 to 8190
The PID of the packetized elementary stream that transmits
the PCR for the current service.
BISS Key
None, (Hidden) selected Key
The assigned security keys for the for Basic Interoperable
Scrambling System presets.
SDT Parameters
Provider
The name of the service provider.
Name
The service name as it appears in the PMT.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-137
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
Service Type
Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, Mosaic,
Data Broadcast
The type of service as transmitted in the PMT.
(T/C) VCT Parameters (ATSC Only)
Short Name
String
Short description of the service
Long Name
String
Long description of the service
Major Channel
Number
1 to 99
PSIP major channel number
Minor Channel
Number
1 to 99
PSIP minor channel number
Service Type
Digital TV; Digital TV (H.264); Digital Radio;
Data Broadcast
Type of service. Does not affect encoding.
Source ID
0 to 65535
Source ID
Hidden
Yes; No
Hide Guide
Yes; No
Error Monitoring (Not supported in this release)
Continuity Count Error
Threshold
Sets Thresholds for error monitoring of service from IP input
only.
Not supported in this release
Continuity Count Error
Sampling Window
Maximum Valid PID
Missing Period
5.5.4.2
Internal PSIP Data Insertion
The Internal Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) Data Insertion feature
allows the user to insert internally generated MPEG Program Specific Information
(PSI) and ATSC PSIP data into any of the internally created Transport Streams.
The PSI information includes the following MPEG tables:
•
Program Association Table (PAT)
•
Program Map Table (PMT)
The internally generated PSIP data includes the following ATSC tables:
5-138
•
Conditional Access Table (CAT)
•
Master Guide Table (MGT)
•
System Time Table (STT)
•
Terrestrial/Cable Virtual Channel Table (T/C)VTC
•
Event Information Table (EIT)
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.5.4.2.1
Operation
To set up PSIP data insertion, follow the steps below.
1. On the Service Configuration page, create the Transport Stream you want to
add the internal PSIP information to.
2. Add the required services and components, and adjust the Transport Stream
and component settings.
3. In the Outputs widget, select the Transport Stream you want to add the PSIP
data to. In the Properties widget, set Syntax to ATSC and the External
Generation to Off. The Program Specific Information and the PSIP
Information accordion panels are now displayed.
4. By setting a table On, the appropriate parameters are displayed. To configure
PSIP data, set PAT/PMT to On. Set PMT Repetition Period as required. The
default value is 500 ms.
5. Conditional Access Table can be activated by setting CAT parameter to On.
6. By setting STT On, GPS UTC Offset and Daylight Saving can be configured.
7. By setting (T/C)VTC On, the following parameters can be configured: Delivery
(Terrestrial/Cable), Major Channel Number, Modulation Mode, Carrier
Frequency.
8. By turning EIT On, EIT Base PID and the number of the Event information
Tables can be set.
Figure 5.40 Setting Internal PSIP Data Insertion on the GUI
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-139
Web GUI Control
5.5.4.3
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS)
When the CE/SWO/BISS license is enabled the encoder can use the Basic
Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) to scramble services in the outgoing
Transport Stream.
BISS Mode 1 operation uses a fixed value for the control word to scramble the
service in the Transport Stream from the encoder. To descramble the transmission,
the decoder needs to have the matching control word value.
BISS is configured by browsing to the service in the Transport Stream configuration
for the output. Each service can be encrypted using a different key, with up to 31
keys being available.
Once BISS has been enabled at a service level it is possible to select which
components in that service are scrambled using the key defined at the service level.
BISS Mode E operation additionally requires the entry of an Injected ID. This value
is associated with the unit rather than an individual service, so a single entry is
made by browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup, and selecting
Base Unit in the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget or by
Advanced/System/Base Unit/BISS Injected ID (14 hex digits) on the front panel.
To improve the security of the BISS encrypted stream, there are two modes
available (referred to as BISS security level) which are Normal BISS Encryption (the
original implementation) and Advanced BISS encryption. By default, Normal BISS
Encryption is enabled.
If Advanced BISS Encryption is required this can be configured by browsing to
Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Base Unit and setting BISS Security
Level to Advanced BISS encryption.
5.5.4.4
ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE 2012-1, 2)
5.5.4.4.1
FEC Parameters
FEC is set up on a per-Transport Stream basis. The following description applies to
the graphical user interface.
If the user has the appropriate license installed to use FEC then below are the
parameters which can be set (with itemised lists of available values where
appropriate).
Table 5.121 FEC Parameters
Parameter
Values
Description
IP Encapsulation
UDP
UDP encapsulation of TS packets
RTP
RTP encapsulation of TS packets
RTP/FEC Column
UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP Packets with added onedimensional FEC
5-140
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Parameter
Values
Description
RTP/FEC Column and Row
UDP/RTP encapsulation of RTP Packets with added twodimensional FEC
Number of Rows
4 - 20
An integer between 4 and 20. See FEC constraints section for
allowable ranges.
Number of Columns
1 - 20
An integer between 1 and 20. See FEC constraints section for
allowable ranges.
Alignment
Block Aligned
Non Block Aligned
If the user does not have a license to use FEC then the available IP Encapsulation
options become UDP, RTP, RTP/FEC Column (No License) and RTP/FEC Column
and Row (No License). If either of the ‘(No License)’ options is selected then IP
Encapsulation will be set to RTP and FEC will not be enabled. If subsequently the
license is enabled for FEC then the ‘(No License)’ suffix will be removed from the
displayed valued of IP Encapsulation
Constraints on FEC Parameters
To promote interoperability and simplify implementation, limits are specified for
values of the L (number of columns) and D (number of rows) parameters. ProMPEG
FEC requires equipment manufacturers to support all combinations of values of L
and D within these limits. The specified limits are:
Columns Only: (L x D <= 100) and (1 <= L <= 20) and (4 <= D <= 20)
Rows and Columns: (L x D <= 100) and (4 <= L <= 20) and (4 <= D <= 20)
Background
Forward Error Correction or FEC, enables packets lost during transmission over IP
networks to be recovered by adding extra information to the transmitted data. The
particular type of FEC used on the unit is that specified by (SMPTE 2012-1, 2).
The key features of ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE 2012-1, 2) are:
•
Open standard FEC scheme.
•
Increased robustness of transmission.
•
Increases network reach through FEC on high loss links.
•
Highly configurable depending on bandwidth vs. robustness.
•
FEC transmitted separately to media stream.
•
Independent of video compression standard (MPEG-2, MPEG-4).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-141
Web GUI Control
ProMPEG FEC (SMPTE 2012-1, 2) can help to solve the problems caused by
missing packets. It is an open standard for protection of contribution broadcast realtime transmissions over IP networks by facilitating real-time lost packet recovery at
the receive units. It permits flexible configurations for optimization requirements.
The scheme uses an RTP layer which adds timing information for sequence
correction. FEC packets are transmitted in separate IP packets. The FEC packets
are calculated by arranging the media packets into a matrix. The matrix size defined
by columns (L) and rows (D).FEC packets are calculated along columns and rows
using the XOR function. FEC can be 1D (Column Only) or 2D (Column and Row).
Media and FEC packets are transmitted on separate IP streams with the Column
FEC stream offset from media stream and have a UDP port number which is the
media port number +2. The Row FEC stream is offset from Media stream and has
UDP port number which is the media port number +4. This arrangement means that
non-enabled FEC receivers can simply ignore FEC streams and decode the media
packets.
The FEC data stream is off-set from the media stream to protect against burst error
loss and jitter. At the receiver, lost packets recovered using the FEC data packets.
The Column FEC protects against burst errors and the Row FEC protects against
random errors. ProMPEG FEC recovers lost packets using column and (optionally)
row FEC packets using the XOR function on the remaining packets. Depending on
the distribution and severity of the pack loss not all errors are recoverable.
Overhead
The overhead which results from ProMPEG FEC transmitting extra packets depends
on whether column or column and row FEC is selected and how many columns and
rows there are. (Note that L = number of columns, D = number of rows.)
Table 5.122 Column FEC
Overhead
(L + (D x L)) / (D x L) = 1 / D + 1
Worst case
4 rows = 25%
Best case
20 rows = 5%
Table 5.123 Column and Row FEC
Overhead
(L + (D x L)) / (D x L) = 1 / D + 1
Worst case
4 rows = 25%
Best case
20 rows = 5%
Block Alignment
FEC offers two methods of block alignment (also referred to as FEC linearisation)
for use when generating FEC packets: Non Block Aligned and Block Aligned. Both
are guaranteed of being able to correct L errors, sometimes more. The Block
Aligned method can however correct 2L+2 errors; this never happens with NonBlock Aligned.
5-142
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
Non-Block Aligned can in theory have a lower latency at the decoder if it can be
guaranteed that the mode of operation will never change.
Block Aligned linearization is dealt with in Annex B of the ProMPEG Code of
Practice. In Block Aligned column FEC packets are sent every D’th frame and the L
Column FEC packets are played out every D slot. They are therefore evenly spread
over the D*L matrix period.
Non Block Aligned linearization is dealt with in Annex A of the ProMPEG Code of
Practice. In Non Block Aligned the matrix is ‘skewed’ for the column calculation. The
L column FEC packets are played out at the end of every column plus a constant.
For ‘square’ matrices (diamonds) where L = D then these column packets will
emerge at regular intervals. For ‘rectangular’ diamonds they will not. In the case of a
4 column by 20 row matrix the 4 FEC packets will emerge within 16 slots, followed
by a gap of 64 slots before the next 4. It therefore produces a less linear spread of
packets.
Receivers which do not have FEC capability can simply ignore the FEC packets and
just make use of the media packets.
5.5.4.5
VLAN Tagging
VLAN tagging can be used to segregate IP packets from data interfaces.
5.5.4.5.1
VLAN Creation
A VLAN is created by specifying the VLAN ID, IP address and the Netmask. All
Transport Streams which are tagged to this VLAN use the VLAN IP address as its
source IP address. Hence the VLAN and VLAN ID must be created before it can be
used to tag a Transport Stream.
To create VLANs, on the Advanced Setup tab of Device Configuration page
navigate to the Encoder > Vlan Tags folder, select the output you want to assign
the VLAN tag to, and click Add in the Properties pane. Alternatively, on the front
panel navigate to Advanced/System/Vlan Tags and set up the VLANs as required.
The available options are listed in the following table.
Table 5.124 VLAN Creation Options
Parameter
Values
Description
Vlan ID (Create)
2-4094
New VLAN ID to create.
Vlan IP
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
VLAN IP Address (VLAN tagged Transport Stream will have
this as its source IP address).
Vlan Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
VLAN Netmask.
Vlan Gateway
zzz.zzz.zzz.zzz
VLAN gateway address for the current VLAN.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
The VLAN Id and its IP address must be unique across all Ethernet
interfaces.
5-143
Web GUI Control
VLAN Tag Sharing
Once the VLANs are created, they can be assigned to IP Transport Streams. To do
that, navigate to Service Configuration page, and create a Transport Stream for
the appropriate IP output. Then, click on the newly created Transport Stream, and in
the Properties widget select the required VLAN tag. VLANs can also be assigned to
Transport Streams in the Outputs/IP Output <m>/Data Interface Group
<n>/Transport Stream ID: <id>/Destination List/Destination <k>/Vlan Tag front
panel menu. The following options can be set:
Table 5.125 VLAN Tag Sharing Options
Parameter
Values
Description
Vlan Tag
None, existing VLAN tag
Disables VLAN tagging or assigns the selected VLAN tag to
the current Transport Stream.
Vlan Priority
0-7
Priority that can be used to support QoS.
It is also possible to group multiple Transport Streams under the same VLAN. To do
this, assign the same VLAN tag to all of them.
Note:
On the web user interface, VLANs can be managed through the Service
Configuration page by clicking on the Manage button next to the Vlan Tag
parameter.
VLAN Deletion
A VLAN can be deleted by changing the VLAN Tag parameter under the Transport
Stream to None. If a VLAN tag used by any Transport Stream is deleted, the VLAN
Tag parameter is set to None in the respective Transport Streams.
5.6
Support Page
The Support page provides information and access to functions that help in
maintenance tasks.
The page consists of the following tabs:
5-144
•
General tab
•
Versions tab
•
Licenses tab
•
Device Management tab
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.6.1
General Tab
The General tab contains the Import and Export and the Log Files widgets.
Figure 5.41 Support Page > General Tab
5.6.1.1
Import and Export Widget
The Import and Export widget lets the user import and export the current
configuration in different formats. Moreover, it enables the user to upgrade the
encoder through the Upgrade Encoder accordion panel.
Note:
5.6.1.2
The format of the files saved through the Support page is not compatible
with the format of the configurations exported on the Stored
Configurations page.
Log Files Widget
The Log Files widget provides a way to export message logs, basic version
information and error messages for debug purposes.
5.6.2
Version Tab
The Version tab displays detailed version information. The information is organized
into panel tabs. By clicking a tab in the Build widget, the very same tab is displayed
in the Host and Modules widgets. In case of a version mismatch on the host or on
any of the option cards, it is clearly indicated in the System tab and on the tab
corresponding to the failing slot.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-145
Web GUI Control
Figure 5.42 Support Page > Versions Tab
5.6.3
Licenses Tab
The Licenses tab allows for license key file management. License key files can be
uploaded in the Licenses widget. Installed and unavailable licenses for each option
slot are listed in separate sections.
Figure 5.43 Support Page > Licenses Tab
5-146
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Web GUI Control
5.6.4
Device Management Tab
The device management tab allows the user to reset the whole AVP or reset a CE-x
option card pair from the user interface.
Note:
The ability to reset the CE-x option card pair is provided to enable the cards
to be reset without affecting other operation of the unit. This reset process
will reset and reconfigure the cards, and will take considerable time to
complete.
This page also provides a complete list of alarms available for each of the modules
in the chassis, along with the ability to change the severity of each alarm.
If the severity of multiple alarms need to be changed to the same setting, it is
possible to change them all at the same time by selecting all required alarms and
choosing the required level by clicking on Action > Set Selected to and selecting
the required severity level.
Figure 5.44 Support Page > Device Management Tab
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5-147
Web GUI Control
BLANK
5-148
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Chapter 6
Contents
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.2
6.2.1
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.2.1
6.4.2.2
6.4.2.3
6.4.2.4
6.4.2.5
6.4.3
6.4.3.1
6.4.3.2
6.5
6.6
6.6.1
6.7
6.7.1.1
6.7.1.2
6.7.1.3
6.7.1.4
6.7.1.5
6.7.1.6
6.8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction to Transport Streams .......................................................6-5
IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams .................................... 6-5
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets .........................................................6-5
MPEG Layer ........................................................................................6-6
RTP Layer ...........................................................................................6-6
UDP Layer ...........................................................................................6-7
IP Layer ...............................................................................................6-7
Ethernet Layer .....................................................................................6-7
IP Overhead ........................................................................................6-7
Data Network Redundancy ..................................................................6-8
Redundancy ........................................................................................6-8
Data Routing .......................................................................................6-9
Packet Processing ...............................................................................6-9
Handling Processed Packets ...............................................................6-9
Setmode ..............................................................................................6-9
Overview .............................................................................................6-9
Operation States .................................................................................6-9
Offline Mode ......................................................................................6-10
Retire Mode .......................................................................................6-10
Preview Mode....................................................................................6-10
Takeover Mode .................................................................................6-10
Online Mode ......................................................................................6-10
Configuring Setmode ......................................................................... 6-10
Configuring Setmode on Unit Level ................................................... 6-11
Configuring Setmode on Media Level ................................................ 6-11
XPO ..................................................................................................6-11
User Access ......................................................................................6-11
User Authentication ........................................................................... 6-11
VCM Video Encoding Functionality....................................................6-12
Overview ...........................................................................................6-12
Functional Description for VCMs ....................................................... 6-12
Video Compression Functionality ...................................................... 6-13
VCM Supported Profiles, Bit Rates and Modes ................................. 6-14
Test Patterns .....................................................................................6-16
Impairment Reduction ....................................................................... 6-16
VCM Video Operating Modes ............................................................6-17
6-1
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.8.1
6.8.1.1
6.8.1.2
6.8.1.3
6.8.1.4
6.8.1.5
6.8.1.6
6.8.1.7
6.8.1.8
6.8.1.9
6.8.2
6.8.2.1
6.8.2.2
6.8.3
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.9.3
6.9.4
6.9.5
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.1.1
6.10.1.2
6.10.1.3
6.10.1.4
6.10.1.5
6.10.2
6.10.2.1
6.10.2.2
6.10.2.3
6.10.2.4
Non-seamless Modes (CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay,
Compatibility, Ultra Low Delay or Stripe Refresh) .............................. 6-17
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a and CEHEVC) .............................................................................................. 6-17
Low Delay Buffer Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a and CE-HEVC) ............ 6-18
Mega Low Delay Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, and CE-HEVC) ..................... 6-18
Super Low Delay (CE-x, CE-xA, and CE-HEVC)............................... 6-18
Compatibility Mode (CE-a J2K) ......................................................... 6-19
Ultra Low Delay Mode (CE-a J2K) .................................................... 6-19
Stripe Refresh (CE-x, CE-xA)............................................................ 6-19
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode) (CE-x, CE-xA) ............................... 6-19
Fixed Latency ................................................................................... 6-19
Typical Delay Performance ............................................................... 6-20
25/50 Hz ........................................................................................... 6-20
29.97/59.94 Hz.................................................................................. 6-21
Audio Compatibility in Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Ultra Low
Delay and Compatibility Modes ......................................................... 6-22
VCM Audio Encoding Functionality ................................................... 6-22
Audio Input Interfaces ....................................................................... 6-23
HD-SDI Input .................................................................................... 6-24
SDI Input ........................................................................................... 6-24
Digital Input ....................................................................................... 6-24
Analogue Input (CE-xA) .................................................................... 6-25
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data ................. 6-25
Ancillary Data .................................................................................... 6-25
Closed Captions................................................................................ 6-25
Time Code ........................................................................................ 6-25
OP-47 ............................................................................................... 6-25
AFD .................................................................................................. 6-25
Generic ANC ..................................................................................... 6-26
VBI Data ........................................................................................... 6-26
VBI Lines .......................................................................................... 6-26
VBI Data ........................................................................................... 6-26
VBI Data on a Separate PID ............................................................. 6-26
Timing ............................................................................................... 6-26
List of Figures
Figure 6.1
Figure 6.2
Figure 6.3
Figure 6.4
Figure 6.5
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ........................................................ 6-5
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ........................................................ 6-6
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets ........................................................ 6-7
Data Network Redundancy ................................................................. 6-8
CE VCM Functional Diagram ............................................................ 6-12
List of Tables
Table 6.1
Table 6.2
Table 6.3
Table 6.4
Table 6.5
6-2
IP Overhead ........................................................................................ 6-8
VCM Compression Profiles and Levels ............................................. 6-13
VCM Supported Profiles, Bit Rates and Modes ................................. 6-14
Test Patterns .................................................................................... 6-16
Impairment Reduction Details ........................................................... 6-17
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.6
Table 6.7
Table 6.8
Table 6.9
Table 6.10
Table 6.11
Table 6.12
Table 6.13
Table 6.14
Table 6.15
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Low Delay 25/50 Hz .......................................................................... 6-20
Mega Low Delay 25/50 Hz................................................................. 6-20
Compatibility Mode 25/50 Hz ............................................................. 6-21
Ultra Low Delay 25/50 Hz .................................................................. 6-21
Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz................................................................. 6-21
Mega Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz ....................................................... 6-21
Compatibility Mode 29.97/59.94 Hz ................................................... 6-22
Ultra Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz ........................................................ 6-22
VCM Input Interfaces and Audio Encoding Methods .......................... 6-23
VBI Data Types .................................................................................6-26
6-3
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
BLANK
6-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.1
Introduction to Transport Streams
6.1.1
IP Encapsulation of MPEG Transport Streams
An MPEG Transport Stream has the following format.
1 to 7 MPEG Transport Stream Packets
RTP Header (optional)
UDP (User Datagram Protocol)
IP (Internet Protocol)
Ethernet (IEEE 802)
Figure 6.1 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
Between one and seven MPEG transport stream packets are carried in a UDP
packet.
The UDP packet may optionally also contain an Real Time Protocol (RTP) header,
which adds additional information such as a sequence number and a timestamp,
which can help in the detection of packet loss across a network. The RTP header is
12 bytes long.
The UDP header is 8 bytes long.
The network layer protocol is IPV4, which adds a 20 byte header to every packet.
The physical link layer is then Ethernet at either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps.
6.1.2
Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
The mapping of MPEG-2 TS packets into IP data frames is done according to the
protocol stack shown in the following illustration.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-5
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Figure 6.2 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
6.1.3
MPEG Layer
The MPEG-2/DVB layer is specified in ISO/IEC IS 13818 Generic Coding of Moving
Pictures and Associated Audio. The main functionality of this layer is to transform
MPTS (Multi-Program Transport Streams) into a number of SPTS (Single-Program
Transport Streams). A Transport Stream carrying multiple programs is in this way
split into a number of mini Transport Streams, each carrying a single program. This
ensures that the video can be passed through limited bandwidth links such as ADSL
further down the transmission path.
6.1.4
RTP Layer
The RTP layer is optional, and will add an 8-byte RTP header to the new packet.
This header contains a sequence number and a time stamp.
6-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.1.5
UDP Layer
The UDP layer is according to RFC768 User Datagram Protocol. The user can
control the target UDP port number for the MPEG-2 stream. A configurable number
of 188-byte long MPEG-2 TS packets are mapped straight into an UDP frame with
no additional overhead. The MTU for Ethernet is usually 1500 bytes. This limits the
number of MPEG-2 TS packets per UDP frame to lie within 1 to 7. The following
illustration shows the mapping of MPEG-2 Transport Streams into UDP packets.
Figure 6.3 Mapping of MPEG-2 TS Packets
6.1.6
IP Layer
The IP layer is according to RFC791 Internet Protocol Specification. The user is
allowed access to the following IP header fields: IP source address, IP destination
address, Time-To-Live field, Type-Of-Service field. Performing static mapping
between class-D IP addresses and the corresponding Ethernet multicast MAC
addresses supports limited IP Multicasting (Type 1).
6.1.7
Ethernet Layer
The data link layer is Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3/802.3u (auto sensing 10/100
Mbps, Twisted Pair, RJ-45 connector).
6.1.8
IP Overhead
The IP overhead calculation when mapping MPEG-2 TS packets into IP frames is
shown in Table 6.1.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-7
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.1 IP Overhead
Item
Overhead factor
Comments
MPEG-2 TS
1.0
UDP
1324/1316 = 1.006
UDP header=8 bytes
IP
1344/1324 = 1.015
IP header=20 bytes
Ethernet
1358/1344 = 1.010
Eth header=14 bytes
Total overhead factor becomes: 1.006 x 1.015 x 1.010 = 1.031 or 3.1% overhead.
Note:
The number of MPEG-2 TS packets one can map down into each UDP
frame is variable (between 1 and 7). Usually 7 is used for minimum
overhead. This is also used in the above calculation.
6.2
Data Network Redundancy
6.2.1
Redundancy
Note:
Both outputs of a pair are active at the same time; therefore the use of
primary and secondary ports is meaningless in this configuration.
The four Ethernet data ports operate as two redundant pairs. Data 1 and 2 (Ge1
with Ge2) are inputs and Data 3 and 4 (Ge3 with Ge4) are outputs.
When an output transport stream is defined, it is assigned by the user to Data 3 and
4.
Both ports are independent of each other i.e. the IP address, MAC address, subnet
mask and default gateway can have different settings. Both ports are active at the
same time and transmit the same data. If both ports are configured to be on the
same subnet, only one port will respond to ICMP messages.
Figure 6.4 Data Network Redundancy
The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
6-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.3
Data Routing
6.3.1
Packet Processing
Every received packet is examined and based on a routing table, determines where
the packet should be routed, or whether the packet should be dropped.
The only received packets that need to be processed are:
•
ARP
•
ICMP
•
Reflex PCR Exchange Messages (UDP)
The only possible destinations for received packets are:
6.3.2
•
The Reflex PCR Exchange Message Handler
•
The Host Processor
Handling Processed Packets
Packets are routed or dropped based on the following fields:
•
MAC destination address
•
Source IP address and mask
•
Destination IP address and mask
•
EtherType (to allow filtering of ARP ICMP STP etc)
•
UDP and TCP Destination UDP Port Number
6.4
Setmode
6.4.1
Overview
The Setmode function enables the switch of the operation states of the services or
of the whole device.
6.4.2
Operation States
The Setmode function is available on two levels: media and unit level. The function
provides five states on both of the levels.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-9
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.4.2.1
Offline Mode
In offline mode, the entity does not enable the emissions and the input related
alarms.
6.4.2.2
Retire Mode
In retire mode, the entity coordinates its going offline with a stand-by entity taking
over the media transmission.
6.4.2.3
Preview Mode
In preview mode, the entity attempts to transmit a transport stream, but not the
associated emissions. This mode can be used for monitoring an output or for preconfiguring a unit or transport stream output for fast redundancy switching.
6.4.2.4
Takeover Mode
Takeover mode is applied only for entities requiring external synchronization. The
device waits for the correct synchronization in this state, and transmits only when
the synchronization is correct.
6.4.2.5
Online Mode
In online mode, the entity transmits a transport stream output and other emissions
for online operations. The input related alarms are enabled.
Note:
The redundancy switch coordination is supported by the Multicast Guard
Protocol (MGP). If MGP is disabled, retire, preview and takeover modes are
not available.
The following setmode transitions are not supported: offline to retire, retire
to preview, and preview to retire.
6.4.3
Configuring Setmode
To set up Multicast Guard Protocol (MGP), browse to Device Configuration >
Advanced Setup, select MGP Support and set the MGP Mode parameter in the
Properties widget. When using the front panel menu, select
Advanced/System/MGP Support/MGP Mode.
In off state, only offline or online mode can be set for both the unit and the media.
In module level state, only offline or online mode can be set for the unit, but any of
the five possible modes for the media.
In unit level state, any of the five possible modes can be set for the unit, but only
offline or online mode for the media.
6-10
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.4.3.1
Configuring Setmode on Unit Level
By browsing to Device Configuration > Advanced Setup and selecting Base Unit,
the Setmode can easily be configured by Offline and Online buttons and by the
Current State Parameter in the Properties widget. On the front panel, select
Advanced/System/Base Unit/Change State.
6.4.3.2
Configuring Setmode on Media Level
By browsing to Service Configuration and selecting the appropriate Transport
Stream in the Outputs widget, Setmode can easily be configured by Offline and
Online buttons and by the Status of Service parameter in the Properties widget
under the Transport Stream accordion panel. On the front panel, select
Output/Slot n/ Transport Stream ID: n/Change State.
6.5
XPO
The unit supports an HTTP interface that is XPO2 compliant for configuration and
status monitoring. At least three simultaneous HTTP sessions can be supported.
HTTP access can be enabled or disabled.
Individual parameters can be controlled via XPO2. It does not require the complete
XML configuration to be sent to change a single parameter.
Note:
The legacy XPO standard is not supported.
The web pages provide a service orientated control menu structure.
6.6
User Access
6.6.1
User Authentication
The unit supports user authentication as defined in the XPO Specification. By
default, user authentication is turned off. When set to On, a user name and
password is required to access the web pages. The default user name (engineer)
and password (password) can be changed by the user under the Encoder > Base
Unit > User Authentication node in Device Configuration > Advanced Setup
through the web user interface or in the Advanced/System/Base Unit/User
Authentication menu through the Front Panel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-11
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.7
VCM Video Encoding Functionality
6.7.1.1
Overview
The VCMs process the video input signal into a compressed encoded bit stream in
accordance with the appropriate specification (ITU-T H.264 or ISO/IEC MPEG-4
AVC, MPEG-2 specification (ISO/IEC 13818) or JPEG 2000 specification (ITU-T
Rec. T.802 or ISO/IEC 15444-3)).
6.7.1.2
Functional Description for VCMs
Figure 6.5 CE VCM Functional Diagram
The 3G/HD/SD-SDI Video Input can be configured to accept either 25 Hz or
29.97 Hz video. The Pre-processor has a video frame re-synchronizer which allows
the video frame rate to be locked to the Unit 27 MHz clock, or to a 27 MHz clock
locked to an external sync input if an External Sync Input option card
(HWO/EXTSYNC) is fitted. If the unit is configured to be locked to video, then the
frame re-synchronizer is inactive.
The Pre-processor can perform horizontal and vertical scaling and bandwidth
filtering on the video prior to passing it on to the Video Encoder. It can also generate
a test pattern or repeat the last frame received if the video input is not valid.
The Video Encoder processes the video from the Pre-processor into a compressed
encoded bit-stream in accordance with the relevant specification.
It can produce a constant bit rate (CBR) output, which can be set in the range
1 Mbps to 200 Mbps depending upon encoder and profile.
The Video Encoder can be configured for CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay
(available only for CE-x VCM variants), Ultra Low Latency (CE-a/J2K only), Stripe
Refresh or Fixed Latency buffer mode. The available modes are dependent upon
VCM type, configuration and available licenses.
CBR is the recommended buffer mode for optimum video quality, while the Low
Delay buffer modes give lower video encoding delay, where video quality may be
impacted. In non-seamless buffer modes, the compressed video output will glitch if
the video bit rate is changed.
6-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.7.1.3
Video Compression Functionality
Table 6.2 summarizes the compression profiles and levels. The availability of each
depends upon the type of VCM and the available licenses.
Table 6.2 VCM Compression Profiles and Levels
Profile and Level
Supported Buffer Modes
(dependent on VCM type and license)
HD H.264
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Stripe Refresh,
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode)
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0 8 bit
Low Delay, Mega Low Delay
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 10 bit
HD MPEG-2
HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay,
HD MPEG-2 High Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit
SD H.264
SD H264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
SD H264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Stripe Refresh,
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode)
SD H264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
SD H264 High 422 Profile Level 3.1 8 bit
SD H264 High 422 Profile Level 3.1 10 bit
SD MPEG-2
SD MPEG-2 Main Profile @ Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay,
SD MPEG-2 422 Profile @ Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit
JPEG2000
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
Compatibility Mode, Ultra Low Delay Mode
HD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
HD HEVC
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Super Low Delay
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10
bit
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-13
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Profile and Level
Supported Buffer Modes
(dependent on VCM type and license)
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10
bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10
bit
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier
4:2:0 8 bit
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier
4:2:0 10 bit
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier
4:2:2 8 bit
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier
4:2:2 10 bit
UHD (4K) HEVC
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10
bit
CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Super Low
Delay.
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10
bit
6.7.1.4
VCM Supported Profiles, Bit Rates and Modes
Table 6.3
VCM Supported Profiles, Bit Rates and Modes
CE-x
CE-a
CE-a/J2K
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
Bit rate Range (Mbit/s)
PROFILE
HD H.264
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
1 - 20
1 – 20
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
1 - 25
1 – 25
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
1 – 62.5
1 - 50
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit
1 - 80
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
1 – 80
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0 8 bit
5 – 62.5
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 8 bit
10 – 80
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2 10 bit
10 - 80
HD MPEG-2
HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit
2 – 80
HD MPEG-2 High Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit
2 - 80
6-14
2 - 50
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
CE-x
CE-a
CE-a/J2K
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
SD H.264
SD H264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 10
0.5 – 10
SD H264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 12.5
0.5 – 12.5
SD H264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 17.5
0.5 – 17.5
SD H264 High 422 Profile Level 3.1 8 bit
0.5 – 25
SD H264 High 422 Profile Level 3.1 10 bit
0.5 – 25
SD MPEG-2
SD MPEG-2 Main Profile @ Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit
1.5 - 15
SD MPEG-2 422 Profile @ Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit
1.5 - 50
1.5 - 15
JPEG2000
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
HD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
HD HEVC
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
720p
2.0 - 30.0
1080i
3.0 – 30.0
720p
2.0 – 50.0
1080i
3.0 – 50.0
720p
2.5 – 30.0
1080i
3.5 – 30.0
720p
2.5 – 50.0
1080i
2.5 – 50.0
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
1080p
4.0 – 50.0
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
1080p
4.0 – 50.0
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
1080p
6.0 – 50.0
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
1080p
6.0 – 50.0
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
HD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
UHD (4K) HEVC
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
9.0 – 100.0
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
12.0 – 100.0
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-15
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
CE-x
CE-a
CE-a/J2K
CE-HEVC
CE-xA
BUFFER MODE
CBR
YES
YES
YES
Low Delay
YES
YES
YES
Mega Low Delay
YES
YES
Compatibility Mode
YES
Ultra Low Delay Mode
YES
Stripe Refresh
YES
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode)
YES
YES
(H.264
only)
Fixed Latency
Notes: When configured in Stripe Refresh buffer mode (only available with H.264
encoding) the bit rate range is limited to 4 Mbps to 10 Mbps in SD, and
8 Mbps to 40 Mbps in HD.
When configured in Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode) (only available with
H.264 encoding) the bit rate range is limited as above and the delay is
increased from <100 ms to <150 ms to allow for the audio encode process.
6.7.1.5
Test Patterns
The video pre-processor can generate the test patterns listed in Table 6.4.
Table 6.4
Test Patterns
Test Pattern
Black
Color bars
Moving object
Slate
Notes: On loss of video the VCM can be configured to select freeze frame, test
pattern, or turn off video PID.
If the PID is removed from the output, a Transport Stream analyzer device
will report the removed PID as a ghost PID, because the reference to it is
still transmitted in the Program Map Table of the MPEG Program Specific
Information.
6.7.1.6
Impairment Reduction
The video pre-processor provides a motion adaptive temporal noise reduction
option.
6-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.5
6.7.1.6.1
Impairment Reduction Details
Impairment Reduction
Comments
Spatial Filtering
The amount of filtering is configurable.
InLoop Filter
For H.264 encoding, the perceived image quality is further enhanced by utilizing a
de-blocking filter in the feedback loop. This filters the frames after decoding, but
before they are stored in the decoded picture buffer, in order to try and remove block
edge artefacts.
6.7.1.6.2
Temporal Noise Reduction
When the CE/SWO/MCTF license is enabled the pre-processor can provide
temporal noise reduction which is motion adaptive (backs-off the filtering with
motion) to the sub-frame level.
6.7.1.6.3
Stills Detection Control
Setting this to other than Off will override the in-built intelligent stills detection. This
saves bit rate but has undesired video quality effects on complex stills.
6.7.1.6.4
Film Mode
The pre-processor identifies 3:2 pull-down sequences. Based on this information the
encoding engine identifies the appropriate fields as repeated. Film Mode can only be
used for SD inputs with a frame rate of 29.97 Hz.
6.8
VCM Video Operating Modes
Note:
6.8.1
The output of the VCM may contain a discontinuity when the operating
mode (profile, buffer mode etc.) is changed.
Non-seamless Modes (CBR, Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Compatibility,
Ultra Low Delay or Stripe Refresh)
When operating in a non-seamless mode, the output of the module may be
discontinuous when the bit rate is changed.
6.8.1.1
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a and CE-HEVC)
The module supports a CBR constant bit rate mode (standard delay).
Any audio configuration is supported when the video is configured for CBR buffer
mode.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-17
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.8.1.2
Low Delay Buffer Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a and CE-HEVC)
The module supports a Low Delay buffer mode. Depending on video encoding
parameters, this can reduce the encode delay to 350 ms (for performance summary
see table below), but will have an impact on video quality.
Parameters that primarily impact both delay and quality are the GOP Structure and
the Scene Cut Detection. Setting up low bit rates can increase the delay.
When configured in Low Delay buffer mode the supported audio is limited to
MPEG-1 Layer II encode, Dolby Digital Encode, LPCM pass-through, Dolby Digital
pass-through and Dolby E pass-through.
6.8.1.3
Mega Low Delay Mode (CE-x, CE-xA, and CE-HEVC)
The module supports a Mega Low Delay buffer mode. Depending on video encoding
parameters, this can reduce the encode delay further (see table below), but will
have an impact on video quality. Parameters that primarily impact both delay and
quality are GOP structure and scene cut detection. Low bit rates can increase the
delay.
Note:
When a VCM is configured for Mega Low Delay buffer mode the system
Clock Source (Mux SCR Source available under the Base Unit node in the
Device Configuration > Advanced Setup > Advanced Video Processor
Settings widget) MUST be set to Video.
When configured in Mega Low Delay buffer mode the supported audio is limited to
MPEG-1 Layer II, LPCM pass-through, Dolby Digital pass-through and DolbyE passthrough.
6.8.1.4
Super Low Delay (CE-x, CE-xA, and CE-HEVC)
This is a licensed feature. The available licenses are:
•
1 HD Channel.
•
1 UHD Channel.
•
4 HD Channels or 1 UHD Channel.
Super Low Delay’s GOP structure supports LPCM Pass-thru and Dolby E Pass-thru
audio encoding. No Supplemental Enhancement Information (SEI), which results in
the loss of:
6-18
•
AFD and AFD Bar ANC Data.
•
Time Code ANC Data.
•
Closed Caption ANC Data.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.8.1.5
Compatibility Mode (CE-a J2K)
In compatibility mode the end-to-end delay introduced by the JPEG2000 encoding
and decoding the maximum delay remains below 160 ms, as set forth in the ITUT.802 or ISO/IEC 15444-3 specification.
Audio encoding is not supported in JPEG 2000. Only LPCM Pass-through or Dolby
E audio pass-through operation is supported.
6.8.1.6
Ultra Low Delay Mode (CE-a J2K)
The CE-a J2K module supports an Ultra Low Delay buffer mode. Depending on the
video encoding parameters, this can reduce the encode delay to as low as 100 ms
(see table below).
Audio encoding is not supported in JPEG 2000. Only audio Only LPCM Passthrough or Dolby E pass-through operation is supported.
6.8.1.7
Stripe Refresh (CE-x, CE-xA)
When the AVP/SWO/CE-x/STRIPE license is enabled, and the unit configured for
H.264 encoding, a Stripe Refresh buffer mode becomes available which can provide
an end to end latency of sub 100 ms when combined with the Ericsson RX8200.
This mode has a limited set of configurable parameters to ensure that minimum
latency is achieved. This, however does make this mode more suited to “talking
heads” content rather than action, fast moving or frequent scene changes.
When configured in Stripe Refresh buffer mode the bit rate range is limited as
follows:
•
4 Mbps to 10 Mbps in SD
•
8 Mbps to 40 Mbps in HD
Audio encoding is not supported in Stripe Refresh mode. Only LPCM Pass-through
or Dolby E Pass-through operation is supported.
6.8.1.8
Stripe Refresh (+ Audio Encode) (CE-x, CE-xA)
This mode adds support for MPEG-1 Layer II audio encode to Stripe Refresh. The
same license, configuration and bit rate limitations apply.
In order to support Audio Encode, the delay in this mode is increased from <100 ms
to <150 ms compared to the Stripe Refresh mode.
6.8.1.9
Fixed Latency
This mode is only supported on CE-x modules when configured for H.264 encode.
It provides a fixed encode latency of ~625ms across the supported bit rate range of
the selected H.264 video profile.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-19
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
When configured for Fixed latency buffer mode the minimum supported bit rate is
1.5 Mbps for SD and 4Mbps for HD.
There are no limitations to the audio supported in this buffer mode.
6.8.2
Typical Delay Performance
The typical performance of each type of delay is shown in the tables below.
Note:
6.8.2.1
Table 6.6
25/50 Hz
Low Delay 25/50 Hz
CE-x and CE-xA
CE-a
1
Table 6.7
Video
Encoding
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit Rate
Range1
Notes
HD H.264
350 ms
10 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
350 ms
3 Mbps – 25 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
430 ms
12 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
430 ms
4 Mbps – 37 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
HD H.264
720 ms
7 Mbps – 50 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
720 ms
3 Mbps – 17.5 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
<800 ms
7 Mbps – 50 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
<800 ms
3 Mbps – 15 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
Bit rates lower than the range specified result in larger encode delay.
Mega Low Delay 25/50 Hz
CE-x and CE-xA
6-20
The delay figures provided in the table assumes a GOP Structure set to IP,
Scene Cut Detection to Off for H.264, On for MPEG-2, and a HD 1080i
video format.
Video
Encoding
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit Rate
Range1
Notes
HD H.264
290 ms
10 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
290 ms
4 Mbps – 25 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
370 ms
12 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
370 ms
4 Mbps – 37 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.8
Compatibility Mode 25/50 Hz
CE-a J2K
Table 6.9
Scan
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit Rate
Range
Interlaced
<160 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Progressive
<140 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Scan
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit Rate
Range
Interlaced
<116 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Progressive
<101 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Notes
Ultra Low Delay 25/50 Hz
CE-a J2K
6.8.2.2
Notes
29.97/59.94 Hz
Table 6.10 Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz
CE-x and CE-xA
CE-a
Video
Encoding
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit Rate
Range1
Notes
HD H.264
333 ms
10 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
333 ms
3 Mbps – 25 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
400 ms
12 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
400 ms
4 Mbps – 37 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
HD H.264
667 ms
7 Mbps – 50 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
667 ms
3 Mbps – 17.5 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
<700 ms
7 Mbps – 50 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
<700 ms
3 Mbps – 15 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
Table 6.11 Mega Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz
CE-x and CE-xA
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Video
Encoding
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit rate
Range1
Notes
HD H.264
290 ms
10 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 15 Mbps
SD H.264
290 ms
4 Mbps – 25 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 3 Mbps
HD MPEG-2
370 ms
12 Mbps – 80 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 30 Mbps
SD MPEG-2
370 ms
4 Mbps – 37 Mbps
Recommended minimum bit rate for
contribution = 6 Mbps
6-21
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.12 Compatibility Mode 29.97/59.94 Hz
CE-a J2K
Scan
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit rate
Range
Interlaced
<140 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Progressive
<120 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Notes
Table 6.13 Ultra Low Delay 29.97/59.94 Hz
CE-a J2K
6.8.3
Scan
Encode
Delay
Applicable Bit rate
Range
Interlaced
<100 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Progressive
<88 ms
1 Mbps - 50 Mbps
Notes
Audio Compatibility in Low Delay, Mega Low Delay, Ultra Low Delay
and Compatibility Modes
Only MPEG-1 Layer II encode, Dolby Digital Pass-through, Dolby E Pass-through
and Linear PCM Pass-through audio modes are supported in Low Delay and Mega
Low Delay buffer modes. Additionally, Dolby Digital Encode is supported in Low
Delay mode. Other audio encoding standards are available (if licensed) but lipsync
and buffer compliance cannot be guaranteed with them.
The CE-a J2K only supports Dolby E Pass-through and Linear PCM Pass-through
audio modes. It does not support audio encoding, so there are no implications in
Ultra Low Delay and Compatibility modes.
6.9
VCM Audio Encoding Functionality
The VCMs support a wide variety of input audio signals, and can encode them in
various formats or pass them as they are received (Pass-through mode). Table 6.14
describes the different input interfaces, the number of audio channel pairs that can
be fed to the unit using the appropriate interfaces, and the encoding methods
supported by the various option cards in the CE VCM family.
6-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Table 6.14 VCM Input Interfaces and Audio Encoding Methods
Input Interfaces
Encoding
Format
Audio
Channel
Pairs
SD-SDI
Up to 8
embedded
CE-a/J2K up to 4
HD-SDI
Up to 8
embedded
CE-a/J2K up to 4
Digital (AES/EBU)
4
Analog
0
MPEG-1 Layer II
2 free, 2 per
license
CE/SWO/MP1L2
Max licenses = 8 per VCM
Dolby Digital
1 per license
CE/SWO/DOLB
Y/AC3
Max licenses = 6 per VCM
CE/SWO/AAC
Max licenses = 6 per VCM
AAC LC
1 per license
License
Note
2 on CE-xA only
3 required for 5.1
3 required for 5.1
HE-AAC
1 per license
CE/SWO/AAC
Max licenses = 6 per VCM
3 required for 5.1
Dolby Digital Passthrough
8
Dolby E Pass-through
8
Except CE-a/J2K = 4
LPCM Pass-through
8
Except CE-a/J2K = 4
Notes: Although there are more sources from the physical inputs, the maximum
number of input streams supported is 8 for CE-x, CE-xA and CE-a, and 4 for
CE-a J2K, which can be from either of the input sources.
There must be a valid video source when using the Digital (AES/EBU) audio
input, the VCM is not designed for audio only encoding.
Any audio input can be associated with the video being processed, and the audio
encoding delay will be matched to the video encoding delay so that audio/video
synchronization (lipsync) is maintained.
All audio components are configurable on a per channel basis. Parameters include
the source of the audio, its encoding configuration and output PID.
6.9.1
Audio Input Interfaces
The Pre-processor function on the different VCMs accepts digital audio input from
either de-embedding from the HD/SD-SDI input or as a balanced (110 Ω) or
unbalanced AES/EBU input (75 Ω) from the D type back panel connector.
Additionally, on a CE-xA, analogue audio can be input through a 20 kΩ balanced or
unbalanced input.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-23
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.9.2
HD-SDI Input
The VCM can receive four groups of audio streams embedded in the HD serial
digital interface (HD-SDI) feed. Each group contains two channel pairs. Hence the
HD-SDI feed can carry up to a maximum of 2 x 4 = 8 pairs, or 16 mono channels.
Each group has an associated Data Identifier (DID). The DIDs are set to the SMPTE
299M defaults for audio group 1 to group 4:
•
Group 1 = 0x2E7
•
Group 2 = 0x1E6
•
Group 3 = 0x1E5
•
Group 4 = 0x2E4
The DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream. They are fixed at the
SMPTE 299M defaults.
6.9.3
SDI Input
The VCM can receive four groups of audio streams embedded in the serial digital
interface (SDI) feed. Each group contains two channel pairs. Hence the SDI feed
can carry up to a maximum of 2 x 4 = 8 pairs, or 16 mono channels.
Each group has an associated Data Identifier (DID). The DIDs are set to the SMPTE
272M defaults for audio group 1 to group 4:
•
Group 1 = 0x2FF
•
Group 2 = 0x1FD
•
Group 3 = 0x1FB
•
Group 4 = 0x2F9
The DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream. They are fixed at the
SMPTE 272M defaults. DID 1F4 is reserved for EDH error packets. Refer to the
SMPTE 272M specification for more details.
6.9.4
Digital Input
The digital input of the VCM accepts four EBU/AES-3 streams that can carry
uncompressed or compressed audio. Digital input is provided by the 15-pin D-Sub
connector located on the backplane of the VCM.
6-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
6.9.5
Analogue Input (CE-xA)
The CE-xA option card provides two stereo analogue audio inputs through the 15pin D-Type Audio connector. The inputs can be balanced or unbalanced with an
input impedance of 20 kΩ.
6.10
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data
The video stream ingested through the SDI/HD-SDI input on the VCM can carry
additional data associated with the video stream. These data are either inserted in
the horizontal or vertical blanking region (ANC) or in the non-active television lines
(VBI).
6.10.1
Ancillary Data
There are two positions in the video stream where ANC packets are allowed. The
first is the horizontal blanking interval of the video line, called the horizontal ANC
space (HANC). The second is the active portion of the video lines in the vertical
blanking interval, called the vertical ANC space (VANC). HANC and CANC of the
SDI signal can carry specific ancillary (ANC) data. The encoder then can be set up
to extract and re-packetize the data carried in the HANC or VANC based on the
ANC data type.
6.10.1.1
Closed Captions
Closed Caption data and any user data embedded in the SDI/HD-SDI according to
SMPTE 334, is extracted and inserted into the picture user data of the video stream
in accordance with ATSC A/72 part 1.
Information regarding the closed captions is carried in PSI as per ATSC A/72 part 2.
6.10.1.2
Time Code
Time code is extracted from HANC of the incoming video and carried in the
transport stream adaptation layer as described in Annex E of ETSI TS 101 154
(AU_information).
6.10.1.3
OP-47
Teletext subtitles can be extracted from ANC in accordance with OP-47 and carried
in a Teletext PID.
6.10.1.4
AFD
As part of the ANC Data, Active Format Description codes can also be transmitted.
These codes provide information to video devices about where in the coded picture
the active video is. The codes are defined by ETSI TS 101 154 V1.7.1 Annex B,
ATSC A/53 Part 4 and SMPTE 2016-1-2007.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6-25
Advanced Video Processing and Networking
Active Format Descriptor (AFD) uses three bits of video index to define the video
format. This information is encoded into user data and can then be used by a
Decoder for wide-screen switching.
6.10.1.5
Generic ANC
Up to 2 Mbps of generic data can be extracted from ANC of the incoming video and
encapsulated in accordance with SMPTE 2038 (Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets
in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream).
6.10.2
VBI Data
The extraction of VBI types can be enabled or disabled individually. The video line
from which the VBI is extracted can also be configured. The default is set according
to the relevant standard for the VBI type.
6.10.2.1
VBI Lines
Up to 8 VBI lines per field can be extracted. Unless otherwise stated, all VBI data
are formed into one VBI transport stream packet that conforms to ETSI EN 301 775
or SCTE 127.
6.10.2.2
VBI Data
Data can be extracted from the vertical blanking interval of the incoming video
stream, processed, and then included in the output transport stream. The following
table summarizes the VBI data types supported by the VCM module.
Table 6.15 VBI Data Types
6.10.2.3
Component
Comments
Video Index
It is possible to extract video index and another VBI type from the same line.
Closed Captions
Via line 21 & 284 (CEA-608C).
Monochrome 4:2:2
Up to 3 lines can be extracted per frame.
Teletext
Up to 18 lines can be extracted per field.
Aspect Ratio Signaling
WSS/WSS-AFD
VBI Data on a Separate PID
The VBI data is packetized into MPEG-2 PES packets according to ETSI ETS 300472 for Teletext and ETSI EN 301 775 or SCTE 127 for all other VBI data types.
Closed caption data and aspect ratio signaling can also be inserted into the
compressed video elementary stream.
6.10.2.4
Timing
The VCM aligns the VBI data and the compressed video frames, i.e. it uses the
same PTS for the video and the VBI data if they are from the same frame.
6-26
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Chapter 7
Contents
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.8.5
7.8.6
7.9
7.9.1
7.9.2
7.9.3
7.9.4
7.10
7.11
7.11.1
7.11.2
7.11.3
7.11.4
7.11.5
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction .........................................................................................7-3
Option Cards Available at this Release................................................7-3
Option Card Combinations ..................................................................7-4
Video Compression Modules ...............................................................7-5
CE-a VCM ...........................................................................................7-5
CE-a J2K VCM ....................................................................................7-7
CE-x VCM ...........................................................................................7-9
CE-xA VCM .......................................................................................7-12
CE-HEVC VCM .................................................................................7-14
ASI I/O Option Card...........................................................................7-17
General .............................................................................................7-17
Interfaces ..........................................................................................7-18
G.703 Transceiver Card ....................................................................7-18
General .............................................................................................7-18
Interfaces ..........................................................................................7-19
External Sync Input Option Card .......................................................7-19
General .............................................................................................7-19
Interfaces ..........................................................................................7-19
GPI Option Card ................................................................................7-20
General .............................................................................................7-20
GPI Triggered Splicing ......................................................................7-20
Alarm Relay ....................................................................................... 7-20
Load Stored Configurations (Not supported in this Release). ............ 7-20
Data Input (Not supported in this Release). ...................................... 7-20
Interfaces ..........................................................................................7-20
Satellite Modulator Option Card (AVP 3000 Voyager Only) ............... 7-21
General .............................................................................................7-21
Interfaces ..........................................................................................7-21
Modulation .........................................................................................7-22
Encryption .........................................................................................7-22
Software and Firmware Upgrades .....................................................7-22
Removal and Replacement of Modules ............................................. 7-23
Handling Modules ..............................................................................7-23
Electrostatic Discharge ......................................................................7-23
Installing a New Module ....................................................................7-24
Removing a Module...........................................................................7-25
Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module .................................................7-25
7-1
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.11.6
Option Card Plug-and-Play ............................................................... 7-27
List of Figures
Figure 7.1 Option Card Slot Numbering – 1AC Chassis ....................................... 7-4
Figure 7.2 CE-a VCM........................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7.3 CE-a J2K VCM.................................................................................... 7-7
Figure 7.4 CE-x VCM ........................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7.5 CE-xA VCM ...................................................................................... 7-12
Figure 7.6 CE-HEVC VCM ................................................................................. 7-15
Figure 7.7 ASI I/O Option Card .......................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7.8 G.703 Transceiver Card .................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7.9 External Sync Input Option Card ....................................................... 7-19
Figure 7.10 Satellite Modulator Option Card ........................................................ 7-21
Figure 7.11 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules .................................................. 7-23
List of Tables
Table 7.1
Table 7.2
Table 7.3
Table 7.4
Table 7.5
Table 7.6
Table 7.7
7-2
Option Cards Available at this Release ............................................... 7-3
Option Card Combinations .................................................................. 7-4
CE-a Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges ............................. 7-5
CE-x Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges ............................. 7-9
CE-xA Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges ......................... 7-12
Analogue Video Standard Parameters .............................................. 7-13
CE-HEVC Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges ................... 7-15
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.1
Introduction
This chapter describes the options that may be used with the Ericsson Advanced
Video Processor (AVP) Family, and the removal and replacement of options. It also
describes the procedure for obtaining licenses and how to upgrade your unit.
7.2
Option Cards Available at this Release
Table 7.1 lists the option cards that are supported at this release.
Table 7.1
Option Cards Available at this Release
Marketing Code
Name
Description
Supported in
CE/HWO/CE-x
CE-x
CE-x dual card video encoder module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-xA
CE-xA
CE-xA analogue input dual card video encoder
module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-a
CE-a
CE-a single card video encoder module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-a/J2K
CE-a J2K
CE-a single card JPEG 2000 video encoder
module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/ASI/2IN2OUT
ASI IO Option Card
ASI Input/Output Option Card
AVP 1000, AVP 2000,
AVP 3000
CE/HWO/G703
G.703 Transceiver Card
G.703 Transceiver Card
AVP 1000, AVP 2000,
AVP 3000
CE/HWO/EXTSYNC
VP/HWO/EXTSYNC
External Sync Input Card
This provides a synchronization input that will
accept either a video signal or a 10 MHz
reference input.
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/CE-x
CE-x
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable CE-x Module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/CE-xA
CE-xA
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable CE-xA Analogue
Module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/CE-a
CE-a
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable CE-a Module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/CE-a/J2K
CE-a J2K
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable CE-a J2K
Module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/ASI/2IN2OUT
VP/UPG/HWO/ASI/2IN2OUT
ASI IO Option Card
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable ASI I/O Module
AVP 1000, AVP 2000,
AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/G703
G.703 Transceiver Card
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable G.703 module
AVP 1000, AVP 2000,
AVP 3000
CE/UPG/HWO/EXTSYNC
VP/UPG/HWO/EXTSYNC
External Sync Input Card
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable External Sync
Module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
AVP/UPH/SATMOD
Satellite Modulator Card
UPGRADE: Customer-fitable Satellite
Modulator module
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/BNC
CE-HEVC
CE-HEVC single card media processing
module with BNC connections
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/SFP/C
CE-HEVC
CE-HEVC single media processing module
with SFP inputs – BNC receive modules
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
CE/HWO/CE-HEVC/SFP/F
CE-HEVC
CE-HEVC single media processing module
with SFP inputs – Fibre receive modules
AVP 2000, AVP 3000
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-3
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.3
Option Card Combinations
Table 7.2 lists the option cards that are available for the AVP family and the
recommended slots for fitting.
Table 7.2
Option Card
Option Card Combinations
AVP 1000
AVP 2000
AVP 3000
CE-a
6 max (Any Slot)
5 max (Any Slot)
CE-a J2K
6 max (Any Slot)
5 max (Any Slot)
CE-x
1 or 2 pair*
1 or 2 pair*
1(P)/2(E)
1(P)/2(E)
or
or
3(P)/4(E)
3(P)/4(E)
1 or 2 pair*
1 or 2 pair*
1(P)/2(E)
1(P)/2(E)
or
or
3(P)/4(E)
3(P)/4(E)
4 max (Any Slot)
4 max (Any Slot)
CE-xA
CE-HEVC
SAT MOD
1 (Slot 6 or 2)
ASI
6 (Any slot)
2 (Any slot)
2 (Any slot)
G.703
1 (Any slot)
1 (Any slot)
1 (Any slot)
1 (Any slot)
1 (Any slot)
Ext SYNC
Notes: CE-x and CE-xA option cards must be correctly fitted in pairs, e.g. 1(P)/2(E)
= Slot 1 (Pre-processor)/Slot 2 (Encoder)
If 2 CE-x or CE-xA modules are fitted in a chassis then no other VCMs can
be fitted.
Thermic restrictions may apply if more than four VCM option cards are fitted
in a unit.
The numbered option card slots available on the AVP are shown in Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1 Option Card Slot Numbering – 1AC Chassis
Note:
In a 4-slot dual AC PSU chassis, slots numbers 5 and 6 are not available.
The features of the available Video Compression Modules (VCMs) and other Option
Cards are described in the following paragraphs.
7-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4
Video Compression Modules
7.4.1
CE-a VCM
7.4.1.1
Overview
The CE-a Video Compression Module (VCM) is a single card that can encode a
single video input. By default the basic card supports encoding SD MPEG-2 video
and MPEG-1 Layer II Audio. Video and audio encoding functionality is extended by
the purchase of feature licenses.
Figure 7.2 CE-a VCM
Table 7.3
CE-a Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges
Video Encode Profiles
Bit Rate Range (Mbps)
Licenses Required
SD MPEG-2 Main Profile @ Main Level 4:2:0
8bit
0.5 - 15
None
HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8bit
2.0 - 50
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD
CE/SWO/CE-a/H264
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8bit
0.5 – 10
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4::0 8bit
0.5 – 12.5
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8bit
0.5 – 17.5
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8-bit
1.0 – 20
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8-bit
1.0 – 25
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8-bit
1.0 – 50
CE/SWO/CE-a/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD
Notes: Up to 6 CE-a modules can be fitted in the unit, but limitations due to
operational temperature may apply.
If the appropriate licenses are available, up to 16 channel pairs of audio can
be encoded using the MPEG-1 Layer II algorithm, 6 audio channel pairs can
be encoded in Dolby Digital or 6 channel pairs in (HE-)AAC.
There is also an option to configure the unit to pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby Digital,
Dolby-E or Linear PCM audio.
Audio decode is not supported.
7.4.1.2
Inputs
This module provides the following inputs:
•
SD/HD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-5
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
•
7.4.1.3
7.4.1.4
Audio Input via a 15-way D-Type male connector for audio and (see Chapter 2
Installing the Equipment).
Video
•
SD/HD-SDI video input.
•
Frame re-synchronization.
•
Programmable bandwidth filter.
•
SD & HD H.264, 4:2:0 Video Encoding (Depending upon purchased licenses).
•
SD & HD MPEG-2 4:2:0 Video Encoding (Depending upon purchased licenses).
•
Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 567 or 480 (SD).
•
Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 720 (SD). Reduced horizontal
resolutions are configurable on the VCM but are not recommended for
contribution feeds. If selected, the reduced resolution must also be supported by
the decoder.
•
Scene cut detection.
•
Low Delay.
•
Bit rate tracking.
Input Detection
The VCM is capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available at the SDI
input. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for configuration details.
7.4.1.5
7.4.1.6
7-6
Ancillary Data
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334.
•
Time Code.
•
OP-47 (Subtitles).
•
Generic ANC extraction.
VBI
•
Video Index.
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334, or line 21.
•
World Standard Text (WST – ETS300472) (625 line only).
•
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS or WSS-AFD).
•
SMPTE 2016-3 AFD and Bar Data.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.1.7
7.4.1.8
Audio Compression
•
Eight channels AES/EBU digital audio input either de-embedded from SD/HDSDI or via the Audio/Data input connector.
•
Supported audio coding modes:
-
MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps) (additional pairs available with
CE/SWO/M1L2 software option).
-
MPEG-1 Layer II Phase Aligned Audio (384 kbps) (software option
CE/SWO/PAA).
-
Dolby Digital (56 kbps to 640 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3).
-
AAC LC/HE-AAC (32 kbps to 192 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/AAC).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby Digital (1 – 5.1 channel).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby E.
-
Pass-thru of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM – SMPTE 302M).
Indications
An LED is provided to indicate Lock Status.
7.4.2
CE-a J2K VCM
7.4.2.1
Overview
The CE-a J2K Video Compression Module (VCM) is a single card that can encode a
single video input.
Figure 7.3 CE-a J2K VCM
Note:
Up to 6 CE-a J2K modules can be fitted in the unit, but limitations due to
operational temperature may apply.
The CE-a J2K VCM cannot decode or encode audio input streams. However, it can
pass-through linear PCM or Dolby E encoded streams embedded in the SDI signal.
The VCM is also capable of processing Ancillary Data (ANC) but only in HD mode.
7.4.2.2
Inputs
This module provides the following inputs:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-7
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.2.3
7.4.2.4
•
SD/HD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
•
Audio Input via a 15-way D-Type male connector for audio and (see Chapter 2
Installing the Equipment).
Video
•
SD/HD-SDI video input.
•
SD & HD JPEG 2000, 4:2:2 10 bit video encoding.
•
Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 567 or 480 (SD).
•
Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 720 (SD).
•
Ultra Low Latency.
•
Bit rate tracking.
Input Detection
The CE-a J2K VCM is capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available
at the SDI input. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for configuration details.
7.4.2.5
Ancillary Data
The CE-a J2K VCM is capable of extracting up to 2 Mbps of the following ANC data
from the SDI output in HD mode:
•
7.4.2.6
Generic ANC in accordance with SMPTE 2038-2008.
VBI
In SD mode, the CE-a J2K VCM is capable of encoding the VBI lines as part of the
picture.
7.4.2.7
7.4.2.8
Audio Compression
•
Four channels AES/EBU digital audio input either de-embedded from SD/HDSDI or via the Audio/Data input connector.
•
Supported audio coding modes:
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby E
-
Pass-thru of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM – SMPTE 302M).
Indications
An LED is provided to indicate SDI lock Status.
7-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.3
CE-x VCM
7.4.3.1
Overview
The CE-x VCM is a two-card solution that can encode a single video input. By
default the basic card supports encoding SD MPEG-2 video and MPEG-1 Layer II
Audio. Video and audio encoding functionality is extended by the purchase of
feature licenses, summarized in Chapter 1, Introduction.
Figure 7.4 CE-x VCM
Two CE-x modules can be fitted in slots 3/4 and 1/2.
Table 7.4 CE-x Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges
Video Encode Profiles
Bit Rate Range (Mbps)*
Licenses Required
SD MPEG-2 Main Profile @ Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit 0.5 - 15
None
SD MPEG-2 422 Profile @ Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit
0.5 - 50
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit
2.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
HD MPEG-2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit
2.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 10
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8bit
0.5 – 12.5
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 17.5
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit
0.5 – 25
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit
0.5 - 25
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
2.0 – 20
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
2.0 – 25
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
1.0 – 62.5
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit
1.0 – 80
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
1.0 – 80
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0 8 bit 5.0 – 62.5
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
8 bit
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
10 bit
10.0 – 80
10.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/1080p
* The full bit rate range is not available when configured in Stripe Refresh mode.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-9
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
If the appropriate licenses are available, up to 16 channel pairs of audio can be
encoded using the MPEG-1 Layer II algorithm, 6 audio channel pairs can be
encoded in Dolby Digital or 6 channel pairs in (HE-)AAC.
There is also an option to configure the unit to pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby Digital,
Dolby-E or Linear PCM audio.
Audio decode is not supported.
The VCM is also capable of processing Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary
ANC Data.
7.4.3.2
Inputs
This module provides the following inputs:
7.4.3.3
7-10
•
3G/HD/SD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
•
Audio Input via a 15-way D-Type male connector for audio and (see Chapter 2
Installing the Equipment).
Video
•
SDI video input.
•
Frame re-synchronization.
•
Programmable bandwidth filter.
•
SD & HD H.264, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased
licenses).
•
SD & HD MPEG-2 4:2:0 & 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased
licenses).
•
HD H264 1080p Video Encoding (depending on purchased licenses). When
configured for 1080p encoding only. Low Delay or Mega Low Delay buffer
modes are supported.
•
Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 567 or 480 (SD).
•
Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 720 (SD). Reduced horizontal
resolutions are configurable on the VCM but are not recommended for
contribution feeds. If selected, the reduced resolution must also be supported by
the decoder.
•
Scene cut detection.
•
Low Delay/Mega Low Delay.
•
Fixed Latency mode in H.264.
•
Stripe Refresh H.264 low delay mode (dependent on purchased license)
•
Bit rate tracking.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.3.4
Input Detection
The CE-x VCM is capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available at
the SDI input. See Chapter 5, Web GUI Control for configuration details.
7.4.3.5
7.4.3.6
7.4.3.7
7.4.3.8
Ancillary Data
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334.
•
Time Code.
•
OP-47 (Subtitles).
•
Generic ANC extraction.
VBI
•
Video Index.
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334, or line 21.
•
World Standard Text (WST – ETS300472) (625 line only).
•
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS or WSS-AFD).
•
SMPTE 2016-3 AFD and Bar Data.
Audio Compression
•
Up to eight channels AES/EBU digital audio input either de-embedded from
SD/HD-SDI or via the Audio/Data input connector.
•
Supported audio coding modes:
-
MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps) (additional pairs available with
CE/SWO/M1L2 software option).
-
MPEG-1 Layer II Phase Aligned Audio (384 kbps) (software option
CE/SWO/PAA).
-
Dolby Digital (56 kbps to 640 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3).
-
AAC LC/HE-AAC (32 kbps to 192 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/AAC).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby Digital (1 – 5.1 channels).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby E.
-
Pass-thru of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM – SMPTE 302M).
Indications
An LED is provided to indicate SDI lock Status.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-11
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.4
CE-xA VCM
7.4.4.1
Overview
The CE-xA VCM is a two-card solution that adds support for analogue video and
audio inputs to the CE-x.
By default the basic card supports encoding SD MPEG-2 video and MPEG-1 Layer
II Audio. Video and audio encoding functionality is extended by the purchase of
feature licenses, summarized in Chapter 1, Introduction.
Figure 7.5 CE-xA VCM
Note:
Two CE-xA modules can be fitted in slots 3/4 and 1/2.
Table 7.5 CE-xA Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges
Video Encode Profiles
Bit Rate Range (Mbps)*
Licenses Required
SD MPEG-2 Main Profile @ Main Level 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 - 15
None
SD MPEG-2 422 Profile @ Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit
0.5 - 50
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
HD MPEG-2 Main Profile High Level 4:2:0 8 bit
2.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
HD MPEG-2 4:2:2 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit
2.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264
SD H.264 Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 10
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 12.5
SD H.264 High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
0.5 – 17.5
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 8 bit
0.5 – 25
SD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 3.1 4:2:2 10 bit
0.5 - 25
HD H.264 Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
3.0 – 20
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
3.0 – 25
HD H.264 High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
1.0 – 62.5
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 8 bit
2.0 – 80
HD H.264 Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2 10 bit
2.0 – 80
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level 4.2 4:2:0 8bit
5.0 – 62.5
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
8bit
10.0 – 80
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile Level 4.2 4:2:2
10bit
Note:
7-12
10.0 - 80
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422 and
CE/SWO/CE-x/1080p
Two CE-x Analogue modules can be fitted in slots 3/4 and 1/2.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
If the appropriate licenses are available, up to 8 channel pairs of audio can be
encoded using the MPEG-1 Layer II algorithm, 3 audio channel pairs can be
encoded in Dolby Digital or 6 channel pairs in AAC LC or HE-AAC. There is also an
option to configure the unit to pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby Digital, Dolby-E or
Linear PCM audio.
The VCM is also capable of processing VBI from the analogue input and ANC and
VBI from the SDI input.
7.4.4.2
Inputs
This module provides the following inputs:
•
HD/SD SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
•
Analogue video input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
•
Digital audio input via a 15-way D-Type male connector (see Chapter 2 Installing
the Equipment)
•
Analogue audio input via a 15-way D-Type male connector (see Chapter 2
Installing the Equipment).
•
Video.
Table 7.6
Standard
Number of Lines
Frame Rate
Video Bandwidth
NTSC - M (without pedestal)
525
29.97 frames/s
4.2 MHz
NTSC - M (with pedestal)
525
29.97 frames/s
4.2 MHz
PAL - B
625
25 frames/s
5.0 MHz
PAL - G
625
25 frames/s
5.0 MHz
PAL - H
625
25 frames/s
5.0 MHz
PAL - I
625
25 frames/s
5.0 MHz
PAL - D
625
25 frames/s
5.0 MHz
Note:
7.4.4.3
Analogue Video Standard Parameters
Reduced horizontal resolutions are configurable on the VCM but are not
recommended for contribution feeds. If selected, the reduced resolution
must also be supported by the decoder.
Input Detection
When encoding analogue video source, the unit is not able to automatically detect
the input video format. Instead, the user must set the correct format through the user
interface and the unit will update the locked state accordingly.
Input auto detection works for digital video input through the SDI/HD-SDI connector.
7.4.4.4
Ancillary Data
The following ancillary data is supported only when the unit is fed by a digital video
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-13
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.4.5
7.4.4.6
7.4.4.7
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334.
•
Time Code.
•
OP-47 (Subtitles).
•
Generic ANC extraction.
VBI
•
Video Index.
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334, or line 21.
•
World Standard Text (WST – ETS300472) (625 line only).
•
Wide Screen Signaling (WSS or WSS-AFD).
•
SMPTE 2016-3 AFD and Bar Data.
Audio Compression
•
Up to eight channels of audio input either de-embedded from SD/HD-SDI or via
the 15-way D-type input connector that accepts four stereo pairs of AES/EBU or
two stereo pairs of analogue audio signals.
•
Supported audio coding modes:
-
MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps) (additional pairs available with
CE/SWO/M1L2 software option).
-
MPEG-1 Layer II Phase Aligned Audio (384 kbps) (software option
CE/SWO/PAA).
-
Dolby Digital (56 kbps to 640 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3).
-
AAC LC/HE-AAC (32 kbps to 192 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/AAC).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby Digital (1 – 5.1 channels).
-
Pass-thru of pre-encoded Dolby E.
-
Pass-thru of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM – SMPTE 302M).
Indications
An LED is provided to indicate digital and analogue video input Lock Status.
7.4.5
CE-HEVC VCM
7.4.5.1
Overview
The CE-HEVC VCM is can encode either a single HD HEVC video from SDI input 1,
or a single UHD (4K) HEVC video using the 4 inputs provided.
7-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
By default the basic card is purchased with no video or audio encode functionality.
Licenses are required to enable all video and audio encoding functionality, while 2
channels of MPEG-1 Layer II Audio are available by default. Video and audio
encoding functionality is enabled or extended by the purchase of feature licenses,
summarized in Chapter 1, Introduction.
Figure 7.6 CE-HEVC VCM
Note:
Up to 4 CE-HEVC modules can be fitted.
Table 7.7 CE-HEVC Encoder Video Profiles and Bit Rate Ranges
Video Encode Profiles
Bit Rate Range (Mbps)*
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0
8 bit
720p
1080i
2.0 – 30
3.0 – 30
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:0
10 bit
720p
1080i
2.0 – 30
3.0 – 30
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0
8 bit
720p
1080i
2.0 – 50
3.0 – 50
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0
10 bit
720p
1080i
2.0 – 50
3.0 – 50
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High
Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
1080p
4.0 – 50
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High
Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
1080p
4.0 – 50
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2
8 bit
720p
1080i
2.5 – 30
3.5 – 30
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0 High Tier 4:2:2
10 bit
720p
1080i
2.5 – 30
3.5 – 30
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2
8 bit
720p
1080i
2.5 – 50
3.5 – 50
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2
10 bit
720p
1080i
2.5 – 50
3.5 – 50
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High
Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
1080p
6.0 – 50
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1 High
Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
1080p
6.0 – 50
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier
4:2:0 10 bit
2160p
9.0 – 100
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/4K
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level 5.1 High Tier
4:2:2 10 bit
2160p
12.0 – 100
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/
422/x4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Licenses Required
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
7-15
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
If the appropriate licenses are available, up to 16 channel pairs of audio can be
encoded using the MPEG-1 Layer II algorithm, 6 audio channel pairs can be
encoded in Dolby Digital or 6 channel pairs in (HE-) AAC.
There is also an option to configure the unit to pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby Digital,
Dolby-E or Linear PCM audio.
Audio decode is not supported.
The processing Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) is not currently supported in this
release.
7.4.5.2
Inputs
There are two module options available providing either BNC or SFP inputs:
•
3G/HD-SDI Input via a 75 Ω BNC female connector.
•
UHD using 4 off 3G-SDI Inputs via 75 Ω BNC female connectors.
Or
•
3G/HD-SDI Input via an LC optical female connector.
•
UHD using 4 off 3G-SDI Inputs via LC female connectors.
Note:
7.4.5.3
7.4.5.4
SFP Modules are NOT hot-swappable.
Video
•
SDI video input.
•
Frame re-synchronization.
•
HD & UHD HEVC, 4:2:0 & 4:2:2 Video Encoding (depending on purchased
licenses).
•
Vertical resolution: 720 or 1080 (HD), 2160 (UHD).
•
Horizontal Resolution: 1920 or 1280 (HD), 3840 (UHD).
•
Low Delay/Mega Low Delay.
•
Bit rate tracking.
Input Detection
The CE-HEVC VCM is capable of detecting if there is a valid video stream available
at the SDI input. See Chapter 3, Getting Started: How to Configure and use Video
Input detection for details.
7-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.4.5.5
7.4.5.6
7.4.5.7
Ancillary Data
•
Closed Captions: EIA-608, EIA-708 via SMPTE 334.
•
Time Code.
•
SMPTE 2016-3 AFD and Bar Data
•
HDR/WSS signalling. SDR (BT.709), UHD SDR (BT.2020), HDR HLG10 (HDR
in VUI), HDR HLG10 (SDR in VUI), HDR PQ10.
Audio Compression
•
Up to eight channels AES/EBU digital audio input either de-embedded from
SD/HD-SDI or via the Audio/Data input connector.
•
Supported audio coding modes:
-
MPEG-1 Layer II (32 kbps to 384 kbps) (additional pairs available with
CE/SWO/M1L2 software option).
-
MPEG-1 Layer II Phase Aligned Audio (384 kbps) (software option
CE/SWO/PAA).
-
Dolby Digital (56 kbps to 640 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3).
-
AAC LC/HE-AAC (32 kbps to 192 kbps) (software option CE/SWO/AAC).
-
Pass-through of pre-encoded Dolby Digital (1 – 5.1 channels).
-
Pass-through of pre-encoded Dolby E.
-
Pass-through of uncompressed audio (Linear PCM – SMPTE 302M).
Indications
LEDs are provided to indicate SDI Lock Status.
7.5
ASI I/O Option Card
7.5.1
General
The ASI I/O option card provides two asynchronous serial input and two
asynchronous serial output interfaces which conform to Part 9 of CENELCE EN
50083-9, subclause 4.3 and can transmit DVB/MPEG-2 Transport Streams up to a
rate of 270 Mbps.
The ASI option card uses the 27 MHz System Clock Reference (SCR) signal from
the base chassis as its frequency reference. The output bit rate of the ASI Card is
configurable up to 200 Mbps. The module automatically configures Burst or Byte
Mode. For a Transport Stream rate less than 70 Mbps, packets are sent in Byte
Mode. Above 70 Mbps Burst Mode is used.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-17
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Figure 7.7 ASI I/O Option Card
7.5.2
Interfaces
The ASI I/O option card has the following interfaces:
•
Two 75 Ω female BNC input connectors.
•
Two 75 Ω female BNC output connectors.
The input connectors are used for feeding the unit with external Transport Streams
that can be passed through the unit unmodified to an available output, or services
from the TS remuxed into a TS configured for an available output.
The output connectors can be configured as a mirrored output pair (with the same
Transport Stream on both outputs) or two independent outputs (with different
Transport Streams on each output).
Note:
When the outputs are configured as independent the maximum bit rate of
the combined outputs must not exceed 200 Mbps.
7.6
G.703 Transceiver Card
7.6.1
General
The G.703 Transceiver card provides one PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy)
output interface that can be used for interfacing Transport Streams to PDH
networks. The interface is G.703 compliant and provides support for E carriers,
namely E31 (E3) and E32 (DS3) as specified in ITU-T Rec. G.703. The input
interface is not supported in this release.
The G.703 Transceiver Card uses the 27 MHz System Clock Reference (SCR)
signal from the base chassis as its frequency reference. The output bit rate of the
card can be 34 384 kbps (E31) or 44 736 kbps (E32). For the E3 carrier no framing
is supported. For the DS3 carrier M13 and C-bit frame structures are supported. If
C-bit framing is selected the output can be encapsulated in ATM packets.
Notes: M13 is the same as M23, C-bit is the same as C-bit Parity.
E3 is the same as E31, DS3 is the same as E32.
7-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Figure 7.8 G.703 Transceiver Card
7.6.2
Interfaces
The G.703 Transceiver option card has the following interfaces for connecting to a
PDH network:
•
One 75 Ω female BNC input connector (not supported in this release).
•
One 75 Ω female BNC output connectors. The output can be configured to
receive any TS generated in the unit, or passed through from an ASI input.
7.7
External Sync Input Option Card
7.7.1
General
With the External Sync Input option card the internal 27 MHz System Clock
Reference of the unit can be locked to an external clock source. The synchronizing
signal is input via a 75 Ω female BNC connector on the rear panel. The unit can be
configured to lock to either a PAL or NTSC black burst signal, or a 1 V peak to peak
10 MHz reference.
If the input is a black burst signal, the horizontal sync information is extracted and
passed to the Host Controller Card. If the input is a 10MHz clock signal, it is directly
passed to the Host Controller card.
Figure 7.9 External Sync Input Option Card
7.7.2
Interfaces
The External Sync Input option card has the following interface:
•
One 75 Ω female BNC input connector for connecting a 10 MHz 1Vpp reference
signal or an analogue video signal.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-19
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.8
GPI Option Card
7.8.1
General
The GPI option card supports the following functions:
7.8.2
•
GPI triggered splicing.
•
Alarm relay.
•
GPI Loading of stored configurations (Not supported in this Release).
•
IEC-232 (RS-232) Data Input (Not supported in this Release).
GPI Triggered Splicing
The GPI card provides an option for splicing triggered by GPI pin state change.
When configured, the card sends SCTE-104 messages to the encoders of the
VCMs fitted in the unit by closing and opening general purpose input pins.
7.8.3
Alarm Relay
The GPI card provides an alarm and a fail relay on the 25-way D-type interface.
The GPI inputs allow various specific Encoder functions to be controlled using 16
contact closure inputs. The controlled functions are software assigned.
The alarm/fail relay contacts provide alarm relay interfaces that can be used to send
a signal to remote equipment on an alarm condition.
7.8.4
Load Stored Configurations (Not supported in this Release).
The GPI input pins can be used to trigger the loading of any of the 64 stored
configurations on the unit. The selection of the stored configuration is made by
configuring 6 of the GPI input pins as a binary representation of the store number
while a 7th pin provides the toggle to action the loading of the configuration.
7.8.5
Data Input (Not supported in this Release).
The Data Input provides an asynchronous serial data communications interface
conforming to the IEC-232 (RS-232) standard.
7.8.6
Interfaces
The GPI option card has the following interfaces:
7-20
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
•
One 9-way D-type female connector labeled as DATA IN (not supported in this
release).
•
One 25-way D-type female connector labeled as GPI/ALARM.
7.9
Satellite Modulator Option Card (AVP 3000 Voyager Only)
7.9.1
General
The satellite modulator option card is a module that takes MPEG Transport Streams
on its input, either a TS generated in the unit, or passed through from an ASI input,
and provides a modulated output either in L-band (950 – 2150 MHz) or in IF band
(50 – 180 MHz) according to the DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2 or DVB-S2X
specification. The output signal can be fed to an up-converter for mixing the signal to
the appropriate satellite channel. The module is also capable of powering the
downstream up-converter.
Figure 7.10 Satellite Modulator Option Card
To increase reliability, the satellite modulator option card can take two input
Transport Streams and encode and modulate one of them at a time. If the Transport
Stream being modulated is lost for some reason, the module can switch
automatically to the other Transport Stream input and continue the transmission
using that.
7.9.2
Interfaces
The Satellite Modulator option card has the following connectors:
•
One 50 Ω female SMA L-Band input connector.
•
One 50 Ω female SMA L-Band main output connector.
•
One 75 Ω female F-type L-Band output connector for monitoring purposes.
•
One 75 Ω female BNC IF main output connectors.
•
One 75 Ω female BNC IF output connector for monitoring purposes.
The L-Band input can be used for inputting a modulated L-Band signal to the
module. The module then can combine the input and its own modulated output and
feed a common up-converter with the combined signal.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-21
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Note:
7.9.3
It is the responsibility of the operator to set up the two modulators so that
the signals produced by them do not interfere with each other (that is, they
do not overlap in any way in the frequency band).
Modulation
The satellite modulator is capable of the following modulations:
7.9.4
•
QPSK modulation in accordance with EN 300 421 (DVB-S).
•
8PSK and 16QAM modulation in accordance with EN 301 210 (DVB-DSNG).
•
QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK and 32APSK in accordance with EN 302 307 (DVB-S2).
•
QPSK, 8PSK, 8APSK-L, 16APSK, 16APSK-L, 32APSK, 32APSK-L, 64APSK
and 64APSK-L in accordance with EN 302 307 -2 (DVB-S2 Extensions).
Encryption
The Transport Stream can be encrypted using RAS algorithm. Individual services in
a Transport Stream can be BISS encrypted.
7.10
Software and Firmware Upgrades
A single Upgrade Wizard is available for the unit and all option cards that can be
fitted for upgrading the unit software and firmware through the Ethernet control port.
To install software upgrade, navigate to the folder where the Upgrade Wizard is
saved, and run the executable file.
Notes: Follow instructions provided with the software upgrade wizard to reduce the
risk of upgrade failure.
The upgrade process needs approximately 50 minutes to finish. The unit
automatically reboots during the process.
Following an upgrade, the unit configuration is lost and any stored
configurations may no longer be compatible with the new software. A
configuration converter tool is available to convert existing configurations so
that they can be re-used. Refer to instructions provided with the converter
tool for more information.
To recover the unit from a failed upgrade, refer to the instructions provided
with the Upgrade Wizard.
7-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.11
Removal and Replacement of Modules
This section gives information relating to the handling of option modules as they are
inserted or removed from the unit.
7.11.1
Handling Modules
Caution!
Care must be taken to when inserting or withdrawing modules to avoid damage to
underside components.
Modules must be kept orthogonal, i.e. at 90 degrees to the unit, to avoid catching
underside components on the chassis.
Figure 7.11 Inserting and Withdrawing Modules
Caution!
Do not plug in modules with excessive force as this may result in damage to the
module connector or other components. If any significant resistance to inserting a
module is felt, withdraw the module slightly and check for obstructions.
7.11.2
Electrostatic Discharge
Warning!
Static electricity can damage electronic components. To avoid damage, keep
modules in their static-protective package until you are ready to install them.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-23
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
To reduce the possibility of electrostatic discharge, observe the following
precautions:
7.11.3
•
Where possible ensure that antistatic protection is worn (for example an earthed
antistatic wrist strap, an ankle or heel strap).
•
Handle modules carefully, holding them by edges or rear panels.
•
Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed printed circuitry.
•
Do not leave the modules where others can handle and possibly damage them.
•
While the module is still in its anti-static package, touch it to an unpainted metal
part of the system unit for at least two seconds. (This drains static electricity
from the package and from your body).
•
Remove the module from its package and install it directly into your base
chassis without setting it down. If it is necessary to set the module down, place it
in its static-protective package.
•
Take additional care when handling modules during cold weather, because
heating reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.
Installing a New Module
A new module can be inserted when the unit is powered off or on. When inserted
and powered, the unit will determine the module capabilities and make it available
for configuration. Initially a default set of parameters will be in place. As long as
there are licenses available for the features required, the module can then be
configured and used immediately.
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section 7.11.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see section 7.11.2).
To install a new module:
1. Remove the blanking plate from the module slot in which the new module is to
be fitted.
2. Carefully remove the new module from its anti-static package, and insert it in to
the base unit, slotting the module edges in to the module guides.
3. Push the module home, so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base
unit.
4. Tighten the two captive retaining screws.
5. When the chassis detects a new card fitted, it will be displayed on the
Dashboard, and an alarm will be raised. If all options are reported correctly, the
7-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Accept Hardware Configuration needs to be applied. This will accept the new
hardware configuration and clear the alarm.
7.11.4
Removing a Module
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see Section 7.11.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see Section 7.11.2).
To remove a module:
1. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the module in the base unit.
2. Holding the captive screws, pull the module from the unit and place it in suitable
anti-static packaging.
3. Fit a blanking panel in place of the removed module.
4. When the unit detects a card is no longer present, it will be displayed on the
Option Slots web page, and an alarm will be raised. If all options are reported
correctly, the Accept Option Slot Configuration needs to be applied. This will
accept the new hardware configuration and clear the alarm.
7.11.5
Replacing (Hot-Swapping) a Module
A module can be replaced on a like-for-like basis without powering down the base
unit, i.e. can be ‘hot-swapped’. This will cause services to be allocated to other
modules, if available, enabling the removal of the module in question. In this way,
essential maintenance can be carried out with minimum disruption.
The replacement module must be of the same type and at the same software
version as the original. The replacement module must be fitted into the same option
slot as the module it is replacing.
To perform a hot-swap, the modules should only be unplugged or inserted when the
unit is fully booted and configured.
Only ONE module should be ‘hot-swapped’ at a time, to prevent problems due to
inrush current, and to ensure that the host recognizes and configures the new
module. A wait time of at least 40 seconds is recommended between removing the
module and replacing or inserting a new module.
Note:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
It could take between 2 and 4 minutes from inserting the module for it to be
recognized, configured and producing video output, following a hot-swap
operation.
7-25
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
Caution!
To avoid damaging the module, always handle carefully (see section 7.11.1) and
avoid electrostatic discharge (see section 7.11.2).
Dual Slot Modules
If the failed card is one of a module pair (i.e., CE-x or CE-xA), both cards must be
unplugged and replaced in the following sequence:
1. Remove the Pre-processor (bottom) card first then the Encoder (top) card.
2. Wait for at least 40 seconds.
3. Replace the Pre-processor (bottom) card.
4. Replace the Encoder (top) card.
If the software or firmware version on the newly inserted card is different from the
software or firmware version on the replaced card, then the Upgrade Wizard has to
be run again to resolve the version conflicts. The conflict is reported on the
Dashboard in the Model accordion of the Device Information widget and on the
Versions tab of the Support page.
To replace an option card:
1. Disconnect all cables from the option card to be replaced.
2. Loosen the two captive screws that retain the option card in the base chassis.
3. Holding the captive screws, pull the option card from the unit, (observe the
handling precautions and advice for module pairs where applicable).
4. Carefully remove the replacement option card from its anti-static package, and
insert it in to the base chassis, slotting the card edges in to the card guides.
5. Push the card home, so that the rear panel is flush with the rear of the base
chassis (observe the handling precautions and advice for module pairs where
applicable).
6. Tighten the two captive retaining screws.
7. Connect all external cables to the replacement option card.
Note:
7-26
If the replacement card is of the same type as the failed card, i.e. if it has
the same capabilities (licenses), is at the same software version and is fitted
in the same slot, then it will be automatically configured to the same settings
as the failed card. If the replacement card is of a different type, then an
alarm will be generated.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
7.11.6
Option Card Plug-and-Play
The unit is designed around a plug-and-play concept to make it as easy as possible
to add new option cards and functionality. This means that the chassis and Host
controller card provide a base level of functionality, while any specific functionality
associated with an option card is contained on the option card itself.
A good example of this is MPEG SI generation. The Host controller provides the
functionality to generate and play out the SI required by a Transport Stream.
However a VCM is required to provide any descriptors required for any elementary
stream types that it generates.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
7-27
Options, Licensing and Upgrades
BLANK
7-28
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Chapter 8
Contents
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.3.1
8.2.3.2
8.2.3.3
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.3.1
8.5.3.2
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7
8.5.7.1
8.5.7.2
8.5.7.3
8.5.7.4
8.5.7.5
8.5.7.6
8.5.7.7
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Introduction .........................................................................................8-3
Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................8-3
Routine Inspection ...............................................................................8-3
Cleaning ..............................................................................................8-3
Servicing .............................................................................................8-3
Damage Requiring Service ..................................................................8-3
Replacement Parts ..............................................................................8-4
Checks on Completion of Servicing .....................................................8-4
Maintenance and Support....................................................................8-4
Introduction .........................................................................................8-4
Warranty..............................................................................................8-4
Service Level Agreements ...................................................................8-4
Alarms .................................................................................................8-5
Alarms - Control Port ...........................................................................8-5
Alarms - Data Port ...............................................................................8-5
Alarm Monitor Widget ..........................................................................8-6
Satellite Modulator Alarms ...................................................................8-6
VCM Alarms ........................................................................................8-7
Fault-finding.........................................................................................8-8
Fault-finding Philosophy ......................................................................8-8
Preliminary Checks..............................................................................8-9
Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working ...........................................8-9
Fuse Replacement ............................................................................8-10
Lithium Battery ..................................................................................8-10
Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating .......................................................8-10
Cannot Access Web GUI ...................................................................8-11
Unit Cannot Be Pinged ......................................................................8-11
General Operation Problems .............................................................8-12
Parameters Slow to Load ..................................................................8-12
Problems Adding Program Clock Reference (PCR) ...........................8-12
MPEG-2 Video PES per GOP Option Removed ................................8-13
Ancillary Timecode (ATC) Not Extracted and Placed into the VBI
Data PES ..........................................................................................8-13
Video Recovery Delay When Switching MPEG-2 to H.264 ................ 8-13
No VITC Control of Timecode ............................................................8-13
Video Index Operation and Active Format Description (AFD)
Problems ...........................................................................................8-13
8-1
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.7.8
8.5.7.9
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.9
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.10
Automatic Loudness Control in Low Delay Modes ............................ 8-14
No RF Output (Voyager II and AVP3000 only) .................................. 8-14
Unit XML ........................................................................................... 8-15
Log Files ........................................................................................... 8-15
Saved and Exported Configurations .................................................. 8-16
Exported Configuration ..................................................................... 8-16
Saved Configuration ......................................................................... 8-17
Remote Server Logging .................................................................... 8-18
Overview ........................................................................................... 8-18
Configuring Remote Server Logging ................................................. 8-18
Configuring the Remote Server ......................................................... 8-19
Limitations and Specifications of Remote Server Logging ................. 8-20
Calling a Service Engineer ................................................................ 8-20
List of Figures
Figure 8.1 Selecting Remote Server Logging ..................................................... 8-19
List of Tables
Table 8.1
Table 8.2
Table 8.3
Table 8.4
Table 8.5
Table 8.6
Table 8.7
8-2
Alarms - Control Port........................................................................... 8-5
Alarms - Data Port .............................................................................. 8-6
Status LED Unlit Fault-finding ............................................................. 8-9
Fans Not Working/Overheating ......................................................... 8-10
Cannot Access Web GUI .................................................................. 8-11
Unit Cannot be Pinged ...................................................................... 8-12
Effect of Alarms That Can Turn Off RF Outputs ................................ 8-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.1
Introduction
This chapter details the schedules and instructions, where applicable, for routine
inspection, cleaning and maintenance of the equipment which should be performed
by an operator. It also details basic fault-finding procedures.
8.2
Preventive Maintenance
8.2.1
Routine Inspection
Check cooling fan operation regularly. The fans are temperature controlled so may
not be on if the ambient temperature is low. Refer to Annex B, Technical
Specification for more information.
Note:
8.2.2
Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating.
This condition is detected by a temperature sensor and causes an alarm to
be raised.
Cleaning
Caution!
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a damp cloth.
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Note:
Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned.
8.2.3
Servicing
8.2.3.1
Damage Requiring Service
Warning!
Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present
within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only
Ericsson trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this
equipment.
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service
personnel under the following conditions:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.2.3.2
•
When the power supply cord or plug is damaged.
•
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product.
•
If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
•
If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions.
•
If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged.
•
When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used parts
specified by the manufacturer or which have the same characteristics as the original
part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
8.2.3.3
Checks on Completion of Servicing
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician
to perform electrical safety checks to determine that the product is in a safe
operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be required.
8.3
Maintenance and Support
8.3.1
Introduction
Ericsson is a leader in the design, integration and implementation of digital
broadcasting products and systems. It has a large team dedicated to keeping our
customers on-air 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service facilities in the
US, UK, and Asia, Ericsson covers the world. There is a customer service centre
open round the clock, every day of the year.
Years of design and support experience enable it to offer a range of service options
that will meet your needs at a price that makes sense.
8.3.2
Warranty
All Ericsson products and systems are designed and built to the highest standards
and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
8.3.3
Service Level Agreements
Customers may choose one of several Support packages, either as an
enhancement during the standard 12-month warranty or as an extension after the
warranty has expired.
8-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
For standalone equipment, customers may choose either Ericsson’s Extended
Hardware Warranty or Secure Basic Support. Extended Hardware Warranty
provides hardware repair of covered equipment after the expiration of the standard
warranty. Secure Basic Support provides hardware repair, remote diagnostics and
support, and 24x7x365 remote support for emergencies.
For systems, along with Secure Basic Support, customers have the option of either
Secure Advanced Support or Secure Superior Support. These support packages
provide higher committed response and resolution times, onsite support where
necessary, service performance review and a host of other proactive services to
help you get the maximum return on your investment in Ericsson solutions.
Call Ericsson Sales for more details.
8.4
Alarms
See Annex E, Alarm Lists for further details of possible alarm messages.
8.4.1
Alarms - Control Port
The control ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
Table 8.1 Alarms - Control Port
8.4.2
Alarm
Description
Ethernet interface Ctrlx link down on Control network
No link has been established on Ethernet Control Port
Ctrl x
Ethernet interface Ctrl1 on Control network:
duplicate IP detected
Another device has responded to an ARP request for
this Control port IP address
Control Network Lost
Control Network Lost
Virtual IP address on Control network: duplicate IP
detected
Virtual IP address on Control network: duplicate IP
detected
Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Control
Network
Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Control Network
Network Configuration failed
Failed to configure Network setting. Using default
network configuration
Alarms - Data Port
The data ports can raise an alarm during abnormal operational conditions.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-5
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Table 8.2 Alarms - Data Port
8.4.3
Alarm
Description
Ethernet interface Data z link down in Data Interface
Group x-y
Data interface in data interface group x-y has gone
down.
Ethernet interface Data z in Data Interface Group xy: duplicate IP detected
Another device has responded to an ARP request for the
IP address set for Data z interface in data interface
group x-y.
Virtual IP address on Data Interface Group x-y:
duplicate IP detected
The virtual IP address assigned to data interface group
1-2 or 3-4 is already in use.
Primary Ethernet interface not in use on Data
Interface Group x-y
Primary interface is not in use in data interface group x-y
or 3-4.
Data x: Duplicate IP Address
Duplicate IP Address Detected; Another device has
responded to an ARP request for the IP address of this
port
Data Interface Group x-y: Data Network Lost
The connection with data interface group x-y has been
lost.
Network Configuration failed
Failed to configure Network setting. Using default
network configuration.
Alarm Monitor Widget
Current Tab
The alarm status of the chassis is available on the Current tab of the Alarm Monitor
widget on the Dashboard. All currently active alarms will be displayed, along with
details of the time and date that the alarm was raised, the severity and description of
the alarm and which module the alarm is associated with.
Alarm History
A complete history of all alarms raised and cleared since the last power cycle is
displayed on the History tab of the Alarm Monitor widget on the Dashboard.
Masking Alarms
The severity of the currently active alarms and those displayed on the History tab
can be edited if required. For this, open the required alarm, and change the severity
to be a warning, minor, major, critical or masked.
Note:
8.4.4
If the alarm is masked it will not be displayed on any of the reporting
interfaces, and will not produce an SNMP trap message.
Satellite Modulator Alarms
Alarm Handling
The Satellite Modulator provides the following alarms back to the Host Card:
8-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
•
Loss of FPGA PLL lock.
•
Loss of reference clock.
•
Loss of Clock PLL lock.
•
OCXO fault
•
PSU failure.
•
Host SCR Sync failure.
•
Load of calibration data failure.
•
Over temperature (including a warning level as well as a critical level).
All masking of alarms is handled by the Host Card.
Self-monitoring
The Satellite Modulator self-monitors for correct operation and corrects any
inconsistencies it finds. This includes the resetting of malfunctioning sub-systems or
the whole card if necessary. The module attempts to maintain correct operation to
minimize the effects of faults. All such actions are reported through the
alarms/status/logging back to the Host Card.
Module Responses
The Host Card monitors all responses back from the module and resets the module
if appropriate. All actions are logged by the Host Card.
8.4.5
VCM Alarms
Alarm Handling
The VCM provides the following alarms back to the Host Card:
•
Loss of video (from any source).
•
Loss of audio (from any source).
•
Loss of VBI data.
•
Invalid parameter (indicating which area video/audio/VBI/ANC data).
•
Critical alarm (card has malfunctioned; internal log holds nature of failure).
•
Over temperature (including a warning level as well as a critical level).
All masking of alarms is handled by the Host Card.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-7
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Self-monitoring
The VCM self-monitors for correct operation and correct any inconsistencies it finds.
This includes the resetting of malfunctioning sub-systems or the whole card if
necessary. The module attempts to maintain correct operation to minimize the
effects of faults. All such actions are reported through the alarms/status/logging
back to the Host Card.
Module Responses
The Host Card monitors all responses back from the module and resets the module
if appropriate. This includes initiating redundancy switches if this results in limiting
the error period. All actions are logged by the Host Card.
8.5
Fault-finding
8.5.1
Fault-finding Philosophy
It is the objective of this section to provide sufficient information to enable you to
rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect module, where possible. Some
basic procedures are provided to follow in the event of a suspected failure. It is
assumed that fault-finding has already been performed at a system level and that
other equipment units have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure.
Warning!
Do not remove the top cover of this equipment. Hazardous voltages are present
within this equipment and may be exposed if the top cover is removed. Only
Ericsson trained and approved service engineers are permitted to service this
equipment.
Caution!
Do not remove the top cover of this equipment as this may invalidate any
warranties. Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements
may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
This Reference Guide does not include any maintenance information or procedures
that would require the removal of the top cover.
If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, call a Service
Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given in the
preliminary pages of this Reference Guide.
8-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.2
Preliminary Checks
Always investigate the failure symptoms fully, prior to taking remedial action. Fault
diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the following tasks, since the
operator should NOT remove the top cover of the equipment:
1. Check the front panel alarm/status LED. If this is not lit:
a
Confirm that the power switch is turned on (I). See Chapter 1, Introduction
for location of the power switch.
b
Replace the fuse in the power connector at the rear panel.
Note:
c
Only replace the fuse once. If it blows again contact Ericsson Customer
Services.
Replace external equipment, power source and cables by substitution to
check their performance.
2. Confirm that the equipment hardware configuration is suitable for the purpose
and has been correctly installed and connected (see Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment).
3. Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem, and that
the equipment software set-up is capable of performing the task being asked of
it. If the validity of the configuration, set-up or operation is in doubt, check it (see
Chapter 3, Getting Started).
4. Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly.
When the failure condition has been fully investigated, and the symptoms are
known, proceed with fault-finding according to the observed symptoms. If the fault
persists, and cannot be rectified using the instructions given in this Reference
Guide, contact Customer Services. Switch off the equipment if it becomes unusable,
or to protect it from further damage.
8.5.3
Power Supply Problems/Unit Not Working
If the unit Status LED is unlit, fault-find the problem as detailed in Table 8.3.
Table 8.3 Status LED Unlit Fault-finding
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Is the LED/LCD display inactive
but the unit still working?
If the unit is clearly working
normally then the LED/LCD
Display itself is probably at
fault. Call a Service Engineer.
Proceed to next step.
2
Check Power Source. Connect
a known-working piece of
equipment to the power source
outlet. Does it work?
The problem lies within the
unit or power cable. Proceed
to next step.
The problem lies with the power
source. Check building circuit
breakers, fuse boxes, etc. If
problem persists, contact the
electricity supplier.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-9
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.3.1
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
3
Check Power Cable and Fuse.
Unplug the power connector
from the unit and try it in another
piece of equipment. Does it
work?
The problem lies within the
unit. Proceed to next step.
The problem lies with either the
cable itself, or with the fuse in
the plug. Replace the fuse or try
to substitute another cable.
4
Check PSU Module(s) and
Fuse(s). Ensure the power
connector is unplugged.
Remove the fuse from the rear
panel connector and inspect it.
Has the fuse blown?
Replace the fuse with one of
the correct type and rating
(see Annex B Technical
Specification). If the PSU still
does not work, unplug the
power cable and call a Service
Engineer.
Possible problem with the PSU
module. Call a Service Engineer.
Fuse Replacement
Please refer to the Installation, Safety and Compliance Information for Ericsson
Compression Products Reference Guide supplied with your product for full details of
how to replace the fuse in your product.
8.5.3.2
Lithium Battery
The lithium battery fitted within this product is not user replaceable and as such
should only be replaced by qualified service personnel.
8.5.4
Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating
The fan speed can be reduced (set to lowest noise) at low temperatures to allow the
unit to quickly attain operational temperature. In the event of overheating problems,
refer to Table 8.4.
Note:
Failure to ensure a free air-flow around the unit may cause overheating.
This condition is detected by a temperature sensor; it may be used to trigger
an automatic alarm.
Table 8.4 Fans Not Working/Overheating
8-10
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Check Fan Rotation. Inspect
the fans located at the sides of
the enclosure. Are the fans
rotating? Check Base Board
temperature and fan (see
nCompass information).
Check that the unit has been
installed with sufficient space
allowed for air-flow (see
Chapter 2, Installing the
Equipment). If the ambient air
is too hot, additional cooling
may be required.
Possible break in the DC supply
from the PSU module to the
suspect fan(s). Call a Service
Engineer.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.5
Cannot Access Web GUI
In the event that you cannot access the web GUI, refer to Table 8.5.
Table 8.5 Cannot Access Web GUI
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Check whether the unit can be
pinged.
Proceed to next step.
Follow the instructions given in
Unit Cannot Be Pinged.
2
If the loading of the unit control
interface is stuck with a warning
message "Use of this browser
configuration is not officially
supported by Ericsson TV",
check whether the Internet
Explorer 8 is used in
compatibility mode. Is it?
Turn off the compatibility mode
in Internet Explorer 8 by
following the steps below:
Proceed to next step.
1. Press the Alt key, then
select the Tools menu.
2. Select Compatibility View
Settings.
3. Make sure that all the three
checkboxes at the bottom are
unchecked.
4. Click Close.
5. Re-open the browser.
3
8.5.6
Does a dialogue appear after
accessing the interface
requesting the user name and
password?
Give the credentials set
before. (The default user
name is "engineer", the default
password is "password".) Not
remembering the user name
or the password, contact the
customer services.
If the procedures given here
cannot solve the problem,
contact the customer services.
Unit Cannot Be Pinged
Pinging a computer is a method of checking if a computer is on the network. Pings
send a network request to a computer asking it to respond (ICMP
ECHO_REQUEST).
To ping a computer from a Windows/PC machine, use the MSDOS prompt and type
the command: ping <IP address>
A successful ‘ping’ consists of receiving back a copy of a short transmitted test
message. The reply will display ‘ping statistics’ (number of packets sent and
received and the time taken, in ms, to receive back those packets.
In the event that you cannot ping your unit, refer to Table 8.6.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-11
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Table 8.6 Unit Cannot be Pinged
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Check that the network cable is
connected to one of the control
ports on the back panel of the
unit. Is the green LED lit?
The problem probably lies with
the network settings. Proceed
to next step.
Check the cable connection
between the unit and the
computer or between the unit
and the network device.
Note: In case of a direct
connection between the unit and
the control computer a cross
Ethernet cable needs to be
used. If connecting between the
unit and the network device
such as a switch or a hub a
cross cable is not required.
For more information, see
Ethernet Control Port.
2
Ensure that the IP control port
address of the device is within
the same subnet as your PC,
then check the settings for the
control IP port on the Front
Panel. Does the used IP
address belong to the unit to be
accessed?
The problem probably lies with
the gateway or subnet mask
settings. Proceed to next step.
Set the correct IP address.
3
Check the subnet mask and
gateway settings. For more
information, see Ethernet
Control Port. Are they correctly
set up?
The problem probably lies with
the firewall settings. Proceed
to next step.
Set up the subnet mask and
gateway correctly.
4
Check the firewall settings. Are
they correct?
Proceed to next step.
Set the firewall correctly. If you
are unsure, turn the firewall off
completely.
Note: By turning the firewall off,
your computer may be exposed
to virus threats.
5
Restart the unit. Can it be now
pinged?
8.5.7
General Operation Problems
8.5.7.1
Parameters Slow to Load
Contact the customer services.
Parameters may take up to 10 seconds to be applied. Please wait 10 seconds for
the configuration to be applied before rebooting the box after a configuration
change.
8.5.7.2
Problems Adding Program Clock Reference (PCR)
A separate PCR component can be added to the service. The PID at the service
level must be selected to match the PID of the PCR component. See Chapter 3,
Getting Started for further details.
8-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.7.3
MPEG-2 Video PES per GOP Option Removed
MPEG-2 video PES per GOP may be removed from the GUI as it is not
recommended by DVB and PES per picture is mandatory for ATSC (see extract
below).
Extract from ETSI TS 101 154 V1.11.1 (2012-11). Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB);
Specification for the use of Video and Audio Coding in Broadcasting Applications
based on the MPEG-2 Transport Stream.
4.1.6.9 Multiple video pictures per PES packet
For MPEG-2 video Bitstreams, while there is no restriction against multiple video
pictures in a single PES packet, there may be some MPEG-2 decoders that do not
support this.
Encoding: The encoder should not put multiple video pictures in a single PES
packet.
Decoding: The IRD may be able to accept and decode bitstreams which contain multiple
video pictures in a single PES.
8.5.7.4
Ancillary Timecode (ATC) Not Extracted and Placed into the VBI Data PES
The ATC is not a VBI component and is not part of the VBI in separate PID (VBI in
PES). The ATC is only present in the MPEG-2 Sequence/GOP header in MPEG-2
or the H.264 SEI message in H.264.
8.5.7.5
Video Recovery Delay When Switching MPEG-2 to H.264
It can take up to 30 seconds for the encoder to switch its output from MPEG-2 to
H.264. We recommend the configuration is not changed during this period.
8.5.7.6
No VITC Control of Timecode
The TC mode on the VBI page controls the timecode mode on the Video PES and
does not control the output on a separate VBI PID (VBI on PES), The only control
for VBI on PES is the presence of the VBI component and the selection of the
appropriate VBI line as VITC.
8.5.7.7
Video Index Operation and Active Format Description (AFD) Problems
For Video Index operation a difference may be observed in AFD operation between
VBI PES and AFD in the SEI. For pass through of the Video Index line in PES, both
the 1995 (3 bit AFD code) and 2008 (4-bit AFD code) versions are supported, i.e.
the relevant 4 data bits are passed through unmodified and can be interpreted as
either specification. For extraction of AFD code information from Video Index to SEI
message/Video User Data, the assumption is made that the 1995 specification is in
use in the encoder/decoder chain (3 bit AFD code only).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-13
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.5.7.8
Automatic Loudness Control in Low Delay Modes
The video low delay modes (Low Delay, Mega Low Delay) are not designed to be
used in conjunction with ALC, therefore ALC should be turned Off when these
modes are selected.
8.5.7.9
No RF Output (Voyager II and AVP3000 only)
8.5.7.9.1
Configuration
There are a number of possible reasons why a unit might not produce an RF output.
The output must be turned on to enable the L-band or IF output, and (depending on
the Output Power-up State setting) these actions may have to be repeated after a
power outage.
If a transport stream has been successfully created and can be monitored on the
front panel confidence monitor, check for these satellite modulator settings:
8.5.7.9.2
•
Output Select must be set to IF or L-band as required (Modulation Parameters
menu).
•
Output State must be On (Line-up menu).
•
The transport stream must be set to Online.
Error Conditions
The satellite modulator option includes a number of internal health monitoring
features that can turn off the RF outputs. The purpose of these features is to prevent
the unit from outputting a bad signal that would interfere with the service of other
users of the satellite. If a fault is detected that would result in an output signal that is
outside the expected frequency band, then the RF output is turned off and an alarm
is generated. You cannot prevent these alarms from turning off the RF output, but
you can determine how they are reported on the user interface. Masking these
alarms does not stop the RF outputs being turned off.
The effects of alarms that can turn off the RF outputs are shown in the table below.
Table 8.7 Effect of Alarms That Can Turn Off RF Outputs
Alarm Name
IF output turned off?
L-band output turned off?
OCXO Fault
Yes
Yes
Clock PLL Unlocked
Yes
Yes
L-band Carrier Frequency Unlocked
No
Yes
If one of these alarms is present, then powering the unit down, waiting for at least 10
seconds and then re-powering the unit might recover it to normal operation,
depending on the alarm’s cause. Don’t forget that you may need to enable the
output after the power cycle.
If power cycling does restore operation after a persistent alarm, we still recommend
that you return the unit for service at the next convenient opportunity
8-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.6
Unit XML
Overview
The Unit XML records the current configuration in a file. Configuration parameters
provide the minimum information required for fault diagnosis.
Saving Configuration
When sending reporting bugs, it is required to attach the configuration to the bug
report. To save the current configuration, do the following:
1. Navigate to the Support page.
2. In the Import and Export widget on the General tab, click on the Save
standard configuration or Save configuration including control parameters
button depending on whether you want to include the IP information of the unit in
the saved xml file.
3. In the popup window, select the Save file option.
4. By default, the unit will save the configuration file to the Downloads folder on
your computer.
8.7
Log Files
Overview
The log file records the events on the unit. Extracted from the unit, the log file may
contain important information that can facilitate tracking down problems.
Log Operation
The event log is stored on the Host Controller Card (HCC). A log file is generated
with a file format as defined by RFC3164. Once the log has filled the space
allocated to it, the oldest entries in the log file are overwritten.
Events that are logged include power-on, power on self test (POST) results, warning
and alarm assertions and de-assertions, user log ins and log outs. Any changes to
the time and date are also recorded in the system log. Each event has a UTC time
and date stamp appended to it, with a time resolution of one second.
The various system log files are accessible from the web pages. The system log can
be exported as a comma separated list, so that it is easy to import it in to a
spreadsheet, where it can be easily filtered or sorted.
Saving Logs
When sending reporting bugs, it is required to attach the log files extracted from the
unit. To save all necessary log files and information required from the unit, do the
following:
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-15
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
1. Navigate to the Support page.
2. In the Log files widget on the General tab, click on the Download Logs and
Status.
3. In the popup window, select the Save file option.
4. By default, the unit will save the log file to the Downloads folder on your
computer.
8.8
Saved and Exported Configurations
The configurations can be extracted from the unit in two xml formats:
8.8.1
•
One format is obtained from the unit by exporting from the Stored Configurations
page. This is often referred to as Exported Configuration.
•
The other format can be saved from the Support page. This is often referred to
as a Saved Configuration.
Exported Configuration
The exported configuration has a format that is used by the unit to efficiently store
unit settings among the pre-stored configurations. This is a compact description in
xml format, and contains only the most important attributes.
Getting the Exported Configuration from the Unit
To get the exported configuration, do the following:
1. Navigate to the Stored Configurations page.
2. In the Stored Configurations widget, select the configuration you want to
export. Its name and description will appear in the Configuration Workbench
widget.
3. Click on the Export button, and save the configuration to the local disk of the
control computer.
Reloading an Exported Configuration to the Unit
Any configuration exported can be easily reloaded to the unit from the Stored
Configurations page.
Note:
Only an exported configuration can be reloaded to the unit using this
method.
For this, do the following:
1. Navigate to the Stored Configurations page.
2. Select an empty slot in the Stored Configurations widget.
8-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
3. In the Configuration Workbench widget, click on the Browse button next to the
Import field. A dialog box shall appear.
4. Browse to the exported configuration file, select it and then click Open.
5. To import the file, click on the Import button.
8.8.2
Saved Configuration
The saved configuration gives a full description of the unit including attributes useful
for debugging purposes. This is the format that shall be sent to Customer Support
when reporting a bug.
Note:
In-band Control mode will be disabled the using Support > Save
Configuration > Save configuration Including Control Parameters and
Support > Restore Configuration Including Control Parameters options
on the web GUI.
Getting a Saved Configuration from the Unit
To get the saved configuration from the unit, do the following:
1. Navigate to the Support page.
2. In the Import and Export widget on the General tab, click on the Save
standard configuration or Save configuration including control parameters
button depending on whether you want to include the IP information of the unit in
the saved xml file.
3. In the popup window, select the Save file option.
4. By default, the unit will save the configuration file to the Downloads folder on
your computer.
Reloading a Saved Configuration to the Unit
Any previously saved configuration can be easily reloaded to the unit from the
Support page.
Note:
Only a saved configuration can be reloaded to the unit using this method.
To reload a saved configuration, do the following:
1. Navigate to the Support page.
2. In the Import and Export widget, open the Restore Configuration or Restore
Configuration including Control Parameters accordion depending on whether
you saved the configuration without or with control information.
3. Click on the Browse button and browse to the converted configuration file,
select it and then click Open.
4. Click on the Upload button and a pop-up box Confirm Restore will appear.
Click on the Yes button to upload the file.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-17
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Note:
Configurations saved from units running previous releases of code may not
be fully compatible with newer code releases. A configuration converter tool
is available to convert these configurations.
8.9
Remote Server Logging
8.9.1
Overview
The remote server logging feature enables an external log server to be used to
capture selective logs from the AVP unit. Four different categories of system log
entries may be selected and delivered to a designated remote server. The four
categories are:
8.9.2
•
Logging messages related to alarms.
•
Logging messages related to ESAM.
•
Logging messages related to SCTE-35.
•
User configuration changes made to the system.
Configuring Remote Server Logging
Enabling Remote Server Logging
To enable remote server logging:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page.
2. In the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the left-hand side of the
screen, click on the Base Unit folder to open the folder tree.
3. Click on the Remote Server Logging folder to display the relevant properties in
the Properties widget on the right-hand side of the screen.
4. Enter the Remote Server IP Address and select the log options required (see
Figure 8.1).
5. Click on the Apply All button to accept the new properties.
Disabling Remote Server Logging
To disable remote server logging:
1. Navigate to the Device Configuration > Advanced Setup page.
2. In the Advanced Video Processor Settings widget on the left-hand side of the
screen, click on the Base Unit folder to open the folder tree.
3. Click on the Remote Server Logging folder to display the relevant properties in
the Properties widget on the right-hand side of the screen.
8-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
4. Disable remote logging by entering a Remote Server IP Address of “0.0.0.0” or
by leaving the field blank (see Figure 8.1).
5. Click on the Apply All button to accept the new properties.
Figure 8.1 Selecting Remote Server Logging
8.9.3
Configuring the Remote Server
Any remote server running a logging process which will accept incoming log
messages on port 514 via UDP, e.g. syslog or rsyslog, can be used. The firewall on
the remote server must be configured to allow UDP traffic to port 514 to pass
through.
The configuration of the logging process, e.g. syslog or rsyslog, on the remote
server determines many aspects of how the incoming messages are logged, such
as:
•
The file to which the messages are logged (the default is the normal system
log).
•
Whether or not the IP address of the source unit is included. The default is Yes
for syslog and No for rsyslog.
Instructions on how to configure the logging process on the remote server is beyond
the scope of this manual.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-19
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
8.9.4
Limitations and Specifications of Remote Server Logging
Saved Configurations and Remote Server Logging
Saving a configuration via the Support page or the Stored Configurations page
will save the current remote logging settings. Loading or restoring a configuration
will update the remote logging settings.
Reboot and Upgrade
Remote server logging settings are retained after reboot.
Remote server logging settings created via the web user interface or front panel are
retained after a unit software upgrade. Changes made by directly editing the logging
configuration file will be lost.
Log Transmission
Logs are transmitted using UDP. Delivery is not guaranteed.
Changing the configuration of remote server logging causes the internal logging
process to be stopped and restarted. This is recorded in the system log.
Some logs may be lost during a remote server restart, i.e. a change of configuration.
User Configuration Logging
When configuration logging is selected, configurations are logged as follows:
8.10
•
Only configuration differences (i.e. the changes made to the default
configuration) are recorded in detail, due to the large volume of data which
would be generated otherwise.
•
The data is not recorded in the local system log.
•
The values of sensitive data such as BISS key settings and passwords are
filtered out. The change event is recorded.
•
If authentication is enabled (see Chapter 6), the name of the user is included in
the message.
•
Changes made via the front panel are always marked with the user name
‘front_panel’.
Calling a Service Engineer
If you cannot resolve a problem with your equipment using the information provided
in this chapter, or if you experience technical or operational difficulties, please do not
hesitate to contact us to request assistance.
There is a lot of information you can give us that will enable us to diagnose your
problem swiftly. When contacting us please provide the following:
8-20
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
•
Serial number. To obtain this, click the About button on any web GUI page.
•
Software version number. To obtain this, click the About button on any web GUI
page or view the front panel System > Versions screen.
•
Configuration, both hardware and software. To obtain a copy of your current
configuration, go to the Configure > Save-Load web page and obtain an XML
file.
•
Unit logs, if relevant. To obtain these, go to the Support > View Logs web
page.
•
System architecture and environment.
•
Description of the symptoms and what diagnosis and tests have already been
attempted.
•
Any external events that may be related as triggers of the symptoms. If so, at
what local time?
•
Wireshark IP captures, if relevant.
•
System logs from any controlling application software, if relevant.
In addition to the above, please do not forget to provide us with your contact details
to enable us to get in touch with you swiftly:
•
Name(s).
•
Telephone and fax numbers.
•
Email address.
•
Business address.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
8-21
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
8-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A Glossary
Annex A
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms as used in
Ericsson Manuals, User and Reference Guides. All terms may not be included in
this Reference Guide.
µm
Micrometer (former name - micron): A unit of length equal to one
-6
millionth (10 ) of a meter.
1000BaseT
The term for the Electrical Gigabit Ethernet interface. This is the
most common interface for Gigabit Ethernet. Most Gigabit-enabled
PCs and equipment use this interface.
3:2 pull-down
A technique used when converting film material (which operates at
24 pictures per second) to 525-line video (operating at 30 pictures
per second).
4:2:0
Digital video coding method in which the color difference signals are
sampled on alternate lines at half the luminance rate.
4:2:2
Digital video coding method in which the color difference signals are
sampled on all lines at half the luminance rate.
422P@ML
422 Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to 50
Mbps over various mediums. Used for Contribution and Distribution
applications.
8b10b
8-bit data mapped to 10-bit symbols.
ABR
Adaptive Bit Rate.
ADPCM
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An advanced PCM
technique that converts analogue sound into digital data and vice
versa. Instead of coding an absolute measurement at each sample
point, it codes the difference between samples and can dynamically
switch the coding scale to compensate for variations in amplitude
and frequency.
ACC
Authorization Control Computer.
ADT
Audio, Data And Teletext.
AFC
Automatic Frequency Control.
AFS
Automation File Server.
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-1
Glossary
A-2
ALC
Automatic Loudness Control: ALC is an audio processing mode for
measuring and modifying audio amplitude with the aim of changing
the perceived loudness level. It uses a measurement based upon
the new standards for measuring audio loudness defined in ITU-R
BS.1770-2, this standard forms the measurement basis of the
guidelines in EBU R128 and ATSC/A85.
AMOL I and II
Automatic Measure of Line-ups I and II: Used by automated
equipment to measure programme-viewing ratings.
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol used to "resolve" IP
addresses into underlying Ethernet MAC addresses.
ASI
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
ASIC
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit: A customized chip designed
to perform a specific function.
Async
Asynchronous.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A connection orientated, cell based,
data transport technology designed for Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN).
It provides a circuit-switched bandwidth-on-demand carrier system,
with the flexibility of packet switching. It offers low end-to-end delays
and (negotiable on call set up) Quality of Service guarantees.
Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being
transmitted. Cells are transmitted only when data is to be sent,
therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the
availability of data.
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee: An organization
founded in 1983 to research and develop a digital TV standard for
the U.S.A. In late 1996, the FCC adopted the ATSC standard, the
digital counterpart of the NTSC standard.
AVP
Advanced Video Processor.
B3ZS
Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution: A method of eliminating long
zero strings in a transmission. It is used to ensure a sufficient
number of transitions to maintain system synchronization when the
user data stream contains an insufficient number of 1s to do so.
B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3.
Backward
Compatibility
Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier
versions.
BAT
Bouquet Association Table: Part of the service information data. The
BAT provides information about bouquets. It gives the name of the
bouquet and a list of associated services.
baud rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises
information symbols that may consist of a number of possible states.
Equivalent to bit rate when the symbols only have two states (1 and
0). Measured in Baud.
BER
Bit Error Ratio: A measure of transmission quality. The rate at which
errors occur in the transmission of data bits over a link. It is
-7
generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g., 10 means that 1 in
10,000,000 bits are in error).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
BISS
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System: Non-proprietary encryption
from EBU (Tech3290).
Bit rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic
states, 1 and 0. Measured in bit/s.
Block; Pixel Block
An 8-row by 8-column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64
DCT coefficients (source, quantized, or de-quantized).
Bouquet
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of
the three) grouped and sold together, and identified in the SI as a
group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
B-Picture; B-Frame
Bi-directionally Predictive Coded Picture/Frame: A picture that is
coded using motion-compensated prediction from previous I or P
frames (forward prediction) and/or future I or P frames (backward
prediction). B frames are not used in any prediction.
BPSK
Binary Phase Shift Keying: A data modulation technique.
Buffer
A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
BW
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as
(among others) a communications network, computer bus, or
broadcast link. It is expressed in bits per second, bytes per second
or in Hertz (cycles per second). When expressed in Hertz, the
frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second,
because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and
highest frequencies transmitted. High bandwidth allows fast
transmission or high-volume transmission.
Byte-mode
Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI transport stream, with
stuffing data added between the Bytes to increase the data rate to
270 Mbps. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI)
Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
CA
Conditional Access: The technology used to control the access to
viewing services to authorized subscribers through the transmission
of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their
decryption by a system such as viewing cards.
CAT
Conditional Access Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data. Mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance if CA is
in use.
C-Band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the
frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz. Used by
communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it
is not susceptible to fading.
CCIR
See: ITU-R.
CCITT
See: ITU-T.
Channel
a narrow range of frequencies, part of a frequency band, for the
transmission of radio and television signals without interference from
other channels.
In the case of OFDM, a large number of carriers spaced apart at
precise frequencies are allocated to a channel.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-3
Glossary
A-4
Channel Coding
A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds
patterns of redundancy into the transmission path in order to
improve the error rate. Such methods are widely used in wireless
communications.
Chrominance
The color part of a TV picture signal, relating to the hue and
saturation but not to the luminance (brightness) of the signal. In a
composite-coded color system, the color information (chrominance,
often referred to as chroma) is modulated onto a high frequency
carrier and added to the monochrome-format video signal carrying
the luminance (Y). In a component-coded color system, the two
color-difference signals (R-Y)(B-Y) usually referred to as CRCB
(digital) or PRPB (analogue), are used to convey color information.
When CRCB (PRPB) is added to the luminance (Y), the complete
picture information is conveyed as YCRCB (YPRPB).
Closed Captioning
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue
transmissions.
CODE
Create Once Distribute Everywhere.
Codec
The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder
located respectively at the input and output of a transmission path.
COFDM
Coded OFDM: COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM
transmission consisting of Reed-Solomon (RS) coding followed by
convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal. This
allows a large number of errors at the receive end to be corrected by
convolutional (Viterbi) decoding followed by RS decoding.
Composite
CVBS Video Signal, 1 V pk-pk
Compression
Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same
information. For the purposes of a broadcast system, it is the
process of reducing digital picture information by discarding
redundant portions of information that are not required when
reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity. Compression
allows a higher bite-rate to be transmitted through a given
bandwidth.
Compression
System
Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video / audio /
data bitstreams, together with the authorization stream. The
multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission.
C RC B
Digital Color difference signals. These signals, in combination with
the luminance signal (Y), define the color and brightness of each
picture element (pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes
a numerical value based on the bits in a block of data. This number
is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information
and the same algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by
comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If a
mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.
CVBS
Chroma Video Burst and Sync: An analogue Video SD resolution
signal, such as NTSC or PAL.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
dB
Decibels: A ratio of one quantity to another using a logarithmic
scale, to give results related to human aural or visual perception. dB
is a ratio of two quantities. dBm, for example, is an absolute power
level, quoted as a ratio to a fixed power of 1 mW (0 dBm), typically
terminated into 50 Ω (RF) or 600 Ω (audio). 0 dBmV is 1 mV across
75 Ω.
DCE
Data Communications Equipment: Typically a modem. It
establishes, maintains and terminates a session on a network but in
itself is not the source (originator) or destination (end receiving unit)
of signals (e.g. a computer, see DTE). A DCE device may also
convert signals to comply with the transmission path (network)
format.
DCT
Discrete Cosine Transform: A technique for expressing a waveform
as a weighted sum of cosines. Raw video data is not readily
compressible. DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is
used to process the video data so that it is compressible by an
encoder. DCT processes the picture on an 8x8-pixel block basis,
converting the data from an uncompressible X Y form (as displayed
by an oscilloscope) to a compressible frequency domain form (as
displayed by a spectrum analyzer). Can be forward DCT or inverse
DCT.
DDS
Direct Digital Synthesiser.
Decoder
The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode
encrypted signals. Some Decoders are separate from the receiver
but in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used
interchangeably as a name for an Integrated Receiver Decoder
(IRD). The term IRD, or IRD / Decoder, is usually associated with
satellite TV broadcasting while Cable systems are based on
Converters or on Set-Top Boxes / Converters.
Decoding Time
stamp
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates
the time that an access unit is to be decoded in the system target
Decoder.
DENG
Digital Electronic News Gathering
DID
Data Identifier.
Differential Coding
Method of coding using the difference between the value of a
sample and a predicted value.
DiffServ
Differentiated Services. A mechanism used on layer 3 - e.g. the IP
layer - to differentiate between traffic of various types. DiffServ is
based on the ToS field and provides a mechanism for the network to
give e.g. video traffic higher priority than other traffic (for example
Internet traffic).
DIL
Dual In Line: The most common type of package for small and
medium scale integrated circuits. The pins hang vertically from the
two long sides of the rectangular package, spaced at intervals of 0.1
inch.
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung: German Standards Institute.
Downlink
The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the
satellite to an Earth station.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-5
Glossary
Downconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream
is shifted to a lower frequency range.
DPCM
Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An audio digitization technique
that codes the difference between samples rather than coding an
absolute measurement at each sample point.
DSNG
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
DTE
Data circuit Terminating Equipment: A communications device that
originates (is the source) or is the end receiving unit (destination) of
signals on a network. It is typically a terminal or computer.
DTH
Direct-To-Home. The term used to describe uninterrupted
transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber, that is, no
intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilized.
DTMF
Dual-Tone MultiFrequency
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting: A European project which has defined
transmission standards for digital broadcasting systems using
satellite (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-T) medium,
created by the EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU. Specifies
modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421 for satellite,
EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial).
DVB SI
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
DVB-PI
DVB-Professional Interfaces
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. A mechanism to utilize
existing fiber with even more bandwidth by adding extra signals
using other wavelengths/colors
Earth
Technical Earth: Ensures that all equipment chassis within a rack
are at the same potential, usually by connecting a wire between the
Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is
sometimes known as a Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is
sometimes known as a safety earth.
EBU
European Broadcast Union.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message.
EDI
Ethernet Data Input
EIA
Electronics Industries Association (USA).
EIT
Event Information Table: Equipment: A component of the DVBService Information (SI) stream generated within an Encoder,
containing information about events or programmes such as event
name, start time, duration, etc.
System: EIT (Present/Following) contains the name of the current
and next event. It may include an optional descriptor (synopsis)
giving brief details of content. EIT (Schedule) is used to produce a
full EPG. The EIT is the only DVB-SI table, which can be encrypted.
Elementary Stream
A-6
A generic term for a coded bitstream, be it video, audio or other.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMM
Entitlement Management Message.
Encryption
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the
appropriate decryption equipment and authorization.
EPG
Electronic Programme Guide: On-screen programme listing using
thumbnail pictures and/or text.
Ethernet
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE
as the 802.3 standard. Transmission speeds vary according to the
configuration. Ethernet uses copper or fiber-optic cables.
ETS
European Telecommunications Standard.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FBAS
German for CVBS
FCC
Federal Communications Commission.
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplex: A common communication channel for
a number of signals, each with its own allotted frequency.
FEC
Forward Error Correction: A method of catching errors in a
transmission. The data is processed through an algorithm that adds
extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data. The extra bits
are then used at the receiving end to check the accuracy of the
transmission and correct any errors.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transformation: A fast algorithm for performing a
discrete Fourier transform.
FIFO
First In, First Out: A data structure or hardware buffer from which
items are taken out in the same order they were put in. Also known
as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a
shelf so that they fall off the other. A FIFO is useful for buffering a
stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not
synchronized - i.e. they not sending and receiving at exactly the
same rate.
FM
Frequency Modulation: Analogue modulation procedure
Footprint
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink
transmission. Also (generally) the area from which the satellite can
receive uplink transmissions.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol: A protocol used to transfer files over a
TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For example, after developing
the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are
typically uploaded to the Web server, using FTP. Unlike e-mail
programs in which graphics and program files have to be attached,
FTP is designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the
overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
G.703
The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical
characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-7
Glossary
A-8
GOP
Group of Pictures: MPEG video compression works more effectively
by processing a number of video frames as a block. The Ericsson
AB Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP; every twelfth frame is
an I frame.
GUI
Graphical User Interface: The use of pictures rather than just words
to represent the input and output of a program. A program with a
GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface
capable of displaying graphics in the form of icons, drop-down
menus and a movable pointer. The on-screen information is usually
controlled / manipulated by a mouse or keyboard.
H.265
ITU-T H.265. A standard that defines HEVC decoding.
HDTV
High Definition Television.
HEVC
High Efficiency Video Coding. This video encoding method is a
successor to AVC.
HPA
High Power Amplifier: Used in the signal path to amplify the
modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for feeding to the
uplink antenna.
HSYNC
Horizontal (line) SYNCs.
HTTP
HyperText Transfer Protocol. The fundamental protocol used on the
Internet for transmission of WEB pages and other data between
servers and PCs
HU
Height Unit
Hub
A device in a multi-point network at which branch nodes
interconnect.
ICAM
Integrated Conditional Access Module: Embedded in the IRD and
responsible for descrambling, plus packet filtering and reception. It
also contains the physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol. ICMP messages, delivered in IP
packets, are used for out-of-band messages related to network
operation or mis-operation
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol. IGMP is a protocol used to
manage multicasts on the Internet. For a host (receiver unit) to
receive a multicast, it needs to transmit IGMP "join" messages on
the right format. Three versions exist. IGMPv2 is common today but
IGMPv3 is the next step.
IDU
Indoor unit
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee.
IF
Intermediate Frequency: Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz
output of the Modulator in cable, satellite and terrestrial transmission
applications.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
Interframe Coding
Compression coding involving consecutive frames. When
consecutive frames are compared, temporal redundancy is used to
remove common elements (information) and arrive at difference
information. MPEG-2 uses B and P frames, but since they are
individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames, they
cannot be edited independently.
Intraframe Coding
Compression coding involving a single frame. Redundant
information is removed on a per frame basis. All other frames are
ignored. Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information
only from that macroblock or picture. Exploits spatial redundancy by
using DCT to produce I frames; these are independent frames and
can be edited.
IP
Internet Protocol: The IP part of TCP/IP. IP implements the network
layer (layer 3) of the protocol, which contains a network address and
is used to route a message to a different network or sub-network. IP
accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or UDP),
adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data
link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support
the Maximum Transmission / Transfer Unit (MTU) of the network.
I-picture; I-frame
Intracoded Picture/Frame: A picture / frame, which is coded using
purely intracoding with reference to no other field or frame
information. The I frame is used as a reference for other
compression methods.
IPPV
Impulse Pay Per View: One-time events, purchased at home (on
impulse) using a prearranged SMS credit line.
IRD
Integrated Receiver Decoder: The Receiver with an internal MPEG
Decoder, which is connected to the subscriber’s TV. The IRD is
responsible for receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit
receives the incoming signal and if CA is active, decodes the signal
when provided with a control word by the viewing card. Domestic
IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.
IRE
Institute of Radio Engineers: No longer in existence but the name
lives on as a unit of video amplitude measurement. This unit is 1%
of the range between blanking and peak white for a standard
amplitude signal.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network: The basic ISDN service is BRI
(Basic Rate Interface), which is made up of two 64 kbps B channels
and one 16 kbps D channel (2B+D). If both channels are combined
into one, called bonding, the total data rate becomes 128 kbps and
is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V.34 modem (28.8 kbps).
The ISDN high speed service is PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It
provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbps D channel (23B+D), which
is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line. When several channels
are bonded together, high data rates can be achieved. For example,
it is common to bond six channels for quality videoconferencing at
384 kbps. In Europe, PRI includes 30 B channels and one D
channel, equivalent to an E1 line.
ISO
International Standards Organisation.
ISOG
Inter-union Satellite Operations Group.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-9
Glossary
A-10
ITS
Insertion Test Signal: A suite of analogue test signals placed on
lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS.
ITT
Invitation To Tender.
ITU-R
International Telecommunications Union - Radiocommunications
Study Groups (was CCIR).
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications
Standardization Sector (was CCITT).
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group: ISO/ITU standard for
compressing still images. It has a high compression capability.
Using discrete cosine transform, it provides user specified
compression ratios up to around 100:1 (there is a trade-off between
image quality and file size).
kbps
1000 bits per second.
Kbit
1024 bits, usually refers to memory capacity or allocation.
Ku-band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the
frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to 14 GHz. Used by
communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because
this range of frequency is less susceptible to interference.
LAN
Local Area Network: A network, which provides facilities for
communications within a defined building or group of buildings in
close proximity.
L-band
The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz, which is the
normal input-frequency-range of a domestic IRD. The incoming
signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the LNB.
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
LNB
Low Noise Block Down-Converter: The component of a subscriber
satellite transmission receiving dish which amplifies the incoming
signal and down-converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the
IRD (typically 950 MHz - 1600 MHz).
LO
Local Oscillator.
lsb
Least significant bit.
Luminance
The television signal representing brightness, or the amount of light
at any point in a picture. The Y in YCRCB.
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signal: LVDS is a generic multi-purpose
Interface standard for high speed / low power data transmission. It
was standardized in ANSI/TIA/EIA-644-1995 Standard (aka RS644).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
Macroblock
A 16x16-pixel area of the TV picture. Most processing within the
MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks. These are converted
to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field DCT. Four 8 x 8
blocks of luminance data and two (4:2:0 chrominance format), four
(4:2:2) or eight (4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance
data coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of
the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the sample data and
to the coded representation of the sample values and other data
elements.
Mbps
Million bits per second.
MCC
Multiplex Control Computer: A component of a System 3000
compression system. The MCC sets up the configuration for the
System 3000 Multiplexers under its control. The MCC controls both
the main and backup Multiplexer for each transport stream.
MCPC
Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
Meta-data
Meta-data is descriptive data that is "tagged" to a movie or audio
clip. Meta-data is essential for the broadcaster.
MMDS
Multichannel Microwave Distribution System: A terrestrial microwave
direct-to-home broadcast transmission system.
Motion
Compensation
The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction
of sample values. The prediction uses motion vectors to provide
offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields
containing previously decoded sample values that are used to form
the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
Motion Vector
A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that
provides an offset from the coordinate position in the current picture
or field to the coordinates in a reference frame or field.
MP@ML
Main Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to
15 Mbps over various mediums.
MP@HL
Main Profile at High Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which
supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and transmissions up to
80 Mbps over various mediums.
MPEG
Moving Pictures Experts Group: The name of the ISO/IEC working
group which sets up the international standards for digital television
source coding.
MPEG-2
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using
compression and multiplexing techniques to minimize video signal
bit rate in preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818.
The standard is split into layers and profiles defining bit rates and
picture resolutions.
MPLS
Multi-protocol Label Switching. A Quality of Service mechanism for
IP networks that allow IP packets to flow along a predefined path in
a network, improving the reliability and robustness of the
transmission.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-11
Glossary
MPM
Media Processing Module.
MPTS
Multi-Program Transport Streams. Transport Streams that carry
multiple TV/Radio services.
msb
Most significant bit.
Msymbol/s
(Msym/s) Mega (million) Symbols per second (10 Symbols per
second).
Multiplex
A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12), from
encoders, that are compressed together in a single DVB compliant
transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
Multicast
An IP mechanism that allows transmission of data to multiple
receivers. A multicast can also have several transmit sources
simultaneously. In video applications, multicast is typically used to
distribute a video signal from a central source to multiple
destinations.
MUSICAM
Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub-band Integrated Coding
And Multiplexing: An audio bit rate reduction system relying on subband coding and psychoacoustic masking.
Mux
Multiplexer: Transmission Multiplexer: receives EMMs from the
ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from the encoders, and
the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single
DVB-compliant transport stream, and delivers the signal to the
uplink after modulation.
6
The Multiplexer also contains the cipher card, which scrambles the
services according to the control words supplied by the BCC.
A-12
Network
In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport
stream multiplexes transmitted on a single delivery system, for
example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
NICAM
Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex: Official name is
NICAM 728. Used for digital stereo sound broadcasting in the UK
employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality
audio. 728 refers to the bit rate in kbps.
NIT
Network Information Table: Part of the service information data. The
NIT provides information about the physical organization of each
transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network
itself (such as the actual frequencies and modulation being used).
nm
Nanometer: a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth (10 ) of
a meter.
NMS
Network Management System. A system used to supervise
elements in an IP network. When a device reports an alarm, the
alarm will be collected by the NMS and reported to the operator.
NMS systems typically collect valuable statistics information about
the network performance and can warn the operator early.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee: The group, which
developed analogue standards used in television broadcast systems
in the United States. Also adopted in other countries (e.g. Mexico,
Canada, Japan). This system uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz
field frequency.
-9
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
NVOD
Near Video On-Demand: Method of offering multiple showings of
movies or events. The showings are timed to start at set intervals,
determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event
can be sold to subscribers separately.
NVRAM
Non-volatile Random Access Memory: Memory devices (permitting
random read / write access) that do not lose their information when
power is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set
by the user.
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OFDM
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex: A modulation technique
used for digital TV transmission in Europe, Japan and Australia;
more spectrally efficient than FDM. In OFDM, data is distributed
over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies.
The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way
that the signals can be received without adjacent channel
interference.
OPPV
Order ahead Pay Per View: An advance purchase of encrypted onetime events with an expiry date.
OSD
On-screen display: Messages and graphics, typically originating
from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s TV screen by the
IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber
to contact the SMS.
Packet
A unit of data transmitted over a packet switching network. A packet
consists of a header followed by a number of contiguous bytes from
an elementary data stream.
PAL
Phase Alternating Line: A color TV broadcasting system where the
phase of the R-Y color-difference signal is inverted on every
alternate line to average out errors providing consistent color
reproduction.
PAT
Program Association Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance.
The PAT points (maps) to the PMT.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation: A process in which a signal is sampled,
each sample is quantized independently of other samples, and the
resulting succession of quantized values is encoded into a digital
signal.
PCR
Program Clock Reference: A time stamp in the transport stream
from which the Decoder timing is derived.
PDC
Program Delivery Control: A Teletext service allowing simple
programming (i.e. VideoPlus) of VCR recording times. If the desired
program is rescheduled, PDC updates the programming information
in the VCR.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-13
Glossary
A-14
Pel
Picture Element: Also known as a pixel. The smallest resolvable
rectangular area of an image either on a screen or stored in
memory. On-screen, pixels are made up of one or more dots of
color. Monochrome and grey-scale systems use one dot per pixel.
For grey-scale, the pixel is energized with different intensities,
creating a range from dark to light (a scale of 0-255 for an eight-bit
pixel). Color systems use a red, green and blue dot per pixel, each
of which is energized to different intensities, creating a range of
colors perceived as the mixture of these dots. If all three dots are
dark, the result is black. If all three dots are bright, the result is
white.
PES
Packetized Elementary Stream: A sequential stream of data bytes
that has been converted from original elementary streams of audio
and video access units and transported as packets. Each PES
packet consists of a header and a payload of variable length and
subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes. A time stamp is provided by the
MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronization between
related elementary streams at the Decoder.
PID
Packet Identifier: the header on a packet in an elementary data
stream, which identifies that data stream. An MPEG-2 / DVB
standard.
PIN
Personal Identification Number: A password used to control access
to programming and to set purchase limits. Each subscriber
household can activate several PINs and may use them to set
individual parental rating or spending limits for each family member.
Pixel
PIX (picture) Element: The digital representation of the smallest
area of a television picture capable of being delineated by the
bit-stream. See Pel for more information.
pk-pk
peak to peak: Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most
negative point to its most positive point.
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. A phase-locked loop is a control system which
controls the rotation of an object by comparing its rotational position
(phase) with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or
other repeating signal. This type of control system can synchronize
not only the speed, but also the angular position of two waveforms
that are not derived from the same source.
PMT
Program Map Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific
Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2 compliance.
Each service has a PMT, which lists the component parts
(elementary streams of video, audio, etc.) for the various services
being transmitted.
P-picture/P-frame
A picture / frame produced using forward prediction. It contains
predictions from either previous I frames or previous P frames. The
P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
ppm
Parts per million.
PPV
Pay Per View: A system of payment for viewing services based on a
usage / event basis rather than on on-going subscription.
Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that
they wish to view. PPV events may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
Program
PC - A sequence of instructions for a computer.
TV - A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1
(MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the timebase is defined by the
PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual
channel within the stream.
Programme
A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster.
For example, football match, news, film show. In the MPEG-2
concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the
programme, have a common start and end time. A series of
programmes are referred to as events.
PRPB
Analogue Color difference signals. Refer to CRCB for an explanation.
PS
Program Stream: A combination of one or more PESs with a
common timebase.
PSI
Program Specific Information: Consists of normative data, which is
necessary for the de-multiplexing of transport streams and the
successful regeneration of programs (see also: SI).
PSIP
Program System Information Protocol: The ATSC equivalent of SI
for DVB.
PSK
Phase Shift Keying: A method of modulating digital signals
particularly suited to satellite transmission.
PSR
Professional Satellite Receiver: See also: IRD.
PSU
Power Supply Unit.
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation: A method of modulating digital
signals, which uses combined techniques of phase modulation and
amplitude modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
QoS
Quality of Service. A common term for a set of parameters
describing the quality you get from an IP network: Throughput,
availability, delay, jitter and packet loss.
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying: A form of phase shift keying
modulation using four states.
QSIF
Quarter Screen Image Format.
Quantise
A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information.
8-bit quantization as set out in ITU-R Rec. 601. Uses 256 levels in
the range 0 – 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any
given point. The value is then converted to a digital number for
processing in the digital domain.
RAM
Random Access Memory: A volatile storage device for digital data.
Data may be written to, or read from, the device as often as
required. When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
RAS
Remote Authorization System: An Ericsson AB proprietary publickey encryption system used to prevent unauthorized viewing of a TV
programme or programmes.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-15
Glossary
Reflex™
An Ericsson AB proprietary system to provide efficient use of
bandwidth by a set of encoders without sacrificing picture quality. A
group bit rate is allocated to a set of Encoders and the bit rate for
each encoder is allocated according to the requirements of the
picture encoding process.
The bit rate allocation can be performed externally by a multiplexer,
or internally in a unit fitted with multiple VCM’s.
A-16
RF
Radio Frequency.
RGB
Red, Green, Blue: The Chroma information in a video signal.
RIP2
Routing Information Protocol v2. A protocol used between network
routers to exchange routing tables and information.
ROM
Read Only Memory: A non-volatile storage device for digital data.
Data has been stored permanently in this device. No further
information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds
cannot be erased. Data may be read as often as required.
RS
Reed-Solomon coding: An error detection and correction, coding
system. 16 bytes of Reed-Solomon Forward Error Correction code
are appended to the packet before transmission bringing the packet
length to 204 bytes. The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to
correct any errors. Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected.
RSVP
ReSerVation Protocol. A Quality-of-service oriented protocol used
by network elements to reserve capacity in an IP network before a
transmission takes place.
RTP
Real-time Transfer Protocol. A protocol designed for transmission of
real-time data like video and audio over IP networks. RTP is used
for most video over IP transmissions.
RLC
Run Length Coding: Minimization of the length of a bit-stream by
replacing repeated characters with an instruction of the form ‘repeat
character x y times’.
SBR
Spectral Band Replication.
SCPC
Single Channel Per Carrier.
Spectral
Scrambling
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal
with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a randomized digital
signal that conveys the original information in a form optimized for a
broadcast channel.
Scrambling
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to
prevent unauthorized reception of the information in clear form.
SDI
Serial Digital Interface.
SDT
Service Description Table: Provides information in the SI stream
about the services in the system; for example, the name of the
service, the service provider, etc.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
SDTI
Serial Data Transport Interface. A mechanism that allows
transmission of various types of data over an SDI signal. This may
be one or more compressed video signals or other proprietary data
types. The advantage of SDTI is that existing SDI transmission
infrastructure can be used to transport other types of data.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950).
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable module. A standardized mechanism to
allow usage of various optical interfaces for Gigabit Ethernet.
Several types of SFP modules exist: Single-mode fiber modules for
long-distance transmission and multi-mode fiber modules for shorter
distances. SFP is also known as "mini-GBIC".
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol. A common acronym for the ongoing
effort to standardize signaling over IP networks, i.e. connection
set-up and tear-down. SIP makes it possible to "dial" a remote
receiver of data and set-up the connection in this way.
STB
Set-Top Box: A box that sits on top of a television set and is the
interface between the home television and the cable TV company.
New technologies evolving for set-top boxes are video-on-demand,
video games, educational services, database searches, and home
shopping. The cable equivalent of the IRD.
SFN
Single Frequency Network: The SFN technique allows large
geographic areas to be served with a common transmission
multiplex. All transmitters in the network are synchronously
modulated with the same signal and they all radiate on the same
frequency. Due to the multi-path capability of the multi-carrier
transmission system (COFDM), signals from several transmitters
arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the
total wanted signal. The SFN technique is not only frequency
efficient but also power efficient because fades in the field strength
of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter.
SI
Service Information: Digital information describing the delivery
system, content and scheduling (timing) of broadcast data streams.
DVB-SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically
demultiplex and decode the various streams of programmes within
the multiplex. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1]. (DVB)
Single Packet Burst A burst of ASI bytes (either 188 or 204, depending on packet length)
Mode
is contiguously grouped into an MPEG-2 transport stream packet.
Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate
to 270 Mbps. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI)
Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
Smart Card
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A plastic card with a built-in microprocessor and memory used for
identification, financial transactions or other authorizing data
transfer. When inserted into a reader, data is transferred to and from
the host machine or a central computer. It is more secure than a
magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is
entered too many times. As a financial transaction card, it can be
loaded with digital money and used in the same way as cash until
the balance reaches zero. The file protocol is specific to its intended
application.
A-17
Glossary
SMATV
Satellite Mast Antenna Television: A distribution system, which
provides sound and television signals to the households of a
building or group of buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment
block.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
SMS
Subscriber Management System: A system which handles the
maintenance, billing, control and general supervision of subscribers
to conditional access technology viewing services provided through
cable and satellite broadcasting. An SMS can be an automatic (e.g.
Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering
information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual
system, which requires subscribers to speak with an operator who
then manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems
support multiple SMSs.
SNG
Satellite News-Gathering.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol is an Internet protocol used to
synchronize the clocks of computers to some time reference. It is a
simplified version of the protocol NTP protocol which is too
complicated for many systems.
Spatial Redundancy Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or
chrominance characteristics within a single frame. Removed using
DCT and Quantization (Intra-Frame Coding).
A-18
SPI
Synchronous Parallel Interface.
Statistical
Redundancy
Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly
occurring events, thereby reducing the overall bit rate. Removed
using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
TCP / IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: A set of
communications protocols that may be used to connect different
types of computers over networks.
TDM
Time Division Multiplex: One common, communications channel
carrying a number of signals, each with its own allotted time slot.
TDT
Time and Date Table: Part of the DVB Service Information. The TDT
gives information relating to the present time and date.
Temporal
Redundancy
Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between
successive frames. Removed using motion estimation and
compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
Time stamp
A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival
of a byte or the presentation of a presentation unit.
TNS
Temporal Noise Shaping.
TOT
Time Offset Table: This optional SI table supports the use of local
offsets as well as the UTC time/date combination. The purpose of
the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the
next expected change to that offset (to track when daylight saving
occurs). The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of
±12 hours from UTC.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Glossary
Transport Stream
A set of packetized elementary data streams and SI streams, which
may comprise more than one programme, but with common
synchronization and error protection. The data structure is defined in
ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the basis of the ETSI Digital Video
Broadcasting standards.
Transport Stream
Packet Header
A data structure used to convey information about the transport
stream payload.
TS
Transport Stream.
TSDT
Transport Stream Descriptor Table: A component of the MPEG-2
PSI data. This table describes which type of Transport stream it is in
(i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
TSP
Transport Stream Processor.
U
44.45 mm (rack height standard).
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter: A device providing a
serial interface for transmitting and receiving data.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol. A protocol above the IP layer that provides
port multiplexing in addition. In essence, you can transmit IP data
packets to several receiving processes in the same unit/device.
Unicast
Point-to-point connection, i.e. the "opposite" of multicast which is
one to many (or many to many). In this mode, a transmit unit sends
video data direct to a unique destination address.
Upconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream
is shifted to a higher frequency range.
Uplink
The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the
Earth to the satellite.
UPS
Uninterruptable Power Supply: A method of supplying backup power
when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage
level. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes;
enough to power down the computer in an orderly manner. This is
particularly important where write back cache is used. Write back
cache is where modified data intended for the disk is temporarily
stored in RAM and can be lost in the event of a power failure.
Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can
provide power for days. UPS systems typically provide surge
suppression and may provide voltage regulation.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated: The Coordinated Universal Time and is
synonymous with Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
VCM
Video Compression Module.
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code.
VITS
Vertical Interval Test Signal: See: ITS.
VLAN
Virtual LAN, a network of units that behave as if they are connected
to the same wire even though they may actually be physically
located on different segments of a LAN.
VPS
Video Programming System: A German precursor to PDC
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A-19
Glossary
A-20
WSS
Wide Screen Switching: Data used in wide-screen analogue
services, which enables a receiver to select the appropriate picture
display mode.
WST
World System Teletext: System B Teletext. Used in 625 line / 50 Hz
television systems
(ITU-R 653).
XLR
Audio connector featuring three leads, two for signal and one for
GND.
XML
eXtensible Markup Language. A very common self-describing textbased data format. Used for many purposes: Meta-data,
configuration files, documents, etc. The readability of the format has
made it very popular and is now the fundament for many types of
WEB services.
XPO
The name given to the second generation Ericsson standard for web
pages and additional supporting interfaces.
Y (Luminance)
Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line. The only
signal required for black and white pictures.
Y/C
Broadcast video with separate color, Y (luminance) and C (Chroma)
(sometimes called S-Video).
YUV
Y: Luminance component (Brightness), U and V: Chrominance
(Color difference)
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B Technical Specification
Annex B
Contents
B.1
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.2
B.2.1
B.2.2
B.2.3
B.3
B.3.1
B.3.2
B.3.3
B.3.4
B.3.5
B.3.6
B.3.7
B.3.8
B.3.9
B.3.10
B.3.11
B.3.11.1
B.3.11.2
B.3.11.3
B.3.11.4
B.3.11.5
B.3.11.6
B.3.12
B.3.12.1
B.3.12.2
B.3.12.3
B.3.12.6
B.3.12.7
B.3.13
B.3.13.1
B.3.14
B.3.15
B.3.16
B.3.17
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Control Ethernet Specification ............................................................ B-3
Overview ............................................................................................ B-3
IP Parameters .................................................................................... B-3
Data Ethernet Specification ................................................................ B-3
Overview ............................................................................................ B-3
Data Port Parameters ......................................................................... B-3
IP Parameters .................................................................................... B-4
CE VCM Specification ........................................................................ B-4
SDI ..................................................................................................... B-4
HD-SDI ............................................................................................... B-5
UHD-SDI ............................................................................................ B-5
HD-Optical SDI ................................................................................... B-6
UHD-Optical SDI ................................................................................ B-6
CVBS Input ........................................................................................ B-6
Digital Audio Input .............................................................................. B-7
Analog Audio Input ............................................................................. B-8
Power Consumption ........................................................................... B-8
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data ................... B-8
Video ................................................................................................ B-10
Pre-Processor Metrics ...................................................................... B-10
HD Video Formats ............................................................................ B-11
SD Video Formats ............................................................................ B-13
Impairment Reduction ...................................................................... B-14
Operating Times ............................................................................... B-15
Test Pattern ...................................................................................... B-15
Audio ................................................................................................ B-16
Encoding Stereo ............................................................................... B-16
MPEG-1 Layer II Encoding ............................................................... B-16
Dolby Digital Encoding ..................................................................... B-18
Audio Test Tone ............................................................................... B-20
Maximum Audio Encode Capability .................................................. B-20
Satellite Modulator Option Card ........................................................ B-21
IF Output .......................................................................................... B-21
ASI I/O Option Card.......................................................................... B-24
G.703 Transceiver Card ................................................................... B-25
External Sync Input Option Card ...................................................... B-25
GPI Option Card ............................................................................... B-26
B-1
Technical Specification
B.4
B.4.1
Environmental ...................................................................................B-27
Environmental Conditions ................................................................. B-27
List of Tables
Table B.1
Table B.2
Table B.3
Table B.4
Table B.5
Table B.6
Table B.7
Table B.8
Table B.9
Table B.10
Table B.11
Table B.12
Table B.13
Table B.14
Table B.15
Table B.16
Table B.17
Table B.18
Table B.19
Table B.20
Table B.21
Table B.22
Table B.23
Table B.24
Table B.25
Table B.26
Table B.27
Table B.28
Table B.29
Table B.30
Table B.31
Table B.32
Table B.33
Table B.34
Table B.35
Table B.36
Table B.37
B-2
IP Parameters (Control Port) ............................................................ B-3
IP Parameters (Data Port) ................................................................ B-4
SDI Specification ..............................................................................B-4
HD-SDI Specification ........................................................................ B-5
UHD-SDI Specification...................................................................... B-5
HD-Optical SDI Specification ............................................................ B-6
UHD-Optical SDI Specification.......................................................... B-6
CVBS Input Specification .................................................................. B-6
DID Associated With Each Group ..................................................... B-7
Audio Digital Input Specification........................................................ B-7
Audio Digital Reference Tone Out Specification ............................... B-7
Analog Audio Input Specification ...................................................... B-8
Power Consumption Specification .................................................... B-8
VBI Data Specification .................................................................... B-10
Video Resizing (HD) Specification .................................................. B-11
Video Profiles (HD) Specification .................................................... B-11
Video Resizing (SD) Specification .................................................. B-13
Video Profiles (SD) Specification .................................................... B-14
Test Pattern .................................................................................... B-15
Encoding Stereo Specification ........................................................ B-16
MPEG-1 Layer II Supported Modes ................................................ B-16
MPEG-1 Layer II Supported Bit Rates ............................................ B-17
Dolby Digital Specification .............................................................. B-18
Advanced Audio Encoding Specification ......................................... B-19
Weighting Points for Audio Encoding Modes .................................. B-20
Satellite Modulator IF Output Specification ..................................... B-21
Satellite Modulator L-band Output Specification ............................. B-22
Reference Frequency Output Specification ..................................... B-24
DC Power Output Specification....................................................... B-24
ASI I/O Specification ....................................................................... B-25
G.703 Transceiver Specification ..................................................... B-25
External Sync Input Specification.................................................... B-25
External Sync Input (Analog Video) Specification ........................... B-26
External Sync Input (10 MHz Reference) Specification ................... B-26
GPI Specification ............................................................................ B-26
Data Input Specification .................................................................. B-27
Environmental Conditions ............................................................... B-27
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.1
Control Ethernet Specification
B.1.1
Overview
The system has two Ethernet control ports that support IEEE 802.3 100Base-TX
and 1000Base-T Ethernet protocols. The Control ports are accessible via RJ-45
connectors on the rear panel of the chassis and support IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation and parallel detection. Also, the ports support Auto-MDIX.
See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for connector details.
B.1.2
IP Parameters
It is possible to configure the following IP parameters for the Control Port.
Table B.1 IP Parameters (Control Port)
Parameter
Specification
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Network Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Note:
The front panel always provides a way of changing these settings to prevent
all control interfaces being disabled.
B.2
Data Ethernet Specification
B.2.1
Overview
The Ethernet Data ports support IEEE 802.3u auto-negotiation and parallel
detection. The auto-negotiation function can be disabled to force the line speed to
be either 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps.
These ports support Auto-MDIX. This function can be disabled
See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for connector details.
B.2.2
Data Port Parameters
The Transport Streams output via the IP Outputs contains 188 byte long Transport
Stream packets.
The time that a port has had a link established is recorded to an accuracy of ± 1
second, and the information made available to the user.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-3
Technical Specification
The Ethernet Data Ports always respond to ICMP Echo requests to any source IP
address assigned to an output Transport Stream currently being transmitted on that
port.
The Ethernet Data Ports respond to all ARP requests
There is hardware filtering of received packets (i.e. a hardware ‘firewall’) to protect
the ports from malicious interference.
B.2.3
IP Parameters
It is possible to configure the following IP parameters for the Data Port.
Table B.2 IP Parameters (Data Port)
Parameter
Specification
IP Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Network Mask
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
Gateway Address
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (Ipv4)
The default values for source IP address, subnet mask are those assigned to the
ethernet port, or in the case of mirrored mode, those assigned to the primary IP port.
B.3
CE VCM Specification
B.3.1
SDI
Table B.3 SDI Specification
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
SD-SDI IN
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC female socket
Input Standard (UK/EC)
ITU-R RECMN BT.656-3 Interfaces for Digital Component Video Signals in
525-Line and 625-Line Television Systems Operating at the 4:2:2 Level of
Recommendation ITU-R BT.601 (Part A).
Input Standard (USA)
ANSI / SMPTE 259M Television 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4 fsc
Composite Digital Signals -Serial Digital Interface (module only supports
Component).
Level C - 270 Mbps, 525/625 component.
Cable length
250m maximum from a source with an output level 800 mV pk-pk nominal
±10%
Recommended cable type
Belden 1694A
or
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF
Input Level
B-4
800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.3.2
Item
Specification
Return Loss
Better than 15 dB, 10 MHz - 270 MHz
Input Impedance
75 Ω (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
HD-SDI
Table B.4 HD-SDI Specification
B.3.3
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
HD-SDI IN
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC female socket
Input Standard
ANSI / SMPTE 292M
Cable length
150m maximum from a source with an output level 800 mV pk-pk nominal
±10%
Recommended cable type
Belden 1694A
Input Level
800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
Return Loss
Better than 15 dB, 5 MHz - 1.5 GHz
Input Impedance
75 Ω (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
UHD-SDI
Table B.5 UHD-SDI Specification
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
SDI IN
Connector Type
4-off 75 Ω BNC female sockets
Input Standard
ANSI / SMPTE 292M
Cable length
150m maximum from a source with an output level 800 mV pk-pk nominal
±10%
Recommended cable type
Belden 1694A
Input Level
800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
Return Loss
Better than 15 dB, 5 MHz - 1.5 GHz
Input Impedance
75 Ω (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-5
Technical Specification
B.3.4
HD-Optical SDI
Table B.6 HD-Optical SDI Specification
B.3.5
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
SDI IN
Connector Type
LC single-mode female sockets
Input Standard
ANSI / SMPTE 297M
Input Sensitivity
-23 dBm
UHD-Optical SDI
Table B.7 UHD-Optical SDI Specification
B.3.6
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
SDI IN
Connector Type
2-off dual LC single-mode female sockets
Input Standard
ANSI / SMPTE 297M
Input Sensitivity
-23 dBm
CVBS Input
A common 75 Ω BNC female socket is used for CVBS input. The following table
defines the parameters for the CVBS connector.
Table B.8 CVBS Input Specification
Signal Format
Supported
Standards
B-6
Specification
625-line
PAL-B, -D, -G, -H, -I, -N, -Nc
525-line
NTSC-M
Connector type
75 Ω BNC female socket
Input level
1 V pk-pk nominal ±5%
Return loss
Better than 30 dB up to 6 MHz
Recommended cable type
Belden 1694A
Input impedance
75 Ω
Connector designation
CVBS
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.3.7
Digital Audio Input
The digital audio input of the VCM accepts four stereo pairs of AES/EBU digital
audio. The available encoding options depend upon the licenses enabled.
The SDI/HD-SDI input of the VCM can be used for audio input, where eight stereo
pairs can be extracted from four groups of embedded audio. The DID associated
with each group is set when the unit leaves the factory.
Table B.9 DID Associated With Each Group
Group
HD-SDI
SD-SDI
GROUP 1
0x2E7
0x2FF
GROUP 2
0x1E6
0x1FD
GROUP 3
0x1E5
0x1FB
GROUP 4
0x2E4
0x2F9
Table B.10 Audio Digital Input Specification
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
AUDIO/DATA
Connector Type
15-way D-Type male connector
AES3
AES-3id
Interface
Balanced
Unbalanced
Connector
XLR-3
BNC
Impedance
110 Ω
75 Ω
Input Level
2 V -7 V peak-to-peak
1 V peak-to-peak
Max Input
7 V peak-to-peak
1.2 V peak-to-peak
Max current
64 mA
1.6 mA
Min Input
0.2 V
0.32 V
Cable
Shielded Twisted Pair
Coax
Table B.11 Audio Digital Reference Tone Out Specification
Item
Specification
Standard
AES/EBU digital
Termination
75 Ω
Sampling rate
48 kHz
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-7
Technical Specification
B.3.8
Analog Audio Input
The analogue audio input of the CE-xA VCM accepts two stereo pairs of analogue
audio through a breakout cable attached to the 15-way D-type backplane connector
of the CE-xA VCM. The VCM accepts two stereo pairs of analogue audio and
samples them at a frequency of 48 kHz.
The same inputs can be used for inputting digital audio as described in Digital Audio
Input.
Table B.12 Analog Audio Input Specification
B.3.9
Item
Specification
Interface
balanced or unbalanced
Impedance
20 kΩ
Clip level
18 dBu or 24 dBu
Power Consumption
The option cards do not exceed the following total power requirements.
Table B.13 Power Consumption Specification
Item
Power Consumption
Specification
CE-x does not exceed 120 Watts.
CE-a does not exceed 40 Watts.
CE-HEVC does not exceed 76 Watts.
Heat Dissipation
B.3.10
All VCM modules have been thermally modeled to minimize any potential
issues with heat dissipation.
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) and Ancillary (ANC) Data
The video stream ingested through the SDI/HD-SDI input on the VCM can carry
additional data associated with the video stream. These data are either inserted in
the horizontal or vertical blanking region (ANC) or in the non-active television lines
(VBI).
Ancillary Data
There are two positions in the video stream where ANC packets are allowed. The
first is the horizontal blanking interval of the video line, called the horizontal ANC
space (HANC). The second is the active portion of the video lines in the vertical
blanking interval, called the vertical ANC space (VANC). HANC and CANC of the
SDI signal can carry specific ancillary (ANC) data. The encoder then can be set up
to extract and repacketize the data carried in the HANC or VANC based on the ANC
data type.
B-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Closed Captions
Closed Caption data and any user data embedded in the SDI/HD-SDI according to
SMPTE 334, is extracted and inserted into the picture user data of the video stream
in accordance with ATSC A/72 part 1.
Information regarding the closed captions is carried in PSI as per ATSC A/72 part 2.
Time Code
Time code is extracted from HANC of the incoming video and carried in the
Transport Stream adaptation layer as described in Annex E of ETSI TS 101 154
(AU_information).
OP-47
Teletext subtitles can be extracted from ANC in accordance with OP-47 and carried
in a Teletext PID.
AFD
As part of the ANC Data, Active Format Description codes can also be transmitted.
These codes provide information to video devices about where in the coded picture
the active video is. The codes are defined by ETSI TS 101 154 V1.7.1 Annex B,
ATSC A/53 Part 4 and SMPTE 2016-1-2007.
Active Format Descriptor (AFD) uses three bits of video index to define the video
format. This information is encoded into user data and can then be used by a
Decoder for wide-screen switching.
HDR/WSS Signalling
HDR/WSS codes can be signalled in accordance with SDR (BT.709), UHD SDR
(BT.2020), HDR HLG10 (HDR in VUI), HDR HLG10 (SDR in VUI), HDR PQ10.
Generic ANC
Up to 2 Mbps of generic data can be extracted from ANC of the incoming video and
encapsulated in accordance with SMPTE 2038 (Carriage of Ancillary Data Packets
in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream).
VBI Data
The extraction of VBI types can be enabled or disabled individually. The video line
from which the VBI is extracted can also be configured. The default is set according
to the relevant standard for the VBI type.
VBI Lines
Up to 8 VBI lines per field can be extracted. Unless otherwise stated, all VBI data
are formed into one VBI Transport Stream packet that conforms to ETSI EN 301 775
or SCTE 127.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-9
Technical Specification
VBI Data
Data can be extracted from the vertical blanking interval of the incoming video
stream, processed, and then included in the output Transport Stream. The following
table summarizes the VBI data types supported by the VCM module.
Table B.14 VBI Data Specification
Component
Comments
Video Index
It is possible to extract video index and another VBI type from the same
line.
Closed Captions
Via line 21 & 284 (CEA-608C).
Monochrome 4:2:2
Up to 3 lines can be extracted per frame.
Teletext
Up to 18 lines can be extracted per field.
Aspect Ratio Signaling
WSS/WSS-AFD
VBI Data on a Separate PID
The VBI data is packetized into MPEG-2 PES packets according to ETSI ETS 300472 for Teletext and ETSI EN 301 775 or SCTE 127 for all other VBI data types.
Closed caption data and aspect ratio signaling can also be inserted into the
compressed video elementary stream.
Timing
The VCM aligns the VBI data and the compressed video frames, i.e. it uses the
same PTS for the video and the VBI data if they are from the same frame.
B.3.11
Video
B.3.11.1
Pre-Processor Metrics
Production
The VCM pre-processor, in conjunction with the first stage ME, analyzes the video
on a macroblock by macroblock basis and produces Pre-Processor Metrics on:
B-10
•
Activity - spatially
•
Complexity
•
Motion (vectors and SAD results)
•
Luminance level
•
Frame size information
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Scene Cuts
Using the VCM Pre-Processor Metrics listed above, the pre-processor determines
scene cuts in the input video. This should cause the encoding engine to minimise
the effect of the scene change. This can shorten or lengthen the GOP. It is
configurable.
B.3.11.2
HD Video Formats
Active Video
The active video has either 1080 lines (interlaced) or 720 lines (progressive).
Video Resizing
The unit supports the input of video at 1920 x 1080i (25 Hz and 29.97 Hz) and 1280
x 720p (50 Hz and 59.94 Hz). The following sub-sampling of any input format is
supported.
Table B.15 Video Resizing (HD) Specification
25 Hz input format
29.97 Hz input format
Process
1920x1080@25 (Passthru)
1920x1080@29.97 (Passthru)
Scale 1/1
1440x1080@25
1440x1080@29.97
1280x720@50 (Passthru)
1280x720@59.94 (Passthru)
960x720@50
960x720@59.94
Comment
Not available for the CE-a J2K
option card
Scale 1/1
Not available for the CE-a J2K
option card
Not available for the CE-a J2K
option card
Video Profiles
Depending on the option module fitted, the following video profiles are supported.
Table B.16 Video Profiles (HD) Specification
Profile
Available on Option Module
H.264
License Required
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 on a CE-x or
a CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/H264 on a CE-a
HD Main Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD on a CE-x or a
CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD on a CE-a
HD High Profile Level 4.0 4:2:0 8-bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD on a CE-x or a
CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD on a CE-a
HD High Profile Level 4.1 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD on a CE-x or a
CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD on a CE-a
HD Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2
8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-11
Technical Specification
Profile
Available on Option Module
License Required
HD Hi422 Profile Level 4.1 4:2:2
10 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
HD p50/60 H.264 High Profile Level
4.2 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/1080p
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile
Level 4.2 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/1080p
HD p50/60 H.264 High422 Profile
Level 4.2 4:2:2 10 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE/SWO/CE-x/1080p
MPEG-2
HD High Profile High Level 4:2:0
8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD on a CE-x or a
CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/HD on a CE-a
HD 422 Profile High Level 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/HD and
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
CE-a J2K
CE/SWO/CE-a/HDJ2K
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0
High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0
High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1
High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1
High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile
Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile
Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0
High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-HEVC
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.0
High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
CE-HEVC
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1
High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-HEVC
HD HEVC Main Profile Level 4.1
High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
CE-HEVC
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile
Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-HEVC
JPEG 2000
HD J2K Profile Level 2 4:2:2 10 bit
HEVC
B-12
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.3.11.3
Profile
Available on Option Module
License Required
HDp50/59.94 HEVC Main Profile
Level 4.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/HD
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level
5.1 High Tier 4:2:0 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/4K
UHD HEVC Main 10 Profile Level
5.1 High Tier 4:2:2 10 bit
CE-HEVC
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/4K
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422
CE/SWO/CE-HEVC/HEVC/422/x4
SD Video Formats
Active Video Start Line
The active video starts on line 23 for both the 525-line and the 625-line system
(SMPTE RP 202-2000).
Video Input
When encoding into SD resolution, the unit supports the input of video at 720x576
25 Hz, 1280x720 50 Hz, 1920x1080 25 Hz, 720x480 29.97 Hz, 1280x720 59.94 Hz,
and 1920x1080 29.97 Hz.
Video Resizing
The following re-sampling of any input format is supported on the VCM cards.
Table B.17 Video Resizing (SD) Specification
25 Hz format
29.97 Hz format
Process
1920x1080
1920x1080
1280x720
1280x720
720x576@25
(Pass-thru)
720x480@29.97 (Passthru)
Scale 1/1
704x576@25
704x480@29.97
Scale 1/1 and blank 8
pixels at left and right
edges
640x576@25
640x480@29.97
Scale 8/9
544x576@25
544x480@29.97
Scale 3/4 and add 2 blank
pixels to left and right
edges
528x576@25
528x480@29.97
Scale 3/4 and blank 6
pixels at left and right
edges in scaled image
480x576@25
480x480@29.97
Scale 2/3
352x576@25
352x480@29.97
Scale 1/2 and blank 4
pixels at left and right
edges in scaled image
Comment
If the output resolution is changed, the pre-processor ensures the change occurs at
a GOP boundary and that the previous GOP is closed.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-13
Technical Specification
Video Profiles
Depending on the option module fitted the following video profiles are supported.
Table B.18 Video Profiles (SD) Specification
Profile
Available on Option Module
H.264
Profile
CE/SWO/CE-x/H264 on a CE-x or
a CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-a/H264 on a CE-a
SD Main Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
SD High Profile Level 3.0 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
SD High Profile Level 3.1 4:2:0 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
SD High 422 Profile Level 3.1 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
SD High 422 Profile Level 3.1 10 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
SD Main Profile Main Level 4:2:0
8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA, CE-a
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
SD 422 Profile Main Level 4:2:2 8 bit
CE-x, CE-xA
CE/SWO/CE-x/422
MPEG-2
JPEG 2000
SD J2K Profile Level 1 4:2:2 10 bit
B.3.11.4
CE-a J2K
Impairment Reduction
Spatial Filtering through De-blocking
For H.264 encoding, the perceived image quality is further enhanced by utilizing a
de-blocking filter in the feedback loop.
Temporal Noise Reduction
When the CE/SWO/MCTF license is enabled the pre-processor can provide
temporal noise reduction which is motion adaptive (backs-off the filtering with
motion) to the sub-frame level.
Stills Detection Control
Setting this to other than Off will override the in-built intelligent stills detection. This
saves bit rate but has undesired video quality effects on complex stills.
Film Mode
The pre-processor identifies 3:2 pull-down sequences. Based on this information the
encoding engine identifies the appropriate fields as repeated. Film Mode can only be
sued for SD inputs with a frame rate of 29.97 Hz.
B-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.3.11.5
Operating Times
Note:
The times mentioned here are an indication of the typical time for a single
VCM fitted in a chassis. When multiple VCMs are fitted these times may
increase.
Boot Time
The module has a complete boot time (from release of reset to generating valid
Transport Streams) of typically 2 minutes. This time is dependent on a valid
configuration being available when the module requires it to complete its boot process.
Configuration/Mode Changes
Configuration
The VCM, when in the same operating mode, changes configuration within two
seconds plus the video delay. This means that the visible glitch period is two
seconds. This includes most coding parameter changes including GOP size,
resolution changes and filter settings.
Mode
For mode changes (profile changes, frame rate, VBR modes and delay modes), the
configuration is complete within ten seconds (to include the time to reset the
buffer). The change time is defined as the time from the configuration change being
received on the module to the module outputting a changed bit stream.
Audio/VBI
The module changes the configuration of the audio and VBI data within 1 second
plus the video delay. On the audio, the audible glitch period is 1 second plus the
video delay as the buffer will be cleared. The change time is defined as the time
from the configuration change being received on the module to the module
outputting a changed bit stream.
B.3.11.6
Test Pattern
The video pre-processor can generate the following test patterns.
Table B.19 Test Pattern
Test Pattern
1
Compatibility Matrix
CE-a
CE-a J2K
CE-x
CE-xA
CE-HEVC
Black
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Color bars
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Moving object
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Slate1
YES
YES
YES
= A slate file uploaded by the user will be used.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-15
Technical Specification
Loss of Video
On loss of video the VCM can be configured to select freeze frame, test pattern, or
turn off output.
B.3.12
Audio
B.3.12.1
Encoding Stereo
Depending upon licenses each audio module on the VCMs can encode the following
listed coding standards.
Table B.20 Encoding Stereo Specification
B.3.12.2
Coding Standard
Maximum
Number
Description
Comments
Dolby Digital
6
AC-3 or Encode
Only available when CE/SWO/DOLBY/AC3 has
been purchased - 1 license required per channel
pair.
MPEG Layer 2
8
MPEG -1 Layer II /
Musicam Encode
Stream type MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 (user
selectable), more than two channels are only
available with CE/SWO/M1L2 license - 1 license
required per channel pair.
Advanced Audio
Coding
6
AAC-LC, HE-AAC,
HE-AACv2
Only available when CE/SWO/AAC has been
purchased - 1 license required per channel pair.
MPEG-1 Layer II Encoding
The VCMs support the following coding modes for MPEG-1 Layer II.
Table B.21 MPEG-1 Layer II Supported Modes
Coding Mode
Implementation
Comments
Mono (left)
1/0 (L – input)
Mono (right)
1/0 (R – input)
Dual mono
1 + 1 (L/ch1, R/ch2)
Left and right are coded separately, referenced as
two services/languages
Stereo
2/0
Coded as two mono signals, only referenced as
one language/service in SI, output as stereo at the
receiver
Joint Stereo
2/0 joint
Coded as a stereo pair, coding takes advantage of
them being stereo, only referenced as one
language/service in SI, output as stereo at the
receiver
6/8 Channel Aligned
1+1
Mono [1/0 (L - input) or 1/0 (R - input)]
This mode has a single audio channel that is encoded independently. It is seldom
used in broadcast as most viewing devices now have stereo speakers or
headphones.
B-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Dual Mono [1 + 1 (L/ch1, R/ch2)]
This was introduced to allow two mono channels to be carried in the same
bandwidth as stereo signal. The main use for this mode is for multi-lingual
transmission where the decoder selects which language to decode on left or right.
Joint Stereo [2/0 joint]
This option is available for MPEG-1 Layer II only. This applies a technique called
intensity coding. The human ear is not as good at locating higher frequencies as it is
lower ones. The use of this mode may introduce more artifacts than stereo.
Stereo [2/0]
This mode treats the incoming audio signal as a left and right channel that the
viewer will listen to simultaneously. Practically, these stereo signals can be
uncorrelated where they are coded separately or related where they combined into a
sum and difference channel and each is coded separately.
6/8 Channel Phase Aligned Audio
For a description of the Phase Aligned Audio (PAA) mode, see Chapter 3, Getting
Started.
Bit Rates
The following table gives the coding modes and bit rates for MPEG-1 Layer II.
Table B.22 MPEG-1 Layer II Supported Bit Rates
Bit Rate (kbps)
Mono (Left or
Right)
32
YES
48
YES
56
YES
64
YES
80
YES
96
Dual Mono
Stereo
Joint Stereo
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
112
YES
YES
YES
YES
128
YES
YES
YES
YES
160
YES
YES
YES
YES
192
YES
YES
YES
YES
224
YES
YES
YES
256
YES
YES
YES
320
YES
YES
YES
384
YES
YES
YES
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
6/8 Channel
Aligned
YES
B-17
Technical Specification
B.3.12.3
Dolby Digital Encoding
The VCMs support the following coding modes for Dolby Digital encoding:
•
Mono 1/0 (center, from left).
•
Mono1/0 (center, from right).
•
Mono 1/0 (center, from left and right).
•
Stereo 2/0 (left, right).
•
Multi-channel 3/2L (left front, right front, center, LFE, left rear, right rear).
Dolby Digital (AC-3) components by default use the descriptor defined by the DVB in
the PMT. The following table gives the coding modes and bit rates for Dolby Digital
encoding.
Table B.23 Dolby Digital Specification
B-18
Bit Rate (kbps)
Single Channel Mono
(1/0) (Left or Right)
Dual Channel Stereo
(2/0)
Multi-Channel Stereo
(3/2)
32
YES
40
YES
48
YES
56
YES
64
YES
80
YES
96
YES
YES
112
YES
YES
128
YES
YES
160
YES
YES
192
YES
YES
224
YES
YES
YES
256
YES
YES
YES
320
YES
YES
YES
384
YES
YES
YES
448
YES
YES
YES
512
YES
YES
YES
576
YES
YES
YES
640
YES
YES
YES
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
B.3.12.4
Advanced Audio Encoding
The VCMs support the following coding modes for AAC encoding:
Stereo 2/0 (left, right)
•
The following table gives the coding modes and bit rates for AAC encoding.
Table B.24 Advanced Audio Encoding Specification
Bit Rate (kbps)
AAC-LC
AAC-LC
HE-AAC
Stereo (2/0)
Multi-Channel
Stereo (3/2L)
Stereo (2/0)
32
B.3.12.5
HE-AACv2
HE-AAC
Multi-Channel
Stereo (3/2L)
YES
48
YES
56
YES
64
YES
YES
80
YES
YES
96
YES
YES
112
YES
128
YES
160
YES
YES
YES
192
YES
YES
YES
224
YES
YES
256
YES
YES
320
YES
384
YES
448
YES
512
YES
YES
YES
Pass-thru Modes
Clocking
For the best performance when passing through compressed audio the video and
audio coming into the unit must be locked together, and the system clock locked to
Video or Ext SYNC. When set to Ext SYNC, the audio and video must also be
locked to this source.
Dolby Digital
The audio module can pass through pre-encoded Dolby Digital audio (up to 5.1).
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-19
Technical Specification
Linear PCM
For passing through 2 channels (1 channel pair) of uncompressed data the audio
module complies with SMPTE 302M standard. The module supports 24, 20 and 16
bit word sizes on the input and output. The bit-depth option defines the output word
size and is independent of the input. Only 2 channels are supported per PID.
Dolby E
The audio module can Pass-thru pre-encoded Dolby E audio. The input word size is
automatically detected, and this is applied to the output. Only 1 Dolby E stream is
supported per PID. Complies with SMPTE 302M, SMPTE 337M and SMPTE 338M.
B.3.12.6
•
SMPTE 302M: Mapping of AES3 Data into MPEG-2 Transport Stream.
•
SMPTE 337M: Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in AES3 Serial Digital
Audio Interface.
•
SMPTE 338M: Format for Non-PCM Audio and Data in AES3 - Data Types.
Audio Test Tone
The module is able to generate a test tone on any audio channel at 1 kHz, with a
level of -18 dBFS.
Note
B.3.12.7
If there is no source connected to the SDI input then Input Detection must
be set to Off otherwise the resulting test tone can “warble”.
Maximum Audio Encode Capability
It is possible to configure any combination of audio coding modes within the
constraints of available processing power for each audio module. Each audio coding
mode requires a definitive amount of CPU resource so is allocated an associated
points weighting. The sum of the weighting for the configured audio encodes cannot
exceed 100 for each audio module. There are 2 audio modules available on the
VCM. The first takes audio 1 to 8 and the second takes audio 9 to 16. A single audio
coding instance cannot use resources from both modules. If a warning informs you
that there is insufficient resource available, the configuration needs to be changed
so that the other module is used.
The following is a summary weighting points for each Audio Encoding mode.
Table B.25 Weighting Points for Audio Encoding Modes
Function
Available Coding Modes
Weighting (points)
MPEG-1 Layer II audio encoding
Mono 1.0 (center, from left)
10
Mono 1.0 (center, from right)
1+1 Dual Mono
Stereo (2.0)
Joint Stereo (2.0)
Phase Aligned MPEG-1 Layer II
audio encoding
B-20
6 Channel Aligned
30
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Function
Available Coding Modes
Weighting (points)
Phase Aligned MPEG-1 Layer II
audio encoding
8 Channel Aligned
40
Dolby Digital encoding
Mono 1.0 (center, from left)
Mono 1.0 (center, from right)
30
Stereo (2.0)
Multi-Channel Stereo (3/2L)
50
Stereo (2.0)
15
Multi-Channel Stereo (3/2L)
40
Dolby Digital Pass-thru (Dolby
Digital AC-3)
All Dolby Digital coding modes up to 5.1 and up to
640 kbps supported for Pass-thru.
5
Dolby-E Pass-thru
Dolby-E Pass-thru only
25
LPCM Pass-thru
2-channel Linear PCM Pass-thru only
25
AAC-LC, HE-AAC, HE-AACv2
encoding
B.3.13
Satellite Modulator Option Card
The Satellite Modulator Option Card is only available for the AVP 3000 Voyager.
B.3.13.1
IF Output
Table B.26 Satellite Modulator IF Output Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
IF OUT MAIN
Connector type
BNC female 75 Ω
Output impedance
75 Ω
Return loss
>20 dB, 50 -180 MHz
Output power
–30 to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
Output power ramp rate
16 dB/s over operational power level range
Power level stability
±0.5 dB
Modulation Standard
DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X
Modulation
QPSK1,2,3,4, 8PSK 1,2,4, 8PSK-L4 ,16QAM2, 16APSK1,4, 16APSK-L4,
32APSK1,4,,32APSK-L4, 64APSK4 and 64APSK-L4
FEC
1/41,4, 1/31,4, 2/51,4, 1/2, 3/51,4, 2/3, 3/4, 4/51,4, 5/6, 7/82,3, 8/91,4, 9/101,4,
13/45,4 , 9/20,4, 8/15,4, 11/20,4, 5/9,4, 26/45,4, 28/45,4, 23/36,4, 25/36,4,
32/45,4, 13/18,4, 11/15,4, 7/9,4, 77/90,4
Available options depend upon Modulation Standard and Modulation
Mode
Symbol Rate
1 to 45 Msymbol/s (Standard)
0.132 to 66 Msymbol/s (Extended symbol rate option)
Spectrum roll-off factor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
5%, 10%, 15%, 20 %, 25%, 35 %
B-21
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Spectrum sense
Selectable Normal/Inverted
Transmission modes
Modulation on/off
Carrier on/off
Carrier frequency
50 -180 MHz, in 1 kHz steps
Carrier frequency stability
< ±0.02 ppm versus temperature
< ±0.0002 ppm/day ageing after 30 days continuous operation
< ±0.05 ppm/year ageing after 30 days continuous operation
Carrier frequency initial setting
accuracy (ex factory)
±0.1 ppm max
Carrier suppression
>40 dB
Carrier ON/OFF ratio
>60 dB
Phase noise
< –46 dBc at 10 Hz offset
< –66 dBc at 100 Hz offset
< –76 dBc at 1 kHz offset
< –86 dBc at 10 kHz offset
< –96 dBc at 100 kHz offset
< –120 dBc at 1 MHz offset
Spurious outputs, (modulated
carrier)
< –60 dBc/4 kHz over the frequency range 0 – 500 MHz but excluding the
frequency range of the wanted signal (equal to ±1.06 x Symbol Rate about
the carrier frequency, as defined by the spectrum mask Figure A.1 in
EN 300 421)
Spurious outputs, (unmodulated
carrier)
< –50 dBc
< –55 dBc typical
0 < f < 500 MHz, each component
Noise floor (N0/C)
< –120 dBc/Hz
Monitor output power level
–30 dB ±3 dB relative to IF Main output (Main output terminated in 75 Ω)
1 Applies to DVB-S2
2 Applies to DVB-DSNG
3 Applies to DVB-S
4 Applies to DVB-S2X
L-band Output
Table B.27 Satellite Modulator L-band Output Specification
B-22
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
L-BAND OUT MAIN
Connector type
SMA female
Output impedance
50 Ω
Return loss
>14 dB, 950 – 2150 MHz
Output power
-40 dBm to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
Output Power Ramp Rate
16 dB/s over operational power level range
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Power level stability
±0.5 dB
Modulation Standard
DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, DVB-S2, DVB-S2X
Modulation
QPSK1,2,3,4, 8PSK 1,2,4, 8PSK-L4 ,16QAM2, 16APSK1,4, 16APSK-L4,
32APSK1,4,,32APSK-L4, 64APSK4 and 64APSK-L4
FEC Rate
1/41,4, 1/31,4, 2/51,4, 1/2, 3/51,4, 2/3, 3/4, 4/51,4, 5/6, 7/82,3, 8/91,4, 9/101,4,
13/45,4 , 9/20,4, 8/15,4, 11/20,4, 5/9,4, 26/45,4, 28/45,4, 23/36,4, 25/36,4, 32/45,4,
13/18,4, 11/15,4, 7/9,4, 77/90,4
Available options depend upon Modulation Standard and Modulation Mode
Symbol Rate
1 to 45 Msymbol/s (Standard)
0.132 to 66 Msymbol/s (Extended symbol rate option)
Spectrum roll-off factor
5%, 10%, 15%, 20 %, 25%, 35 %
Spectrum sense
Selectable Normal/Inverted
Transmission modes:
Modulation on/off
Carrier on/off
Carrier frequency
950 MHz - 2150 MHz in 1 kHz steps
Carrier frequency stability
< ±0.02 ppm versus temperature
< ±0.0002 ppm/day ageing after 30 days continuous operation
< ±0.05 ppm/year ageing after 30 days continuous operation
Carrier frequency initial
setting accuracy (ex
factory)
±0.1 ppm max
Carrier ON/OFF ratio
>60 dB
Carrier suppression
>35 dB
Phase noise (continuous)
<-46 dBc at 10 Hz offset
<-66 dBc at 100 Hz offset
<-76 dBc at 1 kHz offset
<-86 dBc at 10 kHz offset
<-96 dBc at 100 kHz offset
<-120 dBc at 1 MHz offset
Phase Noise (discrete
sidebands)
<-70 dBc
Spurious outputs
<-60 dBc/4 kHz over the frequency range 500 MHz - 2500 MHz but excluding the
frequency range of the wanted signal (equal to ±1.06 x Symbol Rate about the
carrier frequency, as defined by the spectrum mask Figure A.1 in EN 300 421)
(modulated carrier)
Spurious outputs
(Unmodulated Carrier)
<-55 dBc over the frequency range 500 – 2500 MHz, each component
Noise floor (No/C)
–120 dBc/Hz for output power levels > –30 dBm
Monitor output power level
–30 dB ±3 dB relative to L-band Main output (Main output terminated in 50 Ω)
1 Applies to DVB-S2
2 Applies to DVB-DSNG
3 Applies to DVB-S
4 Applies to DVB-S2X
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-23
Technical Specification
Reference Frequency Output
A reference frequency output is provided via the L-BAND OUT MAIN connector,
intended for use by an external frequency up-converter.
Table B.28 Reference Frequency Output Specification
Item
Specification
Output power
0 dBm ±3 dB sine-wave into 50 Ω load
Switchable on/off
Frequency
10 MHz
Frequency stability
< ±0.02 ppm versus temperature
< ±0.0002 ppm/day ageing after 30 days continuous operation
< ±0.05 ppm/year ageing after 30 days continuous operation
Initial frequency setting
accuracy (ex factory)
±0.1 ppm max
Phase noise
−120 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset
−140 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset
−150 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset
DC Power Output
A DC power output is provided via the L-BAND OUT MAIN connector, intended for
powering an external frequency up-converter.
Table B.29 DC Power Output Specification
B.3.14
Item
Specification
Voltage (open circuit)
Off, +15 V, +24 V (switchable)
Output resistance
<1 Ω
Ripple
<20 mV pk-pk
Rated current
500 mA max
Short-circuit current
800 mA max (protected by electronic circuit-breaker)
ASI I/O Option Card
The ASI I/O option card provides a means of outputting an MPEG-2 Transport
Stream over an ASI connection. Two outputs are provided which can be configured
as "mirrored", such that the same TS is output from each connection, or
independent, such that a different TS is output from each.
Two input BNC connectors and associated "lock" LED's are available for feeding the
unit with external Transport Streams.
B-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Table B.30 ASI I/O Specification
B.3.15
Item
Specification
Standard
CENELEC EN50083-9 2002
Input Transport Stream
format
188 byte or 204 byte. For 204 byte, the Reed-Solomon coding is discarded and not
acted upon.
Output Transport Stream
format
188 byte
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
ASI IN 1 / ASI IN 2 / ASI OUT 1 / ASI OUT 2
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC
Input Impedance:
(Resistive termination)
75 Ω
G.703 Transceiver Card
The G.703 Transceiver card provides one PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy)
output interface that can be used for interfacing Transport Streams to PDH
networks. The interface is G.703 compliant, and can provide support for E carriers,
namely E31 (E3) and E32 (DS3) as specified in ITU-T Rec. G.703. The input
interface is not supported in this release.
Note:
The G.703 Transceiver Card has an input interface, but the G.703 input is
not supported in this release.
Table B.31 G.703 Transceiver Specification
B.3.16
Item
Specification
Standard
ITU-T Rec. G.703
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
OUT
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC
Input Impedance:
(Resistive termination)
75 Ω
External Sync Input Option Card
The External Sync Option card provides a means of inputting a system reference
either from an external, 10 MHz clock or analog video source. Only one reference
source may be connected at any time, and the single BNC connector caters for
either input signal type.
Table B.32 External Sync Input Specification
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
SYNC IN
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-25
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC
Input Impedance:
(Resistive termination)
75 Ω
Input (Analog Video)
The input is capable of accepting a wide range of analogue video input voltage
levels and is also capable of accepting various color standards. Requirements for
the video input signal are defined in the following table.
Table B.33 External Sync Input (Analog Video) Specification
Item
Specification
Nominal Video level:
(AC Coupled)
0.5 to 2.0 Volts peak-to-peak
Applicable Video
Standards:
PAL, NTSC
Input Video Interfaces:
Composite (CVBS)
Chroma Filter
Always present
Input (10 MHz Reference)
A 10 MHz input can be applied via the BNC connector which may be sinusoidal or
square in shape. The required characteristics for the input signal are defined in the
following table.
Table B.34 External Sync Input (10 MHz Reference) Specification
B.3.17
Item
Specification
Input Level (AC Coupled)
1 Volt peak-to-peak
Input waveform:
Sinusoidal or Square
GPI Option Card
The GPI option card provides means for GPI triggered splicing and alarm or fail
relay.
Table B.35 GPI Specification
Item
Specification
GPI/Alarm
B-26
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
GPI/ALARM
Connector Type
25-way D-type female
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
GPI Input
1: Open-circuit
0: Pulled low to between 0.8 V and 0.0 V
Limit over-voltage, under-voltage and excess current
Input function
Application-specific, tailored by software. Contacts are debounced to eliminate
false transitions due to contact bounce in external relays
The 9-way D-type interface is not supported in this release.
Table B.36 Data Input Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
DATA IN
Connector type
D-type, 9-way, Female
GPI Input
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
B.4
Environmental
B.4.1
Environmental Conditions
The AVP is for use in non-hostile environments, (i.e. designed for indoor use only
with no protection against dust or water ingress).
Table B.37 Environmental Conditions
Operational
Specification
Temperature
–10ºC to +50ºC (14ºF to 122ºF) ambient with free air-flow. It may require a 10
minute warm-up period before all clocks are within specification if the ambient
temperature is less than 0ºC
Humidity
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Cooling Requirements
Cool air input from left side of unit, exhaust from right side of unit.
Handling Movement
Designed for stationary or fixed use when in operation.
Transportation (Packaged)
Temperature
-40°C to +70°C (-40°F to +158°F)
Humidity
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Storage
Temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Humidity
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
The product requires no special handling or packaging other than normal
procedures for Ericsson equipment and is suitable for lifting by one person.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
B-27
Technical Specification
BLANK
B-28
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
C
Audio Coding
Annex C
Contents
C.1
C.1.1
C.1.2
C.1.3
C.1.4
C.1.5
C.1.6
C.1.7
C.2
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.3
C.2.4
C.2.5
C.2.6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
A Brief Introduction to Audio Coding Standards .................................. C-3
MPEG................................................................................................. C-3
MPEG-1 Layer I/II ............................................................................... C-3
Dolby Digital ....................................................................................... C-3
SMPTE 302M: Mapping of AES3 Data into an MPEG-2 Transport
Stream................................................................................................ C-4
Dolby E............................................................................................... C-4
AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) .......................................................... C-4
HE AAC .............................................................................................. C-5
Audio Coding Modes .......................................................................... C-5
E.2.1 Mono ......................................................................................... C-5
E.2.2 Stereo ....................................................................................... C-5
E.2.3 Joint Stereo ............................................................................... C-5
E.2.4 Dual Mono ................................................................................. C-6
E.2.5 Surround Sound/5.1 .................................................................. C-6
E.2.6 Phase Aligned ........................................................................... C-6
C-1
Audio Coding
BLANK
C-2
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Audio Coding
C.1
A Brief Introduction to Audio Coding Standards
Where appropriate, the output Transport Stream can be made compliant with ATSC
A53(E) ATSC Digital Television Standard and DVB 101-154 v1.7.7.
C.1.1
MPEG
The Moving Pictures Experts Group (MPEG) was formed in 1988 to generate
compression techniques for audio and video. In the first version, ISO/IEC 11172-3
MPEG-1 audio, has a selection of two separate algorithms. MPEG-1 Layer I and II
were implementations of the MUSICAM algorithm and MPEG-1 Layer III (mp3) was
an implementation of the ASPEC algorithm. The algorithms have since been
improved and extended with other versions of MPEG.
C.1.2
MPEG-1 Layer I/II
This algorithm is similar to MUSICAM and only really differs in the structure of the
frame headers. Layer I is a restricted version of the full algorithm to allow a reduced
decoder to be developed. Hence, over time as the processing power of decoders
have increased by orders of magnitude, Layer I is no longer used for broadcast.
The algorithm creates 3 frames of 384 samples. Each small frame is divided into
sub-bands and these sub-bands can be coded for each frame or for all 3. There is
limited ability to allocate bits to different bands and there is no entropy coding of the
encoded samples so a relatively high bit rate is required to obtain a reasonable
quality.
C.1.3
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is an algorithm from Dolby that forms part of both the ATSC and DVB
standard for digital broadcasting. It is marketed under the name of Dolby Digital.
The encoder includes a psychoacoustic model to improve the quality. The signal is
divided into 32 multiple sub-bands, which correspond to the critical bands of the
human ear. The number of bits is fixed for each sub-band but there are additional
bits that can be allocated to any sub-band where encoding quality has suffered.
Dolby recommends stereo signals may be coded at 192 kbps, and 5.1 at 448 kbps
but other rates can be used if required.
The encoders have the ability to encode stereo and equivalent modes, and will also
pass through pre-compressed Dolby Digital (both stereo and multi-channel).
When in Dolby Digital Pass-through mode, glitch suppression is supported, where
the coding module monitors the encoded bitstream and if the framing structure is
incorrect, a valid silence frame or the last good frame is inserted in its place. If this
state occurs for more than a second, the encoder signals that the Dolby Digital
bitstream is corrupted.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
C-3
Audio Coding
C.1.4
SMPTE 302M: Mapping of AES3 Data into an MPEG-2 Transport Stream
Though not specifically a coding standard, this does define a method of carrying
AES3 uncompressed audio streams in an MPEG-2 transport stream. The AES
stream can contain non-audio data as well as uncompressed audio. This
mechanism can be used to carry Linear PCM audio, or Dolby E data.
C.1.5
Dolby E
Dolby E was developed by Dolby Laboratories. It allows up to 8 channels of Dolby E
compressed audio to be distributed over an existing 2 channel digital infrastructure.
The compression applied is less than that for consumer codecs (i.e. Dolby Digital),
so is better quality and the audio can be decompressed and re-compressed several
times. The Dolby E stream can also include metadata and timecode.
Dolby E frame duration is either equal to or double the duration of a video frame.
For interlaced formats the duration matches a video frame, but is double the frame
duration for progressive formats. This facilitates easier editing of video and audio in
the digital domain. Dolby E frames are generally aligned to video frames.
C.1.6
AAC (Advanced Audio Coding)
AAC was designed to be non-backwards-compatible to be able to achieve high
audio quality at a rate of 64 kbps/channel for 5.1 systems.
AAC consists of several tools other than those shown in the basic model:
•
Pre-processing – signal split into 4 equally sized frequency bands and their level
adjusted.
•
Filter bank – MDCT filter is used.
•
Temporal Noise Shaping (TNS) – pre-echo removal.
•
Intensity stereo coding / coupling stereo coding.
•
Prediction – intensity difference between the previous and current frames
coding.
There are three profiles (or versions) available:
C-4
•
Main (MP) - includes all of the tools that improve encoding efficiency.
•
Low Complexity (LC) - used for broadcast, which allows the pre-processing
and prediction tools to be discarded and the TNS complexity to be reduced.
Some tools are not allowed and others are restricted to enable this algorithm to
fit into the broadcast space.
•
Scalable Sample Rate (SSR) - maximises temporal resolution (getting the high
frequency sounds at the right time) at the expense of coding efficiency.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Audio Coding
AAC has specifically been designed to leave behind the baggage of Layers I and II
so that it can be more efficient. The time it takes to encode audio differs between the
profiles, MP being the most intensive and SSR the least.
C.1.7
HE AAC
This standard builds on the AAC. Some of the existing tools have been improved
and new ones added. All AAC objects (including the error robust modes) contain the
Perceptual Noise Substitution (PNS) tool. PNS detects noise in the signal and in the
final bit-stream a noise flag is raised and the power level of the noise stored. The
decoder generates a random noise of the level indicated, and inserts this into the
audio signal.
HE-AAC Formats
HE-AAC audio may be stored and streamed in many formats, which are described
in the standard. These include:
•
ADTS - This format places a header at the start of every audio frame, and
provides enough information for each frame to be independently decoded. It
contains a fixed and a variable header.
•
LATM/LOAS - As for ADTS this also places a header at the front of each audio
frame in such a way that each audio frame can be independently decoded. This
is the required format for compliant DVB streams (ETSI TS 101-154 v1.7.7) and
is available on the Encoder.
C.2
Audio Coding Modes
C.2.1
E.2.1 Mono
This mode has a single audio channel that is encoded independently. It is seldom
used in broadcast as most viewing devices now have stereo speakers or
headphones.
C.2.2
E.2.2 Stereo
This treats the incoming signal as separate left and right signals. Some coding
algorithms will look at the left and right signals and, depending on the correlation of
these will combine the signal into a mid and side channel to save on bits.
C.2.3
E.2.3 Joint Stereo
This option is available for MPEG 1 layer 2 only. This applies a technique called
intensity coding. The human ear is not as good at locating higher frequencies as it is
lower ones. The use of this mode may introduce more artefacts than stereo.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
C-5
Audio Coding
C.2.4
E.2.4 Dual Mono
Used if the left and right channels are carrying separate services. The encoder
knows that it must treat the two channels independently. The main use for this mode
is for multilingual transmission where decoder selects which language to decode on
left or right.
C.2.5
E.2.5 Surround Sound/5.1
A stereo signal produces a very focused audio field so unless the viewer is sitting in
the correct position, the audio reproduction suffers. More audio channels are
required to generate a larger audio field in which the viewer can listen.
The encoder expects the signal to arrive as:
C.2.6
•
AES 0 - Left, right (coded as a stereo pair).
•
AES 1 - Centre, Low Frequency Effect (coded as a mono channel with restricted
frequency on the LFE channel).
•
AES 2 - Left surround, right surround.
E.2.6 Phase Aligned
Note:
The feature “Phase Aligned Audio” is patent pending. An application for
patent has been filed in the Patent and Trademark Office.
This option is a proprietary feature of Ericsson Television, only available for MPEG1
Layer 2. It provides the capability of carrying 5.1 surround sound channels. This is
achieved by dual mono encoding of 3 pairs of audio channels.
In order to preserve the 5.1 surround image, phase alignment is critical, so audio
timing is much more tightly toleranced, with the audio timing between the surround
channels being sample accurate.
C-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D Alarm Lists
Annex D
Contents
D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
D.4.1
D.4.2
D.5
D.6
D.7
D.8
Alarms List – Base Chassis ................................................................ D-3
Alarms List – CE-a, CE-x Pre-Processor, CE-HEVC VCMs ................ D-8
Alarms List – CE-a J2K VCM............................................................ D-21
Alarms List – CE-xA VCM................................................................. D-25
CE-xA Pre-Processor Module ........................................................... D-25
CE-x and CE-xA (Encoder Module) .................................................. D-37
Alarms List – Satellite Modulator ...................................................... D-38
Alarms List – ASI I/O Option Card .................................................... D-40
Alarms List – G.703 Transceiver Card .............................................. D-41
Alarms List – GPI Card ..................................................................... D-42
List of Tables
Table D.1
Table D.2
Table D.3
Table D.4
Table D.5
Table D.6
Table D.7
Table D.8
Table D.9
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm List – Base Unit ........................................................................ D-3
Alarm List – CE-a, CE-x Pre-Processor, CE-HEVC VCMs .................. D-8
Alarm List – CE-a J2K VCM ............................................................. D-21
Alarm List – CE-xA VCM (CE-x Pre-Processor Module) ................... D-25
Alarm List – CE-x and CE-xA (Encoder Module) .............................. D-37
Alarm List – Satellite Modulator ........................................................ D-38
Alarm List – ASI I/O Option Card ...................................................... D-40
Alarm List – G.703 I/O Option Card .................................................. D-41
Alarm List – GPI Card....................................................................... D-42
D-1
Alarm Lists
BLANK
D-2
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
D.1
Alarms List – Base Chassis
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated within the Host
Controller of the unit.
Table D.1 Alarm List – Base Unit
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Ethernet interface Ctrl1 link
down on Control network
Ethernet interface Ctrl1 link down on
Control network
5
00000401
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Ctrl1 on
Control network: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Ctrl1 on Control
network: duplicate IP detected
5
0000040C
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Ctrl2 link
down on Control network
Ethernet interface Ctrl2 link down on
Control network
6
00000402
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Ctrl2 on
Control network: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Ctrl2 on Control
network: duplicate IP detected
6
0000040D
Base Unit
major
Control Network Lost
Control Network Lost
00000410
Base Unit
critical
Virtual IP address on Control
network: duplicate IP detected
Virtual IP address on Control
network: duplicate IP detected
00000407
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data3 link
down in Data Interface Group 34
Ethernet interface Data3 link down in
Data Interface Group 3-4
3
00000405
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data3 in Data
Interface Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Data3 in Data
Interface Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected
3
0000040A
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data4 link
down in Data Interface Group 34
Ethernet interface Data4 link down in
Data Interface Group 3-4
4
00000406
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data4 in Data
Interface Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Data4 in Data
Interface Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected
4
0000040B
Base Unit
major
Data Interface Group 3-4: Data
Network Lost
Data Interface Group 3-4: Data
Network Lost
00000411
Base Unit
critical
Virtual IP address on Data
Interface Group 3-4: duplicate IP
detected
Virtual IP address on Data Interface
Group 3-4: duplicate IP detected
0000040E
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data1 link
down in Data Interface Group 12
Ethernet interface Data1 link down in
Data Interface Group 1-2
1
00000403
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data1 in Data
Interface Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Data1 in Data
Interface Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected
1
00000408
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data2 link
down in Data Interface Group 12
Ethernet interface Data2 link down in
Data Interface Group 1-2
2
00000404
Base Unit
major
Ethernet interface Data2 in Data
Interface Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected
Ethernet interface Data2 in Data
Interface Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected
2
00000409
Base Unit
major
Data Interface Group 1-2: Data
Network Lost
Data Interface Group 1-2: Data
Network Lost
00000412
Base Unit
critical
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-3
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Virtual IP address on Data
Interface Group 1-2: duplicate IP
detected
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Virtual IP address on Data Interface
Group 1-2: duplicate IP detected
0000040F
Base Unit
major
Primary Ethernet interface not in
use on Control Network
Primary Ethernet interface not in use
on Control Network
00000413
Base Unit
major
Primary Ethernet interface not in
use on Data Interface Group 3-4
Primary Ethernet interface not in use
on Data Interface Group 3-4
00000414
Base Unit
major
Primary Ethernet interface not in
use on Data Interface Group 1-2
Primary Ethernet interface not in use
on Data Interface Group 1-2
00000415
Base Unit
major
Network Configuration failed
Failed to configure Network setting.
Using default network configuration
00000418
Base Unit
critical
Network Configuration failed
Failed to configure Network setting.
Unit reboot might rectify it
00000419
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
01000421
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
02000421
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
03000421
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
04000421
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
05000421
Base Unit
critical
Option card failed to boot
The card did not boot. It may be
faulty.
0
06000421
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
01000422
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
02000422
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
03000422
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
04000422
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
05000422
Base Unit
critical
Option Card Comms Failure in
slot
An option card failed to respond to
the host.
0
06000422
Base Unit
critical
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
01000440
Base Unit
critical
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
02000440
Base Unit
critical
D-4
Port Number
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
03000440
Base Unit
critical
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
04000440
Base Unit
critical
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
05000440
Base Unit
critical
HW Configuration Mismatch in
slot
The option card fitted does not
match that of the expected
configuration. This alarm can be
cleared by accepting the config in
the Option Slots menu.
0
06000440
Base Unit
critical
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
01000439
Base Unit
minor
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
02000439
Base Unit
minor
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
03000439
Base Unit
minor
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
04000439
Base Unit
minor
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
05000439
Base Unit
minor
Unrecognized Option Card in
slot
The id prom of the option could not
be read correctly.
0
06000439
Base Unit
minor
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 1
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
01000461
Base Unit
critical
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 2
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
02000461
Base Unit
critical
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 3
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
03000461
Base Unit
critical
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 4
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
04000461
Base Unit
critical
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 5
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
05000461
Base Unit
critical
Referenced Output Stream
Unavailable from slot 6
An option card is not installed in the
specified slot or it cannot provide the
requested output stream.
0
06000461
Base Unit
critical
Fan Failure
Permanent damage may be caused
by running the unit whilst the fans
are not working.
0
00000441
Base Unit
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-5
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
00000442
Base Unit
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
00000443
Base Unit
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems amy be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
00000444
Base Unit
minor
+12V A Failed
+12V A rail has failed. Please check
supply or contact Customer Support.
0
00000445
Base Unit
warning
+12V B Failed
+12V B rail has failed. Please check
supply or contact Customer Support.
0
00000446
Base Unit
warning
Real Time Clock
The Real-time clock has failed. The
time/date will not be stored between
power-ups.
0
00000447
Base Unit
minor
NTP Server Response Timeout
The unit could not contact the NTP
Server. The time/date will drift over
time.
0
00000448
Base Unit
warning
Internal Hardware Issue
An Internal Hardware Issue has
occured. The system may not
function properly.
0
00000449
Base Unit
minor
Host Build Version Mismatch
Host software is not at an officially
released version. Host function may
not be affected.
0
0000044A
Base Unit
minor
System Clock Not Locked
The system 27 MHz VCXO is not
locked. Check if the Mux SCR
Source is valid.
0
0000044B
Base Unit
minor
Chassis Identity Not
Programmed
The chassis identity of the host
could not be read correctly.
0
0000044C
Base Unit
minor
Selected Mux SCR Source is not
present
Selected Mux SCR Source could not
be detected. Check if the Sync Card
is plugged in.
0
0000044D
Base Unit
minor
Host Identity Not Programmed
The host identity could not be read
correctly.
0
0000044E
Base Unit
major
Uncontrolled release
This combination of host and option
card software is not officially
supported. This may lead to
unexpected behavior.
0
0000044F
Base Unit
minor
No identity license
This unit has not been licensed with
an identity.
0
00000450
Base Unit
critical
TS NIT is not valid
At one or more TS the Send
extended NIT (SIRG) parameter is
switched On, and one or more of the
parameters Operator, Longitude or
Latitude have invalid values.
0
00000680
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 1 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000451
Base Unit
major
D-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 2 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000452
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 3 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000453
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 4 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000454
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 5 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000455
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Option Card
The Option Card in Slot 6 is not
supported with this software release.
This may lead to unexpected
behaviour.
o
00000456
Base Unit
major
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 1 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
00000457
Base Unit
warning
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 2 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
00000458
Base Unit
warning
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 3 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
00000459
Base Unit
warning
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 4 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
0000045A
Base Unit
warning
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 5 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
0000045B
Base Unit
warning
Unsupported Software on Option
Card
The Option Card in Slot 6 has
unsupported software. Considering
updating with the latest supported
software. Otherwise it may lead to
unexpected behaviour.
0
0000045C
Base Unit
warning
PCR Exchange message
timeout
PCR exchange message has not
arrived.
0
00000690
Reflex
controller
warning
Status message timeout
Status message has not arrived.
0
00000691
Reflex
controller
warning
Reflex StatMux algorithm failed.
Reflex statistical multiplexing
algorithm returned with an error.
0
00000692
Reflex
controller
warning
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-7
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
MGP Failure
Failed to go online, previous online
device preventing transmission
0
00000491
Base Unit
major
MGP Collision
Potential duplicate transmission
detected
0
00000492
Base Unit
major
MGP Spurious
Spurious MSM packet detected
0
00000493
Base Unit
minor
CSM Contact lost
No CSMs received from Control
System
0
00000680
Base Unit
minor
Datagram loss is greater than 0
The datagram loss rate for the
Transport Stream is greater than 0.
1
000006B0 –
0000073F
Base Unit
major
Sequence number errors in
Transport Stream
There are sequence number errors
in the Transport Stream.
1
000007B0 –
0000083E
Base Unit
major
No data available for Input
Transport Stream
Both Primary and Backup Input
Transport Streams have failed.
1
00000500 –
0000057F
Base Unit
critical
Input Transport Stream running
on Backup
Primary Input Transport Stream has
failed.
1
00000580 –
000005FF
Base Unit
warning
Input Transport Stream missing
Input Transport Stream has failed.
1
00000601 –
0000067F
Base Unit
major
D.2
Alarms List – CE-a, CE-x Pre-Processor, CE-HEVC
VCMs
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated by the Encoding
VCM.
Note:
The first two bits of the AlarmID specify the slot number that the card raising
the alarm is fitted in (01 to 06)
Table D.2 Alarm List – CE-a, CE-x Pre-Processor, CE-HEVC VCMs
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
010C0000
VCM
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
010C0001
VCM
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
Video/Audio Module. Please see
Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0002
VCM
Module
critical
Video/Audio Module Error
Video/Audio Module Error. Please
see Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0003
VCM
Module
critical
D-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
010C0004
VCM
Module
critical
Video Processor Warning
A minor error occurred on the Video
processor but services are not
affected. See log for more details
0
010C0005
VCM
Module
warning
Invalid Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied. Check Video Standard and
Profile selection.
0
010C0006
VCM
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
010C0007
VCM
Module
minor
Video Processor Error
An error has been detected on the
Video Processor. This will affect
services and the error is being
recovered. See log for more details.
1
010C0008
VCM
Module
critical
Video Processor Failure
An unrecoverable failure has
occured on the Video Processor.
The services are affected and
intervention is required. See log for
more details
1
010C000A
VCM
Module
critical
Internal Packetizer Error
A packetizer error has occurred on
at least one stream.
1
010C0009
VCM
Module
warning
Video Processor Boot Failure
At least one video processor has not
booted
1
010C7FE0
VCM
Module
critical
Video Processor Alive Count
Failure
At least one video processor has not
incremented its alive count
1
010C7FE1
VCM
Module
critical
Video 1 Input Lock
No valid video found on video input.
Please check source connection.
1
010C4000
VCM
Module
critical
Video 1 Logo display error
There has been a problem when
attempting to display the logo.
Please check the logo file that has
been uploaded and X,Y position.
1
010C4001
VCM
Module
minor
VBI teletext not detected on
input
Unable to find teletext data on all of
the configured lines. Please check
the video input. For more details on
the type of VBI, see the VBI status
page.
1
010C4008
VBI
minor
VBI video index not detected on
input
Unable to find video index data on
any of the configured lines. Please
check the video input. For more
details on the type of VBI, see the
VBI status page.
1
010C4009
VBI
minor
VBI CC608 closed captions not
detected on input
Unable to find closed caption data
on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400A
VBI
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-9
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
VBI ANC334 closed captions not
detected on input
Unable to find closed caption data
on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400B
VBI
minor
VBI WSS not detected on input
Unable to find WSS (ETSI or AFD)
data on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400C
VBI
minor
VITC not detected on input
Unable to find VITC data on any of
the configured lines. Please check
the video input. For more details on
the type of VBI, see the VBI status
page.
1
010C400D
VBI
minor
Selected Time code source not
detected
For the selected Time code source
no Time code was found. If in auto
mode no source was found on any
input. Make sure that the correct
source is configured.
1
010C400E
VBI
minor
ANC Bar not detected on input
ANC Bar data extraction is on but no
ANC Bar data is present
1
010C400F
VBI
minor
OP-47 not detected on input
OP-47 data extraction is on but no
OP-47 data is present
1
010C4010
VBI
minor
Max ANC Data Rate Exceeded
The maximum bit-rate of the generic
ANC data output is exceeded. A
lower input ANC data rate is
required.
1
010C4011
VBI
warning
VPS not detected on input
Unable to find VPS data on any
of the configured lines. Please
check the video input. For more
details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page
1
010C4012
VBI
minor
Video 1 Encode Invalid
Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied to Main Channel. Check
Video Standard and Profile
selection.
0
010C4018
VCM
Module
minor
Advanced Parameters
Advanced Encode Parameters are in
use.
0
010C401C
VCM
Module
warning
Reflex PCR Exchange Timeout
PCR Exchange message not
received within timeout period
1
010C4020
VCM
Module
warning
Reflex SetRate Msg Timeout
Set Rate message not received
within timeout period
1
010C4021
VCM
Module
warning
Reflex Apply-Time out of range
Set Rate message received that is
too late to be applied, or is more
than 5 seconds early. The alarm is
cleared by the reception of a valid
Set Rate message, or Reflex being
disabled
1
010C4022
VCM
Module
warning
D-10
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Reflex Source Identifier
Unstable
The online source identifier has
changed twice in the last three
messages received
1
010C4023
VCM
Module
warning
Reflex Source Identifier
Mismatch
The online source identifier in the set
rate messages does not match the
source identifier in the pcr exchange
messages. (The alarm is only raised
if this has occurred in two
consecutive PCR exchange
messages)
1
010C4024
VCM
Module
warning
Reflex Tracking PCR Exchange
Timeout
PCR Exchange message not
received from online encoder within
timeout period
1
010C4025
VCM
Module
warning
Audio Module Error
The audio module reported an
unexpected status value.
0
010C3FE0
Audio
Module 1
minor
Audio Module CPU loading
The audio module CPU load is too
high to support the current audio
configuration.
0
010C3FE1
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio DSP Failed to Boot
The audio DSP has failed to boot
0
010C3FE2
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio 1 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2000
Audio 1
major
Audio 1 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2001
Audio 1
major
Audio 1 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2002
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2003
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2004
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2005
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2006
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2007
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2008
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2009
Audio 1
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-11
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 1 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C200a
Audio 1
minor
Audio 2 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2020
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2021
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2022
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2023
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2024
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2025
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2026
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2027
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2028
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2029
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C202A
Audio 2
minor
Audio 3 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2040
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2041
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2042
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2043
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2044
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2045
Audio 3
minor
D-12
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 3 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2046
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2047
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2048
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2049
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C204A
Audio 3
minor
Audio 4 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2060
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2061
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2062
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2063
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2064
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2065
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2066
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2067
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2068
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2069
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C206A
Audio 4
minor
Audio 5 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2080
Audio 5
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-13
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 5 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2081
Audio 5
major
Audio 5 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2082
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2083
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2084
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2085
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2086
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2087
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2088
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2089
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C208A
Audio 5
minor
Audio 6 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20A0
Audio 6
major
Audio 6 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20A1
Audio 6
major
Audio 6 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20A2
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20A3
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20A4
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20A5
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20A6
Audio 6
minor
D-14
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 6 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20A7
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20A8
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20A9
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20AA
Audio 6
minor
Audio 7 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20C0
Audio 7
major
Audio 7 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20C1
Audio 7
major
Audio 7 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20C2
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20C3
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20C4
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20C5
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20C6
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20C7
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20C8
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20C9
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20CA
Audio 7
minor
Audio 8 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20E0
Audio 8
major
Audio 8 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20E1
Audio 8
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-15
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 8 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20E2
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20E3
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20E4
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20E5
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20E6
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20E7
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20E8
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20E9
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20EA
Audio 8
minor
Audio 9 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2100
Audio 9
major
Audio 9 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2101
Audio 9
major
Audio 9 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2102
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2103
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2104
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2105
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2106
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2107
Audio 9
minor
D-16
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 9 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2108
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2109
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C210A
Audio 9
minor
Audio 10 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2120
Audio 10
major
Audio 10 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2121
Audio 10
major
Audio 10 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2122
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2123
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2124
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2125
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2126
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2127
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2128
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2129
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C212A
Audio 10
minor
Audio 11 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2140
Audio 11
major
Audio 11 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2141
Audio 11
major
Audio 11 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2142
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2143
Audio 11
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-17
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 11 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2144
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2145
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2146
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2147
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2148
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2149
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C214A
Audio 11
minor
Audio 12 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2160
Audio 12
major
Audio 12 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2161
Audio 12
major
Audio 12 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2162
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2163
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2164
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2165
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2166
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2167
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2168
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2169
Audio 12
minor
D-18
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 12 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C216A
Audio 12
minor
Audio 13 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2180
Audio 13
major
Audio 13 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2181
Audio 13
major
Audio 13 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2182
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2183
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2184
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2185
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2186
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2187
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2188
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2189
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C218A
Audio 13
minor
Audio 14 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21A0
Audio 14
major
Audio 14 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21A1
Audio 14
major
Audio 14 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21A2
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21A3
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21A4
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21A5
Audio 14
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-19
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 14 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21A6
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21A7
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21A8
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21A9
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21AA
Audio 14
minor
Audio 15 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21C0
Audio 15
major
Audio 15 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21C1
Audio 15
major
Audio 15 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21C2
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21C3
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21C4
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21C5
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21C6
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21C7
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21C8
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21C9
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21CA
Audio 15
minor
Audio 16 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21E0
Audio 16
major
D-20
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 16 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21E1
Audio 16
major
Audio 16 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21E2
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21E3
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21E4
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21E5
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21E6
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21E7
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21E8
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21E9
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21EA
Audio 16
minor
D.3
Alarms List – CE-a J2K VCM
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated by the CE-a J2K
VCM.
Table D.3 Alarm List – CE-a J2K VCM
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
010C0000
CE-a J2K
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
010C0001
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
Video/Audio Module. Please see
Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0002
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-21
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Video/Audio Module Error
Video/Audio Module Error. Please
see Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0003
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
010C0004
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Video Processor Warning
A minor error occurred on the Video
processor but services are not
affected. See log for more details
0
010C0005
CE-a J2K
Module
minor
Invalid Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied. Check Video Standard and
Profile selection.
0
010C0006
CE-a J2K
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
010C0007
CE-a J2K
Module
minor
Video Processor Error
An error has been detected on the
Video Processor. This will affect
services and the error is being
recovered. See log for more details.
0
010C0008
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Internal Packetizer Error
A packetizer error has occurred on
at least one stream.
1
010C0009
CE-a J2K
Module
warning
Video Processor Failure
An unrecoverable failure has
occured on the Video Processor.
The services are affected and
intervention is required. See log for
more details
1
010C000A
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Video Processor Boot Failure
At least one video processor has not
booted
1
010C0FE0
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Video Processor Alive Count
Failure
At least one video processor has not
incremented its alive count
1
010C0FE1
CE-a J2K
Module
critical
Video 1 Input Lock
No valid video found on video input.
Please check source connection.
1
010C4000
CE-a J2K
critical
Max ANC Data Rate Exceeded
The maximum bit-rate of the generic
ANC data output is exceeded. A
lower input ANC data rate is
required.
1
010C4011
VBI
warning
Video 1 Encode Invalid
Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied to Main Channel. Check
Video Standard and Profile
selection.
0
010C4018
CE-a J2K
minor
Audio Module Error
The audio module reported an
unexpected status value.
0
010C3FE0
Audio
Module 1
minor
Audio Module CPU loading
The audio module CPU load is too
high to support the current audio
configuration.
0
010C3FE1
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio DSP Failed to Boot
The audio DSP has failed to boot
0
010C3FE2
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio 1 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2000
Audio 1
major
Audio 1 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2001
Audio 1
major
D-22
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 1 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2002
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2003
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2004
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2005
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2006
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2007
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2008
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2009
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C200a
Audio 1
minor
Audio 2 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2020
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2021
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2022
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2023
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2024
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2025
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2026
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2027
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2028
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2029
Audio 2
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-23
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 2 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C202A
Audio 2
minor
Audio 3 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2040
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2041
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2042
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2043
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2044
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2045
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2046
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2047
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2048
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2049
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C204A
Audio 3
minor
Audio 4 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2060
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2061
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2062
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2063
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2064
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2065
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2066
Audio 4
minor
D-24
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 4 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2067
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2068
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2069
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C206A
Audio 4
minor
D.4
Alarms List – CE-xA VCM
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated by the CE-xA
VCM.
D.4.1
CE-xA Pre-Processor Module
Table D.4 Alarm List – CE-xA VCM (CE-x Pre-Processor Module)
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
010C0000
CE-x
Analogue
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
010C0001
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
Video/Audio Module. Please see
Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0002
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
Video/Audio Module Error
Video/Audio Module Error. Please
see Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010C0003
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
010C0004
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
Invalid Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied. Check Video Standard and
Profile selection.
0
010C0006
CE-x
Analogue
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
010C0007
CE-x
Analogue
Module
minor
Video Processor Error
An error has been detected on the
Video Processor. This will affect
services and the error is being
recovered. See log for more details.
1
010C0008
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-25
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Internal Packetizer Error
A packetizer error has occurred on
at least one stream.
1
010C0009
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Video Processor Failure
An unrecoverable failure has
occured on the Video Processor.
The services are affected and
intervention is required. See log for
more details
1
010C000A
CE-x
Analogue
Module
critical
Video Processor Boot Failure
At least one video processor has not
booted
1
010C7FE0
Video
Module
critical
Video Processor Alive Count
Failure
At least one video processor has not
incremented its alive count
1
010C7FE1
Video
Module
critical
Video 1 Input Lock
No valid video found on video input.
Please check source connection.
1
010C4000
CE-x
Analogue
critical
Video 1 Logo display error
There has been a problem when
attempting to display the logo.
Please check the logo file that has
been uploaded and X,Y position.
1
010C4001
CE-x
Analogue
minor
VBI teletext not detected on
input
Unable to find teletext data on all of
the configured lines. Please check
the video input. For more details on
the type of VBI, see the VBI status
page.
1
010C4008
VBI
minor
VBI video index not detected on
input
Unable to find video index data on
any of the configured lines. Please
check the video input. For more
details on the type of VBI, see the
VBI status page.
1
010C4009
VBI
minor
VBI CC608 closed captions not
detected on input
Unable to find closed caption data
on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400A
VBI
minor
VBI ANC334 closed captions not
detected on input
Unable to find closed caption data
on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400B
VBI
minor
VBI WSS not detected on input
Unable to find WSS (ETSI or AFD)
data on any of the configured lines.
Please check the video input. For
more details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page.
1
010C400C
VBI
minor
VITC not detected on input
Unable to find VITC data on any of
the configured lines. Please check
the video input. For more details on
the type of VBI, see the VBI status
page.
1
010C400D
VBI
minor
Selected Time code source not
detected
For the selected Time code source
no Time code was found. If in auto
mode no source was found on any
input. Make sure that the correct
source is configured.
1
010C400E
VBI
minor
ANC Bar not detected on input
ANC Bar data extraction is on but no
ANC Bar data is present
1
010C400F
VBI
minor
D-26
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
OP-47 not detected on input
OP-47 data extraction is on but no
OP-47 data is present
1
010C4010
VBI
minor
Max ANC Data Rate Exceeded
The maximum bit-rate of the generic
ANC data output is exceeded. A
lower input ANC data rate is
required.
1
010C4011
VBI
warning
VPS not detected on input
Unable to find VPS data on any
of the configured lines. Please
check the video input. For more
details on the type of VBI, see
the VBI status page
1
010C4012
VBI
minor
Video 1 Encode Invalid
Configuration
An invalid configuration has been
applied to Main Channel. Check
Video Standard and Profile
selection.
0
010C4018
CE-x
Analogue
minor
Reflex PCR Exchange Timeout
PCR Exchange message not
received within timeout period
1
010C4020
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Reflex SetRate Msg Timeout
Set Rate message not received
within timeout period
1
010C4021
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Reflex Apply-Time out of range
Set Rate message received that is
too late to be applied, or is more
than 5 seconds early. The alarm is
cleared by the reception of a valid
Set Rate message, or Reflex being
disabled
1
010C4022
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Reflex Source Identifier
Unstable
The online source identifier has
changed twice in the last three
messages received
1
010C4023
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Reflex Source Identifier
Mismatch
The online source identifier in the set
rate messages does not match the
source identifier in the pcr exchange
messages. (The alarm is only raised
if this has occurred in two
consecutive PCR exchange
messages)
1
010C4024
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Reflex Tracking PCR Exchange
Timeout
PCR Exchange message not
received from online encoder within
timeout period
1
010C4025
CE-x
Analogue
Module
warning
Audio Module Error
The audio module reported an
unexpected status value.
0
010C3FE0
Audio
Module 1
minor
Audio Module CPU loading
The audio module CPU load is too
high to support the current audio
configuration.
0
010C3FE1
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio DSP Failed to Boot
The audio DSP has failed to boot
0
010C3FE2
Audio
Module 1
major
Audio 1 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2000
Audio 1
major
Audio 1 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2001
Audio 1
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-27
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 1 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2002
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2003
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2004
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2005
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2006
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2007
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2008
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2009
Audio 1
minor
Audio 1 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C200a
Audio 1
minor
Audio 2 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2020
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2021
Audio 2
major
Audio 2 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2022
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2023
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2024
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2025
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2026
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2027
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2028
Audio 2
minor
Audio 2 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2029
Audio 2
minor
D-28
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 2 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C202A
Audio 2
minor
Audio 3 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2040
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2041
Audio 3
major
Audio 3 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2042
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2043
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2044
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2045
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2046
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2047
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2048
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2049
Audio 3
minor
Audio 3 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C204A
Audio 3
minor
Audio 4 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2060
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2061
Audio 4
major
Audio 4 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2062
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2063
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2064
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2065
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2066
Audio 4
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-29
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 4 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2067
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2068
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2069
Audio 4
minor
Audio 4 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C206A
Audio 4
minor
Audio 5 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2080
Audio 5
major
Audio 5 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2081
Audio 5
major
Audio 5 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2082
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2083
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2084
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2085
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2086
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2087
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2088
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2089
Audio 5
minor
Audio 5 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C208A
Audio 5
minor
Audio 6 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20A0
Audio 6
major
Audio 6 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20A1
Audio 6
major
Audio 6 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20A2
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20A3
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20A4
Audio 6
minor
D-30
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 6 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20A5
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20A6
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20A7
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20A8
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20A9
Audio 6
minor
Audio 6 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20AA
Audio 6
minor
Audio 7 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20C0
Audio 7
major
Audio 7 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20C1
Audio 7
major
Audio 7 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20C2
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20C3
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20C4
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20C5
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20C6
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20C7
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20C8
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20C9
Audio 7
minor
Audio 7 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20CA
Audio 7
minor
Audio 8 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C20E0
Audio 8
major
Audio 8 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C20E1
Audio 8
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-31
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 8 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C20E2
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C20E3
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C20E4
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C20E5
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C20E6
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C20E7
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C20E8
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C20E9
Audio 8
minor
Audio 8 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C20EA
Audio 8
minor
Audio 9 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2100
Audio 9
major
Audio 9 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2101
Audio 9
major
Audio 9 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2102
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Input frame CRC failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2103
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2104
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2105
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2106
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 Dolby E metadata frame
rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2107
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2108
Audio 9
minor
Audio 9 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2109
Audio 9
minor
D-32
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 9 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C210A
Audio 9
minor
Audio 10 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2120
Audio 10
major
Audio 10 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2121
Audio 10
major
Audio 10 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2122
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2123
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2124
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2125
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2126
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2127
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2128
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2129
Audio 10
minor
Audio 10 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C212A
Audio 10
minor
Audio 11 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2140
Audio 11
major
Audio 11 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2141
Audio 11
major
Audio 11 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2142
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2143
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2144
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2145
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2146
Audio 11
minor
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-33
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 11 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2147
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2148
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2149
Audio 11
minor
Audio 11 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C214A
Audio 11
minor
Audio 12 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2160
Audio 12
major
Audio 12 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2161
Audio 12
major
Audio 12 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2162
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2163
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2164
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2165
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2166
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2167
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2168
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2169
Audio 12
minor
Audio 12 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C216A
Audio 12
minor
Audio 13 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C2180
Audio 13
major
Audio 13 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C2181
Audio 13
major
Audio 13 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C2182
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C2183
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C2184
Audio 13
minor
D-34
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 13 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C2185
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C2186
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C2187
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C2188
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C2189
Audio 13
minor
Audio 13 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C218A
Audio 13
minor
Audio 14 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21A0
Audio 14
major
Audio 14 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21A1
Audio 14
major
Audio 14 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21A2
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21A3
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21A4
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21A5
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21A6
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21A7
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21A8
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21A9
Audio 14
minor
Audio 14 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21AA
Audio 14
minor
Audio 15 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21C0
Audio 15
major
Audio 15 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21C1
Audio 15
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-35
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 15 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21C2
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21C3
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21C4
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21C5
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21C6
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21C7
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21C8
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21C9
Audio 15
minor
Audio 15 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21CA
Audio 15
minor
Audio 16 Input lock
No valid audio detected on selected
input. Please check source
connection.
0
010C21E0
Audio 16
major
Audio 16 TS input error
Incoming transport stream error.
Please check source TS.
0
010C21E1
Audio 16
major
Audio 16 Compressed audio not
detected
Compressed audio not detected on
input. Please check source
connection and source format.
0
010C21E2
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Input frame CRC
failure
CRC error in compressed input
frame. Output is muted.
0
010C21E3
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Unsupported sample
rate
Unsupported sample rate at decoder
output.
0
010C21E4
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E program not
present
Program not present in Dolby E
stream.
0
010C21E5
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E alignment
Dolby E frames not properly aligned
to video frames. May glitch on frame
drop/repeat and video may not be
aligned to audio.
0
010C21E6
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 Dolby E metadata
frame rate mismatch
Frame rate indicated in Dolby E
metadata does not match current
video frame rate.
0
010C21E7
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 ADS control track
Control track for audio description
not present.
0
010C21E8
Audio 16
minor
Audio 16 ADS silence
Silent period detected. Valid only for
Audio Description Service encoding.
0
010C21E9
Audio 16
minor
D-36
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Audio 16 Clipping
Audio output is clipping. Audio gain
value or input amplitude should be
reduced.
0
010C21EA
Audio 16
minor
D.4.2
CE-x and CE-xA (Encoder Module)
Table D.5 Alarm List – CE-x and CE-xA (Encoder Module)
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
010D0000
Encoder
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
010D0001
Encoder
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
Video/Audio Module. Please see
Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010D0002
Encoder
Module
critical
Video/Audio Module Error
Video/Audio Module Error. Please
see Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
010D0003
Encoder
Module
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
010D0004
Encoder
Module
critical
Internal HW Information
HW reported an unexpected status
value. This does not affect normal
operation of the unit.
0
010D0005
Encoder
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
010D0007
Encoder
Module
minor
Video DSP Not Alive
Video DSP alive count not
incremented
1
010D0008
Encoder
Module
critical
Failed to Configure Device
FPGA load failed
1
010D0009
Encoder
Module
critical
Inter–card Link Error
See logs for further information
1
010D000D
Encoder
Module
critical
Lookahead Data Error
See logs for further information
1
010D000E
Encoder
Module
critical
Video Buffer Error
See logs for further information
1
010D000F
Encoder
Module
critical
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-37
Alarm Lists
D.5
Alarms List – Satellite Modulator
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated within the Media
Processing Module (MPM).
Table D.6 Alarm List – Satellite Modulator
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive
0
060F0001
Satellite
Modulator
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support
0
060F0002
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version
0
060F0008
Satellite
Modulator
minor
FPGA PLL Unlocked
FPGA PLL unlocked
0
060F000A
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Reference Clock Unlocked
10 MHz reference clock PLL
unlocked when Clock Reference set
to external
0
060F000B
Satellite
Modulator
minor
Clock PLL Unlocked
Clock generator PLL unlocked. This
alarm automatically turns off the IF
and L-band outputs
0
060F000C
Satellite
Modulator
critical
PSU Failed
12V power supply failed
0
060F001B
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Host SCR Sync Failed
Host SCR Sync Failed
0
060F0026
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Un-calibrated
Failed to load calibration data. Using
default data set. The RF output is
still present, but performance may
be degraded below published
specifications. For data recovery
please contact Customer Support
0
060F0027
Satellite
Modulator
major
Stream Input Data Rate Low
Stream input data rate low
0
060F000D
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Stream Input Data Rate High
Stream input data rate high
0
060F000E
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Primary Stream MPEG Sync Fail
Primary Stream MPEG sync fail
0
060F000F
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Secondary Stream MPEG Sync
Fail
Secondary Stream MPEG sync fail
0
060F0010
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Primary Stream BBFRAME Sync
Fail
Primary Stream BBFRAME sync fail
0
060F0011
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Secondary Stream BBFRAME
Sync Fail
Secondary Stream BBFRAME sync
fail
0
060F0012
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Input Buffer Overflow
Input buffer overflow
0
060F0013
Satellite
Modulator
critical
D-38
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Input Buffer Underflow
Input buffer Underflow
0
060F0014
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Primary Input Not Selected
Primary input not selected when
Input Mode is set to automatic
0
060F001F
Satellite
Modulator
major
Primary Stream BB Frame
Illegal MODCOD
Primary Stream BB Frame Illegal
MODCOD
0
060F0015
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Secondary Stream BB Frame
Illegal MODCOD
Secondary Stream BB Frame Illegal
MODCOD
0
060F0016
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Primary Stream BB Header
Error
Primary Stream BB Header Error
0
060F0017
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Secondary Stream BB Header
Error
Secondary Stream BB Header Error
0
060F0018
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Numeric Overflow I
I channel numeric overflow
0
060F001D
Satellite
Modulator
major
Numeric Overflow Q
Q channel numeric overflow
0
060F001E
Satellite
Modulator
major
DVB-S2 TS1 buffer overflow
DVB-S2 TS1 buffer overflow
0
060F0020
Satellite
Modulator
critical
DVB-S2 TS2 buffer overflow
DVB-S2 TS2 buffer overflow
0
060F0021
Satellite
Modulator
critical
DVB-S2 BB1 buffer overflow
DVB-S2 BB1 buffer overflow
0
060F0022
Satellite
Modulator
critical
DVB-S2 BB2 buffer overflow
DVB-S2 BB2 buffer overflow
0
060F0023
Satellite
Modulator
critical
DVB-S2 BB multiplex buffer
overflow
DVB-S2 BB multiplex buffer overflow
0
060F0024
Satellite
Modulator
critical
L-Band Carrier Frequency
Unlocked
L-band carrier frequency synthesizer
unlocked. This alarm automatically
turns off the L-band output.
0
060F0019
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Up-converter Power Shutdown
Up-converter Power Shutdown
0
060F001A
Satellite
Modulator
major
OCXO Fault
The satellite modulator’s on-board
precision oscillator has
malfunctioned. This alarm
automatically turns off the IF and
L-band outputs.
0
060F0028
Satellite
Modulator
critical
Contact Ericsson Service personnel
as the unit should be returned for
repair.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-39
Alarm Lists
D.6
Alarms List – ASI I/O Option Card
Table D.7 Alarm List – ASI I/O Option Card
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
01110001
ASI IO
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
01110002
ASI IO
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
ASI IO Module. Please see Video
Encoder status for a more detailed
description of the error.
0
01110003
ASI IO
Module
critical
Module Error
Option Card Error. Please see log
for a more detailed description of the
error.
0
01110004
ASI IO
Module
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
01110006
ASI IO
Module
critical
Internal HW Information
HW reported an unexpected status
value. This does not affect normal
operation of the unit.
0
01110007
ASI IO
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
01110008
ASI IO
Module
minor
ASI Output-1 Error
An error has occurred in ASI Output
1. See the log for more details.
0
01110020
ASI Output
critical
ASI Output-2 Error
An error has occurred in ASI Output
2. See the log for more details.
0
01110120
ASI Output
critical
ASI Input-1 TS Lock Error
No valid Transport Stream found on
ASI Input 1. ASI input possibly
corrupt
0
01110030
ASI Input 1
critical
ASI Input-1 Error
An error has occurred on ASI Input
1. See the log for more details.
0
01110040
ASI Input 1
minor
ASI Input-2 TS Lock Error
No valid Transport Stream found on
ASI Input 2. ASI input possibly
corrupt
0
01110130
ASI Input 2
critical
ASI Input-2 Error
An error has occurred on ASI Input
2. See the log for more details.
0
01110140
ASI Input 2
minor
D-40
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
D.7
Alarms List – G.703 Transceiver Card
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated by the G.703
Transceiver card.
Table D.8 Alarm List – G.703 I/O Option Card
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
01120001
G.703 I/O
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch it off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
01120002
G.703 I/O
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid parameter received by the
Transceiver Card. Please see G.703
I/O Status for a more detailed
description of the error.
0
01120003
G.703 I/O
critical
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this option card is
not an officially released version.
0
01120008
G.703 I/O
minor
CLAD Loss Of Lock failure
SCT Clock Rate Adapter PLL not
locked to internal clock reference
(hardware error). Please refer to
Customer Support.
1
01120010
G.703 I/O
critical
Loss Of Signal (LOS) failure
No input or input signal level is too
low (>24dB below nominal). Please
check the G.703 Input port. Cable
might be faulty or too long.
1
01120020
G.703 I/O
major
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
failure
Malfunction of far-end G.703
terminal. Please see FEAC
indication (if available) under G.703
I/O Status for details.
1
01120021
G.703 I/O
major
Loss of Frame (LOF) failure
DS3 frame synchronization loss.
Framing might have been disabled
in the transmission.
1
01120022
G.703 I/O
major
Remote Alarm Indication (RAI)
failure
Defects (LOS, LOF or AIS) detected
at far-end G.703 terminal input.
Please see FEAC indication (if
available) under G.703 I/O Status for
details.
1
01120023
G.703 I/O
warning
Loss of Cell Delineation (LCD)
failure
Indefinite ATM cell boundaries. ATM
encapsulation might have been
disabled in the transmission.
1
01120024
G.703 I/O
major
Corrupt Payload failure
ATM FEC schemes error correction
capability exceeded. Too many ATM
cell losses and/or too long errored
blocks in the transmission.
1
01120025
G.703 I/O
major
Corrupt Payload failure
DVB FEC scheme's error correction
capability exceeded. Too long
errored blocks in the transmission.
1
01120026
G.703 I/O
major
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-41
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Sequence Number Invalid (SNI)
failure
Garbled AAL1 SAR-PDU headers.
Far-end terminal equipment might
be configured erroneously (nonstandard transmission parameters).
1
01120027
G.703 I/O
major
Lost Or Misinserted Cells (LMC)
failure
Inconsistent ATM cell stream.
Network ATM switching functionality
might be unreliable.
1
01120028
G.703 I/O
major
TS Sync Loss Error (TSLE)
failure
TS synchronization loss.
Transmission might not contain a
valid MPEG-2 Transport Stream.
1
01120029
G.703 I/O
major
Loss Of Lock (LOL) failure
Receive clock recovery PLL not
locked. Transmission PDH carrier
(E3/DS3) might have changed.
1
0112002A
G.703 I/O
major
DS3 Framing Format Mismatch
(DS3FM) failure
Wrong DS3 framing format.
Transmission framing format
(M13/C-bit) might have changed.
1
0112002B
G.703 I/O
major
Unsupported Transmission
Format failure
Transmission Format Auto detection
(TFA) timed out. Input signal might
not be valid or supported.
1
0112002C
G.703 I/O
major
Transmit Driver Overload failure
Short circuit detected on the output.
Please check the G.703 Output port.
Cable might be faulty.
1
01120030
G.703 I/O
major
D.8
Alarms List – GPI Card
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated by the GPI option
card.
Table D.9 Alarm List – GPI Card
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Over Temperature Warning
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please check the fans are working
correctly, and that the ambient
temperature is not excessive.
0
00130001
Data & GPI
Module
minor
Over Temperature
Failure to take action may cause
permanent damage to the unit.
Please switch it off and refer to
Customer Support.
0
00130002
Data & GPI
Module
critical
Invalid Parameter
Invalid Parameter received by the
Data & GPI Module. Please see
Video Encoder status for a more
detailed description of the error.
0
00130003
Data & GPI
Module
critical
Module Error
Option Card Error. Please see log
for a more detailed description of the
error.
0
00130004
Data & GPI
Module
critical
Power On Self Test Failure
At least one start-up test has failed.
Problems may be experienced with
the normal operation of the unit.
0
00130005
Data & GPI
Module
critical
D-42
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Alarm Lists
Alarm
Description
Port Number
Alarm ID
Source
Severity
Internal HW Information
HW reported an unexpected status
value. This does not affect normal
operation of the unit.
0
00130006
Data & GPI
Module
minor
Option Card Build Version
Mismatch
The software on this Card is not an
officially released version.
0
00130007
Data & GPI
Module
minor
SCR CRC Error
A CRC error has been found in the
SCR clock.
0
00130008
Data & GPI
Module
critical
Input Error
An error has occurred in RS232
Input. See the log for more details.
0
00130020
Data & GPI
Module
critical
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
D-43
Alarm Lists
BLANK
D-44
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
E Logo Creator
Annex E
Contents
E.1
E.2
E.3
E.4
E.5
E.5.1
E.5.2
E.5.3
E.5.4
E.5.5
E.5.6
E.6
E.6.1
E.6.2
E.6.3
E.6.4
E.6.5
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Logo Creation ..................................................................................... E-3
Logo Creator Installation .................................................................... E-3
Using Logo Creator ............................................................................ E-3
Loading a File ..................................................................................... E-4
Create Logo Tab ................................................................................ E-4
Creating Transparency ....................................................................... E-4
Adding Transparency Manually .......................................................... E-4
Adding Transparency Using a Key File ............................................... E-5
Editing the Palette .............................................................................. E-5
Palette Reallocation............................................................................ E-5
Downsampling .................................................................................... E-6
Logo Position Tab .............................................................................. E-6
Positioning .......................................................................................... E-6
Resolution .......................................................................................... E-6
Fade ................................................................................................... E-6
Image Validation ................................................................................. E-7
Saving the OSD File ........................................................................... E-7
E-1
Logo Creator
BLANK
E-2
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Logo Creator
E.1
Logo Creation
Logo Creator is an application for creating OSD-format files from bitmap files and
modifying previously saved OSD files. It has the facility to introduce a transparency
component into the image so that some areas appear transparent when the image is
superimposed onto video. This transparency can be added manually or by loading a
separate Key File. The application also includes the facility to downsample the
image to the desired size. It can then be used to position the image on a screen of
the specified resolution and select if the image should fade in. The application runs
under Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7 on an ordinary PC.
E.2
Logo Creator Installation
The application runs under Windows XP, Windows Vista or Windows 7 on an
ordinary PC.
The PC requires the .NET framework to be installed, this is available from the
following location:
https://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/download/details.aspx?id=17718
To install Logo Creator:
1. Double-click the Logo Creator Installer.msi file.
2. If required at the prompt, click Run.
3. Click Next at the prompt.
4. Select Browse to change the default installation location.
5. Click Next to complete the installation.
E.3
Using Logo Creator
The steps for creating an OSD file are:
1. Load a .BMP file.
2. Downsample to the desired size.
3. Create transparency in the desired areas.
4. Select the screen resolution it is to be displayed in.
5. Select if the image should fade in.
6. Position the image on the screen.
7. Save as an .OSD file.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
E-3
Logo Creator
E.4
Loading a File
Logo creator can load bitmap file or OSD files.
To load a bitmap file Select File > Open from the menu and choose a bitmap file
(.BMP extension). The application will not accept compressed bitmaps or multiplaned bitmaps.
To load an OSD file Select File > Open from the menu and choose an OSD file
(.OSD extension). The application will accept version 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 OSD files.
The application will then display the image from the bitmap and the palette used in
the image.
E.5
Create Logo Tab
When the logo is first loaded the Create Logo tab is shown, this allows the image
appearance to be changed.
E.5.1
Creating Transparency
We shall call the area of the image that is to be made transparent the inactive area.
The rest is the active area.
Transparency can be added manually or by using a Key File.
A Key File is a bitmap image with the same size as the OSD image. In this file the
inactive areas should be colored white, the active areas should be colored black and
the parts with an intermediate level of transparency should be intermediate levels of
grey.
The settings for changing transparency manually are located on the toolbar at the
top.
E.5.2
Adding Transparency Manually
Firstly, change the background color so that it contrasts sharply with the whole of
the source image, using the black, red, green or blue buttons on the toolbar. This
will make it easier to spot mistakes.
The left button is used to make an area transparent (transparency 0), the right
button makes it opaque (transparency 255). Different transparency levels can be
selected by entering different values in the transparency boxes in the toolbar.
The brush size determines the size of the area that is changed. Small brush size
colors individual pixels, medium brush size colors a circle with a 5 pixel diameter,
large brush size colors a circle with a 9 pixel diameter.
E-4
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Logo Creator
If the Changes Affect Palette button is selected, changing the transparency of a
pixel on the image will also change the palette entry on which the pixel is based and
all the pixels that share that palette entry.
If the inactive area is mainly one color, check the Changes Affect Palette button
and click in the inactive area. All pixels of that color will become transparent and you
will see the background. Repeat until the whole of the inactive area is transparent. If
parts of the active area have become transparent, uncheck the Changes Affect
Palette box and paint the areas opaque again. Zoom in if necessary.
If there is no general color for the inactive area, uncheck the Changes Affect
Palette button and paint the inactive area manually. Use the left button to set the
area to the desired transparency and the right button to correct mistakes. Trace
around the edge of the area with a medium brush then use the large brush for wide
areas. Then zoom in and use the small brush to do the fine corrections for individual
pixels.
E.5.3
Adding Transparency Using a Key File
Create the Key File using a drawing package. Color the active area white, the
inactive area black and intermediate areas as shades of grey. Save as a .BMP file.
Click the Apply Key File toolbar button and select the file to be used as a Key File.
The areas that were black in the Key File are now transparent (background-colored)
and the areas that were white in the Key File are now opaque.
Change the background color to verify that the correct areas are transparent.
E.5.4
Editing the Palette
The palette is displayed to the right of the image.
The palette will contain at most 256 colors in it. This is the largest number of colors
allowed in an OSD file.
The transparency of each palette entry may be altered in the same way as the
image itself, using the left and right mouse buttons. Changes to the palette are
shown immediately on the image.
E.5.5
Palette Reallocation
When the level of transparency of a pixel in the image is changed, a new color is
effectively created. Whenever the image is downsampled or saved the palette is
rebuilt to reflect the actual colors in the image. The number of colors will also be
reduced to 256 colors if necessary.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
E-5
Logo Creator
As part of this process, pixels which have a transparency value of zero are mapped
to palette entry zero, which is defined as Red = Green = Blue = Transparency = 0.
The original color information is lost and the right mouse button will not change the
pixel back to its original color.
To rebuild the palette during editing, click the Reallocate Palette toolbar button.
E.5.6
Downsampling
If the image loaded is too large, then the image can be downsampled. This reduces
the size of the image to between 1 and 1/8th of its original size.
A dialog box will allow the new size to be specified either as a new size or as a ratio
of the current size.
After clicking on OK the image will be downsampled. Anti aliasing will be performed
to soften the boundary between the active and inactive area.
E.6
Logo Position Tab
When the Logo Position tab is selected, the current image is displayed in a grey
rectangle that represents a screen of the currently selected resolution.
E.6.1
Positioning
The position of the image defaults to X=0, Y=0.
To change the image position on the screen you can either drag the image about in
the grey area or manually enter the coordinates.
When dragging the image, the coordinates will be updated in real time. It cannot be
positioned wholly or partially outside of the grey area.
When updating the coordinates in the toolbar, the position on the screen will be
displayed after each key press. Entering a value above the maximum allowed will
reset the position to the maximum.
E.6.2
Resolution
The resolution defaults to Any. This can be changed using the drop down menu and
the grey area will immediately change to show the new size of the screen.
E.6.3
Fade
The fade setting defaults to not fade. This can be set to fade by clicking on the fade
button.
E-6
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
Logo Creator
The fade setting does not affect the current image. It will only be used when saving
OSD 5 and OSD 6 files when it will be stored in the file for later use.
E.6.4
Image Validation
The size and position of the image is validated on loading, each time the resolution
is changed and each time the position is changed.
If the image is too large for the resolution then a warning will be displayed and the
resolution will be reset to the previous setting except on file loading.
If the image is off screen due to the changes, then a warning will be displayed and
(unless the image has just been loaded) the changed setting will be reset to the
previous setting.
E.6.5
Saving the OSD File
Select File > Save As from the menu and select the version of OSD file you wish to
save as from the drop down menu.
OSD 4 files do not contain position, resolution or fade information. They are a
legacy file format and only included to be backward compatible with older versions
of other software
OSD 5 files contain all the information on the screen in a readable format. This is the
default file type selected when saving bitmaps and legacy OSD formats.
OSD 6 files contain all the information on the screen in a binary format. This means
that the files will be smaller and take up less space.
Saving is possible at any time, and it is advisable to save the image often while
editing is in progress. You may also save the file in BMP format, but this file will not
contain transparency information.
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V
E-7
Logo Creator
BLANK
E-8
1/1553-FGC 101 1788 Uen V